ABB ControlIT 53MC5000 Instruction Manual

Add to my manuals
406 Pages

advertisement

ABB ControlIT 53MC5000 Instruction Manual | Manualzz

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Control

IT

Multi-Loop Process Controller

53MC5000

PROCESS CONTROL STATION

PN24950

✶ ✶ RETAIN THE INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION SHEET ✶ ✶

The factory set calibration constants for the analog inputs and analog outputs are recorded on the instrument calibration sheet. This sheet should be retained in the event one or more of the constants is inadvertently changed.

TRADEMARKS:

The following are trademarks of ABB Automation Inc.:

The following is a registered trademark of General Electric Company:

The following is a registered trademark of the HART Communication

Foundation

The following is a registered trademark of Scada Software Corporation

The following are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation

The following is a registered trademark of Reed Devices, Inc.

F-CIM

F-TRAN

EASY-TUNE

MICRO-DCI

MicroLink

SUPERVISOR-PC

Flexible Control

Strategy

ULTEM 1000

®

HART

®

SCADA

®

MS-DOS

®

WINDOWS®

SNAPTRACK

®

All software, including design, appearance, algorithms and source codes, is copyrighted by ABB Automation and is owned by ABB

Automation or its suppliers.

NOTICE

The instructions given in this manual cover generally the description, installation, operation, and maintenance of the subject product.

ABB Automation reserves the right to make engineering refinements that may not be reflected in this bulletin. Should any questions arise which may not be answered specifically by these instructions, the questions should be directed to ABB Automation for further detailed information and technical assistance. The material in this manual is for informational purposes and is subject to change without notice. ABB

Automation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual.

Copyright 2000 ABB Automation Inc. [December 2000]

Contents

Table of Contents

1.0 INTRODUCTION 1-1

1.1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2 SCOPE OF BOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

1.3 MODEL NUMBER BREAKDOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

1.4 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

1.5 RELATED DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

2.0 INSTALLATION 2-1

2.1 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.2 PACKING BOLT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.3 LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.4 MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.5 MOUNTING THE INTERCONNECTION TERMINAL BOARDS (ITBs) . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2.6 REMOVABLE PLUG-IN CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

2.7 POWER CONNECTIONS FOR CONTROLLER AND ITBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

2.7.1 SINGLE +24 V DC POWER SOURCE TO CONTROLLER AND ITBs . . . . . 2-18

2.7.2 SEPARATE 24 V DC POWER SOURCES TO CONTROLLER AND ITBs . . . 2-20

2.7.3 110/120 V AC POWER SOURCE TO CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

2.7.4 220/240 V AC POWER SOURCE TO CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

2.7.5 220/240 V AC (NO NEUTRAL) POWER SOURCE TO CONTROLLER . . . . 2-26

2.8 SIGNAL CONNECTIONS TO STANDARD REAR TERMINAL BOARD . . . . . . . . 2-28

2.8.1 ANALOG INPUTS 0-3 (ANI0-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

2.8.2 ANALOG OUTPUTS 0 AND 1 (ANO0&1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

2.8.3 CONTACT CLOSURE INPUTS 0 AND 1 (CCI0&1) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

2.8.4 CONTACT CLOSURE OUTPUTS 0 AND 1 (CCO0&1) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

2.9 SIGNAL CONNECTIONS FOR SINGLE CHANNEL ANALOG OPTION (ANI8) . . . . . 2-32

2.10 SIGNAL CONNECTIONS FOR THE ITBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

2.10.1 SCADA ADAPTER SIGNAL CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

2.10.2 ANALOG ITB SIGNAL CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

2.10.3 CORD SET ITB SIGNAL CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

2.10.4 DUAL RELAY ITB SIGNAL CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

2.10.5 6 DIGITAL INPUT/4 DIGITAL OUTPUT (6DI/4DO) ITB . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

2.10.6 16 DIGITAL INPUT/DIGITAL OUTPUT (16DI/DO) ITB . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

2.11 DATALINK CONNECTIONS TO THE CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

2.12 MICROLINK CONNECTIONS TO THE CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

3.0 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 3-1

3.1 DOT MATRIX DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2 MINI-DIN CONFIGURATION PORT CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.3 REAR TERMINAL BOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.4 CONTROLLER POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3.5 MAIN PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3.6 EXPANSION BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3.7 SAMPLING TIME INTERVALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3.8 DATALINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.9 FUNCTION INDEXES (FIXs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

3.10 DATABASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

3.11 KEYPADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 i

53MC5000 Process Control Station

3.12 ENGINEERING MODE OVERLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

3.12.1 PASSWORD FUNCTION PROMPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

3.12.1.1 PROCEDURE TO ENTER A KEY PASSWORD . . . . . . . . . 3-9

3.12.2 DISPLAYING A DATAPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

3.12.2.1 PROCEDURE TO DISPLAY A DATAPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

3.12.3 DISPLAYING A MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

3.12.3.1 PROCEDURE TO DISPLAY A MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

3.12.4 CONFIGURE A DATAPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

3.12.4.1 PROCEDURE TO CONFIGURE A DATAPOINT . . . . . . . . . 3-14

3.12.5 CONFIGURE A MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

3.12.5.1 MODULE-MODE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . 3-16

3.13 KEYPAD ALTERNATIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

3.13.1 USING THE HAND HELD CONFIGURER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

3.13.1.1 HAND HELD CONFIGURER SET UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

3.13.1.2 DISPLAYING A CONTROLLER DATAPOINT . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

3.13.1.3 ALTERING A CONTROLLER DATAPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

3.13.1.4 SETTING OR CHANGING A CONTROLLER PASSWORD KEY . . 3-24

3.13.1.5 HHC MEMORY MODULE ASSEMBLY TRANSFER . . . . . . . . 3-25

3.13.1.6 SAMPLE HAND HELD CONFIGURER COMMANDS . . . . . . . 3-26

3.13.2 USING A PC TERMINAL EMULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

3.13.2.1 MICROSOFT WINDOWS HYPERTERMINAL . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

3.14 ENGINEERING MODE LOCKOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

4.0 OPERATOR DISPLAYS 4-1

4.1 DISPLAY 1 - ALARM SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

4.2 DISPLAY 2 - SYSTEM STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

4.3 DISPLAYS 3, 4, 5, AND 6 - POINT DISPLAYS (CON0-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

4.3.1 POINT DISPLAYS 3, 4, 5, AND 6 (CDM = 0, STANDARD PID) . . . . . . . 4-10

4.3.2 POINT DISPLAY 3 (CDM = 1, INDICATOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

4.3.3 POINT DISPLAY 3 (CDM = 2, MANUAL LOADER) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

4.3.4 POINT DISPLAY 3 (CDM = 3, RATIO CONTROLLER) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

4.3.5 POINT DISPLAY 3 (CDM = 4, AUTO/MANUAL STATION) . . . . . . . . . 4-19

4.3.6 POINT DISPLAY 3 (CDM = 5, RATIO AUTO/MANUAL STATION) . . . . . . 4-20

4.4 POINT DISPLAYS 7 AND 8 - TWO LOOP DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

4.5 POINT DISPLAYS 9, 10, 11, AND 12 - SINGLE LOOP WITH

HORIZONTAL TREND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

4.6 DISPLAYS 13 TO 20 - PARAMETER MODULE DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

4.7 DISPLAYS 21 AND 22 - DISCRETE STATUS DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

4.8 DISPLAYS 23 TO 30 - TOTALIZER DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

4.9 DISPLAY 31 - LOCATOR GRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

4.10 POINT DISPLAY 32 - FOUR LOOP DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

5.0 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS 5-1

5.1 READY TO USE CONTROL STRATEGIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.2 DATAPOINT TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.3 CONFIGURING THE DATABASE MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

5.4 ANALOG INPUT MODULES (ANI0-8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

5.5 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULES (ANO0-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

5.6 CONTACT CLOSURE INPUT MODULES (CCI0-17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

5.7 CONTACT CLOSURE OUTPUT MODULES (CCO0-17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

5.8 EXTERNAL I/O MODULE (TASKS 0-23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

5.9 CONTROLLER MODULES (CON0-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

5.10 STATUS DISPLAY MODULES (SDT0 AND SDT1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 ii

Contents

5.11 PARAMETER DISPLAY MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

5.12 TREND MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

5.13 TOTALIZER MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

5.14 COMMUNICATION MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

5.15 SYSTEM AND MISCELLANEOUS MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

5.16 CONFIGURATION SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

6.0 CS1 - SINGLE LOOP CONTROLLER 6-1

6.1 CS1 - SINGLE LOOP (PID) CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.2 CS1 CONTROL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.3 CS1 STANDARD DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

6.4 CS1 DATAPOINT CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

6.5 CS1 SOFT-WIRE LIST MODIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

7.0 CS2 - ANALOG BACKUP CONTROLLER 7-1

7.1 CS2 - ANALOG BACKUP CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.2 CS2 CONTROL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7.3 CS2 STANDARD DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7.4 CS2 DATAPOINT CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

8.0 CS3 - RATIO (PID) CONTROLLER 8-1

8.1 CS3 - RATIO (PID) CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.2 CS3 CONTROL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

8.3 CS3 STANDARD DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

8.4 CS3 DATAPOINT CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

9.0 CS4 - AUTOMATIC/MANUAL STATION 9-1

9.1 CS4 - AUTOMATIC/MANUAL STATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.2 CS4 CONTROL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

9.3 CS4 STANDARD DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

9.4 CS4 DATAPOINT CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

10.0 CS5 - RATIO AUTOMATIC/MANUAL STATION 10-1

10.1 CS5 - RATIO AUTOMATIC/MANUAL STATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10.2 CS5 CONTROL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

10.3 CS5 STANDARD DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

10.4 CS5 DATAPOINT CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

11.0 CS20 - TWO LOOP CONTROLLER 11-1

11.1 CS20 - TWO LOOP CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.2 CS20 CONTROL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

11.3 CS20 STANDARD DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

11.4 CS20 DATAPOINT CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

12.0 CS21 - TWO LOOP CASCADE CONTROLLER 12-1

12.1 CS21 - TWO LOOP CASCADE CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

12.2 CS21 CONTROL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

12.3 CS21 STANDARD DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

12.4 CS21 DATAPOINT CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 iii

53MC5000 Process Control Station

13.0 CS22 - TWO LOOP OVERRIDE CONTROLLER 13-1

13.1 CS22 - TWO LOOP OVERRIDE CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

13.2 CS22 CONTROL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

13.3 CS22 STANDARD DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

13.4 CS22 DATAPOINT CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

14.0 CS40 - DUAL TWO LOOP CASCADE CONTROLLER 14-1

14.1 CS40 - DUAL TWO LOOP CASCADE CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

14.2 CS40 CONTROL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

14.3 CS40 STANDARD DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3

14.4 CS40 DATAPOINT CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3

15.0 CS41 - FOUR LOOP CONTROLLER 15-1

15.1 CS41 - FOUR LOOP CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

15.2 CS41 CONTROL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

15.3 CS41 STANDARD DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4

15.4 CS41 DATAPOINT CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4

16.0 TUNING PID PARAMETERS 16-1

16.1 PROPORTIONAL ACTION (PB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

16.2 INTEGRAL ACTION (TR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

16.3 DERIVATIVE ACTION (TD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

16.4 CONTROLLER PID LOOP TUNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

17.0 EASY-TUNE 17-1

17.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

17.2 INITIATING THE EASY-TUNE SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

17.3 EASY-TUNE PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

17.4 EASY-TUNE SEQUENCE STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3

17.5 MODIFICATIONS TO TUNING CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5

17.6 ABORTING THE EASY-TUNE SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7

17.7 EASY-TUNE SEQUENCE COMPLETION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7

18.0 MAINTENANCE AND PARTS LIST 18-1

18.1 SERVICE APPROACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

18.2 PARTS REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

18.3 PARTS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4

18.4 CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9

18.5 ERROR AND HARDWARE MALFUNCTION MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10

18.6 RESETTING THE CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10

18.7 SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11

APPENDIX A.0 DISCRETE CONTACT OUTPUT CCOs A-1

A.1 CCO EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

A.2 POWER FOR CCO OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

A.3 CCO WITH SOLID STATE RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

A.4 OPERATING CCOs IN PARALLEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

A.5 CASCADING A CCO TO A CCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3 iv

Contents

APPENDIX B.0 COMMUNICATIONS B-1

B.1 STANDARD COMMUNICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

B.1.1 CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

B.1.2 PROTOCOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

B.1.3 MESSAGE TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

B.1.4 COMMUNICATION TRANSACTION EXAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

B.1.5 CALCULATING DATA ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

B.1.6 SOFTWARE CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

B.1.7 HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

B.1.8 DATALINK NODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

B.1.9 INITIALIZATION MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10

APPENDIX C.0 REMOTE KEYPAD C-1

C.1 REMOTE KEYPAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

APPENDIX D.0 DATABASE D-1

APPENDIX E.0 FM APPROVALS E-1 v

Contents

List of Tables

Table 1-1. 53MC5000 Process Control Station Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Table 1-2. 6 Digital Input/4 Digital Output Option Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Table 1-3. Dual Relay ITB Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Table 1-4. 16 Digital Input/Digital Output Option Board and ITB Specifications . . . . . . 1-14

Table 1-5. OPTO 22 Module Specifications for 16 DI/DO ITB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Table 1-6. Single Channel Analog Input Option (ANI8) Specifications . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Table 1-7. Multichannel Analog Option Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Table 1-8. Group 5B Isolation Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Table 1-9. SCADA Board Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Table 2-1. Packing Bolt Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Table 2-2. Controller Panel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Table 2-3. Single +24 V dc Power Source to Controller and ITBs . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Table 2-4. Controller Dedicated 24 V dc Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Table 2-5. 110/120 V ac Power Source to Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Table 2-6. 220/240 V ac Power Source to Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Table 2-7. 220/240 V ac (No Neutral) Power Source to Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Table 3-1. Sampling Time Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Table 3-2. Entering a Key Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Table 3-3. Procedure to Display a Datapoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Table 3-4. Procedure to Alter a Datapoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Table 3-5. Procedure to Configure in Module Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Table 4-1. Standard Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Table 4-2. Generated Display Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Table 4-3. Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Table 4-4. Faceplate Push Buttons (Operator Functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Table 4-5. Editing a Parameter Value in Operator/Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Table 4-6. Status Indicator Display Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Table 5-1. Ready to Use Control Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Table 5-2. Datapoint Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Table 5-3. Database Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Table 5-4. Analog Input Modules (ANI0-8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Table 5-5. Analog Output Modules (ANO0-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Table 5-6. Contact Closure Input Modules (CCI0-17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Table 5-7. Contact Closure Output Modules (CCO0-17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Table 5-8. External I/O Module (Tasks 0-23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Table 5-9. Controller Modules (CON0-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Table 5-10. Status Display Modules (SDT0 and SDT1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Table 5-11. Parameter Display Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Table 5-12. Trend Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Table 5-13. Totalizer Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Table 5-14. Communication Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Table 5-15. System and Miscellaneous Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Table 6-1. CS1 Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Table 6-2. CS1 Standard Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Table 6-3. CS1 Single Loop CON0 Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Table 6-4. CS1 Soft-Wire List Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 vi

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 7-1. CS2 Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Table 7-2. CS2 Standard Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Table 7-3. CS2 Analog Backup Controller Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Table 8-1. CS3 Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Table 8-2. CS3 Standard Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Table 8-3. CS3 Ratio Controller Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Table 9-1. CS4 Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Table 9-2. CS4 Standard Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Table 9-3. CS4 Automatic/Manual Station Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Table 10-1. CS5 Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Table 10-2. CS5 Standard Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Table 10-3. CS5 Ratio Automatic/Manual Station Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Table 11-1. CS20 Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Table 11-2. CS20 Standard Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

Table 11-3. CS20 Two Loop Controller Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Table 12-1. CS21 Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Table 12-2. CS21 Standard Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

Table 12-3. CS21 Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

Table 13-1. CS22 Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

Table 13-2. CS22 Standard Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Table 13-3. CS22 Two Loop Override Controller Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Table 14-1. CS40 Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

Table 14-2. CS40 Standard Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3

Table 14-3. CS40 Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7

Table 15-1. CS41 Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

Table 15-2. CS41 Standard Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4

Table 15-3. CS41 Four Loop Controller Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9

Table 16-1. Summary Information for Tuning Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

Table 16-2. Trial and Error Tuning Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

Table 16-3. Proportional Cycle Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3

Table 16-4. Step Response Method (Ziegler-Nichols) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3

Table 17-1. Summary Information for Tuning Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

Table 17-2. EASY-TUNE Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

Table 17-3 Normal Successful Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3

Table 17-4. EASY-TUNE Unsuccessful Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3

Table 17-5. EASY-TUNE Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5

Table 18-1. Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2

Table 18-2. Controller Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4

Table 18-3. Related Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7

Table 18-4. Isolated Discrete I/O Modules for the 16DI/DO ITB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9 vii

Contents

Table B-1. Communication Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

Table B-2. Message Field Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

Table B-3. Controller Memory Address Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

Table B-4. Node List Assignment Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

Table B-5. Network D Node List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9

Table D-1. Datapoint Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

Table D-2. Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2

Table D-3. Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2

Table D-4. Contact Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2

Table D-5. Contact Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

Table D-6. External I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

Table D-7. Controller (CON) Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4

Table D-8. Status Display Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6

Table D-9. Parameter Display Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7

Table D-10. Trend Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8

Table D-11. Totalizer Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8

Table D-12. Communication Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8

Table D-13. System and Miscellaneous Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9

Table D-14. Database - L Type Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10

Table D-15. Database - B Type Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17

Table D-16. Database - C Type Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-22

Table D-17. Database - H Type Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-29

Table D-18. Database - A Type Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-31

Table D-19. Database - F Type Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-37 viii

Contents

List of Figures

Figure 1-1. Typical Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Figure 1-2. Information Layout of Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Figure 2-1. Packing Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Figure 2-2. Outline Dimensions and Panel Cut-Out Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Figure 2-3. Single or Multiple Panel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Figure 2-4. Bracket Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Figure 2-5. Intercase Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Figure 2-6. ITB Snap-Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Figure 2-7. Controller Rear Terminal ITB Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Figure 2-8. Potential ITB Complement to Controller with Standard Rear Terminal Board . . . 2-9

Figure 2-9. Potential ITB Complement to Controller with Cord Set Connector Board . . . . 2-10

Figure 2-10. Removable Plug-In Connectors from Standard Rear Terminal Board . . . . . 2-11

Figure 2-11. Power Connections Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Figure 2-12. Assigned Power Input Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Figure 2-13. Single +24 V dc Power Source to Controller and ITBs . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Figure 2-14. Wiring Example for Single +24 V dc Power Supply to Controller

and ITBs (Negative Ground System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Figure 2-15. Controller Dedicated 24 V dc Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Figure 2-16. Wiring Example of Separate 24 V dc Power Sources for Controller

and ITBs (Controller Positive, Negative, or Floating Ground) . . . . . . . . 2-21

Figure 2-17. 110/120 V ac Power Source to Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Figure 2-18. 110/120 V ac Power Wiring Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Figure 2-19. 220/240 V ac Power Source to Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Figure 2-20. 220/240 V ac Power Wiring Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Figure 2-21. 220/240 V ac (No Neutral) Power Source to Controller . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Figure 2-22. 220/240 V ac (No Neutral) Power Wiring Example . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Figure 2-23. Rear Terminal Board Resistors R1 and R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Figure 2-24. Controller Standard Rear Terminal Board Signal Connections . . . . . . . . 2-29

Figure 2-25. Current Input Signals to ANI0&1 (Transmitters Have Power Source) . . . . . 2-30

Figure 2-26. Current Input Signals to ANI0&1 (Transmitters Receive +24 V dc from Controller) 2-30

Figure 2-27. Current Input Signals to ANI2&3 (Transmitters Have Power Source) . . . . . 2-31

Figure 2-28. Current Input Signals to ANI2&3 (Transmitters Receive +24 V dc from Controller) 2-31

Figure 2-29. ANI, ANO, CCI, and CCO Graphical Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Figure 2-30. Input Signals to ANI8 at TB3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Figure 2-31. SCADA Adapter Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Figure 2-32. Comm ITB Datalink Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

Figure 2-33. Analog ITB Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39

Figure 2-34. Cord Set ITB Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

Figure 2-35. 6DI/4DO ITB Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Figure 2-36. 16DI/DO ITB Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Figure 2-37. Datalink Installation to Controllers with Cord Set Option . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

Figure 3-1. Process Control Station Illustrated Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Figure 3-2. Engineer Mode Command Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Figure 3-3. Engineer Mode Key Password Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Figure 3-4. Displaying a Datapoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Figure 3-5. Altering a Datapoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Figure 3-6. Front Panel Configuration Port Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 ix

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Figure 4-1. Display 1 - Alarm Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Figure 4-2. Display 2 - System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Figure 4-3. Point Displays 3, 4, 5, and 6 (CDM = 0, Standard PID) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Figure 4-4. Point Display 3 (CDM = 1, Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Figure 4-5. Point Display 3 (CDM = 2, Manual Loader) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Figure 4-6. Point Display 3 (CDM = 3, Ratio Controller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Figure 4-7. Point Display 3 (CDM = 4, Auto/Manual Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Figure 4-8. Point Display 3 (CDM = 5, Ratio Auto/Manual Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Figure 4-9. Two Loop Point Displays 7 and 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Figure 4-10. Point Displays 9 - 12, Single Loop with Horizontal Trend . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Figure 4-11. Displays 13 to 20 - Parameter Module Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Figure 4-12. Displays 21 and 22 - Discrete Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Figure 4-13. Displays 23 to 30 - Totalizer Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Figure 4-14. Display 31- Locator Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Figure 4-15. Point Display 32 - Four Loop Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Figure 5-1. Database Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Figure 5-2. Configuration Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Figure 6-1. Typical CS1 Single Loop Controller Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Figure 6-2. CS1 Single Loop CON0 Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Figure 7-1. Typical CS2 Analog Backup Controller Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Figure 7-2. CCO Output Diverter Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Figure 7-3. CS2 Analog Backup Controller Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Figure 8-1. Typical CS3 Ratio Controller Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Figure 8-2. CS3 Ratio Controller Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Figure 9-1. Typical CS4 Automatic/Manual Station Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Figure 9-2. CS4 Automatic/Manual Station Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Figure 10-1. Typical CS5 Ratio Automatic/Manual Station Application . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Figure 10-2. CS5 Ratio Automatic/Manual Station Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Figure 11-1. Typical CS20 Two Loop Controller Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Figure 11-2. CS20 Two Loop Controller Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

Figure 12-1. Typical CS21 Two Loop Cascade Controller Application . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Figure 12-2. CS21 Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

Figure 13-1. Typical CS22 Two Loop Override Controller Application . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Figure 13-2. CS22 Two Loop Override Controller Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Figure 14-1. Typical CS40 Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller Application . . . . . . . . 14-1

Figure 14-2. CS40 Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

Figure 15-1. Typical CS41 Four Loop Controller Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Figure 15-2. CS41 Four Loop Controller Datapoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5

Figure 16-1. Typical Step Response Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4

Figure 17-1. EASY-TUNE Sequence Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4

Figure 17-2. Process Step Response Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6 x

Contents

Figure 18-1. Illustrated Parts Breakdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5

Figure 18-2. Hand Held Configurer and Valve Holder Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . 18-12

Figure 18-3. Cord Set Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-13

Figure 18-4. Cord Set ITB Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14

Figure 18-5. Dual Relay ITB Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-15

Figure 18-6. 6 Digital Input/4 Digital Output ITB Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16

Figure 18-7. 16 Digital Input/ Digital Output ITB Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-17

Figure 18-8. Multichannel Analog ITB Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-18

Figure 18-9. Communication ITB Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19

Figure 18-10. 6 Digital Input/4 Digital Output (6DI/4DO) PCB Option . . . . . . . . . . 18-20

Figure 18-11. 16 Digital Input/ Digital Output (16DI/DO) PCB Option . . . . . . . . . . 18-21

Figure 18-12. Single Channel Analog Input PCB Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-22

Figure 18-13. Multi I/O Analog PCB Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-23

Figure 18-14. High Speed Communications PCB Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-24

Figure A-1. CCO Circuit and its Equivalent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Figure A-2. Power For CCO Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

Figure A-3. CCO with Solid State Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

Figure A-4.. Operating CCOs in Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

Figure A-5. Cascading a CCO to a CCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

Figure C-1. Remote Keypad Wiring Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 xi

I

Read First

READ FIRST

WARNING

INSTRUCTION MANUALS

Do not install, maintain, or operate this equipment without reading, understanding and following the proper ABB Automation instructions and manuals, otherwise injury or damage may result.

RETURN OF EQUIPMENT

All Flowmeters and/or Signal Converters being returned to ABB

Automation for repair must be free of any hazardous materials (acids, alkalis, solvents, etc). A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for all process liquids must accompany returned equipment. Contact ABB

Automation for authorization prior to returning equipment.

Read these instructions before starting installation; save these instructions for future reference.

DOCUMENTATION SUBMISSIONS

Send photocopies of pages with marked corrections or comments to:

ABB Automation

Instrumentation Division

Department 261/A2

125 E. County Line Road

Warminster, PA 18974-4995

Please include a reference to the Publication Number (PN...) or equipment Model Number when submitting corrections or comments.

Contacting ABB Automation

Should assistance be required with any ABB Automation product, contact the following:

Telephone:

ABB Instrumentation Technical Support Center

1 (800) 697-9619

E-Mail: [email protected]

Section 1. Introduction

1.0 INTRODUCTION

1.1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW

The ABB Automation 53MC5000 Process Control Station is a versatile controller that is available in one, two, and four loop versions. It can function as a stand-alone unit or as part of a distributed controller network. The controller’s functionality is determined by the Function Index (FIX), which is used to select a broad range of resident control strategies that are common to industrial process applications. Each version of the controller comes ready to install as a Single Loop Controller, Two

Loop Controller, or Four Loop Controller.

It is not necessary to have any programming knowledge or to analyze complex switch diagrams that represent the internal operation of the controller to implement a control strategy.

After the appropriate control strategy (CS) is selected, it is tailored to the user’s specific process application requirements by entering process specific information into datapoint locations with the keypad push buttons. For many datapoints, entries are simplified index values that represent operating characteristics.

Every controller provides the capability to customize the existing Control Strategies or create new ones using Flexible Control Strategy wire lists. Also included with every controller are Datalink network capabilities; a front panel RS-232 configuration port; EASY-TUNE

, the instrument self tuning algorithm; four analog inputs; analog input digital filtering; analog input square root extraction; two contact closure inputs; two analog outputs; and two contact closure outputs. The standard features are summarized in the table that follows:

CS Application or Feature

CS1 Single Loop (PID*) Controller

CS2 Analog Backup (PID) Controller

CS3 Ratio (PID) Controller

CS4 Automatic/Manual Station

CS5 Ratio Automatic/Manual Station

CS20 Two Loop (PID) Controller

CS21 Two Loop (PID) Cascade Controller

CS22 Two Loop (PID) Override Controller

CS40 Dual Two Loop (PID) Cascade Controller

CS41 Four Loop (PID) Controller

RS-485 Datalink Network Capabilities

Front Panel RS-232 Configuration Port

EASY-TUNE

Four Analog Inputs (AI0-3)

Analog Input Digital Filtering

Analog Input Square Root Extraction

Two Contact Closure Inputs (DI0&1)

Two Analog Outputs (AO0&1)

Two Contact Closure Outputs (DO0&1)

1 Loop 2 Loops 4 Loops

**

• •

**

**

* Proportional, Integral, and Derivative control action, one PID algorithm per loop.

**

= Ready to use as described in Sections 6 (CS1), 11 (CS20), and 15 (CS41).

1-1

53MC5000 Process Control Station

If the controller has extended functionality (optional), additional performance capabilities are included. The extended functionalities include Flexible Control Interconnection Modules (F-CIM) and

Flexible TRANslator language (F-TRAN). Both can be used to create more personalized control strategies (F-TRAN can also be used to create personalized displays).

The hardware architecture of the controller allows for a diverse assortment of upgrades to meet the unique needs of most process applications. The upgrades are implemented using an optional

Expansion board and associated option cards within the controller, and Interconnecting Terminal

Boards (ITBs) that are mounted external to the controller. A controller that contains an Expansion

Board is called expansion ready (model number 53MC5

♦♦♦

A2

B etc., where

are other controller selectable items). The following table lists the 53MC5000 Process Control Station hardware expansion capabilities described in this book.

Expansion Board

Option Card

Single Channel Analog

Input Option

Multi I/O Analog PCB

Option

6 Digital Input/4 Digital

Output (6DI/4DO) Option

16 Digital Input/Digital

Output (16DI/DO) PCB

Option

High Speed

Communications PCB

Option

(MicroLink)

HART* Modem Option

Card and/or one or two

Auxiliary Processor

Boards (APBs)

One or two Auxiliary

Processor Boards

(APBs)

Required ITB Function

None

Analog ITB

6 Digital Input/4

Digital Output ITB

16 Digital Input/

Digital Output

None

HART ITB and/or

HART Modem ITBs

(two maximum)

RS-232/485 ITB

Adds Analog Input 8 (AI8) which accepts one of the Group 5 Analog Device Modules (e.g,

Isolated Linearized Thermocouple) that are described in detail in specifications Table 1-8.

Adds Analog Inputs 4 through 7 (AI4-7), and

Analog Outputs 2 and 3 (AO2&3). Capabilities for Frequency Input (AI4-7) and Pulsed Input

(AI5-7) are supported. This option also supports the AI8 capabilities above.

This option provides six additional Contact

Closure Inputs (DI2-7) and four additional

Contact Closure Outputs (DO2-5).

This option provides 16 additional Contact

Closures that can be a mix of inputs and outputs from DI2-17 and DO2-17. The ITB is populated with a variety of OPTO 22 or equivalent modules. The OPTO 22 modules are described in specifications Table 1-5.

The Expansion Board can accept two of these option cards. Each one provides controller access to a MicroLink peer-to-peer communications network.

Provides the capability to communicate with

HART instruments. See Publication Number

24526, IB 53MC9014, 53MC5000 HART

Interface.

Provides controller-to-PLC communication capabilities for Allen-Bradley, OPTO22, Modbus

RTU, Siemens S5, and Koyo. It also provides a printer interface for outputting datalogs. See

Publication Number 24627, IB 53MC9015,

53MC5000 PLC and Printer Interface.

* Highway Addressable Remote Transducer.

1-2

Section 1. Introduction

The ABB Automation 53MC5000 Process Control Station provides a variety of standard displays to give a multiperspective presentation of the controlled process. Unlike many other controllers that have a singular bar graph display, the 53MC5000 Process Control Station has trend, parameter, status, totalizer, and multi-bar graph displays (2 and 4 loop versions). A display locator grid identifies the current display suite. User defined displays can be created with F-TRAN (requires extended functionality). Typical low-resolution 53MC5000 Process Control Station displays are shown in

Figure 1-1.

Single Loop

Display

Single Loop with

Horizontal Trend

Display

Parameter

Display

Status Display Two Loop

Display

Figure 1-1. Typical Displays

Four Loop

Display

1-3

53MC5000 Process Control Station

1.2 SCOPE OF BOOK

The information layout of the book is illustrated in Figure 1-2 and described as follows:

Section 1, Introduction - This section contains product overview information, a product model number breakdown, product specifications, and a list of related documentation.

Section 2, Installation - This section provides information to physically mount the controller in a panel and information to mount the ITBs. It also provides power and signal connection information for the controller and ITBs. Detailed controller power wiring example diagrams are provided for a +24 V dc power source (negative ground), 24 V dc power source (controller positive, negative, or floating ground), 110/120 V ac power source, 220/240 V ac power source, and 220 (208)/240 V ac (no neutral) power source.

Section 3, Product Description - This section provides a physical description of the product. It explains the SCAN index sampling time intervals and sampling time intervals for other various product functions such as trending and totalizing. It describes the function indexes, database, and front display keypad functions. Also provided in this section are instructions to use the Hand Held Configurer (HHC) to configure the controller database datapoints instead of using the controller keypad push buttons.

Section 4, Operator Displays - This section describes the standard displays of the controller. All of the displays described are available on every controller; however, some displays may not be active, dependent on the controller version purchased (e.g., single loop, 2 loop, or 4 loop versions).

Section 5, Configuration Parameters - This section describes the datapoint types, provides a summary illustration of the controller database modules, and provides a definition of each datapoint in the database modules.

Sections 6 through 15, Control Strategy 1 (CS1) - Control Strategy 41 (CS41) - Each section provides a brief description and illustration of a predefined control strategy application.

The applicable external control signals for each control strategy are defined and the control strategy standard displays are listed. Also provided is a datapoint configuration illustration followed by the specific datapoint definitions for each control strategy.

Section 16, Tuning PID Parameters - This section provides three methods to tune the instrument: Trial and Error, Proportional Cycle, and Step Response (Ziegler-Nichols).

Section 17, EASY-TUNE - This section provides information to initiate EASY-TUNE and to modify the tuning parameters. EASY-TUNE is the controller self-tuning algorithm used to help determine the optimal values for the Proportional Band, Integral, and Derivative control action datapoints. This section also provides definitions of the tuning sequence status parameters.

Section 18, Maintenance and Parts List - This section provides a parts replacement procedure, an illustrated parts breakdown of the controller, a parts list, calibration information for the analog input/output zero and span settings, hardware malfunction messages, a hardware reset procedure, Hand Held Configurer (HHC) and Valve Holder pin assignments, schematics of the ITBs, and illustrations with descriptive summaries of the Expansion Board Option

Cards.

1-4

Section 1. Introduction

Appendix A, Discrete Contact Output DOs - This appendix illustrates various circuit layouts for the Discrete Contact Outputs (DOs).

Appendix B, Communications - This appendix provides reference information for binary serial communication. Both, the RS-232 front port communications and the standard Datalink communications are described.

Appendix C, Remote Keypad - This appendix provides information to use the 6DI/4DO ITB for remote keypad operation. A remote keypad wiring schematic is also provided.

Appendix D, Database - This appendix lists all of the database parameters (datapoints).

1-5

53MC5000 PROCESS CONTROL STATION

1. Introduction

4. Operator

Displays

2. Installation

3. Product

Description

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.

.

.

5. Configuration

Parameters

ALTERNATE PATH INDICATED BY DOTS ( . . . )

. . . . . . . . . .

6. CS1 - Single

Loop PID Controller

7. CS2 - Analog

Backup Controller

8. CS3 - Ratio

Controller

9. CS4 - Automatic/

Manual Station

10. CS5 - Ratio

Automatic/ Manual

Station

11. CS20 - Two

Loop Controller

12. CS21 - Two

Loop Cascade

Controller

13. CS22 - Two

Loop Override

Controller

14. CS40 - Dual

Two Loop Cascade

Controller

15. CS41 - Four

Loop Controller

18. Maintenance and Parts List

16. Tuning PID

Parameters

17. EASY-TUNE

Reference Information

A. Discrete

Contact Outputs

B. Communications C. Remote Keypad

Figure 1-2. Information Layout of Book

D. Database

Section 1. Introduction

1.3 MODEL NUMBER BREAKDOWN

The following pages show the detailed breakdown of the 53MC5000B Controller Model Number

1-7

53MC9015 53MC5000 PLC and Printer Interfaces

53MC5 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Base Model Number

Control Loops

One Loop

Two Loops

Four Loops

Power Requirements

AC (120/240)

DC (24)

1

2

4

Functional Requirements

Standard

Extended (Programmable)

Standard w/Factory Configuration

Extended w/Factory Programming

Standard w/Configuration by Subsidiary or

Field Integration

Extended w/Programming by Subsidiary or

Field Integration

Design Level

1

2

1

2

3

4

5

6

A

B

Type Bezel (Design Level "B" Only)

DIN 72 x 144 mm Bezel Lo-Resolution Display

DIN 72 x 144 mm Bezel Hi-Resolution Display

Main Rear Terminal Req.

Std. Rear Terminal

Std. Rear Terminal w/Valve Holder Connector

Cord Set Connector Board Only

Cord Set Connector Board Standard ITB

Cord Set Connector Board Cable, Standard ITB

Cord Set Connector Board w/Valve Holder Connector

Cord Set Conn. Board w/Valve Holder Conn., Std. ITB

Cord Set Conn. Board w/Valve Holder Conn., Cable,

Standard ITB

Chassis

Standard

Expansion Ready

Safety Classification

General Purpose

FM Approved: Nonincendive for Class 1, Div. 2,

Groups A,B,C & D

CSA Approved General Purpose Category Certification

Discrete I/O Option

Not Implemented

6DI/4DO Board Only

6DI/4DO Board, DI/DO ITB

6DI/4DO Board, Cable, DI/DO ITB

16DI/DO Board Only

16DI/DO Board, ITB

16DI/DO Board, cable, ITB

DDI-A HART AUX PROCESS Board Only

DDI-A HART APB, HART MODEM ITB

DDI-A HART APB, MODEM ITB, 5’ Cable

DDI-A Printer/PLC APB Only

DDI-A Printer/PLC APB, RS-232/485 ITB

DDI-A Printer/PLC APB, RS-232/485 ITB, 5’ Cable

2

4

6

7

4

5

8

1

2

3

A

B

A

B

C

E

F

G

H

J

X

A

B

C

D

K

L

M

1-8

Section 1. Introduction

53MC5 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Dual Relay ITB

Not Implemented

One ITB

Two ITB’s

Three ITB’s

Analog I/O Option

Not Implemented

Single Channel Analog Input Bd Only

Multi-Channel Analog I/O Board

Multi-Channel Analog I/O Board, Analog ITB

Multi-Channel Analog I/O Board, Cable, Analog ITB

Multi-Channel Analog I/O Board/HART Option

Multi-Channel Analog I/O Board/HART, HART ITB

Multi-Channel Analog I/O Board/HART, HART ITB, 5’ Cable

Analog Conditioning

Not Implemented

0-20 mA

0-5V

RTD 100 Ohm, -100 o

C to +100

Type J, 0 to +760 o

Type T, 0 to +200 o

C

C o

C

Comm A Option

Not Implemented

Cable Only

Communication ITB Only

Cable, Communications ITB

Microlink A Communications Board Only

Microlink A Communications Board, Cable

Microlink A Communications Board, Cable, Communications ITB

Comm B Option

Not Implemented

Microlink B

Microlink B

Microlink B

DDI-B HART AUX PROCESS Board Only

DDI-B HART APB, HART MODEM ITB

DDI-B HART APB, HART MODEM, 5’ Cable

DDI-B Printer/PLC APB Only

DDI-B Printer/PLC APB, RS-232/485 ITB

DDI-B Printer/PLC APB, RS-232/485 ITB, 5’ Cable

Conformal Coating

Not Required

Required

X

1

2

3

X

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

X

A

B

C

D

E

X

A

B

C

D

E

F

X

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

J

X

A

1-9

53MC5000 Process Control Station

1.4 SPECIFICATIONS

Table 1-1. 53MC5000 Process Control Station Specifications

1 of 4

Item

Power requirements (as specified) 21 to 28 V dc

90-132 V rms

180-264 V rms

50/60 Hz

Power consumption ac/dc operation 20 VA maximum.

Internal power supply:

Available power output for transmitters

Output Ripple

Analog inputs (all analog inputs are referenced to signal common [SC]):

Quantity

200 mV p-p maximum.

4

Specification(s)

25 V dc

±

1 V dc @ 80 mA maximum, short circuit protected.

Signal Range

Input impedance

Measurement accuracy

Contact closure inputs (contact inputs are referenced to power common [PC]):

Quantity 2

0 to 5.46 V dc (1-5 V dc typically) or any current signal (4-

20 mA dc typically) converted to an appropriate voltage signal by an external ranging resistor.

Note: The standard rear terminal board has the appropriate resistors at 0.1% tolerance for AI0 and AI1. Cord set ITBs have appropriate resistors for AI0 - AI3.

1 megohm minimum for voltage inputs; value of ranging resistor for current signals.

±

0.1% of span.

Type

Permitted contact resistance

Open/Close contact duration

Discrete inputs

100 ohms maximum

For open recognition: 0.05 seconds minimum.

For close recognition: 0.05 seconds minimum.

Closed contact recognition level

Open contact recognition level

Analog outputs:

Quantity

Signal range

Load range

1 V dc maximum.

4 V dc to 24 V dc.

2

0 to 21.84 mA dc (4 to 20 mA dc typically).

0 to 750 ohms.

1-10

Section 1. Introduction

Table 1-1. 53MC5000 Process Control Station Specifications

Specification(s) Item

Analog outputs (cont)

Accuracy:

Contact closure outputs

Quantity

±

0.2% of span.

2

Type Solid state switch output.

2 of 4

Configuration Solid state equivalent of single pole single throw, N.O. or

N.C. contacts referenced to common.

30 V dc maximum.

Voltage

Current

Datalink communication

Sampling and update program scan rate.

50 mA dc maximum.

RS-485, four wire, asynchronous, non-isolated inputs and outputs with common mode rejection of

±

7 V maximum referenced to ground. All standard baud rates between 300 and 9,600; 14,400 and 28,800.

User configurable from 0.05 seconds to 1.5 seconds.

Analog input signal sampling rate

Contact input signal sampling rate

Display update

Output signal update

Environmental characteristics:

Controlled environment

0.05 seconds

0.05 seconds

User configurable, every 1 to 15 program scans.

Same as program scan rate.

Ambient temperature limits

Relative humidity limits

Temperature effects on accuracy

Transient immunity (all circuits)

EMI susceptibility

Enclosed temperature controlled locations (class A and B per ISA-S71.01 1985).

4

°

to 52

°

C (40

°

to 125

°

F).

10% to 90% maximum non-condensing.

±

0.28% per 28

°

C (50

°

F) from reference temperature

25

°

C (77

°

F).

ANSI C37.90a-1974/IEEE Std 472-1974: Ring Wave: 1.5

MHz, 3 kV, 60 pulses/s for 2.0 seconds, IEC 801-4 Class-3

(shielded cable).

SAMA PMC 33.1-1978: Class 3-abc: no effect at 30 V/m, at

27, 146, and 446 MHz.

Enclosure classification/environment Panel Mounted Equipment: No enclosure rating. Designed to be installed in a user provided panel or enclosure.

Radiated Emissions CISPR11 Class A conducted and radiated.

1-11

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 1-1. 53MC5000 Process Control Station Specifications

3 of 4

Item

Enclosure classification/environment

(cont)

Specification(s)

Rated for installation in a "Pollution Degree 2" location per

U.L. 508-1989/"Controlled Environment" per CSA C22.2 No.

142-M1987. An indoor, temperature controlled location

(control room or shop floor) where normally, only nonconductive pollution occurs; however, temporary conductivity caused by condensation may be expected.

Shock vibration

Vibration

Drop and topple

Safety classification

Location in environments more severe than the above requires supplementary protection.

0.5 g, ISA, G3.

SAMA PMC 31.1-1978; point to point constant displacement

0.05" (1.27mm), 5 to 14 Hz: 0.5 g, 14 to 200 Hz.

SAMA PMC 31.1-1978; Tilt 30 degrees from horizontal and fall freely to a hard surface, all sides, front and back.

A) General Purpose: Complies with ANSI/ISA S82.01-1988,

Safety Standard for Electrical and Electronic Test,

Measuring, Controlling and Related Equipment; General

Requirements and S82.03-1988 Safety Standard for

Electrical and Electronic Test, Measuring, Controlling and

Related Equipment; Electrical and Electronic Process

Measurement and Control Equipment.

B) FM Approved: Nonincendive for Class I, Div 2, Groups

A, B, C & D hazardous locations.

Physical characteristics:

Construction materials:

Case

Circuit boards

Bezel

Instruments dimensions

Steel, ABB Light Gray enamel.

Glass epoxy.

ULTEM 1000

®

(Polyetherimide Resin) Flammability-UL94

5V.

2.844 W x 5.656 H x 12.906 L (inches)

73 W x 144 H x 329 L (mm)

0.125 inch to 1 inch thickness (3.2mm to 25.4mm).

Rear of case screw type terminal block.

5 pounds (2.3 kg).

Flush panel mounting

Electrical connections

Weight (approximate)

PID control ranges:

Proportional band

Integral

Derivative

Front panel:

Display - High Resolution

- Low Resolution

Push buttons

2% to 1000% and

off

.

0.02 to 200 min./repeat, or Manual Reset from 0 to 100%.

0.01 to 8 minutes advanced and

off

.

192 x 96 dot matrix addressable.

96 x 48 dot matrix addressable.

10 membrane type switches.

1-12

Section 1. Introduction

Table 1-1. 53MC5000 Process Control Station Specifications

Specification(s) Item

Lithium battery:

ABB Automation part number 167B024U01

Manufacturer

Manufacturer’s part number

Battery type

Voltage

Capacity

Storage temperature

Operating temperature

Sealing

Eagel Picher Industries, Inc.

Box 130 Bethel Road

Seneca, MO 64865

LTC-7P

Inorganic, liquid lithium thionyl chloride.

3.5

750 mAh

150

°

C (302

°

F).

-40

°

to 125

°

C (-40

°

to 257

°

F).

Hermetic, non-venting.

4 of 4

WARNING

REPLACE BATTERY WITH EAGLE PICHER P/N LTC-7P ONLY. USE OF

ANOTHER BATTERY MAY PRESENT A RISK OF FIRE OR EXPLOSION.

CAUTION

BATTERY MAY EXPLODE IF MISTREATED. DO NOT RECHARGE,

DISASSEMBLE, OR DISPOSE OF IN FIRE. DISPOSE OF USED

BATTERIES IN ACCORDANCE WITH FEDERAL, STATE, AND LOCAL

CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS.

Replacement procedure The LTC-7P battery is short circuit protected for wave soldering. Care should be taken to avoid short circuiting the battery during installation. No special handling procedures are required for removal of used batteries.

1-13

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 1-2. 6 Digital Input/4 Digital Output Option Specifications

Item

Safety classification

Dimensions

Number of inputs

Operational type

Input connections:

Voltage input mode

Specification(s)

FM Approved: Nonincendive for Class 1, Div. 2, Groups A,

B, C & D hazardous locations.

8.25 in. (210 mm) long, 2.740 in. (70 mm) wide.

Contact Input Specifications (DI2 - DI7)

6

Optically-coupled phototransistors.

2 terminals (+ and -) for each input.

Contact input mode

Recognition level:

Voltage input mode

2 terminals for each input (one is common).

Energized: 12 to 26 V dc range, 50 ohm maximum resistance. Non-energized: 1 V dc maximum.

Contact input mode

External power requirements

Recognition time

Maximum input voltage

Common mode limit

Transient immunity (all circuits)

Energized: 500 ohms maximum, 22 to 26 V dc range. Nonenergized: 60 k ohms minimum, 26 V dc maximum.

24 V dc 180 mA. Only required when using contact input mode DIs.

50 milliseconds

26 V dc

50 V with respect to chassis ground.

ANSI C37.90a-1974/IEEE Std 472-1974: Ring Wave: 1.5

MHz, 3 kV, 60 pulses/s for 2.0 seconds.

Contact Output Specifications (DO2 - DO5)

Number of outputs

Operational type

ON resistance

Load voltage limit

Load current

OFF state leakage current

Common mode limit

Contact protection

Transient immunity (all circuits)

4

Form A, SPST, normally open, optically isolated MOSFET switch.

15 ohms maximum.

50 V dc or peak ac.

150 mA

1 mA maximum.

50 V with respect to chassis ground.

250 mA fuse

ANSI C37.90a-1974/IEEE Std 472-1974: Ring Wave: 1.5

MHz, 3 kV, 60 pulses/s for 2.0 seconds.

1-14

Section 1. Introduction

Table 1-3. Dual Relay ITB Specifications

Item

Safety classification

Specification(s)

FM Approved: Nonincendive for Class 1, Div. 2, Group A,

B, C, & D hazardous locations.

WARNING

For use in Division 2 locations, the energy to relay contacts 8 and 11 must be limited to < 3 VA, < 28 V and 250 mA, resistive loads only.

The use of open contact type relays in a Class 1, Division 2 location is permitted only if the energy switched by the contacts is limited to an intrinsically safe level. It is the user’s responsibility to limit the energy.

Dimensions

Number of outputs

Operational type

External power requirements

Contact rating

3.5 in. (89 mm) long, 2.740 in. (70 mm) wide.

2

SPDT

+24 V, 35 mA for each relay.

10 Amps Resistive, 1 Amp Inductive, 250 V ac maximum.

Table 1-4. 16 Digital Input/Digital Output Option Board and ITB

Specifications

Item

Safety classification

Specification(s)

FM Approved: Nonincendive for Class 1, Div. 2, Group A,

B, C, & D hazardous locations.

Dimensions 11 in. (279.40 mm) long, 2.740 in. (70 mm) wide.

Maximum number of inputs/outputs 16

Operational type

External power requirements

OPTO 22 modules.

5 V @ 224 mA

24 V @ 420 mA

NOTE

When using this option, the 16 inputs and 16 outputs are mapped into

DI2-17 and DO2-17 respectively (32 total). Any mix of 16 I/O modules can be installed; however, positions having input modules installed must have the corresponding output DO bit set to 0. For example, if the first module position (M1) is an input module, the DO2 bit (L026) must be configured to 0 to indicate it is not an output module. The status of the input module will be reflected in the DI2 bit (L002).

1-15

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 1-5. OPTO 22 Module Specifications for 16DI/DO ITB

Safety classification: FM Approved: Nonincendive for Class 1, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, & D

hazardous locations as part of the 16DI/DO ITB.

1 of 2

WARNING

It is the user’s responsibility to install all associated switches and load apparatus in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.

Rules and requirements for the installation and wiring of equipment in

Class 1, Division 2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations are found in

Article 501 of the Code.

CSA Certified.

Meets IEEE surge withstand specification.

UL recognized.

4000 V ac optical isolation.

Will withstand one cycle surge of 80 Amperes.

Built-in LED Status Indicator.

Output modules have replaceable fuses.

16DI/DO

Voltage

OPTO 22 AC Input Modules

Input Voltage Range

OPTO 22

Part Number

G41DC5

G41DC5G

G41AC5

G41AC5A

G41DC24

G41AC24

OPTO 22

Part Number

G40AC5

G40AC5A

G40AC5A5(NC)

G40AC24

G40AC24A

OPTO 22

Part Number

G41C5

G41DC5B

G41DC5D

5 V dc

5 V dc

5 V dc

5 V dc

24 V dc

24 V dc

180 - 280 V ac

12 - 32 V ac

90 - 140 V ac

16DI/DO

Voltage

OPTO 22 AC Output Modules

Output Line

Voltage

Range

Load

Current

@ 45

°

C

5 V dc

5 V dc

5 V dc

24 V dc

12 - 140 V ac

24 - 280 V ac

24 - 280 V ac

12 - 140 V ac

3 Amps

3 Amps

3 Amps

3 Amps

24 V dc

16DI/DO

Voltage

5 V dc

5 V dc

5 V dc

12 - 32 V ac

35 - 60 V ac

90 - 140 V ac

24 - 280 V ac 3 Amps

OPTO 22 DC Input Modules

Input Voltage Range

10 - 32 V dc

4 - 16 V dc

2.5 - 28 V dc

Input

Current @

Max V In

25 mA

25 mA

11 mA

6.5 mA

25 mA

11 mA

Input

Maximum for No Output

3 V ac

9 V ac

45 V ac

80 V ac

3 V ac

45 V ac

Load

Current

@ 70

°

C

2 Amps

2 Amps

2 Amps

2 Amps

2 Amps

Maximum

Off State

Leakage

5 mA ac

2.5 mA ac

2.5 mA ac

5 mA ac

2.5 mA ac

Input

Current @

Max V In

25 mA

45 mA

30 mA

Input

Maximum for No Output

3 V dc

1 V dc

1 V dc

1-16

Section 1. Introduction

Table 1-5. OPTO 22 Module Specifications for 16DI/DO ITB

OPTO 22

Part Number

G41DC5G

G41AC5

G41AC5A

G41DC24

G41AC24

OPTO 22

Part Number

G40DC5

G40DC5A

G40DC24

OPTO 22 DC Input Modules (Cont)

16DI/DO

Voltage Input Voltage Range

5 V dc

5 V dc

5 V dc

24 V dc

24 V dc

35 - 60 V dc

90 - 140 V dc

180 - 280 V dc

10 - 32 V dc

90 - 140 V dc

16DI/DO

Voltage

5 V dc

5 V dc

24 V dc

OPTO 22 DC Output Modules

Output Line

Voltage

Range

Load

Current

@ 45

°

C

3 Amps 5 - 60 V dc

5 - 200 V dc

5 - 60 V dc

1 Amp

3 Amps

Input

Current @

Max V In

6 mA

11 mA

6.5 mA

25 mA

11 mA

Load

Current

@ 70

°

C

2 Amps

0.55 Amp

2 Amps

2 of 2

Input

Maximum for No Output

9 V dc

45 V dc

80 V dc

3 V dc

45 V dc

Maximum

Off State

Leakage

1 mA

2 mA

1 mA

Table 1-6. Single Channel Analog Input Option (AI8) Specifications

Item Specification(s)

This option requires one of the 5B series isolation modules described in Table 1-8.

Safety classification FM Approved: Nonincendive for Class 1, Div. 2, Group A,

B, C, & D hazardous locations.

1 (Analog Input 8 - AI8).

Quantity

Analog-to-digital specifications:

Accuracy

Resolution

±

0.1% Full Scale

12 bits

1-17

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 1-7. Multichannel Analog Option Specifications

1 of 2

Item

Saftey classification

Quantity

Connection type

Transmitter power

Current to voltage resistors

Current signals:

Signal Range

Measurement accuracy

Voltage measurement accuracy

Frequency signals:

Signal range

Input impedance

Measurement accuracy

Signal amplitude

Pulse width

Specification(s)

FM Approved: Nonincendive for Class 1, Div. 2, Group A,

B, C, & D hazardous locations.

Non-Isolated Analog Inputs (AI4 - AI7)

4

Track mounted ITB.

Supplied by user to ITB.

Provided on ITB (250 ohm

±

0.1% tolerance).

0 - 21.84 mA

±

0.2% of Full Scale

±

0.1% of Full Scale

9 - 25,000 Hz

47 k ohms in series with a 0.22 MFD capacitor.

±

0.2% of rate

4 - 25 V p-p

20 microseconds minimum

NOTE

The minimum frequency of 9 Hz and minimum voltage of 4 V p-p assumes the input waveform has a 50% duty cycle. The 53MC5000

Process Control Station frequency inputs are capacitively coupled into a level sensitive Schmidt Trigger; therefore, the dc bias level of the signal is not important. If, however, the duty cycle is not adhered to larger signal amplitudes are required and low frequency accuracy will degrade.

The following formula is provided to calculate required signal amplitudes for duty cycles other than 50%:

Required Amplitude

=

|

2

5

(

%

Duty Cycle

50

)

|

+

4

If the duty cycle is 50%, then the required amplitude is 4 V p-p.

If the duty cycle is 10%, then the required amplitude is 20 V p-p.

If the duty cycle is 90%, then the required amplitude is 20 V p-p.

Pulse signals:

Signal range

Input impedance

Signal amplitude

Pulse width

Rollover pulse count

0 - 25,000 Hz

47 k ohms in series with a 0.22 MFD capacitor.

4 - 25 V p-p

20 microseconds minimum

10,000,000

Isolated Analog Input (AI8)

This option requires one of the 5B series isolation modules described in Table 1-8.

Quantity 1 (Analog Input 8 - AI8).

Analog-to-digital specifications:

Accuracy

Resolution

±

0.1% Full Scale

12 bits

1-18

Section 1. Introduction

Table 1-7. Multichannel Analog Option Specifications

Item

Quantity

Signal range

Load range

Accuracy

Specification(s)

Non-Isolated Current Outputs (AO2 and AO3)

2

0 to 21.84 mA dc (4 to 20 mA dc typically).

0 - 640 ohms.

±

0.2% span.

2 of 2

Table 1-8. Group 5B Isolation Module Specifications

1 of 4

Item

Saftey classification for all Group 5B

Isolation Modules

Specification(s)

FM Approved: Nonincendive for Class 1, Div. 2, Group A,

B, C, & D hazardous locations.

Isolation Module: 5B30 Group - Isolated mV Inputs

Accuracy (Includes the combined effects of repeatability, hysteresis,

±

0.05% span

±

10

µ

V RTI

±

0.05% V z

(A nominal voltage that results in a 0 V output.) and nonlinearity. It also assumes a very high load resistance.)

Nonlinearity

±

0.02% span

Stability versus Ambient

Temperature:

Input offset

Output offset

Gain

Input bias current

±

1

µ

V/

°

C

±

20

µ

V/

°

C

±

25 ppm of reading/

°

C

±

3 nA

Input resistance:

Normal

Power off

Overload

Noise:

Input, 0.1 - 10 Hz

Output, 100 k Hz

Bandwidth, -3 db

Rise Time, 10% to 90% span

Input protection:

Continuous

Transient

5 M ohms

40 k ohms

40 k ohms

0.2

µ

V rms RTI

200

µ

V rms RTO

4 Hz

0.2 seconds

CMV, input to output:

Continuous

Transient

CMR (50 or 60 Hz):

1 k ohms in either or both input leads

NMR (50 or 60 Hz)

240 V rms

Meets IEEE - STD 472 (SWC).

160 db (all ranges)

60 db

240 V rms maximum continuous

Meets IEEE - STD 472 (SWC).

1-19

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 1-8. Group 5B Isolation Module Specifications

2 of 4

Item Specification(s)

Isolation Module: 5B31 Group - Isolated Voltage Inputs

Accuracy (Includes the combined effects of repeatability, hysteresis,

±

0.05% span

±

0.2 mV RTI

±

0.05% V z

(A nominal voltage that results in a 0 V output.) and nonlinearity. It also assumes a very high load resistance.)

Nonlinearity

±

0.02% span

Stability versus Ambient

Temperature:

Input offset

Output offset

Gain

Input bias current

Input resistance:

Normal

Power off

Overload

Noise:

Input, 0.1 - 10 Hz

Output, 100 k Hz

Bandwidth, -3 db

Rise Time, 10% to 90% span

CMV, input to output:

Continuous

Transient

CMR (50 or 60 Hz):

1 K ohms in either or both input leads

NMR (50 or 60 Hz)

Input protection:

Continuous

Transient

±

20

µ

V/

°

C

±

20

µ

V/

°

C

±

50 ppm of reading/

°

C

±

0.2 nA

650 k ohms

650 k ohms

650 k ohms

2

µ

V rms RTI

200

µ

V rms RTO

4 Hz

0.2 seconds

240 V rms

Meets IEEE - STD 472 (SWC).

160 db (span <

±

2 V)

150 db (span =

±

10 V)

60 db

240 V rms maximum continuous

Meets IEEE - STD 472 (SWC).

Isolation Module: 5B32 Group - Isolated Current Inputs

Accuracy (Includes the combined effects of repeatability, hysteresis,

±

0.05% span

±

0.05% I z

(A nominal value of input current that results in an output of 0 V.) and nonlinearity. It also assumes a very high load resistance. It does not include input resistor error.)

Input resistor (The current-tovoltage conversion resistor

[AC1362] is supplied as a plug-in component for mounting external to the module.)

Value

Accuracy

Nonlinearity

20 ohms

±

0.1%

±

0.02% span

1-20

Section 1. Introduction

Table 1-8. Group 5B Isolation Module Specifications

3 of 4

Item Specification(s)

Isolation Module: 5B32 Group - Isolated Current Inputs (Cont)

Stability versus Ambient

Temperature:

Module offset

Module Gain

Stability of supplied input resistor

±

0.0025%/

°

C of I z

(A nominal value of input current that results in an output of 0 V.)

±

0.0025%/

°

C of reading/

°

C

±

0.001%/

°

C

Noise:

Input, 0.1 - 10 Hz

Output, 100 k Hz

Bandwidth, -3 db

Rise Time, 10% to 90% span

CMV, input to output:

Continuous

Transient

10 nA rms RTI

200

µ

V rms RTO

4 Hz

0.2 seconds

240 V rms

Meets IEEE - STD 472 (SWC).

CMR (50 or 60 Hz):

1 k ohms in either or both input leads

NMR (50 or 60 Hz)

160 db (all ranges)

60 db

Input protection:

Continuous

Transient

240 V rms maximum continuous

Meets IEEE - STD 472 (SWC).

Isolation Module: 5B34 Group - Isolated RTD

Accuracy (Includes the combined

±

0.05% span

±

0.1 ohm (

±

0.025 for 1 mA excitement effects of repeatability, hysteresis, and linearity. It also assumes a very high load resistance. It does used with Cu RTDs.)

±

0.05% R z

(Is the value of the RTD resistance at the lowest point of the measurement range.) not include sensor or signal source error.)

Conformity error (For Pt RTDs only, other types may vary.)

±

0.05% span

Stability versus Ambient

Temperature:

Input offset

Output offset

Gain

Input bias current

Input resistance:

Normal

Power off

Overload

Noise:

Input, 0.1 - 10 Hz

Output, 100 k Hz

Bandwidth, -3 db

Rise Time, 10% to 90% span

±

0.02

°

C

C

±

20

µ

V/

°

C

±

50 ppm of reading/

°

C

±

3 nA

5 M ohms

40 k ohms

40 k ohms

0.2

µ

V rms RTI

200

µ

V rms RTO

4 Hz

0.2 seconds

1-21

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 1-8. Group 5B Isolation Module Specifications

Item Specification(s)

Isolation Module: 5B34 Group - Isolated RTD (Cont)

CMV, input to output:

Continuous

Transient

240 V rms

Meets IEEE - STD 472 (SWC).

CMR (50 or 60 Hz):

1 k ohms in either or both input leads

NMR (50 or 60 Hz)

160 db (all ranges)

60 db

Sensor excitement current:

100 ohms Pt, 120 ohms Ni

10 ohms Cu

Lead resistance effect:

100 ohms Pt, 120 ohms Ni

10 ohms Cu

0.25 mA

1.0 mA

±

±

0.02

0.2

°

°

C/ohm

C/ohm

Input protection: Continuous 240 V rms maximum continuous.

Isolation Module: 5B47 Group - Isolated Linearized Thermocouple

4 of 4

NOTE

Open thermocouple detection gives an upscale reading when the option board jumper W-1 is in the B-C position. A downscale reading is obtained when the jumper is in the A-B position.

Stability versus Ambient

Temperature:

Input offset

Gain

Input bias current

Input resistance:

Normal

Power off

Overload

±

1

µ

V/

°

C (This is equivalent to 0.020

°

C

C for J thermocouples and 0.025

°

C

C for K and T thermocouples.)

±

25 ppm of reading/

°

C

-25 nA

5 M ohms

40 k ohms

40 k ohms

Noise:

Output, 100 k Hz

Bandwidth, -3 db

Rise Time, 10% to 90% span

500

µ

V rms RTO

4 Hz

0.2 seconds

CMV, input to output:

Continuous

Transient

CMR (50 or 60 Hz):

1 k ohms in either or both input leads

NMR (50 or 60 Hz)

240 V rms

Meets IEEE - STD 472 (SWC).

160 db (all ranges)

Input protection: Continuous

60 db

240 V rms maximum continuous.

1-22

Section 1. Introduction

Table 1-9. SCADA Board Specifications

Item

Safety classification

Dimensions

Power requirements

Modem baud rate

Data protocol

Modem parity

Modem delay

Datalink baud rate

LEDs on SCADA board:

CTS - Clear to Send

RTS - Request to Send

M_R - Modem Receive

M_T - Modem Transmit

D_R - Datalink Receive

D_T - Datalink Transmit

Specification(s)

FM Approved: Nonincendive for Class 1, Div. 2, Group A,

B, C, & D hazardous locations.

10 in. (254 mm) long, 2.740 in. (70 mm) wide.

+12 V dc or +24 V dc @ 100 ma.

600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19,200, 28,800, and 38,400.

Eight data bits, one stop bit.

Even or none.

10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 100, 200, and 250 milliseconds.

9,600 or 28,800.

The modem is ready to receive data from the SCADA board.

The SCADA board wishes to transmit to the modem.

The data line from the modem to the SCADA board.

The data line from the SCADA board to the modem.

The data line from the controllers to the SCADA board.

The data line from the SCADA board to the controllers.

1.5 RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Other documents related to the 53MC5000 Process Control Station are summarized in the list that follows. It should be noted that the list contains the latest editions of the referenced documents as of the release date for this book; therefore, documents in the list may be at higher revision levels than the ones shown or may be superseded by new books.

Publication Number 24568, Instruction Bulletin 53MC5000 Flexible Control Strate- gies.

This book provides information to configure soft-wire lists for the Flexible Control Strategy

(FCS) modules. An overview figure shows all of the FCS modules and each module type is presented in the book with an illustration and functional description. The book also has soft-wire lists and function block diagrams of the ten resident control strategies (CS1-5,

20-22, 40, and 41) to aid in modifying an existing control strategy.

Publication Number 24975, Customization Guide 53MC5000, MICRO-DCI

Modular

Controller.

This is a guide used to create F-TRAN programs and F-CIM sequence configurations for the 53MC5000 Process Control Station.

Publication Number 24365, Instruction Bulletin 53SU5000, Revision 1, Design Level

B Software Release 4.

This book provides installation and operating information for the SUPERVISOR-PC software that runs under MS-DOS on a personal computer, for the ABB Automation operator keyboard, and for the expansion slot SUPERVISOR-PC card(s). It also provides descriptive information for the following product package capabilities: personal computer communication from a COM port or the SUPERVISOR card(s) to the standard datalink network; personal computer communication from the SUPERVISOR card(s) to a MicroLink network; how a personal computer can be used to create hierarchical color displays, graphical

1-23

1-24

53MC5000 Process Control Station displays, perform current trending, historical trending, create historical data files, and centralize data logging; and how a personal computer can be used to configure controllers online, compile F-TRAN programs, download F-TRAN programs, edit recipes, and produce controller configuration documentation.

Publication Number 24368, Instruction Bulletin 53HC3300D, Custom Program Inter- face (MICRO-DCI

Instrument to MS-DOS® Personal Computer).

This book provides installation and operating information for the Custom Program Interface software that runs under MS-DOS on a personal computer. It also provides descriptive information for the following product package capabilities: personal computer communication to the controller using the COM1 or COM2 port; how a personal computer can be used to configure controllers on-line, compile F-TRAN programs, download F-

TRAN programs, and produce controller configuration documentation; how a personal computer can be used to access the MICRO-DCI database with user programs written in

BASIC; and how to create files to generate custom EPROMs for MICRO-DCI products.

Publication Number 24470, Instruction Bulletin 53MC9011, Revision 2, MicroLink

.

This book provides information to install and configure modular controllers for operation on a MicroLink network. It specifies the cabling requirements and provides the MicroLink loads calculation procedure. There is also a separate section that provides all of the necessary Datalink-MicroLink combined network gateway information.

Publication Number 24526 , Instruction Bulletin 53MC9014, 53MC5000 HART

Interface.

This book provides information to calculate the required HART network cable lengths. It contains information to install the HART ITB and HART Modem ITB, as well as a checklist that can be referenced to help expedite online operation of the HART network. It also provides instructions to use the operator displays, and information to configure the controller for HART operation. The maintenance section of the book provides a parts replacement procedure, parts list, illustrated parts breakdown, illustrations of the Expansion Board

HART Modem Option Card and Auxiliary Processor Board (APB), and illustrations of the

HART ITB and HART Modem ITB.

Publication Number 24926, Instruction Bulletin 53MT6000, Micro-Tools

This manual provides information for the Micro-Tools product. Micro-Tools is a Windows

NT-based configuration tool for the 53MC5000 family of Process Control Stations. The

Micro-Tools product helps reduce controller configuration and maintenance time by providing an easy to use view into the database and configuration of the instrument.

Publication Number 24828, Configuration Guide 53PW6000, Micro-PWC

The

Micro-PWC Configuration Guide

is designed for use with Micro-DCI and other compatible equipment.

The Micro-PWC Configuration Guide

describes the operations required to configure the Micro-PWC product. It provides information on how to perform configuration tasks on the Micro-PWC and provides suggestions and examples for configuration activities.

Publication Number 24924, Installation & Setup Guide 53PW6000, Micro-PWC

The Micro-PWC

Installation and Setup Guide describes a software product which provides a process control operator interface for several Micro-DCI instruments. The heart of this product is a suite of applications that provide easy to use, state-of-the-art displays and tools to a plant operator.

Section 1. Introduction

Publication Number 24829, Operator’s Manual 53PW6000, Micro-PWC

The

Micro-PWC Operator’s Manual

describes the operations required to use a configured

Micro-PWC. It is designed to provide instructions on how to perform operational tasks on the Micro-PWC, provide suggestions and examples for operator activities as well as providing additional operational information.

1-25

Section 2. Installation

2.0 INSTALLATION

2.1 INSPECTION

A list of all items in the shipment is attached to the shipping container. Inspect the equipment upon arrival for shipping damage and report all claims to the responsible shipping agent before installation is attempted. The ABB Automation Customer Service Department should be notified if it appears the damage may cause faulty operation.

As a precaution, inspect the packing material before discarding it to prevent inadvertent loss of the mounting hardware or special instructions that may have been included with the shipment.

2.2 PACKING BOLT REMOVAL

The packing bolt is illustrated in Figure 2-1 and the removal procedure is provided in Table 2-1.

PACKING BOLT

THROUGH-HOLE

ù

WASHER BOLT END-CAP

Figure 2-1. Packing Bolt

Table 2-1. Packing Bolt Removal

Step Procedure

1 While holding the bolt loop, twist off end-cap.

2 Remove tag and slide bolt with washer from unit.

3 Save bolt, washer, and end-cap.

2-1

53MC5000 Process Control Station

2.3 LOCATION

The 53MC5000 Process Control Station is supplied with an enclosure designed specifically for indoor mounting in a dry, vibration free location. The location ambient temperature should be stable and maintained within the specified temperature limits listed in specifications Table 1-1.

2.4 MOUNTING

It is not necessary to remove the controller from its case to install it. For unique installations that require the removal of the controller from its case, reference Section 18-2, Parts Replacement.

Appropriate mounting hardware is supplied with the controller for flush panel mounting as a single unit. Side by side mounting in multiple fashion requires optional hardware. Outline dimensions and panel cut-out requirements for case mounting are shown in Figure 2-2.

The dimensions given for spacing between controllers were selected on the basis of 1/8 inch thick panel strength. Panel strength must be considered when multiple case mounting is required. As the panel becomes longer with multiple cut-outs, it may be necessary to install supporting members to stiffen the panel strips or to increase the 9 inch minimum center line dimension between horizontally mounted rows.

For multiple case mounting, the rear of the controller cases must be supported to prevent panel warping and to prevent damage to the controllers if the panel is moved. Mount an angle iron or similar member along the bottom of the cases as indicated in Figure 2-3. Also, a tilt-back panel with multiple mounted controllers may require additional support by increasing the panel thickness to prevent sagging.

Each controller is furnished with a trim collar (mounting frame) for single case mounting or multiple mounting of single cases (several single cut-outs). Table 2-2 provides the procedure to install single or multiple mounted controllers in prepared panel cut-outs. Trim collars (mounting frames) are also available from ABB Automation in various sizes for multiple controller mounting in a single cutout (several controllers occupying a single cut-out). See Table 18-3, Related Parts List for available sizes and part numbers.

SEPARATE PACKAGING

Mounting brackets and trim collars (mounting frames) are packaged separately. Check the shipment carefully to prevent loss of mounting hardware.

2-2

Section 2. Installation

Figure 2-2. Outline Dimensions and Panel Cut-Out Requirements

2-3

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 2-2. Controller Panel Mounting

Step

1

2

Procedure See Figure

Ensure the through-case shipping bolt is removed as described in Table 2-1. Figure 2-1

Slip the trim collar (mounting frame) over the rear of the case and slide it forward to the front of the case.

Figure 2-3

Figure 2-4

For Single Mounted Case(s)

3a Slide the controller through the panel opening.

4a Support the weight of the case and attach the top and bottom mounting brackets. Tighten the bracket screws.

For Multiple Mounted Cases

3b Slide the controller through the panel opening.

4b Install ABB Automation self-adhesive pads at rear of cases and spacer bars between the cases. Two pads, one on top of the other, are needed at the rear of the cases. Start the installation from the right (when facing the panel), installing the spacers as each case is added. After each case is positioned in place, install and tighten the top and bottom mounting brackets. Each case must be tight against the previous case.

Note

Spacers are not required on the outside of the right and left cases.

Figure 2-3

Figure 2-4

Figure 2-3

Figure 2-5

Figure 2-4

2-4

Figure 2-3. Single or Multiple Panel Mounting

Section 2. Installation

FOOT EXTENDS

THROUGH NOTCH

MOUNTING BRACKET ROD

TOP OR BOTTOM

OF CONTROLLER

SITE MOUNTING PANEL

TRIM COLLAR (SUPPLIED

WITH CONTROLLER)

CONTROLLER BEZEL

Figure 2-4. Bracket Rods

1. SLIDE TRIM

COLLAR FROM

REAR OF

CONTROLLER

TOWARD FRONT

BEZEL.

2. SLIDE

CONTROLLER

THROUGH SITE

PANEL CUT-OUT.

3. INSERT UPPER

MOUNTING

BRACKET FOOT

INTO NOTCH.

4. POSITION CASE

AND TURN ROD

WITH SCREW-

DRIVER UNTIL IT

MEETS PANEL.

5. FOR LOWER

MOUNT-

Figure 2-5. Intercase Spacing

2-5

53MC5000 Process Control Station

2.5 MOUNTING THE INTERCONNECTION TERMINAL BOARDS (ITBs)

The Interconnection Terminal Boards (ITBs) (and SCADA Adapter) are designed for snap-mounting into non-conductive, 2.9 inch (74 mm) wide PVC track that is either direct surface mounted (wall mounted) or mounted on DIN rail (32 or 35 mm) with adapters. The 2.9 inch (74 mm) wide PVC track is available from ABB Automation in 4 foot (1.2 m) lengths as part number 129A003U03 for wall mounting and for DIN rail mounting. To mount the PVC tracks on either the 32 mm or 35 mm

DIN rails, order kit part number 614B958U02, which contains 12 DIN Adapters. DIN rails are NOT available from ABB Automation and must be purchased locally.

As shown in Figure 2-6, the elongated mounting holes for the PVC track are centered 2 inches

(50.8 mm) apart, as well as the two parallel rows of adapter holes. The track can be mounted directly to the wall with screws through the elongated holes or it can be mounted on 32 mm or

35 mm DIN rail with DIN Adapters that are inserted into the adapter holes. It is not necessary to snap all 12 adapters into a single 4 foot PVC track section.

The ITBs (and SCADA Adapter) are not provided with an enclosure. They may be mounted within a user provided enclosure as protection against environmental hazards and mechanical damage, and to provide operating personnel with suitable protection from electrical shock.

WARNING

The ABB Automation Interconnection Terminal Boards (ITBs) and

SCADA Adapter, when properly installed in the non-conductive, 2.9 inch

(74 mm) wide PVC track snap-mount channels, comply with ANSI/ISA,

UL, CSA, and IEC safety requirements with respect to accessibility to a potential shock hazard when installed in a service access area that can only be accessed, by use of tool, by qualified service personnel. It is the user’s responsibility to provide supplementary protection against accidental contact with the ITBs and SCADA Adapter mounted in an operator access area where access can be gained without the use of a tool.

When snap-mounted, the boards can be mounted horizontally or vertically and there is no preferred mounting order. A 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) edge gap between boards is preferred for easier snapinsertion and removal from the track. The minimum required above board clearance is 3 inches (76.2 mm) for connector cable bends, although 7 inches (177.8 mm) is preferred to allow access space above the track surface.

As a PVC track installation overview, Figure 2-7 is provided to illustrate a close-up view of the controller rear terminal connections available for the ITBs. Figures 2-8 and 2-9 are also provided to summarize the various possible ITB-to-controller connections for controllers with the Standard

Rear Terminal Board and Cord Set Connector Board. The ITBs shown in these illustrations are the

SCADA Adapter, Communication (Comm) ITB, HART ITB, HART Modem ITB, Analog ITB, 6 Digital

Input/4 Digital Output (6DI/4DO) ITB, Dual Relay ITB, 16 Digital Input/Digital Output (16DI/DO)

ITB, and Cord Set ITB.

2-6

Figure 2-6. ITB Snap-Mounting

Figure 2-7. Controller Rear Terminal ITB Connectors

Figure 2-8. Potential ITB Complement to Controller with Standard Rear Terminal Board

Figure 2-9. Potential ITB Complement to Controller with Cord Set Connector Board

Section 2. Installation

2.6 REMOVABLE PLUG-IN CONNECTORS

The controller with standard rear terminal board (not the cord set option) has a vertical terminal strip (TB1) for signal connections and a horizontal terminal strip (TB2) for power input wiring. Both terminal strips have removable plug-in connectors. As shown in Figure 2-10, the upper signal connector for TB1 has screw lugs 1 through 12 and the lower signal connector has screw lugs 13 through 22. All of the screw lugs for TB2 are on a single power connector.

To remove a signal connector from TB1, grasp it firmly on both sides with the thumb and forefinger, rock it gently from top to bottom (not side to side) and pull it straight out.

To remove the power connector from TB2, grasp it firmly with the thumb and forefinger, rock it gently from side to side and pull it straight out.

Each connector is keyed and has one scalloped side as an aid to proper insertion alignment after the wires are connected.

The screw lugs for the plug-in connectors on the back of the controller are designed for 12 - 24

AWG wire. The wire should be stripped to expose 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) of conductor before installation. All wiring to the controller rear terminal board screw lugs is supplied by the customer .

SIDE

12 SIGNAL

CONNECTO

LUG 1

TB1

LUG 12

10 SIGNAL

CONNECTO

LUG 13

BACK

POWER

CONNECTO

LUG 22

TB2

SCALLOPED SIDES OF

CONNECTOR

LUG 1 LUG 5

TO REMOVE SIGNAL CONNECTOR, GRASP SIDES

FIRMLY WITH THUMB AND FOREFINGER, ROCK

GENTLY FROM TOP TO BOTTOM (NOT SIDE TO SIDE)

TO REMOVE POWER CONNECTOR, GRASP SIDES

FIRMLY WITH THUMB AND FOREFINGER, ROCK

GENTLY FROM SIDE TO SIDE AND PULL STRAIGHT

OUT.

NOTE: REMOVABLE PLUG-IN CONNECTORS ON

Figure 2-10. Removable Plug-In Connectors from Standard Rear

Terminal Board

2-11

53MC5000 Process Control Station

2.7 POWER CONNECTIONS FOR CONTROLLER AND ITBs

An overview illustration of power connections to the controller and ITBs is provided in Figure 2-11.

The Comm ITB does not require power; therefore, it is not shown in the illustration. It should be noted that power input requirements for the 16DI/DO ITB are dependent upon the modules installed on the board (5 V dc or 24 V dc modules, which can not be intermixed), and that the Cord

Set ITB receives +24 V dc power for the transmitters at J3 (not shown) from a controller cable.

The Cord Set ITB, however, still requires power common and chassis safety ground connections.

It should also be noted that TB3-3 (Chassis Ground) of the 6DI/4DO ITB is always connected; however, TB3-1&2 are connected only if DIs requiring +24 V dc power are wired to the ITB.

Assigned power input terminals for the controller, Cord Set ITB (power common and chassis safety grounds), Dual Relay ITB, Analog ITB, 16DI/DO ITB, 6DI/4DO ITB, and SCADA Adapter, are illustrated in Figure 2-12 Sheets 1-4. All wiring is supplied by the customer.

A controller can be ordered to operate with either a +24 V dc input or with ac inputs of 110/120 V or 220/240 V. Procedures to connect the controller to +24 V dc (negative ground), +24 V dc

(floating ground), 110/120 V ac, 220/240 V ac, and 220 (208)/240 V ac (no neutral) are provided in Sections 2.7.1 through 2.7.5.

WARNING

Instruments that are powered from an ac line service constitute a potential electric shock hazard to the user. Make certain that these system ac power lines are disconnected from the operating branch circuit before attempting electrical connections.

GROUNDING

Installations are expected to have access to a high quality, noise-free point of earth reference. Connection should be through a low resistance (less than one ohm) lead wire directly to the installation’s point of earth reference which can be an independent grounding rod or ground grid mesh that penetrates the permanent moisture level below the frost line in accordance with Article 250 of ANSI/NFPA 70, the

National Electrical Code, or other code(s) acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction over the installation.

COMMON BUS BAR

Use of a common bus bar that is connected to the earth ground through a low resistance (less than one ohm) lead wire is recommended to minimize potential voltage differences that may occur as a result of ground loops, e.g., potential differences between separate power grounds, signal grounds, etc.

METAL CONDUIT

In noisy locations, the power wiring should be enclosed in metal electrical conduit and not routed in close proximity to signal wiring.

2-12

CORD SET

ITB

TB2

9 10

DUAL RELAY

ITB

TB1

1 2

ANALOG

ITB*

TB2

+ - ▼

1 2 3

16 DIGITAL

INPUT/DIGITAL

OUTPUT ITB

(16DI/DO)**

TB2

1 2

OR

6 DIGITAL

INPUT/4

DIGITAL

OUTPUT ITB

(6DI/4DO)***

TB3

+ - ▼

1 2 3

SCADA

ADAPTER

BOARD

TB1

+24 V ▼

53MC5000

CONTROLLER†

TB2

PC L3 L2 L1

G

110/120 V ac,

220/240 V ac, OR

+24 V dc POWER

TO CONTROLLER ac

••••• *EITHER ANALOG ITB OR HART ITB. (BOTH CANNOT COEXIST.)

**EITHER 16DI/DO ITB OR HART MODEM ITB. (BOTH CANNOT

COEXIST.) ALSO, ASSUMES 24 V MODULES INSTALLED ON THE 16DI/DO

ITB.

***EITHER 6DI/4DO ITB OR HART MODEM ITB. (BOTH CANNOT

COEXIST.) ALSO, TB3-3 IS ALWAYS CONNECTED (CHASSIS SAFETY

•GROUND). TB3-1&2 CONNECTED ONLY FOR CCIs THAT REQUIRE

•POWER.

†••A 24 V DC DISTRIBUTION TERMINAL STRIP IS PREFERRED TO DAISY

CHAINED SINGLE WIRE DROPS.

SEE †

ABOVE

+

-

24 V DC P/S

COMMON BUS BAR FOR ALL CONTROLLERS

(NOT PROVIDED BY ABB AUTOMATION)

Figure 2-11. Power Connections Overview

Figure 2-12. Assigned Power Input Terminals (Sheet 1 of 4)

Figure 2-12. Assigned Power Input Terminals (Sheet 2 of 4)

Figure 2-12. Assigned Power Input Terminals (Sheet 3 of 4)

Figure 2-12. Assigned Power Input Terminals (Sheet 4 of 4)

53MC5000 Process Control Station

2.7.1 SINGLE +24 V DC POWER SOURCE TO CONTROLLER AND ITBS

The procedure to connect the controller TB2 screw lugs to a +24 V dc power source is provided in

Table 2-3. This procedure assumes the power supply, controller, and ITBs are negatively grounded (negative ground system).

Table 2-3. Single +24 V dc Power Source to Controller and ITBs

Step Procedure

1 Connect the positive (+) 24 V input line, via a remote SPST switch, to TB2-4

( L1 ).

2 Connect the negative (-) 24 V input line to TB2-3 ( L2 ).

3 Connect TB2-1, Power Common ( PC ), to a bus bar that is connected to earth ground.

Individual wires should connect each controller Power Common ( PC ) screw lug to the common bus bar.

4 Connect the earth ground to TB2-5, Chassis Safety Ground ( G ).

See Figure

Figure 2-13

Figure 2-13

Figure 2-13

Figure 2-14

Figure 2-13

PC L3 L2 L1 G

1 2 3 4 5

TB2 (REAR OF

CONTROLLER)

SPST

COMMON BUS BAR FOR

ALL CONTROLLERS

+

-

24 V dc

POWER

SUPPLY

AC

EARTH GROUND

2-18

Figure 2-13. Single +24 V dc Power Source to Controller and ITBs

MC5000

1

PC L3 L2

L1 G

Section 2. Installation

SPST

MC5000

2

PC L3 L2

L1 G

SPST

MC5000

3

PC L3 L2

L1 G

SPST

CONTROLLERS AND ITBs ARE WIRED SAME AS

CONTROLLER 3.

SCADA

+24 V

TB1

CORD

SET

TB2

DUAL

RELAY

TB1

1

2

ANALOG

TB2

1

2

16DI/DO**

24 V DC P/S***

+

-

AC

24 V DC DISTRIBUTION

TERMINAL STRIP* COMMON BUS BAR*

EARTH GROUND

*DISTRIBUTION TERMINAL STRIP AND COMMON

BUS BAR NOT PROVIDED BY ABB Instrumentation.

**ASSUMES 24 V MODULES INSTALLED ON 16DI/DO.

*** P/S IS NEGATIVE GROUND.

Figure 2-14. Wiring Example for Single+24 V dc Power Supply to

Controller and ITBs (Negative Ground System)

2-19

53MC5000 Process Control Station

2.7.2 SEPARATE 24 V DC POWER SOURCES TO CONTROLLER AND ITBs

The procedure to connect the controller TB2 screw lugs to a controller-dedicated 24 V dc power source is provided in Table 2-4. The ITB power source must be negatively grounded; the controller power source can float, be positively grounded, or negatively grounded.

Table 2-4. Controller-Dedicated 24 V dc Power Source

Step Procedure See Figure

1 From the negative distribution strip, connect the negative (-) 24 V input line, via a remote SPST switch (SPST switch is on this input if positive ground), to TB2-3 ( L2 ).

Figure 2-15

2 From the positive distribution strip, connect the positive (+) 24 V input line, via a remote SPST switch (SPST switch is on this input if negative ground or if power supply floats), to TB2-4 ( L1 ).

Figure 2-15

Figure 2-15 3 Connect TB2-1, Power Common ( PC ), to a common bus bar that is connected to earth ground.

Individual wires should connect each controller Power Common ( PC ) screw lug to the common bus bar.

4 Connect the earth ground to TB2-5, Chassis Safety Ground ( G ).

Figure 2-16

Figure 2-15

TB2 (REAR OF

CONTROLLER)

PC L3 L2 L1 G

1 2 3 4 5

NEG DIST STRIP

POS DIST STRIP

ONLY ONE SPST SWITCH NEEDED ON

P/S HOT SIDE (UNGROUNDED)

COMMON BUS BAR

+

24 V dc

POWER

SUPPLY

-

AC

EARTH GROUND

Figure 2-15. Controller Dedicated 24 V dc Power Source

2-20

Section 2. Installation

SPST

ONLY ONE SPST

SWITCH PER

CONTROLLER IS

NEEDED. (SEE TABLE

2-4.) THE

CONTROLLER P/S CAN

BE TO A POSITIVE

GROUND, NEGATIVE

GROUND, OR FLOAT.

NEGATIVE

TERMINAL STRIP*

MC5000

1

PC L3 L2

L1 G

SPST

ITBs ARE WIRED

SAME AS THOSE

UNDER

CONTROLLER 2.

MC5000

2

PC L3 L2

L1 G

SCADA

CORD

SET

TB2 9

10

DUAL

RELAY

TB1

SPST

POSITIVE

TERMINAL STRIP*

-

CONTROLLER

24 V DC P/S

+

AC

ITB

24 V DC P/S***

+

-

NOTE:

THE POWER

SUPPLY

DEDICATED TO

THE ITBs MUST

STILL BE

CONNECTED TO A

NEGATIVE

GROUND.

ANALOG

TB2

1

2

16DI/DO**

TB2 1

2

ITB 24 V DC

DISTRIBUTION

TERMINAL STRIP* COMMON BUS BAR*

AC

EARTH GROUND

*TERMINAL STRIPS AND COMMON BUS BAR NOT

PROVIDED BY ABB AUTOMATION.

**ASSUMES 24 V MODULES INSTALLED ON 16DI/DO.

*** P/S IS NEGATIVE GROUND.

Figure 2-16. Wiring Example of Separate 24 V dc Power Sources for

Controller and ITBs (Controller Positive, Negative, or Floating Ground)

2-21

53MC5000 Process Control Station

2.7.3 110/120 V AC POWER SOURCE TO CONTROLLER

The procedure to connect the controller TB2 screw lugs to a 110/120 V ac power source is provided in Table 2-5.

Table 2-5. 110/120 V ac Power Source to Controller

Step Procedure

1 Connect the phase or hot input line, via a remote SPST switch, to TB2-4

( L1 ).

2 Connect the neutral input line to TB2-3 ( L2 ).

3 Connect TB2-1, Power Common ( PC ), to a bus bar that is connected to earth ground.

Individual wires should connect each controller Power Common ( PC ) screw lug to the common bus bar.

4 Connect the earth ground at the supply source (green/green-yellow ground) to TB2-5, Chassis Safety Ground ( G ).

Note

SURGE PROTECTION

All supply connections include surge protection rated at 275 V ac normal mode.

See Figure

Figure 2-17

Figure 2-17

Figure 2-17

Figure 2-18

Figure 2-17

PC L3 L2 L1 G

1 2 3 4 5

TB2 (REAR OF

CONTROLLER)

110/120 V ac

SPST HOT

NEUTRAL

COMMON BUS BAR FOR

ALL CONTROLLERS

BOX

BREAKER

AC NEUTRAL AC HOT

EARTH GROUND

Figure 2-17. 110/120 V ac Power Source to Controller

2-22

Section 2. Installation

MC5000

1

PC L3 L2

L1 G

SPST

MC5000

2

PC L3 L2

L1 G

CONTROLLERS AND ITBs ARE WIRED

SAME AS CONTROLLER 3.

SPST

MC5000

3

PC L3 L2

L1 G

AC

BREAKER

BOX

SCADA

TB1 +24 V

CORD

SET

TB2

DUAL

RELAY

TB1

ANALOG

1

TB2

16DI/DO**

SPST

24 V DC P/S

+

24 V DC DISTRIBUTION

TERMINAL STRIP*

AC

COMMON BUS BAR*

EARTH GROUND

*DISTRIBUTION TERMINAL STRIP AND COMMON

BUS BAR NOT PROVIDED BY ABB AUTOMATION.

•••**ASSUMES 24 V MODULES INSTALLED ON 16DI/DO.

Figure 2-18. 110/120 V ac Power Wiring Example

2-23

53MC5000 Process Control Station

2.7.4 220/240 V AC POWER SOURCE TO CONTROLLER

The procedure to connect the controller TB2 screw lugs to a 220/240 V ac power source is provided in Table 2-6.

Table 2-6. 220/240 V ac Power Source to Controller

Step Procedure

1 Connect the phase or hot input line, via a remote SPST switch, to TB2-4

( L1 ).

2 Connect the neutral input line to TB2-2 ( L3 ).

3 Connect TB2-1, Power Common ( PC ), to a bus bar that is connected to earth ground.

Individual wires should connect each controller Power Common ( PC ) screw lug to the common bus bar.

4 Connect the earth ground at the supply source (green/green-yellow ground) to TB2-5, Chassis Safety Ground ( G ).

Note

SURGE PROTECTION

All supply connections include surge protection rated at 275 V ac normal mode.

See Figure

Figure 2-19

Figure 2-19

Figure 2-19

Figure 2-20

Figure 2-19

PC L3 L2 L1 G

1 2 3 4 5

TB2 (REAR OF

CONTROLLER)

220/240 V ac

SPST PHASE/HOT

BOX

BREAKER

NEUTRAL

COMMON BUS BAR FOR

ALL CONTROLLERS

AC NEUTRAL

AC

PHASE/

HOT

EARTH GROUND

Figure 2-19. 220/240 V ac Power Source to Controller

2-24

INST4

INST4

Section 2. Installation

MC5000

1

PC L3 L2 L1 G

1 2 3 4 5

SPST

MC5000

2

PC L3 L2 L1 G

1 2 3 4 5

CONTROLLERS AND ITBs ARE WIRED

SAME AS CONTROLLER 3.

SPST

MC5000

3

PC L3 L2 L1 G

1 2 3 4 5

SCADA

TB1

+24 V

CORD

SET

TB2

9

10

DUAL

RELAY

TB1

1

2

ANALOG

TB2

1

2

AC

BREAKER

BOX

16DI/DO**

TB2

1

2

SPST

24 V DC P/S

+

24 V DC DISTRIBUTION

TERMINAL STRIP*

AC

COMMON BUS BAR*

EARTH GROUND

*DISTRIBUTION TERMINAL STRIP AND COMMON

BUS BAR NOT PROVIDED BY F&P.

•••**ASSUMES 24 V MODULES INSTALLED ON 16DI/DO.

Figure 2-20. 220/240 V ac Power Wiring Example

2-25

53MC5000 Process Control Station

2.7.5 220/240 V AC (NO NEUTRAL) POWER SOURCE TO CONTROLLER

The procedure to connect the controller TB2 screw lugs to a 220 (208)/240 V ac (no neutral) power source (208 V ac

±

10% variance) is provided in Table 2-7.

Table 2-7. 220/240 V ac (No Neutral) Power Source to Controller

Step Procedure See Figure

1 Connect the hot input line, via a remote DPST switch, to TB2-4 ( L1 ).

Figure 2-21

2 Connect the second hot input line, via a remote DPST switch to TB2-2 ( L3 ).

Figure 2-21

Figure 2-21 3 Connect TB2-1, Power Common ( PC ), to a bus bar that is connected to earth ground.

Individual wires should connect each controller Power Common ( PC ) screw lug to the common bus bar.

Figure 2-22

Figure 2-21 4 Connect the earth ground at the supply source (green/green-yellow ground) to TB2-5, Chassis Safety Ground ( G ).

Note

SURGE PROTECTION

All supply connections include surge protection rated at 275 V ac normal mode.

PC L3 L2 L1 G

1 2 3 4 5

TB2 (REAR OF

CONTROLLER)

220/240 V ac

DPST

HOT

HOT

BOX

BREAKER

COMMON BUS BAR FOR

ALL CONTROLLERS

HOT

AC

HOT

EARTH GROUND

Figure 2-21. 220/240 V ac (No Neutral) Power Source to Controller

2-26

Section 2. Installation

MC5000

1

PC L3 L2

L1 G

DPST

MC5000

2

PC L3 L2

L1 G

CONTROLLERS AND ITBs ARE WIRED

SAME AS CONTROLLER 3.

DPST

MC5000

3

PC L3 L2

L1 G

SCADA

TB1 +24 V

CORD

SET

TB2 9

10

DUAL

RELAY

TB1 1

2

ANALOG

TB2

1

2 AC

BREAKER

BOX

16DI/DO**

TB2 1

2

DPST

24 V DC P/S

+

24 V DC DISTRIBUTION

TERMINAL STRIP*

AC

COMMON BUS BAR*

EARTH GROUND

*DISTRIBUTION TERMINAL STRIP AND COMMON

BUS BAR NOT PROVIDED BY ABB AUTOMATION.

•••**ASSUMES 24 V MODULES INSTALLED ON 16DI/DO.

Figure 2-22. 220/240 V ac (No Neutral) Power Wiring Example

2-27

53MC5000 Process Control Station

2.8 SIGNAL CONNECTIONS TO STANDARD REAR TERMINAL BOARD

Under ideal conditions shielded cable may not be required; however, in noisy locations two-wire shielded signal cable should be used. Also, signal transmission distance must not exceed the limit specified for the particular transmitter (refer to the applicable technical literature provided with the respective device), and correct polarity must be observed when connecting remote transmitters to the controller.

Each wire lead should be stripped to expose 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) conductor. All wiring to the controller rear terminal board screw lugs is supplied by the customer.

2.8.1 ANALOG INPUTS 0-3 (AI0-3)

There are provisions to connect four analog input signals (AI0-3) to the controller at the standard rear terminal board. If the controller has the cord set terminal board option, the analog inputs are connected to the Cord Set ITB. Each analog input can be configured for a two wire transmitter

(controller powers the loop) or a four wire transmitter (transmitter is self powered and does not require controller power). Controller power available to the transmitters is +24 V dc and is limited to

80 mA current maximum. The power available to the transmitters is net of the power required by the controller itself (there is no separate power supply for transmitters). Each analog input signal range is selectable either as 4-20 mA (1-5 V) or as 0-20 mA (0-5 V). (Selections for the analog inputs are provided in Section 5, Configuration Parameters.) When the input for AI2 or AI3 is a current signal, a voltage dropping resistor that is 250 ohm (

±

0.1%) must be installed at the terminal connector screw lugs with the input wires for that AI. The resistors for AI0 and AI1 come installed on the rear terminal board as illustrated in Figure 2-23. If the input is a voltage signal for AI0 or

AI1, then the appropriate resistor ( R1 for AI0 or R2 for AI1 ) must be removed from the terminal board. The Cord Set ITB has all four resistors ( R1 through R4 ) for AI0 through AI3 which eliminates the necessity to add a resistor for AI2 or AI3 current input signals.

An overall illustration of the controller rear terminal board with signal definitions is provided as Figure 2-24. Figures 2-25 through 2-28 illustrate shielded two-wire current input signal connections to

AI0-3 from self powered transmitters and from transmitters that require controller power. Figure

2-29 contains a graphical illustration of AI signal conditioning.

TB1

TB2

BACK OF REAR TERMINAL BOARD

R1

R2

R1 AND R2 ARE 250 OHM

±

0.1% RESISTORS

MOUNTED VERTICALLY ON

REAR TERMINAL BOARD.

THEY CONVERT THE AI0

AND AI1 INPUT CURRENT

SIGNALS TO VOLTAGE

DROPS. EACH RESISTOR IS

REMOVED IF ITS INPUT IS A

VOLTAGE SIGNAL.

Figure 2-23. Rear Terminal Board Resistors R1 and R2

2-28

Figure 2-24. Controller Standard Rear Terminal Board Signal Connections

53MC5000 Process Control Station

TB1

PIN 2 AI0

PIN 3 SIGNAL COMMON

PIN 4 +24 VOLTS

PIN 5 AI1

PIN 6 SIGNAL COMMON

+

+

-

-

CABLE FROM TRANSMITTER

CABLE FROM TRANSMITTER

CHASSIS SAFETY

GROUND

NO. 6

SCREW

WIRED AS SHOWN EACH TRANSMITTER HAS ITS OWN POWER SOURCE AND DOES

NOT REQUIRE +24 V FROM THE CONTROLLER

Figure 2-25. Current Input Signals to AI0&1 (Transmitters Have Power

Source)

TB1

PIN 1 +24 VOLTS

PIN 2 AI0

PIN 3 SIGNAL COMMON

PIN 4 +24 VOLTS

PIN 5 AI1

+

-

CABLE FROM TRANSMITTER

+

-

CABLE FROM TRANSMITTER

NO. 6

SCREW

CHASSIS SAFETY

GROUND

WIRED AS SHOWN EACH TRANSMITTER RECEIVES +24 V FROM THE CONTROLLER

Figure 2-26. Current Input Signals to AI0&1 (Transmitters Receive +24

V dc from Controller)

2-30

Section 2. Installation

PIN 6 SIGNAL COMMON

PIN 7 AI2

PIN 8 SIGNAL COMMON

PIN 9 AI3

TB1

CHASSIS SAFETY

-

+

GROUND NO. 6

SCREW

CABLE FROM TRANSMITTER

-

+

CABLE FROM TRANSMITTER

NO. 6

SCREW

CHASSIS SAFETY

GROUND

R3 R4

RESISTORS ARE 250 OHM

±

0.1 %

WIRED AS SHOWN EACH TRANSMITTER HAS ITS OWN POWER SOURCE AND DOES

NOT REQUIRE +24 V FROM THE CONTROLLER

Figure 2-27. Current Input Signals to AI2&3 (Transmitters Have Power

Source)

TB1

PIN 4 +24 VOLTS

PIN 5 AI1

PIN 6 SIGNAL COMMON

CHASSIS SAFETY

GROUND NO. 6

SCREW

+

-

CABLE FROM TRANSMITTER

PIN 7 AI2

PIN 8 SIGNAL COMMON

+

-

CABLE FROM TRANSMITTER

PIN 9 AI3

NO. 6

SCREW

R3 R4

CHASSIS SAFETY

GROUND

RESISTORS ARE 250 OHM

±

0.1 %

WIRED AS SHOWN EACH TRANSMITTER RECEIVES +24 V FROM THE CONTROLLER

Figure 2-28. Current Input Signals to AI2&3 (Transmitters Receive +24

V dc from Controller)

2-31

53MC5000 Process Control Station

2.8.2 ANALOG OUTPUTS 0 AND 1 (AO0&1)

As shown on TB1 of Figure 2-24 , two current analog output signals (AO0 and AO1) are available for transmission to remote analog indicating, recording, or process controlling devices. Each output is independently selectable as a 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA signal. (Selections for the analog outputs are provided in Section 5, Configuration Parameters.) Proper polarity must be observed when connecting the analog outputs to the remote device. Figure 2-29 contains a graphical illustration of

AO signal conditioning.

2.8.3 CONTACT CLOSURE INPUTS 0 AND 1 (DI0&1)

Two separate contact inputs are provided (DI0 and DI1) as event indicators that are used for system sequencing and control purposes. For example, in Control Strategy 1, DI1 must be closed to enable Remote Setpoint so that it can be selected with the R/L push button. As stated in Section

1, Specifications, the minimum open recognition duration is 0.05 seconds, and the minimum closed recognition duration is also 0.05 seconds for a valid DI signal (open or closed condition) to the controller. Reference Figure 2-24 for the TB1 screw lug assignments of the contact inputs. Figure 2-

29 contains a graphical illustration of DI signal conditioning.

2.8.4 CONTACT CLOSURE OUTPUTS 0 AND 1 (DO0&1)

Two separate contact outputs are provided (DO0 and DO1) as maintained solid state contacts that are either on or off. The output of a DO does not vary proportionally to a process variable change, for example, a DO may be used to turn on a constant speed pump. A DO may also be used by a controller to indicate its status to another controller. As stated in Section 1, Specifications, a DO has a 30 V dc and 50 mA dc maximum voltage and current rating for resistive loads.

Transient suppression is required for reactive loads. An interposing relay, such as the Dual Relay

ITB, must be wired to the DO outputs for applications where the DO tolerances are exceeded. Reference Figure 2-24 for TB1 DO screw lug assignments and for Dual Relay ITB wire connections to

TB1 when used in conjunction with the DO outputs. Additional information for DO applications is provided in Appendix A, Discrete Contact Outputs. Figure 2-29 contains a graphical illustration of

DO signal conditioning.

2.9 SIGNAL CONNECTIONS FOR SINGLE CHANNEL ANALOG

OPTION (AI8)

The Single Channel Analog Option adds Analog Input 8 (AI8) to the controller. AI8 is dedicated to isolated inputs and requires either a Single or a Multiple Channel Analog Input Card with an Isolation Module installed on it. The Input Card is not an ITB, but comes installed on the Expansion Board inside the controller . As shown in Figure 2-30, signal wires are connected to AI8 at

TB3 of the controller. Since TB3 is not on the same side of the controller backpanel as the standard rear terminal board or the cord set connector board, its position and screw lug assignments remain constant for both of these controller configurations.

Both, the Single and Multiple Channel Analog Input Cards have open thermocouple detection and indication that is jumper selectable. The factory setting for jumper W1 (B-C position) causes a hothot (upscale) indication if the thermocouple fails. The alternate setting for jumper W1 (A-B position) causes a cold-cold (downscale) indication if the thermocouple fails. WARNING: If the jumper position of W1 must be changed, then all of the safety precautions stated in Section

18, Maintenance and Parts List, must be adhered to, as this requires opening the controller case to gain access to the Input Card. (See Figures 18-13 and 18-14 for the location of W1 on the option card.)

2-32

Section 2. Installation

AI AO

DI DO

Note: The above illustrations are graphical representations of the signal conditioning that occurs on the controller main board. They are provided for reference purposes only.

Figure 2-29. AI, AO, DI, and DO Graphical Illustrations

2-33

Figure 2-30. Input Signals to AI8 at TB3

Section 2. Installation

2.10 SIGNAL CONNECTIONS FOR THE ITBS

In noisy locations, two-wire shielded signal cable should be used and the routing of signal cable bundles close to power wires should be avoided.

Each wire lead should be stripped to expose 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) conductor. All wiring to the ITB terminal board screw lugs is supplied by the customer.

2.10.1 SCADA ADAPTER SIGNAL CONNECTIONS

The SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) Adapter is an interface adapter for interconnecting the controller’s RS-485 communications link to RS-232 devices, such as a phone modem, radio modem, or computer RS-232 communications port. Figure 2-31 illustrates SCADA

Adapter connections and provides the summary tables to set mode switches 1-8 for correct Request-to-Send/Clear-to-Send delays, parity, and baud rate. As shown in Figure 2-31, the SCADA

Adapter is cabled from adapter J4 to the controller backpanel at Datalink output jack J11 for the cord set connector board. For the standard rear terminal board, the SCADA Adapter is cabled to

J1 of a Comm ITB. Screw lugs 1-4 of TB1 on the Comm ITB are wired to the controller rear terminal board TB1, screw lugs 19-22 (TB1-5 [shield] of the Comm ITB is connected to a controller backpanel #6 screw). See Figure 2-8 for SCADA Adapter to standard rear terminal board cabling and see Figure 2-32 for Comm ITB to controller wire connections.

2.10.2 ANALOG ITB SIGNAL CONNECTIONS

As shown in Figure 2-33, the Analog ITB adds the capability for optional analog input connections

4 through 7 (AI4-7) and analog output connections 2 and 3 (AO2&3) to the controller. AI4-7 can be used for current, pulse (AI5-7), or frequency inputs. (See the Multichannel Analog I/O Option in

Section 1, Specifications.) If used as a frequency input, the appropriate AI 250 ohm resistor must be replaced with a resistor calculated to produce 4 V peak-to-peak minimum signal at the AI - and

+ terminals. Also, if the frequency input waveform deviates more than

±

2% from a 50% duty cycle, then additional signal amplitude is required as follows:

Required Amplitude =

|

2/5 (%

Duty Cycle

- 50)

|

+4

A waveform with a 50% duty cycle requires 4 V peak-to-peak.

A waveform with a 10% duty cycle requires 20 V peak-to-peak.

A waveform with a 90% duty cycle requires 20 V peak-to-peak.

The Analog ITB is cabled from ITB J4 to the controller options connector board J4 as shown in Figures 2-8 and 2-9. A controller can have an Analog ITB or a HART ITB, but not both (see Section 1.3, Model Number Breakdown, Analog I/O Option).

2.10.3 CORD SET ITB SIGNAL CONNECTIONS

The Cord Set ITB is a remote version of the standard rear terminal board with some exceptions: it has voltage dropping resistors R3 and R4 for AI2 and AI3, and it has screw lugs on TB1 for the cable shields rather than #6 screws that are used on the controller backpanel. The Cord Set ITB eliminates the necessity to rewire the rear terminal board every time the controller chassis is removed and re-installed in the instrument panel. It also puts the standard complement of controller field wired inputs and outputs in closer proximity to the other ITBs. Signal connections for the Cord

Set ITB are illustrated in Figure 2-34. The Cord Set ITB is cabled from ITB J3 to controller cord set connector board J3 as shown in Figure 2-9.

2-35

53MC5000 Process Control Station

2.10.4 DUAL RELAY ITB SIGNAL CONNECTIONS

The Dual Relay ITB provides two interposing relays for use with the controller Contact Closure Outputs (DOs). Each relay can be wired directly to a controller standard rear terminal board (see Figure 2-24), to a Cord Set ITB (see Figure 2-34), or to a 6DI/4DO ITB (see Figure 2-35). The Dual

Relay ITB enhances DO performance by extending the switching tolerances to accommodate larger loads. Reference Section 1, Specifications, for the contact ratings of the Dual Relay ITB.

2.10.5 6 DIGITAL INPUT/4 DIGITAL OUTPUT (6DI/4DO) ITB

As shown in Figure 2-35, the 6DI/4DO ITB adds the capability for additional Contact Closure Inputs

2 through 7 (DI2-7) and Contact Closure Outputs 2 through 5 (DO2-5). The four DO outputs can be wired directly to remote devices or connected to a maximum of two Dual Relay ITBs. Reference Section 1, Specifications, for the contact ratings of the 6DI/4DO ITB and the Dual Relay ITB.

A controller can have either a 6DI/4DO ITB or a 16DI/DO ITB, but not both. The 6DI/4DO ITB is cabled from ITB J5 to controller options connector board J5 as shown in Figures 2-8 and 2-9.

It should be noted that the controller model number must indicate this board is installed in the unit; otherwise, it will not be identified as active hardware. The model number is configured in the controller at the factory and it resides in two datapoint locations, A190 and A191. The correct controller model numbers with a 6DI/4DO option installed are as follows: 53MC5000A2

♦♦♦

A etc.,

53MC5000A2

♦♦♦

B etc., and 53MC5000A2

♦♦♦

C etc., where

= other alphanumerics that describe the controller backpanel, chassis, and safety classification. (Section 3.12.2 describes how to display a datapoint and Section 5, Table 5-15, System Module provides definitions for datapoints

A190 and A191. See also Section 1.3, Model Number Breakdown.)

2.10.6 16 DIGITAL INPUT/DIGITAL OUTPUT (16DI/DO) ITB

As shown in Figure 2-36, the 16DI/DO ITB has 16 sockets (M1 through M16) for optically isolated solid state relays that provide the capability for optional DI connections 2 through 17 (DI2-17) or

DO connections 2 through 17 (DO2-17) or a mix of DI and DO connections 2 through 17 whereby co-identity of a module socket number by a DI and a DO is prohibited. (If M1 is installed as DI2, then DO2 can not exist; instead, an output module is installed in M2 and it is called DO3.) The modules are 5 V and 24 V and may not be intermixed. A 16DI/DO ITB is dedicated to all 5 V or 24 V modules. The solid state modules are of four types: AC input, AC output, DC input, and DC output. Reference Section 1, Specifications, for module details. A controller can have a 16DI/DO ITB or a 6DI/4DO ITB, but not both. The 16DI/DO ITB is cabled from ITB

J5 to controller options connector board J5 as shown in Figures 2-8 and 2-9.

2-36

Figure 2-31. SCADA Adapter Connections

Figure 2-32. Comm ITB Datalink Connections

Figure 2-33. Analog ITB Connections

Figure 2-34. Cord Set ITB Connections

Figure 2-35. 6DI/4DO ITB Connections

Figure 2-36. 16DI/DO ITB Connections

Section 2. Installation

2.11 DATALINK CONNECTIONS TO THE CONTROLLER

Figure 2-32 illustrates a Datalink network daisy-chain installation for controllers with the standard rear terminal board. Four of the cable leads are connected to TB1 screw lugs 19 through 22, and the shield is connected to a #6 backpanel screw. The installation is terminated with a Comm ITB.

Terminal board wire connections for the controller and Comm ITB are defined in Table 1 of the illustration.

Figure 2-37 illustrates a Datalink network daisy-chain installation for controllers with the cord set connector board. The first Comm ITB in the illustration provides cable conversion from the standard shielded four lead cable to the modular cable. When a Comm ITB is used for cable conversion, the two load resistors R1 and R2 are removed from the board. The modular cables are then daisy-chained from J11 (OUT) of one controller to J10 (IN) of the next controller. The network is terminated with a Comm ITB, which has the two load resistors R1 and R2.

2.12 MICROLINK CONNECTIONS TO THE CONTROLLER

Installation information for the MicroLink network and MicroLink-Datalink gateway is provided in Instruction Bulletin 53MC9011, Revision 2, MicroLink.

2-43

Figure 2-37. Datalink Installation to Controllers with Cord Set Option

Section 3. Product Description

3.0 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

As shown in Figure 3-1, the 53MC5000 Process Control Station contains a graphical dot matrix display; horizontal and vertical keypads; a mini-DIN configuration port connector concealed behind the faceplate pull-down door; and a compact instrument case that protects the instrument Main Board and internal power supply. The Main Board with attached power supply is shown in the upper left of the illustration. Three plugs on the power supply mate with connectors on the Main Board and the power supply is secured in place with three retaining screws through standoff posts. The instrument case also protects the Expansion Board (shown in the upper right of the illustration) which provides the capability to configure the controller option cards.

3.1 DOT MATRIX DISPLAY

The gas discharge dot matrix display is available in one of two resolutions, 96 x 48 low resolution or

192 x 96 high resolution. A high contrast orange-on-black format was selected to enhance visibility and readability. The intensity is a range selectable entry from 0 to 7, with 0 being the brightest setting

(see the System Module Table 5-15). The controller is factory set for a mid-range setting of 4.

3.2 CONFIGURATION PORT CONNECTOR

An RS-232 mini-DIN configuration port connector is concealed behind the faceplate pull-down door.

(See Figure 3-1.) The door is hinged at the bottom and drops open by sliding a thumb or finger down on its surface. To close the door, lift it up from the hinged edge and then push the surface of the door until the detent snaps into position. The port is a convenient connection to alter the controller database via a Hand Held Configurer (HHC) or a personal computer (PC) COM port. The personal computer must have loaded and running one of the software application packages listed in the following table. Instructions to use the HHC are provided at the end of this section.

ABB Hand Held Configurer

(Procedure in Section 3.13.1)

P/N 6988182U01 or

P/N 6988182U02 with storage cartridge capabilities.

ABB Automation Products on a Personal Computer

Software/Hardware Package Reference

IB 53HC3300 5 3 H C 3 3 0 0 s o f t w a r e p a c k a g e u s i n g

MC5FIG.EXE configuration program.

53MT6000 software package using the configuration program.

53PW6000 MicroPWC software package

Datalink SUPERVISOR-PC hardware and software package.

IB 53MT6000

IB 53PW6000

IB 53SU5000

3.3 REAR TERMINAL BOARDS

The rear terminal boards provide the means for power, signal, and RS-485 network data communications (Datalink) connections to the controller. Not all signal connections are always wired directly to the controller, as Interconnecting Terminal Boards (ITBs) may be required, dependent upon the options ordered. When ITBs are used, they are cable connected to the controller at the rear terminal boards. There are two side-by-side locations for rear terminal boards on the back of the controller.

From the back of the controller, the left rear terminal board location can have a blank board or the

Options Connector Board. The right board can be a Standard Rear Terminal Board or the Cord Set

Connector Board. The rear terminal boards configured in the controller are dependent upon the options that are ordered.

3-1

53MC5000 Process Control Station

FRONT

MAIN

BOARD

POWER

SUPPLY

BACK

EXPANSION

BOARD

SLOTS

5 4 3 2 1

FRONT

RESET HOLE

(DEFAULTS

DATABASE)

DISPLAY

(96 X 48

GAS

DISCHARGE

DOT MATRIX)

CASE

ù

REAR TERMINAL BOARDS

FACE-

PLATE

R

/

L

PULL-DOWN

DOOR

VERTICAL KEYPAD

(6 PUSH BUTTONS)

HORIZONTAL KEYPAD

(4 PUSH BUTTONS)

F1 F2 F3

MINI-DIN CONFIGURATION CONNECTOR

CONCEALED BEHIND PULL-DOWN DOOR

A/

M

Figure 3-1. Process Control Station Illustrated Overview

3-2

Section 3. Product Description

3.4 CONTROLLER POWER SUPPLY

The internal power supply provides power to the Main Board, Expansion Board with its installed option cards, display, and output power for transmitters (24-26 V dc, 80 mA total available output for controller and transmitters).

3.5 MAIN PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

The Main Board contains the necessary circuitry, firmware, and memory for 53MC5000 Process

Control Station functionality.

A microprocessor provides the intelligence to perform the various processing and calculation algorithms. For improved reliability, surface-mount technology is used in the design. The microprocessor controls the display, keypads, configuration port communications, Datalink communications, analog input/output signals, digital input/output signals, and options interface. The main printed circuit board contains circuitry to protect against various fault conditions on the base I/O. It also contains the base product analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog signal conversions, as well as timers.

3.6 EXPANSION BOARD

The Expansion Board has five slots that allow a variety of optional hardware cards to be added internally to the controller to extend its basic input/output (I/O) capabilities. The option cards contain the operating instructions specific to that option and each option card can access main memory directly. All signal synchronization between options cards is provided by the Main Board Processor-

I/O. Five typical option cards that can be configured in an expansion ready controller are the 6 Digital

Input/4 Digital Output (6DI/4DO) PCB Option, 16 Digital Input/Digital Output (16DI/DO) PCB Option,

Single Channel Analog Input PCB Option, Multi I/O Analog PCB Option, and High Speed Communications PCB Option. Some of these options are mutually exclusive, as they can not cohabit the same

Expansion Board slot. These options cards are illustrated and described in detail in Section 18,

Maintenance and Parts List. Additional option cards, such as the Auxiliary Processor Board (APB), which is not listed here, may also be added to the controller. The additional option cards are described in the documentation that is shipped with the option.

3.7 SAMPLING TIME INTERVALS

Analog and digital input signals are sampled 20 times a second (every 50 ms). These signals are converted if needed and digitally processed to provide the required filtering. At configurable SCAN

INDEX intervals between 1 (50 ms) and 30 (1500 ms or 1.5 seconds), the signals are further processed to convert them into engineering units and calculations are performed to obtain the needed results. After the calculations are completed the results are converted and used to update the analog and digital outputs with new values.

There are eight trend and eight totalizing operations that occur within a one second time frame. One trend or totalizer is updated every 50 ms. Trends are processed first, then totalizers, in ascending order. Although the 16 operations at 50 ms each do not fill one complete second (200 ms less than a second), each trend and totalizer is updated once every second.

The data update rate for the display is configurable as the BACKGROUND SCAN INDEX. The

BACKGROUND SCAN INDEX is a function of the SCAN INDEX. The [(BACKGROUND SCAN

INDEX) X (SCAN INDEX) X (50 ms)] = DISPLAY DATA UPDATE TIME INTERVAL.

3-3

53MC5000 Process Control Station

If the BACKGROUND SCAN INDEX is left at one, the display will be updated with each control algorithm execution because it will be determined solely by the SCAN INDEX. A number greater than one configured into the BACKGROUND SCAN INDEX causes that many control algorithm updates to occur before the display is updated with new data.

There is a standard display algorithm for each display of the 53MC5000 Process Control Station.

(The controller displays are covered in detail in Section 4.) If the controller has extended functionality (model number 53MC5

♦♦

2 etc., where

is a selectable item), F-TRAN can be used to create personalized display algorithms to supplement the standard display complement. The display is generated when the microprocessor interprets the active display algorithm to produce a pattern in memory which corresponds to the elements in the display. This pattern is then transferred into a special memory which can be accessed by two processors. Here a second processor uses the contents of the memory to light individual elements in the display. The dynamics of the display require that each element be on only a fraction of a second. Therefore, to give the appearance of being continuously lit, the second processor refreshes the screen by turning the individual elements on and off 80 times a second.

The horizontal and vertical keypads are scanned 20 times a second (every 50 ms). When a key is detected as being pressed, that information is temporarily stored for synchronization with the control algorithms and display processing. If a slewing key is pressed (setpoint up arrow, etc.), the appropriate database location is manipulated. For controllers with multiple loops, e.g., 2 loop or 4 loop controllers, a pointer appears on the display to identify which algorithm is affected by the keypad push buttons. The pointer directs the keypad inputs to the individual control algorithm databases.

The pointer is shifted from one loop to another with a push button on the vertical keypad.

A summary of the sampling time intervals is provided in Table 3-1 as follows:

Table 3-1. Sampling Time Intervals

Time Interval

50 ms

50 ms - 1500 ms

1 s

80 times/s

50 ms

Event

Analog and digital input signal sampling.

Input signals are digitally processed through user selected algorithms (50 ms =

1/20 s = SCAN INDEX set to 1. 1500 ms = 1 1/2 seconds = SCAN INDEX set to 30).

Time between successive trend and totalizer updates. Each trend and each totalizer is updated sequentially in ascending order every 50 ms. Trends are updated first, then totalizers.

Display elements are turned on and off to refresh the screen.

Keypads are scanned.

3.8 DATALINK

The Datalink port is at the rear of the unit on either the Standard Rear Terminal Board (pins 19 through 22) or the optional Cord Set Connector Board (J10 and J11). It provides the standard

RS-485 MICRO-DCI multidrop network connection. A personal computer with the appropriate software application package loaded and running (see the table of software application packages in

Section 3.2) can function as the network server and therefore be a central operating station for the network. The maximum data transfer rate for a Datalink network is 28,800 baud.

3-4

Section 3. Product Description

3.9 FUNCTION INDEXES (FIXs)

The controller’s functionality is determined by the Function Index (FIX), which is used to select a broad range of control strategies and operations. A FIX is selected by entering its number into the database System Module Function Index datapoint B000. (The database description and data entry procedures follow in this section of the book.) The FIXs are described as follows:

FIX 0 Suspend State - The company logo appears on the display when a 0 is entered into datapoint B000. The control program stops; however, inputs continue to be measured.

The totalizers and trends continue to update.

FIX 1 Flexible Control Strategy - The FIX 1 control algorithm has a set of function modules that always execute in a fixed sequence; however, inter-module signal connections are flexible and can be selected to produce various Control Strategies. The resident

Control Strategies provided with the controller are signal connections that are mapped into the database. Ten available control strategies are provided with the four loop controller

(five are provided with a single loop controller and eight are provided with a two loop controller). The ten Control Strategies are listed here and described in Sections 6 through

15.

CS Application

CS1 Single Loop PID Controller

CS2 Analog Backup Controller

CS3 Ratio Controller

CS4 Automatic/Manual Station

CS5 Ratio Automatic/Manual Station

CS20 Two Loop Controller

CS21 Two Loop Cascade Controller

CS22 Two Loop Override Controller

CS40 Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller

CS41 Four Loop Controller

1 Loop 2 Loops 4 Loops

*

• •

*

*

*Ready to use as described in Sections 6 (CS1), 11 (CS20), and 15 (CS41).

To create a Control Strategy, signals are sourced from and connected to modules with datapoint entries in the database. Because the signals are routed using datapoint entries instead of physically altering wire connections, the process is called

soft-wiring

and each

Control Strategy appears as a

wirelist

in the database memory. A wirelist is specified to be executed by entering the Control Strategy number into the System Module Link List Load datapoint B016 (e.g. 1 for CS1, 20 for CS20, 41 for CS41, etc.). When a wirelist is created to produce a Control Strategy that meets unique process application needs, it is called a

Flexible Control Strategy (FSC). To do this requires understanding the information presented in Instruction Bulletin 53MC5000 Flexible Control Strategies. The FCS procedure can also be applied to alter an existing Control Strategy even if only minor enhancements are needed.

FIX 97 Display Test - Entering a 97 into datapoint B000 causes a series of test patterns to appear on the display. One pattern lights the dots around the outer edge of the display. A second pattern lights the even numbered dots and a third pattern lights the odd numbered dots. The control program stops but the database is not disturbed.

3-5

53MC5000 Process Control Station

FIX 98 Default Database - The database of the controller can be set to a predetermined condition by entering a 98 into datapoint B000. This causes the entire database except for the analog I/O calibration constants, the FCS wirelist, and some text strings to be set to the default values. It should be noted that any pre-loaded database configuration will also be overwritten with the default values by FIX 98.

See the tables in Section 5 for the default values of each datapoint. After this operation, the controller returns to FIX 0

Suspend State.

FIX 99 F-CIM Modules - Requires a controller that has extended functionality. If a control strategy is needed that can not be accomplished with FCS, then the F-CIM modules might provide the solution. F-CIM provides soft-wiring capabilities just like FCS, but has additional modules and the module sequencing can be altered. Each module is a step and an entire

F-CIM sequence can be 100 steps. There is a large library of modules and most of them can be used many times. Creating a module sequence requires an understanding of the

F-CIM information presented in 53MC5000 Customization Guide.

FIXs 2-89 and 101-255 F-TRAN - Requires a controller that has extended functionality.

The F-TRAN programming language provides the ultimate 53MC5000 controller flexibility to customize Control Strategies and displays. It can also be used to create custom modules. Creating F-TRAN programs requires an understanding of the F-TRAN information presented in 53MC5000 Customization Guide and a personal computer to load the programs into the controller. The personal computer must have loaded and running one of the application packages listed in Section 3.2.

FIXs 90-96 - Reserved.

FIX 100 - Must be implemented in custom EPROM (see Instruction Bulletin 53HC3300D,

Custom Program Interface, for information to create files to generate custom EPROMS for

MICRO-DCI products).

3.10 DATABASE

Basic operation, signal conditioning, and algorithm execution are controlled by the contents of the database memory, which can be configured by the user. For convenience, the database memory is mapped as individual datapoint locations rather than raw memory addresses. There are six datapoint types: L, B, C, H, A, and F. Each datapoint type has a different data format, e.g., L type datapoints are single bit (0 or 1) logical switches, H type datapoints are high precision floating point numbers, A type datapoints are text strings, etc. The datapoint types are defined in Section 5.2. As a further aid to database configuration, datapoints dedicated to specific functions, e.g., analog inputs, etc., are clustered into groups or modules. These modules are not the same as those defined for

FCS and F-CIM wirelist generation, but identify broader functional areas of the controller. All of the datapoints are defined by module in Section 5 and listed by type in Appendix D. The information stored in the database memory is protected by a lithium battery and power loss detection circuitry.

This permits power to be removed and restored to the unit without degrading the memory contents.

3-6

Section 3. Product Description

3.11 KEYPADS

To the right of the display is the vertical keypad and directly beneath the display is the horizontal keypad . Both keypads have functioning push buttons that are dependent on the instrument mode of operation which can be either operator/control mode or engineer mode . Mode selection is made with the Mode ( ● ) push button on the horizontal keypad. Engineer mode is entered to make the necessary datapoint entries for controller operation; otherwise, the instrument is left in operator/control mode for process applications. The operator/control mode functions for the keypad push buttons vary with the displays; therefore, they are described in Section 4, Operator Displays. Both keypads for engineering mode operation are described as follows:

Horizontal Keypad:

( F1 ) ( F2 ) ( F3 )

Push Button Title Operator Mode

F1

F2

F3

● Mode

Engineer Mode

See Section 4.0

O p e r a t o r

Displays

Back to previous entry line function (Quit).

Pages the configure/display/program functions (see engineer mode command hierarchy in Figure 3-2).

In Module Mode - Selects next PAGE (when in

Parameter List only)

Executes an Enter or select function.

O p e r a t o r / E n g i n e e r m o d e s e l e c t . A l s o c a l l e d A C K / S E L f o r

ACKnowledge/SELect.

Vertical Keypad:

Button Title

Ascending

Character

Select

Descending

Character

Select

Shift Left

Function

Configure Datapoint Mode

[Sec. 3.12.4]

D i s p l a y s o n e c h a r a c t e r a t a t i m e i n ascending alphanumeric order; it is released when the desired character, number, or symbol appears on the engineer mode data entry line.

D i s p l a y s o n e c h a r a c t e r a t a t i m e i n d e s c e n d i n g a l p h a n u m e r i c o r d e r ; i t i s r e l e a s e d w h e n t h e d e s i r e d c h a r a c t e r , number, or symbol appears on the engineer mode data entry line.

Configure Module Mode

[Sec. 3.12.5]

Scroll up

Scroll down

Shifts the selected character one position left on the engineer mode data entry line each time it is pressed.

Scroll left/Previous module

(Parameter list only)

Shift Right

Shifts the characters on the engineer mode data entry line one character position right each time it is pressed.

Scroll right/Previous module

(Parameter list only)

3-7

Display

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Engineer Mode

Configure

Key? **

[Sec 3.12.1]

Program *

Key? **

[Sec 3.12.1]

Datapoint Module Datapoint Module View Build Erase

Display

Datapoint

Operations

[Sec. 3.12.2]

Module

Display

Mode

[Sec. 3.12.3]

Configure

Datapoint

Operations

[Sec. 3.12.4]

Module

Configure

Mode

[Sec. 3.12.5]

*See 53MC5000 Customization Guide

** If configured

Blocks shown shaded only appear when using the Hi-Resolution display

Figure 3-2. Engineer Mode Command Overview

3-8

Section 3. Product Description

3.12 ENGINEER MODE OVERLAYS

The Engineer Mode Overlays are used to view (Display) or make necessary changes (Configure) to the controller database parameters. Standard viewing/change entries are made by addressing single parameters by their datapoint specification on a single line overlay at the bottom of the display.

On units with HiRes displays (53MC5xxxB4xxxxxxxxx) either the datapoint method or the module method may be used to perform viewing/change operations. The following sample screens show the high-resolution display except where noted. The module method uses a full screen overlay to navigate through a series of menus to select the parameter(s) of interest by their module/atom reference. If Engineer Mode is accessed and its functions (e.g., configure or display) are not used, it

"times-out" in 20 seconds and the overlay disappears from the bottom of the display. The Engineer

Mode may be locked-out with the Hand Held Configurer using the procedure described in Section

3.14.

3.12.1 PASSWORD FUNCTION PROMPT

When the password prompt KEY?

appears, it indicates a password was set with an external device

(e.g. Hand Held Configurer, personal computer, etc.). The password can not be set via the front panel push buttons. A password key is a maximum of 10 numeric characters (numbers 0-9 only). It does not impede display functions in engineering mode but must be unlocked to perform configuration functions. A password key is NOT SET FOR NEW INSTRUMENTS from the factory; therefore, if it is set, it must have been done locally. The password must first be obtained from the originator before the procedures below can be used to access the engineering mode configuration function capabilities.

3.12.1.1 Procedure to Enter a Key Password

The following screens illustrate the CONFIGURE prompt, the KEY?

prompt, the key 222222 entered on the edit line, and the POINT input query that appears after key access is granted.

Press the Mode button to enter the ENGINEER mode indicated by the appearance of either CONFIG-

URE, DISPLAY or PROGRAM at the bottom of the display.

If CONFIGURE does not appear, press F2 until CON-

FIGURE appears

When CONFIGURE is displayed, press F3.

3-9

53MC5000 Process Control Station

The screen should now appear as shown on the right.

If the required key-code is "222222", follow the following procedure.

Press the key until the digit "2" appears on the entry line.

Press the key to shift the first entry one position to the left.

Press the key until the next "2" appears on the entry line.

Press the key to shift this entry one position to the left.

Repeat this procedure until all of the key-code characters have been entered on the entry line.

The display should now look as shown on the right.

When all of the characters have been entered, press

F3.

3-10

Pressing the F3 key enters the password key and enables display and entry of either the MODULE o r

DATAPOINT modes which will be discussed later.

The engineer mode configuration function is now ready for use.

The screen should now appear as shown in one of the following screens (the rightmost screen represents the low-resolution display).

Section 3. Product Description

3.12.2 DISPLAYING A DATAPOINT

The following procedure illustrates how to display the contents of datapoint B012, which is the display brightness index.Note that B12 is shown being entered instead of B012 , since leading zeros are not required when specifying datapoints.

3.12.2.1 Procedure to Display a Datapoint

Press the Mode button to enter the ENGINEER mode indicated by the appearance of either CONFIG-

URE, DISPLAY or PROGRAM at the bottom of the display.

If DISPLAY does not appear, press F2 until DISPLAY appears

When DISPLAY appears at the bottom, press F3.

Press F2 until DATAPOINT appears at the bottom of the display.

The bottom of the screen should appear as shown on the right.

Press F3 to enter DATAPOINT mode.

3-11

53MC5000 Process Control Station

The display shows the POINT entry line at the bottom of the display, as shown on the right.

Press the key until the character "B" appears on the entry line.

Press the key to shift the first entry one position to the left.

Press the key until "1" appears on the entry line.

Press the key to shift this entry one position to the left.

Press the key until "2" appears on the entry line.

The entry-line should now appear as shown on the right.

Press F3 to accept the entry.

3-12

The contents of DATAPOINT B012 are displayed at the bottom of the display as shown on the right.

Press the Mode button to return the instrument to operator mode.

Section 3. Product Description

3.12.3 DISPLAYING A MODULE

Refer to Section 3.11 for Keypad function in Module Mode

The navigational sequence would be the following

(Refer to Table 3-5):

Select Module Type (then Module, if there’s more than one Module)

Select Page (Skipped when there’s only a single page)

Select Parameter

3.12.3.1 Procedure to Display a Module

Press the Mode button to enter the ENGINEER mode indicated by the appearance of either CONFIG-

URE, DISPLAY or PROGRAM at the bottom of the display.

If DISPLAY does not appear, press F2 until DISPLAY appears

When DISPLAY is shown at the bottom, press F3.

Press F2 until MODULE appears at the bottom of the display.

Press F3 to enter MODULE mode.

Press the button, if required, until the pointer aligns with SYSTEM.

The screen should now appear as shown at the top right.

Press F3 to enter the SYSTEM module.

The list of SYSTEM module pages now appear.

Press the button to scroll to the DISPLAY page.

The display should now appear as shown in the right center screen.

Press F3 and the DISPLAY page parameters are shown as the screen to the right shows.

The parameter BRGT, associated with Datapoint B012 storage location (refer to Section 3.12.2) is displayed as the second entry in the list of parameters as shown in screen to the right.

Press the Mode button to return the instrument to operator mode.

3-13

53MC5000 Process Control Station

3.12.4 CONFIGURE A DATAPOINT

The following procedure illustrates how to alter the contents of datapoint C115 (CONTROL module &

Span parameter) from 100 to 200.

3.12.4.1 Procedure to Configure a Datapoint

Press the Mode button to enter the ENGINEER mode indicated by the appearance of either CONFIG-

URE, DISPLAY or PROGRAM at the bottom of the display.

If CONFIGURE does not appear, press F2 until CON-

FIGURE appears at the bottom of the display.

When CONFIGURE is displayed at the bottom, press

F3.

If using the Hi-Res display, as shown, press F2 until

DATAPOINT appears at the bottom of the display.

Then press F3 to enter DATAPOINT mode.

The screen should now show the point-entry line similar to the one at the right.

3-14

Press the key until the character "C" appears on the entry line.

Press the key to shift the first entry one position to the left.

Press the key until "1" appears on the entry line.

Press the key to shift this entry one position to the left.

Press the key until "1" appears on the entry line.

Press the key to shift this entry one position to the left.

Press the key until "5" appears on the entry line.

The entry line should appear similar to that shown on the right.

Press F3.

Section 3. Product Description

The existing contents of DATAPOINT C115 are displayed (shown as 100.000 in this example).

To change the value of C115, first shift the C115 contents all the way right by pressing and holding the button.

Replace the "1" with a "2" by pressing the button until a "2" appears on the entry line, as shown in the screen to the right.

Enter the two additional zeros by using the and buttons as discussed previously.

The screen should now look as shown on the right.

Replace the current C115 value with the new one by pressing the F3 button.

If you don’t want to make the change, the edit may be aborted by pressing the F1 button.

After pressing F3, the display changes back to the

DATAPOINT display as shown to the right.

Notice the change in bar-graph scale to 200.0.

Press the Mode button to return the instrument to operator mode.

3-15

53MC5000 Process Control Station

3.12.5 CONFIGURE A MODULE

Refer to Section 3.11 for Keypad function in Module Mode

The navigational sequence would be the following (Refer to Table 3-5):

Select Module Type (then Module, if there’s more than one Module)

Select Page (Skipped when there’s only a single page)

Select Parameter

3.12.5.1 Module-Mode ConfigurationProcedure

Press the Mode button to enter ENGINEER mode indicated by the appearance of either CONFIGURE,

DISPLAY or PROGRAM at the bottom of the display..

If CONFIGURE does not appear, press F2 until CON-

FIGURE appears at the bottom of the display.

When CONFIGURE is displayed, press F3 to enter the

CONFIGURE mode.

For a Hi-Res display, as shown, press F2 until MOD-

ULE appears at the bottom of the display.

When MODULE is displayed, press F3 to enter the

MODULE mode.

The screen should now appear as shown on the right.

Select the desired MODULE type to be configured by using the keys to navigate to the desired module type.

In this example, the button was used to navigate to the CONTROL module type as shown to the right.

Press F3 to select this Module type.

3-16

Section 3. Product Description

If more than one module of the type selected is available, a list of modules appears showing module number and TAGNAME

Use the buttons to scroll to the desired module, in this example the CONTROL-0 module is selected.

The screen should now be similar to the one to the right.

Press F3 to select the desired module.

If more than one screen of parameters is available, the parameters are grouped into separate sections (called

PAGES) which are listed as shown in the screen to the right.

Use the button to scroll to the desired PAGE.

In this example, the TUNE page is selected, as shown on the right.

Press F3 to select the desired page.

This should show a list of parameters that the selected

PAGE consists of, similar to the one to the right.

Use the keys to navigate to the desired parameter

Press F3 to select the desired parameter to be configured.

Depending on the type of data associated with the parameter, one of three methods may be used to configure the data as shown on the next page:

3-17

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Numeric and Datapoint Data

The current value and an editable value are displayed, as shown in the screen to the right.

Use the buttons to select the desired character position on the edit line

Use the buttons to change the character value on the edit line.

Once the new value has been entered, press F3 to accept the new value on the edit line and change the parameter’s value or press F1 to abort the changes and retain the current value.

Listed-Choices Data

A list of choices for the value is displayed with the current value indicated, as shown to the right.

Use the buttons to scroll to the desired selection.

If the length of the list exceeds what can fit on the screen, up (

) and down (

) arrows are displayed indicating the direction to scroll in to view the additional selections. An axample is shown in the screen to the right.

Press F3 to accept the new value or press F1 to abort the changes and retain the current value.

Word Data

The screen shows the current value, an editable value and a table of alphanumeric characters from which to select as shown in the example on the right.

The underline indicates the character to be changed.

Use the buttons to select the desired values from the alphanumeric table.

Press the F2 button to shift the underline one position to the right. The underline "wraps around" to the leftmost character if scrolling past the right-most position.

Press F3 to accept the new value on the edit line and change the parameter’s value or press F1 to abort the changes and retain the current value.

3-18

Section 3. Product Description

When the Module Mode configuration is complete, the controller may be returned to the operator mode either by pressing the F1 key to step backwards through the menus or by pressing the MODE key .

The following chart is a representation of the Module-Mode menu structure:

3-19

CONFIGURE-MODULE MODE MENU ORGANIZATION

SYSTEM

EXECUTE

COUNTER

COMM.

DISPLAY

CALIB.

EZ-TUNE

TAG

FIX

FXM

SCAN

BACK

BSCAN

PWRUP

LLD

SEC

MIN

HOURS

DAY

MONTH

YEAR

CMODE

IA

BR

CP

CB

DLD

DSPL

BRGT

NALIN

ALINE

MDG

MDS

CIS 0

CIZ 0

CIS 1

CIZ 1

CIS 2

CIZ 2

CIS 3

CIZ 3

COS 0

COZ 0

COS 1

COZ 1

LPS

CM

TLIM

DPV

DOUT

DPPV

PLIM

APLD

ANALOG IN

0 to 8

SPAN

ZERO

DFILT

BASE

SQRT

FREQ *

TAG

EU

ANALOG OUT

0 to 3

BASE

TAG

DISCRETE IN

0 to 11

INV

TAG

DISCRETE OUT

0 to 11

INV

TAG

EXTERNAL

0 to 11

RPT

LPT

SCAN

MODE

* Only appears in Module numbers 4 through 7

CONTROL

0 to 3

GENERAL TAG

IR

IRL

CTR

CTM

CDM

EU

SETPOINT

SP

RSP

STV

SH

SL

SSR

B1

K1

SPM

ALARM

PL1

PL2

ADB

AIX

AK

TUNE

PB

TR

TD

MR

FF

CZ

RS

OUTPUT

OUT

OH

OL

OSR

OTV

RSV

HML

MFD

SWITCHES

AE

RE

STE

OTE

SWA

SWR

SWSPT

SWOVT

STATUS

0 & 1

NAME

STA

STB

STC

STD

STE

STF

STG

STH

TAG

MODE

SMA

SMB

SMC

SMD

SME

SMF

SMG

SMH

PARAMETER

0 to 7

TAG

PNA

PDA

PNB

PDB

PNC

PDC

PMD

ALARM

SAA

SAB

SAC

SAD

SAE

SAF

SAG

SAH

MODIFY

SDA

SDB

SDC

SDD

SDE

SDF

SDG

SDH

TREND

0 to 7

TAG

TRS

TRZ

TRR

TRM

TRH

TRP

EU

TOTALIZER

0 to 7

TAG

TMM

TMD

TMF

TMPT

TMR

EU

Section 3. Product Description

3.13 KEYPAD ALTERNATIVES

There are six alternative methods other than the faceplate push buttons for accessing and changing database parameters. All six methods to display and/or alter database parameters are listed as follows:

1.

Using a personal computer running the MC5FIG.EXE configuration program that is supplied as part of the 53HC3300 software package. This procedure is included in the Instruction Bulletin (IB 53HC3300) with the software.

2.

Using a personal computer running the configuration program that is supplied as part of the 53MT6000 software package. This procedure is included in the Instruction Bulletin

(IB 53MT6000) with the software.

3.

Using an ABB SUPERVISOR-PC with configuration software. This procedure is provided in the SUPERVISOR-PC Instruction Bulletin (IB 53SU5000).

4.

Using the ABB Hand Held Configurer connected to the configuration port mini-DIN plug on the front panel of the instrument.

5.

Using an ASCII RS-232 terminal or a PC terminal emulator application connected to the configuration port mini-DIN plug on the front panel of the instrument (Refer to Section

3.13.2).

6.

Using the remote keypad. (See Appendix C, Remote Keypad.)

Figure 3-6 illustrates the Hand Held Configurer and personal computer mini-DIN plug cables necessary to configure an instrument using alternative methods 1 through 5 described above. The personal computer cable type (9 pin or 25 pin) is dependent upon the communications port connector.

3.13.1 USING THE HAND HELD CONFIGURER

The Hand Held Configurer (HHC) is a portable terminal designed to interface with the instrument through the configuration port that is located behind the pull-down door on the faceplate of the instrument (see Figure 3-1).

The HHC is available in two versions:

1.

A Standard HHC with capabilities to display or alter specifically addressed datapoints in the controller database. The part number to order this HHC is 698B182U01.

2.

An HHC with memory function capabilities to save the entire database of a controller onto a removable memory module assembly or load a controller database from an HHC memory module assembly. The part number to order this HHC is 698B182U02.

3-21

Figure 3-6. Front Panel Configuration Port Connections

Section 3. Product Description

3.13.1.1 HAND HELD CONFIGURER SET UP

The Hand Held Configurer is shipped pre-configured to operate with the instrument. If the HHC does not operate correctly, check the configuration by entering set up mode. To enter HHC set up mode, hold CONTROL and SHIFT , and press F1 . The correct configuration is shown below.

Option Selection

Baud

Data Bits*

9600

7

Parity** Space

*Not applicable for U02 version.

**Parity = None for U02 version.

Option

Display

Repeat

Echo

Selection

PE Enabled

Fast

Disabled

Option

Handshake

Self Test

Selection

Disabled

Disabled

If the configuration is not correct, it can be altered while in set up mode. When set up mode is entered, the current baud rate setting is displayed on the top line; the following choices are also displayed:

Key

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

Selection

Change Parameter

Next

Previous

Quit

Save

If the baud rate setting is incorrect, it can be changed by pressing F1 . Each time the F1 key is pressed, an optional setting for the parameter is displayed on the top line. When the desired setting appears, press F2 to select it and see the current setting for the next parameter (or press F3 to select it and see the current setting for the previous parameter). If the setting is not correct, use F1 to cycle through available settings. All parameters can be checked and changed in this way.

Pressing F4 (Quit) exits set up mode and any changes made will stay in effect until the HHC is disconnected.

Use F5 to save changes to the controller’s memory; the Hand Held Configurer can then be disconnected and the changes to the controller will remain in effect.

3.13.1.2 DISPLAYING A CONTROLLER DATAPOINT

To DISPLAY a controller datapoint, press D and enter the datapoint number (e.g., B12), then press

ENTER . The current value of the datapoint is displayed. The datapoint number is the data type identifier (B, L, C, H, F, and A) as described in Table 5-1, followed by the point number.

For example, to display the value of datapoint B12, press:

D B12 <ENTER>.

The value presently assigned to B12 is displayed.

Values displayed with the D command are formatted as follows:

3-23

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Data Type

B

L

C & H

A

F

Data Format

Are three digit characters 000-255.

Is a one digit character 0 or 1.

Are ten digit characters including digits, d e c i m a l p o i n t a n d s i g n ( w h e n negative). Zero = 0.0.

Are ten characters or less.

Are five characters or less.

Pressing ENTER after pressing D automatically recalls the last datapoint number that was accessed.

Pressing N after pressing D causes the next datapoint of the same data type to be displayed. (The

NEXT command N only works with index numbers below 256.)

3.13.1.3 ALTERING A CONTROLLER DATAPOINT

To modify a value or enter a new value press P and the datapoint number followed by ENTER . Then press the keys corresponding to the value to be assigned followed by ENTER .

For example, to change AI0 Units (A298) from PERCENT to gallons per minute (GPM):

P A298 <ENTER> GPM <ENTER>

Values entered with the PUT command P must be formatted as follows:

In general, all modification inputs are limited to the first ten characters of the field.

For B type datapoints, the value entered must be between 0 and 255.

For L type datapoints, the value must be 1 or 0.

All responses are completed by pressing ENTER .

Pressing ENTER after pressing P automatically recalls the last database parameter.

Pressing N after pressing P causes the next datapoint of the same type to be displayed. (The NEXT command N only works with index numbers below 256.)

3.13.1.4 SETTING OR CHANGING A CONTROLLER PASSWORD KEY

As a security feature, the controller can be configured with a password key that is required to access the Engineer Mode configuration function. The password key can be set by the Hand Held Configurer, or any of the personal computer application packages (53HC3300 or 53MT6000). It can also be set from a SUPERVISOR-PC, but not with the controller faceplate push buttons. A password key is a special data type ( Q1 ) that is displayed or configured just like any other data type using the Hand

Held Configurer. The value assigned to a password key must be an ASCII numeric string up to 10 characters because only numbers (0-9) are permitted as KEY? input characters by the controller. To remove a password key completely, press CTRL 0 (hold CTRL and press zero , then ENTER.

3-24

Section 3. Product Description

3.13.1.5 HHC MEMORY MODULE ASSEMBLY TRANSFER

The procedure to save or load the controller database and/or calibration constants using the HHC with memory module (part number 698B182U02) is as follows:

1.

Insert the memory module containing the desired database in the HHC. The memory module is inserted by placing it into the recess at the back of the HHC with the memory module label facing outward and up, then sliding it down until it is firmly seated. When loading a database to the controller, verify that the write protect switch (when present) on the memory module has been pushed to its outside position. When saving a controller database to the memory module, the write protect switch must be toward the inside.

2.

To initiate the TRANSFER operation, press T at the command entry point. The following menu appears:

MEMORY TRANSFER

F1-TO CONTROLLER

F2-FROM CONTROLLER

3.

Press either F1 or F2 to select the desired operation. Pressing CTRL C aborts the operation.

Depending on which selection is made, one of the following two menus is displayed:

F1 (TO CONTROLLER) is selected , the following menu appears:

F1-CALIBRATE

F2-DATABASE

F3-PROGRAM

Based on the selection made from this menu, one of the following operations can occur:

F1-CALIBRATE: This selection copies the calibration values of the standard analog inputs and outputs to the controller. These are values that were previously saved to the memory module with a memory transfer from the controller. This transfer takes approximately 1 second.

F2-DATABASE: This selection copies the database, less the calibration values, and the assigned controller address to the controller. This transfer takes approximately 12 seconds.

F3-PROGRAM: This selection copies the F-TRAN programs and F-CIM module sequences to the controller.

This transfer takes approximately 20 seconds.

2.

If F2 (FROM CONTROLLER) is selected, the following menu appears:

F2-DATABASE

F3-PROGRAM

3-25

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Based on the selection made from this menu, one of the following operations can occur:

F2- DATABASE: This operation copies the entire database, all B, L, C, H, and A, datapoint values, in the controller to the memory module. This transfer takes approximately 12 seconds.

F3- PROGRAM: This selection copies the F-TRAN programs and F-CIM module sequences from the controll er t o t he me mo ry mo du l e. Thi s t ransfer takes approximately 20 seconds.

When the transfer begins a message is displayed indicating the transfer has started.

Another message appears when the transfer is completed. If the transfer fails, an error message is displayed instead of the transfer completed message. If an error does occur, resolve the cause and re-initiate the transfer. A transfer error should not be ignored, as a partial transfer may cause the HHC memory module to contain corrupted data. The

HHC returns to the command entry mode if the transfer is successful or if it is halted with an error message.

3.13.1.6 SAMPLE HAND HELD CONFIGURER COMMANDS

The following table provides a sample of typical Hand Held Configurer Display ( D ), Put ( P ), and

Memory Transfer ( T ) commands.

Key Entries

D B101 <ENTER>

D N <ENTER>

D <ENTER>

P C256 <ENTER> 200 <ENTER>

P <ENTER> 150 <ENTER>

P N 200 <ENTER>

T <ENTER>

Displayed Data

D B101 XXX

D B102 XXX

D B102 XXX

Result

Displays contents of B101.

Displays contents of Next (N) datapoint, B102.

B102 contents still displayed. It updates the display value of the current datapoint.

Alters contents of C256 to 200

P C256 XXX 200

P C256 XXX 150

P C257 XXX 200

MEMORY TRANSFER

F1 - TO CONTROLLER

F2 - FROM CONTROLLER

TRANSFER FINISHED

Alters contents of C256 to 150.

It alters the value of the current datapoint.

Alters contents of C257 to 200.

It alters the value of the Next (N) datapoint.

Displays memory transfer query t o e i t h e r s e n d c a l i b r a t i o n c o n s t a n t s , d a t a b a s e , o r programs to the instrument; or receive database or programs from the instrument for storage into the memory module.

Note: XXX = Displayed characters from the addressed datapoint.

3-26

Section 3. Product Description

3.13.2 USING A PC TERMINAL EMULATOR

3.13.2.1 Microsoft Windows Hyperterminal

This procedure describes the use of the Microsoft Windows HyperTerminal program to emulate the

53MC5000 Handheld terminal. This procedure is based on configuring this function for the first time.

Once configured, handheld terminal emulation may be started by double-clicking on the icon created in Step 5 of this procedure.

1.

Be sure the serial communication port to be used with HyperTerminal program is not being used by another application.

2.

Attached the communication cable between the PC and the front port of the 53MC5000 controller.

3.

The HyperTerminal program can usually be found in the START/Programs/Accessories program group. Start the program by double clicking on the HyperTerminal Icon.

4.

The HyperTerminal program will open a window for the application. The first time we use

HyperTerminal for this application, we must set up a new connection and its settings.

5.

Enter a name for the connection and select an Icon from the display provided. The name and

Icon are used for future access to this particular terminal setup. This example uses Hand-

held Emulation as the name and the default Icon. Select OK to continue.

6.

A new Connect To window is displayed. Since a modem or phone connection will not be used, select COM1 from the Connect using: pull down menu.

3-27

7.

Select OK to continue.

53MC5000 Process Control Station

8.

The next window is used to configure the PC COM port communications parameters. The front port of the 53MC5000 has fixed communication parameters of 9600 baud, 8 Data Bits,

1 Stop Bit, and no Parity.

9.

When the proper settings have been made, select OK to accept the settings.

10. Select File Properties from the HyperTerminal tool bar.

3-28

Section 3. Product Description

11. In the Properties window, select the Settings tab as pictured below. Choose the VT100 option from the Emulation pull down list. Click OK to continue.

12. The terminal mode setup is now complete. If the cable is connected between the controller and the PC, the basic handheld functions may now be performed using the terminal mode.

13. Displaying database values:

Any database location within the controller can be displayed. To display a database location type D. The controller will respond by placing a space after the letter D. Enter the database location (such as B12) and press the ENTER key. The controller will respond by displaying the current value of this database location.

14. Modifying a database location:

Any database location within the controller can also be modified. To modify a database location type P (for put). The controller will respond by placing a space after the letter P.

Enter the database location to be modified and press the ENTER key. The controller will respond again by sending a space. Enter the new value to be put into the database location you selected and press the ENTER key.

3-29

53MC5000 Process Control Station

3.14 ENGINEER MODE LOCKOUT

Access to Engineer mode operation through the ACK/SEL ( ● ) faceplate push button can be disabled.

This can be accomplished by configuring password datapoint Q000 to the three character sequence

%Z$ using the Hand Held Configurer. To remove the character sequence, press <CTRL> 0 (hold

CTRL and press the zero key) on the Hand Held Configurer, which enters a NULL character string into the addressed datapoint.

NOTES:

3-30

Section 4. Operator Displays

4.0 OPERATOR DISPLAYS

Standard displays are provided by the 53MC5000 Process Control Station (controller) and additional displays can be designed using F-TRAN if the controller has extended functionality. Typical display types are point, parameter, summary, status, and totalizer. There is one unique display, called the

Locator Grid, which is not common to any one of these types.

Point displays are bar graphs with setpoint indicators and alphanumeric tags. Some bar graph point displays also have horizontal trend lines. Parameter module displays each provide expedient access to view or alter three datapoint values in operator/control mode. There is only one summary display which shows the alarm state of six module tagnames and one system status display which has alphanumeric descriptors followed by numeric values. Another status display type, the status module displays, can have configured operation (e.g., open/closed) and alarm indicator legends.

Totalizer displays have the simplest presentation that shows the current accumulated value.

A display list is generated from the standard displays when the active control strategy (CS) is loaded.

Loading a control strategy automatically configures the appropriate CON module Control Display

Mode (CDM0-3) datapoints (B339, B334, B349, and B354) with values from 0 to 5 to identify the type of point displays in the display list (e.g., standard PID, indicator, manual loader, etc.). Which display appears on the front panel from the display list is determined by the contents of the Display Program datapoint B005. Should the Display Program datapoint be set to a value having no corresponding display program, then a NO DISPLAY message appears on the front panel. Two exceptions that will prevent a valid selected display from appearing are FIX 0 (company logo) or FIX 97 (Display Test) active.

The controller Flexible Control Strategy (FCS) has a display handler that provides a convenient method for an operator to page through the display list of a loaded control strategy. The FCS display handler is also available as a function block or subroutine to F-CIM and F-TRAN programs. As part of FCS, the display handler is automatically configured when a control strategy is loaded. The display handler allows the display list to be accessed using the F1 and F2 push buttons. Pressing the F1 or F2 push button causes the Display Program datapoint B005 to be configured with the next display program value from the display list for that control strategy. The display handler can be configured for a simple display list or a hierarchical display list. When configured for a simple display list, pressing the F2 push button pages forward through the list and pressing the F1 push button pages backward through the list. If configured for a hierarchical display list, pressing the F1 push button pages to the next display group and pressing the F2 push button pages through the displays within a selected group.

In addition to sequencing through the display list, pressing the F1 and F2 push buttons will indicate the relative position of the currently selected display on the Locator Grid. After a display is selected, waiting a short period of time and then pressing either the F1 or F2 push buttons causes the display

Locator Grid to appear. Releasing the F1 or F2 push buttons causes the displayed Locator Grid to disappear and the interrupted display to reappear on the screen. Pressing the F1 or F2 push buttons once again will sequence through the displays as described earlier. When invoked with the F1 or F2 push buttons, the display Locator Grid for a single display list appears as a single line of cells with the selected display cell highlighted. For hierarchical display lists, the display Locator Grid appears as multiple columns of cells with the selected display cell highlighted. The Locator Grid can have 8 group lists (columns) with 8 displays (rows) each for a maximum of 64 cells.

4-1

53MC5000 Process Control Station

The display handler may be configured manually by entering the appropriate values into datapoints of the System Module (see Section 5, Table 5-15). The datapoints are Number of Groups (B017),

Number of Displays per Group (B018), and Display List (B021 through B084).

Displays are updated at intervals determined by the Scan Index (B003) and Background Scan Index

(B006), which are configurable parameters. (The display elements themselves are always refreshed

80 times a second independent of the updating intervals.)

A horn overlay that flashes in reverse video is superimposed at the top of any display whenever a controller monitored process variable alarm condition occurs. If not in FIX 0 (company logo) or FIX

97 (Display Test), the top line of the display is overwritten with the contents of datapoint A009; datapoint L065 (Horn) must be set to 1 and datapoint L063 (No A Line) must be cleared to 0 for this to happen. An alarm overlay also appears on point displays just below the horn overlay. The alarm overlay flashes in reverse video the type of alarm detected (e.g., High, Low, HiHi, etc.). On multiple point display bar graph presentations, the alarmed state bar graph vertical axis flashes on and off. (If the entire selected display flashes from normal to reversed video, it indicates a watchdog timer condition occurred as a result of a processor failure in the controller.)

The controller standard displays are listed in Table 4-1. The display lists generated for single loop, dual loop, and four loop control strategies are provided in Table 4-2. Selected displays that are representative of the standard displays, as well as displays with alarm and horn overlays are described and illustrated in remainder of the section. Where applicable, datapoints are identified parenthetically with the display item call-outs in the illustrations. The datapoints are defined in

Section 5.

4-2

Section 4. Operator Displays

Table 4-1. Standard Displays

Display

Number

1

2

Alarm Summary

System Status

Title Point

Display*

Group

Display

3

4

5

6

7

8

Single Loop CON0

Single Loop CON1

Single Loop CON2

Single Loop CON3

Two Loop CON0 and CON1

Two Loop CON2 and CON3

9

10

Single Loop CON0 with Horizontal Trend

Single Loop CON1 with Horizontal Trend

11

12

Single Loop CON2 with Horizontal Trend

Single Loop CON3 with Horizontal Trend

13

14

Parameter Module 0

Parameter Module 1

15

16

17

18

19

20

Parameter Module 2

Parameter Module 3

Parameter Module 4

Parameter Module 5

Parameter Module 6

Parameter Module 7

21

22

Status Module 0

Status Module 1

23

24

Totalizer Module 0

Totalizer Module 1

25

26

Totalizer Module 2

Totalizer Module 3

27

28

29

30

Totalizer Module 4

Totalizer Module 5

Totalizer Module 6

Totalizer Module 7

31 Locator Grid

32 Four Loop CON0 - CON3 ●

*Point Displays can be any of six types (0-5): 0 - Standard PID, 1 - Indicator, 2 - Manual Loader,

3 - Ratio Controller, 4 - Auto/Manual (A/M) Station, and 5 - Ratio A/M Station.

4-3

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 4-2. Generated Display Lists

Display

Number

Title

3

9

13

14

2

Applicable Control Strategies

Single Loop Flexible Control Strategies

Single List

Single Loop CON0*

Single Loop CON0 with Horizontal Trend

Parameter Module 0

Parameter Module 1

System Status

CS1 Single Loop PID Controller,

CS2 Analog Backup Controller,

CS3 Ratio Controller,

CS4 Automatic/Manual Station, and

CS5 Ratio Automatic/Manual Station.

(Pressing the F1 push button pages forward down the list and pressing the F2 push button pages backward up the list to select the next display.)

3

9

13

14

2

4

10

18

19

7

Two Loop Flexible Control Strategies

Group 1

Single Loop CON0

Single Loop CON0 with Horizontal Trend

Parameter Module 0

Parameter Module 1

System Status

Group 2

CS20 Two Loop Controller,

CS21 Two Loop Cascade Controller, and

CS22 Two Loop Override Controller.

(Pressing the F1 push button selects the group and pressing the F2 push button selects the next display in the group.)

Single Loop CON1

Single Loop CON1 with Horizontal Trend

Parameter Module 5

Parameter Module 6

Two Loop CON0 and CON1*

32

9

10

11

12

Four Loop Flexible Control Strategies

Group 1

Four Loop CON0 - CON3*

Single Loop CON0 with Horizontal Trend

Single Loop CON1 with Horizontal Trend

Single Loop CON2 with Horizontal Trend

Single Loop CON3 with Horizontal Trend

Group 2

CS40 Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller and CS41 Four Loop Controller.

(Pressing the F1 push button selects the group and pressing the F2 push button selects the next display in the group.)

1

2

Alarm Summary

System Status

21 Status Module 0

22

32

Status Module 1

Four Loop CON0 - CON3

*These displays are also presented in their applicable Control Strategy Sections 6-15.

4-4

Section 4. Operator Displays

4.1 DISPLAY 1 - ALARM SUMMARY

The Alarm Summary Display (also called the Summary Display) shows the name of the instrument followed by the tagnames of the six modules that can generate alarms. These six modules are the four CON modules (CON0-CON3) and the two SDT modules (SDT0 and SDT1). Any of these modules that are in alarm causes the corresponding tagname to blink. The UP and DOWN arrow keys are used to move the display pointer to the desired tagname. Pressing the F3 push button causes the corresponding display for the tagname to appear, e.g., CON-0 is Display 3, Single Loop

CON0; CON-1 is Display 4, Single Loop CON1; CON-2 is Display 5, Single Loop CON2; CON-3 is

Display 6, Single Loop CON3; SDT-0 is Display 21, Status Module 0; and SDT-1 is Display 22, Status

Module 1. The low-resolution version of the Alarm Summary Display is illustrated in Figure 4-1. Also shown in Figure 4-1 is an illustration of an active alarm condition on the display for CON-0.

Accessing CON-0 with the F3 push button would show that Display 3 has an alarm condition.

INSTRUMENT NAME

HORN OVERLAY

CON-0 ALARM ACTIVE

POINTER

POINTER

UP AND

DOWN

PUSH

BUTTONS

6 MODULES

F3 PUSH BUTTON

Figure 4-1. Display 1 - Alarm Summary

4-5

53MC5000 Process Control Station

4.2 DISPLAY 2 - SYSTEM STATUS

The System Status Display provides information indicating the functionality, operation, and communication status of the controller. The display is composed of two pages. The second page is accessed by pressing the F3 push button. Releasing the F3 push button causes the first page to reappear. The low-resolution version System Status Display is illustrated in Figure 4-2. Also shown in Figure 4-2, Sheet 2 is an illustration of how the overlay banner appears at the top of this display.

(The Alarm Summary Display should be accessed to determine the module generating the alarm.)

INSTRUMENT NAME (A008)

MODEL NUMBER (A190 & A191)

ACTIVE FUNCTION INDEX (B000)

SCAN INDEX (B003)

SCAN OVERRUN COUNT (B004)

DISPLAY/BACKGROUND SCAN INDEX (B006)

DISPLAY/BACKGROUND OVERRUN

COUNTER (B007)

COMMUNICATIONS INSTRUMENT ADDRESS

0-31 (B001)

BAUD RATE (E.G., 253 = 9600 BAUD)(B002)

EVEN PARITY (0 = EVEN PARITY,

1 = NO PARITY) (L256)

NO BYTE STUFFING (L258)

F3 PUSH BUTTON

4-6

Figure 4-2. Display 2 - System Status (Sheet 1 of 2)

Section 4. Operator Displays

EXPANSION BOARD OPTION SLOT CONTENTS

(DATAPOINTS ARE: SLT1 - B095, SLT2 - B096,

SLT3 - B097, SLT4 - B098, SLT5 - B099.) INDEX

VALUES EN TERED IN THESE OPTION SLOT

DATAPOINTS CAN BE AS FOLLOWS:

128 = MICROLINK CARD OCCUPIES SLOT,

129 = AUXILIARY PROCESSOR BOARD IN SLOT,

1 = 6 DIGITAL INPUT/4 DIGITAL OUTPUT CARD, 2

= SINGLE CHANNEL ANALOG INPUT [AI8]

CARD OCCUPIES THE SLOT,

3 = MULTICHANNEL ANALOG I/O CARD IN SLOT,

4 = 16 DIGITAL INPUT/ DIGITAL OUTPUT CARD,

5 = HART MODEM OPTION CARD IN SLOT.

(ADDITIONAL CARD ID’S ARE IDENTIFIED IN THE

DOCUMENTATION RELEASED WITH THE

OPTION.)

M i c r o L i n k N E T W O R K M O D E ( B 4 4 8 ) ( 0 - 2

MBIT/SEC, 1 - 1 MBIT/SEC, 2 - 0.5 MBIT/SEC, AND

3 - 0.25 MBIT/SEC.)

MicroLink NETWORK STATUS (CAN BE AB, A, B,

OR BLANK. AB - INDICATES EITHER MicroLink

NETWORKS A OR B CAN COMPLETE ALL OF THE

EXTERNAL I/O TABLE TASKS. A - INDICATES

ONLY NETWORK A CAN COMPLETE ALL OF THE

EXTERNAL I/O TABLE TASKS.

B - INDICATES ONLY NETWORK B CAN

COMPLETE ALL OF THE EXTERNAL I/O TABLE

TASKS. A BLANK FIELD INDICATES BOTH, A

AND B, ARE REQUIRED TO COMPLETE ALL OF

THE NETWORK TASKS; THEREFORE, PSTAT CAN

STILL BE OK BECAUSE THE TASKS ARE BEING

COMPLETED, BUT BY BOTH NETWORKS.)

PSTAT (OK - INDICATES ALL OF THE

CONFIGURED TASKS IN THE EXTERNAL I/O TA-

BLE ARE BEING COMPLETED.)

HOURS:MINUTES:SECONDS (B259, B258, B257)

DAY MONTH YEAR (B260, B261, B262)

HORN OVERLAY - (CONTENTS OF A009 ARE

’wALARMx’, L065 = 1, AND L063 = 0 TO ALLOW

CONTENTS OF A009 TO BE SUPERIMPOSED

OVER DISPLAY. IF ’ALARM’ IS ENTERED IN A009

W I TH O U T T H E ’ w ’ A N D ’x ’, T H E N B R A C K ET

POINTS DO NOT APPEAR IN OVERLAY.)

Figure 4-2. Display 2 - System Status (Sheet 2 of 2)

4-7

53MC5000 Process Control Station

4.3 DISPLAYS 3, 4, 5, AND 6 - POINT DISPLAYS (CON0-3)

Displays 3, 4, 5, and 6 are point displays (see Figure 4-3). A point display provides loop control information with bar graphs and digital readouts. The type of bar graphs presented can be selected by the value loaded into the Control Display Mode (CDM0-3) datapoint (B339, B344, B349, or B354, as applicable) of the CON module for the point display. If the value loaded into the CDM is 0, then the point display will have a Standard PID presentation. Because this is the most common selection made, point displays 3, 4, 5, and 6 (CON0-3) are used in the Section 4.3.1 to illustrate Standard PID displays (CDM0-3 = 0). However only point display 3 (CON0) is used in Sections 4.3.2 through 4.3.6

to describe the Indicator (CDM0 = 1), Manual Loader (CDM0 = 2), Ratio Controller (CDM0 = 3),

Auto/Manual Station (CDM0 = 4), and Ratio Auto/Manual Station (CDM0 = 5) graphical presentations. It should be noted that the resident Control Strategies (CSs) set the CDM datapoints as required.

On four of the point display selections (CDM = 0, 3, 4, and 5), large status alpha indicators appear on the display near the output decrease (left arrow) faceplate push button. The function of the status indicators is identical for all four CDM variations of the point displays. The alpha character on the right indicates Local, Remote, Ratio, Computer (R), or External Override and the alpha character on the left indicates Manual, Automatic, or Tracking/Override control mode. The functions of these indicators are summarized in Table 4-3 as follows:

Table 4-3. Status Indicators

Indicator

L

R

R

E

M

A

A

T

State Function

Right Character

Steady Local (faceplate) setpoint push buttons affect the setpoint setting.

Steady Remote/Ratio/Computer. Remote indicates remote setpoint control. If

Ratio, the setpoint push buttons affect the setpoint ratio term K1. If

Computer, a remote computer is directly controlling the final element.

The meaning of R is determined by the control strategy and instrument application, e.g., a controller connected to a wild variable and a controlled variable that is configured as a CS3 - Ratio Controller would have an R indicator that means Ratio.

Blinking Operator Remote selected, waiting for remote enable (local).

Steady External/Override setpoint.

Left Character

Steady Manual output push buttons affect output.

Steady Auto Output Control. Output is determined by controller PID algorithm.

Blinking Operator Auto Output Control requested; waiting for auto enable (manual).

Steady Tracking/Override output. Tracking is when the output is being overwritten with a varying value regardless of the Auto/Manual switch setting. Override is when the output is being overwritten with a fixed value regardless of the Auto/Manual switch setting.

The faceplate push buttons do not operate in the same manner for all variations of the point displays.

When the Remote push button is activated, the operation of the setpoint push buttons can be modified based on the value in the Setpoint Mode (SPM0-3) datapoint (B338, B343, B348, or B353, as applicable) of the CON module for the point display. Although independent of the display presentation, an SPM can alter the setpoint increase and decrease push buttons to modify the remote setpoint ratio term (K1) while in ratio operation (CDM = 3 - Ratio Controller, and CDM = 5 -

4-8

Section 4. Operator Displays

Ratio Auto/Manual Station). Also, many of the faceplate push button operator functions are Not

Applicable (N/A) for the Indicator (CDM = 1) and Manual Loader (CDM = 2) graphical presentations as shown in Table 4-4, which follows.

Table 4-4. Faceplate Push Buttons (Operator Functions)

Title Function Push

Button

R/L

A/M

Remote/Ratio/Computer or Local

(N/A for Indicator and

Manual Loader)

Setpoint Up

(N/A for Indicator and

Manual Loader)

Setpoint Down

(N/A for Indicator and

Manual Loader)

Auto/Manual Select

(N/A for Indicator and

Manual Loader)

Output Decrease

(N/A for Indicator)

Selects the Remote or Local setpoint modes for displays of all control strategies except CS2, CS3, and CS5. Selects

Computer direct element control or Local setpoint control mode for graphical display of CS2. Affects ratio term K1 in

Ratio or selects Local setpoint control mode for displays of

CS3 and CS5. When R is selected, an R appears as the control mode indicator. When L is selected, an L appears as the control mode indicator.

Setpoint increase and decrease push buttons when R/L is in

Local. Setpoint dynamic characteristics are: A single short push on either button causes the setpoint to move 0.1% of full scale. Holding the push button causes the setpoint to slew at a rate of 4% per second for the next 4 seconds.

Continuing to hold the push button increases the slew rate to 16% of the control range.

These push buttons also move the line item pointer up and down in some group displays.

Auto selects automatic output control from the controller PID algorithm. Manual allows output to be controlled by the output push buttons. When A is selected, an A appears as the control mode indicator. When M is selected, an M appears as the control mode indicator.

Output decrease when A/M is in Manual. (The control mode indicator is an M.)

F1

F2

F3

Output Increase

(N/A for Indicator)

Output increase when A/M is in Manual. (The control mode indicator is an M.)

Next Group List/Page

Back

Page In List/Page

Forward

Loop

Select/(Copy/Insert)

Alarm Reset/Mode

Pages back through simple display lists. Pages to the nest display group for hierarchical display lists.

Pages forward through simple display lists. Pages to the next display within a group for hierarchical display lists.

Moves the loop pointer horizontally to select a loop in multipoint displays. (For the Parameter display, it copies the pointed line to the edit overlay that appears at the bottom of the display. After the addressed datapoint is altered, F3 is used to insert the data back into the pointed line.)

Used to reset the alarm annunciator or toggle between operator/control and engineer modes (see Section 3 for engineering mode push button functions). Pressing this push button after the process variable is within tolerable limits past Dead Band causes the alarm indicator to disappear.

4-9

53MC5000 Process Control Station

4.3.1 POINT DISPLAYS 3, 4, 5, AND 6 (CDM = 0, STANDARD PID)

The control module tag name (e.g., CON-0) appears at the top of the display. The left side of the

Standard PID Display (CDM = 0) contains a fifty segment vertical axis. Above and below the vertical axis are the numerical values indicating its upper and lower ranges. Left of the vertical axis is the process variable bar. When alarm limits are configured, they appear left of the process variable bar as indicators at the alarm limit values. On the immediate right of the vertical axis is the setpoint arrowhead. Beneath the vertical axis is a forty segment horizontal axis. At either end of the horizontal axis are the C and O close and open valve indicators. The output bar moves under the horizontal axis to indicate the output value of the controller. The output value is also indicated numerically under the horizontal output bar. On the right side of the display are the alphanumeric values and legends. The top legend is SP for setpoint and the setpoint value appears immediately beneath it. The middle legend is the units of measurement (unless configured otherwise PERCENT is the default for this legend). The lower legend is PV for process variable and the process variable value appears immediately beneath it. If the process variable bar moves beyond either alarm limit indicator, an alarm overlay appears in the area immediately below the control module tag name that indicates the alarm type.

The Point Displays 3, 4, 5, and 6 (CON0-3) are illustrated (in low-resolution version) in Figure 4-3.

All four control loops (CON0-3) were configured to illustrate different alarm types; however, the

Control Display Mode for all four is set to zero (CDM0-3 = 0) for Standard PID display.

Figure 4-3, Sheet 1 illustrates CON0 with all of the display call-outs described above. For this illustration CON0 is configured with HIGH and LOW alarm limits.

Figure 4-3, Sheet 2 illustrates CON0 HIGH and LOW alarm overlays.

Figure 4-3, Sheet 3 illustrates CON1. For this illustration it is configured with HIGH and

HI-HI alarm limits. Sheet 3 also illustrates the CON1 HI-HI alarm overlay.

Figure 4-3, Sheet 4 illustrates CON2. For this illustration it is configured with LOW and

LO-LO alarm limits. Sheet 4 also illustrates the CON2 LO-LO alarm overlay.

Figure 4-3, Sheet 5 illustrates CON3. For this illustration it is configured with high (HI) and low (LO) Setpoint Deviation (DEV) alarm limits. Sheet 5 also illustrates the CON3 HI DEV alarm overlay.

4-10

Section 4. Operator Displays

CONTROL MODULE

TAG NAME (A000)

CONTROLLER SPAN

(C115) + CONTROLLER

LOWER RANGE (C116)

50 SEGMENT VERTICAL

AXIS

HIGH ALARM LIMIT

INDICATOR - CON0

ALARM LIMIT 1 (C103)

(ALSO CONTROL

ALARM MODE, B335 = 0)

SETPOINT ARROWHEAD

PROCESS VARIABLE

BAR

LOW ALARM LIMIT

INDICATOR - CON0

ALARM LIMIT 2 (C104)

CONTROLLER LOWER

RANGE (C116)

40 SEGMENT

HORIZONTAL AXIS

C = CLOSE VALVE (SEE

REVERSE VALVE L109)

MODE - ALARM RESET

O = OPEN VALVE

CON0 CONFIGURED WITH HIGH

ANDLOW ALARM LIMITS.

*PB = PUSH BUTTON IN

ILLUSTRATION.

F2 - PAGE IN LIST OR PAGE FORWARD

OUTPUT VALUE

OUTPUT BAR

F1 - NEXT DISPLAY GROUP OR PAGE BACK

R/L - REMOTE/LOCAL

SETPOINT CONTROL

PB

SP = SETPOINT

LEGEND

L = SETPOINT UP

ARROW PB*

SETPOINT DIGITAL

VALUE

ENGINEERING UNITS

(A001)

L = SETPOINT DOWN

ARROW PB

PROCESS VARIABLE

AUTO/MANUAL OUTPUT

SELECTOR PB

PROCESS VARIABLE

VALUE

M = DECREASE OUT-

PUT PB

M = INCREASE OUTPUT

PB

M = MANUAL, L = LOCAL

STATUS INDICATORS

Figure 4-3. Point Displays 3, 4, 5, and 6 (CDM = 0, Standard PID)

(Sheet 1 of 5)

4-11

53MC5000 Process Control Station

HORN OVERLAY (A009 =

’wALARMx’, L065 = 1, AND

L063 = 0)

HIGH ALARM OVERLAY

PROCESS VARIABLE BAR

PASSED HIGH ALARM LIMIT

ALARM LIMIT 1 (C103)

HORN OVERLAY (A009 =

’wALARMx’, L065 = 1, AND

L063 = 0)

LOW ALARM OVERLAY

ALARM LIMIT 2 (C104)

PROCESS VARIABLE BAR

BELOW LOW ALARM LIMIT

CON0 HIGH AND LOW ALARM

OVERLAYS

4-12

Figure 4-3. Point Displays 3, 4, 5, and 6 (CDM = 0, Standard PID)

(Sheet 2 of 5)

Section 4. Operator Displays

CONTROL MODULE TAG NAME (A002)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C151) +

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE (C152)

ENGINEERING UNITS LEGEND (A003)

HI-HI ALARM LIMIT INDICATOR

CON1 ALARM LIMIT 2 (C140)

(ALSO CONTROL ALARM MODE,

B340 = 4)

HIGH ALARM LIMIT INDICATOR

CON1 ALARM LIMIT 1 (C139)

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE (C152)

C = CLOSE VALVE (SEE REVERSE VALVE

L133)

O = OPEN VALVE

HORN OVERLAY (A009 =

’wALARMx’, L065 = 1, AND

L063 = 0)

HI-HI ALARM OVERLAY

PROCESS VARIABLE BAR

PASSED HI-HI ALARM LIMIT

HI-HI ALARM LIMIT INDICATOR

CON1 ALARM LIMIT 2 (C140)

CON1 DISPLAY AND CON1 HI-HI ALARM

OVERLAY

Figure 4-3. Point Displays 3, 4, 5, and 6 (CDM = 0, Standard PID)

(Sheet 3 of 5)

4-13

53MC5000 Process Control Station

CONTROL MODULE TAG NAME (A004)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C187) +

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE (C188)

ENGINEERING UNITS LEGEND (A005)

LOW ALARM LIMIT INDICATOR

CON2 ALARM LIMIT 1 (C175)

(ALSO CONTROL ALARM MODE,

B345 = 5)

LO-LO ALARM LIMIT INDICATOR

CON2 ALARM LIMIT 2 (C176)

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE (C188)

C = CLOSE VALVE (SEE REVERSE VALVE

L157)

O = OPEN VALVE

HORN OVERLAY (A009 =

’wALARMx’, L065 = 1, AND

L063 = 0)

LO-LO ALARM OVERLAY

LO-LO ALARM LIMIT INDICATOR

CON2 ALARM LIMIT 2 (C176)

PROCESS VARIABLE BAR

BELOW LO-LO ALARM LIMIT

CON2 DISPLAY AND CON2 LO-LO ALARM

OVERLAY

4-14

Figure 4-3. Point Displays 3, 4, 5, and 6 (CDM = 0, Standard PID)

(Sheet 4 of 5)

Section 4. Operator Displays

CONTROL MODULE TAG NAME (A006)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C223) +

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE (C224)

ENGINEERING UNITS LEGEND (A007)

HI-DEV ALARM LIMIT INDICATOR

CON3 ALARM LIMIT 1 (C211)

(ALSO CONTROL ALARM MODE,

B350 = 6)

LO-DEV ALARM LIMIT INDICATOR

CON3 ALARM LIMIT 2 (C212)

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE (C224)

C = CLOSE VALVE (SEE REVERSE VALVE

L181)

O = OPEN VALVE

HORN OVERLAY (A009 =

’wALARMx’, L065 = 1, AND

L063 = 0)

HI-DEV ALARM OVERLAY

PROCESS VARIABLE BAR

ABOVE HI-DEV ALARM LIMIT

DEV ALARM LIMIT INDICATOR

CON3 ALARM LIMIT 1 (C211)

CON3 DISPLAY AND CON3 HI-DEV ALARM

OVERLAY

Figure 4-3. Point Displays 3, 4, 5, and 6 (CDM = 0, Standard PID)

(Sheet 5 of 5)

4-15

53MC5000 Process Control Station

4.3.2 POINT DISPLAY 3 (CDM = 1, INDICATOR)

The Indicator display is illustrated in Figure 4-4 In the illustration the control module tag name appears at the top of the display. The left side of the Indicator display (CDM = 1) contains a fifty segment vertical axis. Above and below the vertical axis are the numeric values indicating the upper and lower ranges. Left of the vertical axis is the process variable bar. When alarm limits are configured, they appear left of the process variable bar as indicators at the alarm limit values. On the right side of the display are the process variable (PV) legend, process variable value (e.g., 48.73

shown in the illustration), and the engineering units legend. (Unless configured otherwise, PER-

CENT is the default for the engineering units legend.) If the process variable bar moves beyond either alarm limit indicator, an alarm overlay appears in the area immediately below the control module tag name that indicates the alarm type. The faceplate vertical keypad push buttons have no affect on the Indicator display (R/L,

,

, A/M,

, and

push buttons are not applicable).

CONTROL MODULE

TAG NAME (A000)

CONTROLLER SPAN

(C115) + CONTROLLER

LOWER RANGE (C116)

50 SEGMENT

VERTICAL AXIS

HIGH ALARM LIMIT

INDICATOR - CON0

ALARM LIMIT 1 (C103)

(ALSO CONTROL

ALARM MODE, B335 = 0)

LOW ALARM LIMIT

INDICATOR - CON0

ALARM LIMIT 2 (C104)

PROCESS VARIABLE

BAR

CONTROLLER LOWER

RANGE (C116)

PROCESS VARIABLE

LEGEND

PROCESS VARIABLE

VALUE

ENGINEERING UNITS

(A001)

NOT APPLICABLE

MODE - ALARM RESET

F2 - PAGE IN LIST OR PAGE FORWARD

F1 - NEXT DISPLAY GROUP OR PAGE BACK

Figure 4-4. Point Display 3 (CDM = 1, Indicator)

4-16

Section 4. Operator Displays

4.3.3 POINT DISPLAY 3 (CDM = 2, MANUAL LOADER)

The Manual Loader Display is illustrated in Figure 4-5. In the illustration the control module tag name appears at the top of the display. The left side of the Manual Loader Display (CDM = 2) contains a fifty segment vertical axis. Above and below the vertical axis are the numerical values indicating its upper and lower ranges. Left of the vertical axis is the process variable bar. When alarm limits are configured, they appear left of the process variable bar as indicators at the alarm limit values.

Beneath the vertical axis is a forty segment horizontal axis. At either end of this axis are the C and

O close and open valve indicators. The bar that moves under the horizontal axis indicates the output value of the controller. The output value is also indicated numerically under the horizontal output bar.

On the right side of the display are the alphanumeric values and legends. The top legend is PV for process variable and the process variable value appears immediately beneath it. The next legend is the engineering units. (Unless configured otherwise PERCENT is the default for this legend.) If the process variable bar moves beyond either alarm limit indicator, an alarm overlay appears in the area immediately below the control module tag name that indicates the alarm type. Four of the faceplate vertical keypad push buttons have no affect on the Manual Loader Display (R/L,

,

, and A/M push buttons are not applicable).

CONTROL MODULE TAG NAME

(A000)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C115) +

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE

(C116)

50 SEGMENT VERTICAL AXIS

HIGH ALARM LIMIT INDICATOR

CON0 ALARM LIMIT 1 (C103)

(ALSO CONTROL ALARM

MODE, B335 = 0)

LOW ALARM LIMIT INDICATOR

CON0 ALARM LIMIT 2 (C104)

PROCESS VARIABLE

BAR

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE

(C116)

40 SEGMENT

HORIZONTAL AXIS

C = CLOSE VALVE (SEE

REVERSE VALVE L109)

NOT APPLICABLE

PROCESS VARIABLE

LEGEND

PROCESS VARIABLE

VALUE

ENGINEERING UNITS

(A001)

DECREASE OUTPUT PB*

INCREASE OUTPUT PB

O = OPEN VALVE

MODE - ALARM RESET

OUTPUT VALUE

F2 - PAGE IN LIST OR PAGE FORWARD

OUTPUT DYNAMIC BAR

F1 - NEXT DISPLAY GROUP OR PAGE BACK

*PB = PUSH BUTTON

Figure 4-5. Point Display 3 (CDM = 2, Manual Loader)

4-17

53MC5000 Process Control Station

4.3.4 POINT DISPLAY 3 (CDM = 3, RATIO CONTROLLER)

The Ratio Controller Display is illustrated in Figure 4-6. In the illustration the control module tag name appears at the top of the display. The left side of the Ratio Controller Display (CDM = 3) contains a fifty segment vertical axis with numerical values above and below it indicating its upper and lower ranges. Left of the vertical axis is the process variable bar. Alarm limits appear left of the process variable bar as indicators at the alarm limit values. On the immediate right of the vertical axis are the setpoint arrowhead and ratio tick-pointer. The ratio tick-pointer indicates the value the setpoint will assume when ratio operation is selected. Beneath the vertical axis is a forty segment horizontal axis with the C and O close and open valve indicators at either end. The output bar moves under the horizontal axis and the output value is also indicated numerically below the output bar. On the right side of the display is the RAtio legend and the RAtio value that affects the output appears immediately beneath it. The middle legend is the engineering units and the lower legend is PV with the Process Variable value appearing below it. If the process variable bar moves beyond either alarm limit indicator, an alarm overlay appears in the area below the control module tag name.

CONTROL MODULE TAG NAME

(A000)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C115) +

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE

(C116)

50 SEGMENT VERTICAL AXIS

RATIO TICK-POINTER

CON0 ALARM LIMIT 1 (C103)*

SETPOINT

CON0 ALARM LIMIT 2 (C104)*

PROCESS VARIABLE BAR

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE

(C116)

40 SEGMENT HORIZONTAL AXIS

C = CLOSE VALVE (SEE

REVERSE VALVE L109)

*(CONTROL ALARM MODE

B335=0)

**PB = PUSH BUTTON

R = RATIO CONTROL

L = LOCAL (SP) CONTROL

SELECT PB**

LEGENDS AND VALUES

R = RATIO TICK-POINTER

UP PB

L = SETPOINT UP PB

R = RATIO TICK-POINTER

DOWN PB

L = SETPOINT DOWN PB

AUTO/MANUAL OUTPUT

SELECTOR

M = DECREASE OUTPUT

PB

M = INCREASE OUTPUT

PB

M = MANUAL, L = LOCAL

STATUS INDICATORS

MODE - ALARM RESET

O = OPEN VALVE

OUTPUT VALUE

F2 - PAGE IN LIST OR PAGE FORWARD

OUTPUT DYNAMIC BAR

F1 - NEXT DISPLAY GROUP OR PAGE BACK

Figure 4-6. Point Display 3 (CDM = 3, Ratio Controller)

4-18

Section 4. Operator Displays

4.3.5 POINT DISPLAY 3 (CDM = 4, AUTO/MANUAL STATION)

The Auto/Manual Station Display is illustrated in Figure 4-7. In the illustration the control module tag name appears at the top of the display. The left side of the Auto/Manual Station Display (CDM = 4) contains a fifty segment vertical axis with numerical values above and below it indicating its upper and lower ranges. Left of the vertical axis is the alarmed variable indicator bar. Alarm limits appear left of the alarmed variable indicator bar as indicators at the alarm limit values. On the immediate right of the vertical axis is the auto-control signal bar. The station output bar appears adjacent to the auto-control signal bar. On the right side of the display is the OUTput legend and the output value appears immediately beneath it. The middle legend is the engineering units and the lower legend is

INput, with the auto-control signal value appearing below it. If the alarmed variable indicator bar moves beyond either alarm limit indicator, an alarm overlay appears in the area below the control module tag name. Three of the faceplate vertical keypad push buttons have no affect on the

Auto/Manual Station Display (R/L,

,and

push buttons are not applicable).

CONTROL MODULE TAG NAME

(A000)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C115) +

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE

(C116)

50 SEGMENT VERTICAL AXIS

STATION OUTPUT BAR

AUTO-CONTROL SIGNAL BAR

ALARM LIMIT 1 (C103)*

ALARM LIMIT 2 (C104)*

ALARMED VARIABLE

INDICATOR BAR

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE

(C116)

*(CONTROL ALARM MODE

B335 = 0)

**PB = PUSH BUTTON

NOT APPLICABLE

OUTPUT LEGEND

OUTPUT VALUE

ENGINEERING UNITS

(A001)

AUTO-CONTROL INPUT

LEGEND

AUTO-CONTROL VALUE

A/M (AUTO/MANUAL)

SELECTOR PB**

M = DECREASE OUTPUT

PB

M = INCREASE OUTPUT

PB

M = MANUAL, A = AUTO

STATUS INDICATOR

MODE - ALARM RESET

F2 - PAGE IN LIST OR PAGE FORWARD

F1 - NEXT DISPLAY GROUP OR PAGE BACK

Figure 4-7. Point Display 3 (CDM = 4, Auto/Manual Station)

4-19

53MC5000 Process Control Station

4.3.6 POINT DISPLAY 3 (CDM = 5, RATIO AUTO/MANUAL STATION)

The Ratio Auto/Manual Station Display is illustrated in Figure 4-8. In the illustration the control module tag name appears at the top of the display. The left side of the Ratio Auto/Manual Station

Display (CDM = 5) contains a fifty segment vertical axis with numerical values above and below it indicating its upper and lower ranges. Left of the vertical axis is the alarmed variable indicator bar.

Alarm limits appear left of the alarmed variable indicator bar as indicators at the alarm limit values.

On the immediate right of the vertical axis is the auto-control signal bar. The station output bar appears adjacent to the auto-control signal bar. On the right side of the display is the RA legend and the RAtio value that is applied to the auto-control signal appears immediately beneath it. The middle legend is the engineering units and the lower legend is INput. The auto-control signal value, after the ratio is applied to it, appears below the IN legend. If the alarmed variable indicator bar moves beyond either alarm limit indicator, an alarm overlay appears in the area below the control module tag name. The R/L faceplate selector push button has no affect on the Ratio Auto/Manual Station

Display

CONTROL MODULE TAG NAME

(A000)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C115) +

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE

(C116)

50 SEGMENT VERTICAL AXIS

STATION OUTPUT BAR

AUTO-CONTROL SIGNAL BAR

ALARM LIMIT 1 (C103)*

ALARM LIMIT 2 (C104)*

ALARMED VARIABLE

INDICATOR BAR

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE

(C116)

*(CONTROL ALARM MODE

B335 = 0)

**PB = PUSH BUTTON

NOT APPLICABLE

RATIO LEGEND

RATIO VALUE

RATIO INCRESE PB**

RATIO DECREASE PB

ENGINEERING UNITS

(A001)

A/M (AUTO/MANUAL)

SELECTOR PB

AUTO-CONTROL INPUT

LEGEND

AUTO-CONTROL VALUE

M = DECREASE OUTPUT

PB

M = INCREASE OUTPUT

PB

M = MANUAL, A = AUTO

STATUS INDICATORS

MODE - ALARM RESET

F2 - PAGE IN LIST OR PAGE FORWARD

F1 - NEXT DISPLAY GROUP OR PAGE BACK

4-20

Figure 4-8. Point Display 3 (CDM = 5, Ratio Auto/Manual Station)

Section 4. Operator Displays

4.4 POINT DISPLAYS 7 AND 8 - TWO LOOP DISPLAYS

As shown in Figure 4-9, a Two Loop Display has two abbreviated Single Loop bar graph sets without the digital information. Typical alarm indications are shown first on sheet 1of the figure, followed by the displays with item call-outs on sheet 2. Each bar graph set represents an individual PID controller (CON module). Two control module tag names appear at the top of the display. The tag name for the right bar graph set is on the first line and the tag name for the left bar graph set is on the second line. A bar graph set has a fifty segment vertical axis that has a 2% resolution. Upper and lower range numeric values appear above and below the vertical axis. Left of the vertical axis is the process variable bar. Alarm limit indicators are left of the process variable bar to indicate the alarm limit values. On the immediate right of the vertical axis is the setpoint arrowhead. Beneath the vertical axis is a sixteen segment horizontal axis that has a 6% (approximate) resolution. The output bar moves under the horizontal axis. Beneath the output bar are the setpoint source and status indicators (see Table 4-3). (A pending enable condition for either of these indicators causes it to blink.) At the bottom of the Two Loop Display is the selection indicator block. The selection block is toggled back and forth under either CON module bar graph with the F3 push button. It indicates which bar graph set can be manipulated with the keypad push buttons. If the left or right process variable bar moves beyond one of its alarm limit indicators, the vertical axis starts flashing on and off to identify the out-of-tolerance CON module.

HORN OVERLAY -

( C O N T E N T S O F

A 0 0 9 A R E

’wALARMx’, L065 =

1, AND L063 = 0

TO ALLOW CON-

T E N T S O F A 0 0 9

TO BE SUPERIM-

POSED OVER DIS-

PLAY. IF ’ALARM’

I S E N T E R E D I N

A 0 0 9 W I T H O U T

THE ’w ’ AND ’x’,

T H E N B R A C K E T

POINTS DO NOT

APPEAR IN OVER-

LAY.)

FLASHING

VERTICAL AXIS

( S H O W N O F F )

IDENTIFIES

CON-0 MODULE.

(THE PV BAR HAS

M O V E D A B O V E

THE HIGH ALARM

INDICATOR. CON-

1 I S S E T F O R

H I G H , H I - H I

A L A R M S A N D I S

T H E R E F O R E

W I T H I N T O L E R-

ANCE.)

NOTE: ALL ALARMS SHOWN IN THIS FIGURE ARE FOR ILLUSTRATIVE PURPOSES ONLY AND

DO NOT REPRESENT REQUIRED SETTINGS FOR THE DIFFERENT CON MODULES.

CON-0 IS SET FOR HIGH/LOW (B335 = 0), CON-1 IS SET FOR HIGH/HI-HI (B340 = 4),

CON-2 IS SET FOR LOW/LO-LO (B345 = 5), AND CON-3 IS SET FOR HIGH/LOW SETPOINT

DEVIATION (B350 = 6).

Figure 4-9. Two Loop Point Displays 7 and 8 (Sheet 1 of 2)

4-21

RIGHT BAR GRAPH TAG NAME

LEFT BAR GRAPH TAG NAME

CONTROLLER SPAN (C115) +

CONTROLLER LOWER

RANGE (C116)

50 SEGMENT VERTICAL AXIS

CON0 ALARM LIMIT 1 (C103)*

SETPOINT

CON0 ALARM LIMIT 2 (C104)*

PV BAR

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE

(C116)

16 SEGMENT HORIZONTAL

AXIS

OUTPUT DYNAMIC BAR

53MC5000 Process Control Station

CONTROLLER SPAN (C187) +

CONTROLLER LOWER

RANGE (C188)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C151) +

CONTROLLER LOWER

RANGE (C152)

R/L - REMOTE/ LOCAL

SETPOINT CONTROL PB*

L = SETPOINT UP ARROW PB

CON1 ALARM LIMIT 1 (C139)

CON1 ALARM LIMIT 2 (C140)

L = SETPOINT DOWN ARROW

PB

AUTO/MANUAL OUTPUT

SELECTOR PB

M = DECREASE OUTPUT PB

CONTROLLER LOWER

RANGE (C152)

M = INCREASE OUTPUT PB

M = MANUAL, L = LOCAL

STATUS INDICATORS

CONTROLLER SPAN (C223) +

CONTROLLER LOWER

RANGE (C224)

CON3 ALARM LIMIT 1 (C211)

CON2 ALARM LIMIT 1 (C175)

CON2 ALARM LIMIT 2 (C176)

CONTROLLER LOWER

RANGE (C188)

SELECTION INDICATOR

BLOCK

CON3 ALARM LIMIT 2 (C212)

CONTROLLER LOWER

RANGE (C224)

*PB = PUSH BUTTON

MODE - ALARM RESET

F3 - SELECTION BLOCK TOGGLE

F2 - PAGE IN LIST OR PAGE FORWARD

F1 - NEXT DISPLAY GROUP OR PAGE BACK

Figure 4-9. Two Loop Point Displays 7 and 8 (Sheet 2 of 2)

4-22

Section 4. Operator Displays

4.5 POINT DISPLAYS 9, 10, 11, AND 12 - SINGLE LOOP WITH

HORIZONTAL TREND

The Single Loop With low-resolution Horizontal Trend display is illustrated in Figure 4-10. A typical display with a high alarm indication is shown first on sheet 1. On sheet 2 the tag name is shown appearing at the top of the display. The left side of the Single Loop With Horizontal Trend Display has a trend indicator that provides 2% resolution of the last 40 process variable samples taken.

The time frame for the trend indicator is determined by the sample rate of the process variable

(e.g., a sample taken every 2 seconds X 40 samples on the indicator = an 80 second trend indicator time frame). The indicator time frame appears on the left side of the display, directly below the graph baseline (shown as 80 S in the illustration). The right side of the display has a 50 segment vertical axis line with numeric values above and below it indicating its upper and lower ranges.

Left of the vertical axis line is the process variable bar. The top of the PV bar connects to the trend indicator. On the immediate right of the vertical axis line is the setpoint arrowhead. Alphanumeric legends and values are listed below the graph baseline, under the vertical axis lower range value. They are the engineering units (e.g., PERCENT), setpoint (SP) or ratio (RA), process variable (PV), and output value (OV) legends. The status indicators also appear below the graph baseline, but to the left of the SP and PV legends. There are no alarm limit indicators on this graphical display; however, the horn overlay appears at the top of the display and the alarm overlay appears directly below it.

HORN OVERLAY (A009

= ’wALARMx’, L065 = 1,

AND L063 = 0)

HIGH ALARM OVERLAY

PROCESS VARIABLE HAS

MOVED ABOVE

CONFIGURED UPPER

ALARM LIMIT (ALARM

INDICATORS DO NOT

APPEAR ON TREND

DISPLAY)

Figure 4-10. Point Displays 9 - 12, Single Loop with Horizontal Trend

(Sheet 1 of 2)

4-23

53MC5000 Process Control Station

CONTROL MODULE TAG

NAME (A000)

50 SEGMENT VERTICAL

AXIS

TREND LINE OF 40 SAMPLE

DOTS

PROCESS VARIABLE BAR

TREND INDICATOR TIME

FRAME (40 SAMPLES X 2

SEC TREND RATE = 80 SEC

TIME FRAME).

TREND RATE IS CON-0,

B336 OR TREND MODULE 0

B355). ACCEPTABLE TREND

RATES ARE 1,2,3,4,5,6,10,

12,15,20,30,AND 60 SEC. AN

INVALID VALUE CAUSES

THE NEXT LOWEST VALUE

TO BE USED. 0 = NO

TRENDING.

ENGINEERING UNITS (A001)

M = MANUAL, L = LOCAL

STATUS INDICATORS

SP = SETPOINT OR

RA = RATIO

PV = PROCESS VARIABLE

OV = OUTPUT VALUE

*PB = PUSH BUTTON

CON0 CONTROLLER SPAN

(C115) + CONTROLLER LOWER

RANGE (C116)

R/L - REMOTE/LOCAL

SETPOINT CONTROL PB*

L = SETPOINT UP ARROW PB

L = SETPOINT DOWN ARROW

PB

SETPOINT

AUTO/MANUAL OUTPUT

SELECTOR PB

M = DECREASE OUTPUT PB

CON0 CONTROLLER LOWER

RANGE (C116)

M = INCREASE OUTPUT PB

MODE - ALARM RESET

F2 - PAGE IN LIST OR PAGE FORWARD

F1 - NEXT DISPLAY GROUP OR PAGE BACK

TREND MODES (CON-0 B337 OR TREND MODULE 0 B356)

ARE AS FOLLOWS:

0 = INSTANTANEOUS VALUE. IF TREND RATE (TRR) = 2,

THEN SAMPLES AT EVERY 2ND SECOND ARE

RECORDED.

1 = AVERAGE VALUE. IF TRR = 2, THEN USE AVERAGE OF

ALL SAMPLES TAKEN FOR 2 SECONDS.

2 = MAXIMUM VALUE. IF TRR = 2, EACH SAMPLE IS TESTED

TO BE > EVERY SECOND FOR 2 SECONDS. LARGEST

IS USED IN TREND.

3 = MINIIMUM VALUE. IF TRR = 2, EACH SAMPLE IS TESTED

TO BE < EVERY SECOND FOR 2 SECONDS. SMALLEST

IS USED IN TREND.

Figure 4-10. Point Displays 9 - 12, Single Loop with Horizontal Trend

(Sheet 2 of 2)

4-24

Section 4. Operator Displays

4.6 DISPLAYS 13 TO 20 - PARAMETER MODULE DISPLAYS

Parameter Module Displays provide access to any datapoint for display or configuration purposes without entering engineer mode. Each display allows access to view and/or alter three parameter datapoint values in operator/control mode. As shown in Figure 4-11, a Parameter Display has seven information lines. There is a tag name at the top of the display. Beneath the tag name are three descriptive point names. Both the tag name and the descriptive point names can be legends that are 10 character each. Under each point name is a point value. If the Parameter Display is for viewing purposes only, there is a Modify Disable datapoint (e.g., L312 for Parameter Display module 0, see Table 5-11) that can be set when the Parameter Display Module is configured to prohibit altering all three of the displayed parameter point values in operator/control mode.

When modifications to the parameter values are allowed (Modify Disable = 0), a selector arrow appears to the left of one of the three point names. The selector arrow can be positioned at any of the three point names with the setpoint up/down push buttons. Pressing the F3 push button copies the point value under the selected point name to an edit line that appears at the bottom of the screen. New data values are selected on the edit line with the setpoint up/down push buttons which scroll through the controller character set. After each character is selected, it is shifted left with the output decrease push button so that a space exists on the edit line to enter another character using the setpoint push buttons. When the entire character string is completed, the F3 push button is pressed again to enter the string into the parameter point value under the point name that was selected. This procedure is summarized in Table 4-5. The edit procedure is abandoned if the

F1 push button is pressed instead of F3. The R/L and A/M push buttons are not applicable for the

Parameter Module Display.

Table 4-5. Editing a Parameter Value in Operator/Control Mode

Step Press Shift

Result

Press to

Locate

Target

Char.

Result

1

2

3

or

F3 hold

L locator

Position arrowhead to select parameter.

Copies value to edit line at bottom of display.

Datapoint contents are shifted right; only the locator point remains on the entry line.

4

5

L

N

∆ or

or

N

N

Puts first number on entry line.

Shifts N and puts second number on entry line.

Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all numbers are entered.

6

7 F3

Notes:

= space, N = any numeric value 0-9.

Enters the edited value into the parameter.

4-25

53MC5000 Process Control Station

HORN OVERLAY

(CONTENTS OF A009 ARE

’wALARMx’, L065 = 1, AND

L063 = 0 TO ALLOW CON-

TENTS OF A009 TO BE

SUPERIMPOSED OVER

DISPLAY. IF ’ALARM’ IS

ENTERED IN A009 WITHOUT

THE ’w’ AND ’x’, THEN

BRACKET POINTS DO NOT

APPEAR IN OVERLAY.)

NOTE: MODIFY DISABLE

(E.G., L312 FOR PARAMETER

MODULE 0) MUST BE A 0 TO

PERMIT POINT VALUE

ALTERATION IN

OPERATOR/CONTROL

MODE. IF MODIFY DISABLE IS

SET (E.G., L312 FOR PARAME-

TER MODULE 0 = 1), THEN

THE POINTER DOES NOT AP-

PEAR ON THE DISPLAY AND

THE EDIT LINE CANNOT BE IN-

VOKED TO ALTER THE VALUE

SELECTED WITH THE

POINTER.

PARAMETER MODULE 0

TITLE (A010)

POINT 1 NAME (A011 = PROP.

BAND)

LEGEND POINTER

POINT 1 VALUE (F084 = C106

WHICH CONTAINS THE

PROP. BAND VALUE)

POINT 2 NAME (A012 = RESET

TIME)

POINT 2 VALUE (F085 = C107

WHICH CONTAINS THE

RESET TIME VALUE)

POINT 3 NAME (A013 = DERV.

TIME)

POINT 3 VALUE (F086 = C108

WHICH CONTAINS THE

DERV. TIME VALUE)

EDIT LINE SHOWING PROP.

BAND VALUE TO BE

ALTERED.

R/L = NOT APPLICABLE

LEGEND POINTER UP MOTION

PB*

(EDIT LINE UP CHARACTER

SELECT)

LEGEND POINTER DOWN

MOTION PB (EDIT LINE

DOWN CHARACTER

SELECT)

A/M = NOT APPLICABLE

(EDIT LINE SHIFT LEFT

CURSOR CONTROL PB)

(EDIT LINE SHIFT RIGHT

CURSOR CONTROL PB)

MODE - ALARM RESET

F3 - INVOKES EDIT LINE AND IS THE

ENTER PUSH BUTTON

F2 - PAGE IN LIST OR PAGE FORWARD

*PB = PUSH BUTTON F1 - JUMP TO NEXT DISPLAY GROUP, PAGE

BACK, OR ABANDON THE EDIT OPERATION

(IF EDIT LINE IS DISPLAYED)

Figure 4-11. Displays 13 to 20 - Parameter Module Displays

4-26

Section 4. Operator Displays

4.7 DISPLAYS 21 AND 22 - DISCRETE STATUS DISPLAYS

There are two Discrete Status Displays, SDT0 and SDT1, that show the current state of sixteen logical parameters in the controller (eight parameters per display - see Figure 4-12). Each of the logical parameters has a dedicated set of configuration bits that determine how the status indicator appears on the display, whether or not an alarm will be generated when the indicator is active, and if operator/control mode access is permitted to alter the parameter state with the F3 push button.

The individual parameters of a display are selected with the setpoint up/down push buttons.

The Mode (M) bit indicates how the status indicator is displayed, which is also affected by three other parameters: SDT Alarm Enable (A), SDT State (S), and SDT Alarm Acknowledge (K). Dependent upon the contents of all four of these datapoint types, the status indicator can be displayed as 10 characters (10), the first five characters (1-5), or the second five characters (6-10).

(First five and second five character display modes are used to simulate the functions of push button switches.) Display modes include normal video, reverse video, flashing video, or flashing reverse video. The F3 push button can toggle the SDT State bit if the corresponding Modify Disable datapoint for that status indicator in the display is set to 0. If the Modify Disable datapoint for that status indicator legend = 1, then modification to that status indicator is inhibited. The selection pointer skips over inhibited status legends on the display; therefore, the F3 push button can not be used to toggle the SDT State bit. (See Table 5-10, Status Display Modules, for all SDT0 and SDT1 datapoint definitions. Also, it should be noted that for the 10 control strategies presented in this manual, STD0 is designated as a display only status screen and STD1 is designated as the operator input screen.)

The R/L, A/M,

, and

push buttons are not applicable for this display. The number of characters displayed for a status indicator, given the contents of the four parameters (MASK) is provided in Table 4-6.

Table 4-6. Status Indicator Display Modes

M A S K

0 0 0

0 0 1

0 1 0

0 1 1 0

Normal Video

1 - 10

1 - 10

Reverse Video

1 - 10

Flashing Video

1 - 10

(Reverse Video)

0 1 1

1 0 0

1 0 1

1 1 0

1 1 1

1

1 - 5

6 - 10

1 - 5

1 - 10

0

1 1 1 1 6 - 10

Notes: M = SDT Mode 0-7, A = SDT Alarm Enable 0-7, S = SDT State 0-7,

K = SDT Alarm Acknowledge 0-7.

6 - 10

(Normal Video)

4-27

53MC5000 Process Control Station

M A S K

0 0 1

MODIFY DISABLE 0 (L320) = 1

INHIBITING POINTER AT

ALARM A. POINTER

APPEARS FOR ALARMS B - H.

ALARM C = 1 - 10

CHARACTERS REVERSE

VIDEO.

TAG NAME (A063)

SELECTION POINTER

(MODIFY DISABLE 0 (L320) = 0;

THEREFORE, SELECTION

POINTER IS NOT INHIBITED AT

ALARM A.)

M A S (F3) K

1 0 0

1 - 5 CHARACTERS

NORMAL VIDEO

M A S (F3)

1 0 1

6 - 10 CHARACTERS

NORMAL VIDEO

K

POINT 1 NAME FOR SDT-1 (A064) = OPEN CLOSE*. F3 IS

PRESSED TO TOGGLE OPEN, THEN CLOSE, ON DISPLAY.

R/L = NOT APPLICABLE

SELECTION POINTER UP

MOTION PB

SELECTION POINTER

DOWN MOTION PB

NOT APPLICABLE

*OPEN CLOSE IS 10

CHARACTERS THAT

ARE ENTERED AS

SHOWN.

MODE - ALARM RESET

F3 - TOGGLES SDT STATE BIT (WHEN

IFY DISABLE = 0)

F2 - PAGE IN LIST OR PAGE FORWARD

F1 - JUMP TO NEXT DISPLAY GROUP OR PAGE BACK.

Figure 4-12. Displays 21 and 22 - Discrete Status Displays

4-28

Section 4. Operator Displays

4.8 DISPLAYS 23 TO 30 - TOTALIZER DISPLAYS

The Totalizer Display is illustrated in Figure 4-13. There are eight Totalizer Displays, one for each

Totalizer Module. Each Totalizer Display has a ten character tag name, a current value, and a ten character engineering units legend. The current value is the current running total in the accumulator. It is incremented at a rate determined by the configured input and scale factor. When the current value reaches the configured rollover value, the count in the accumulator restarts, which is visible on the display. Three push buttons are required to function for the Totalizer Display: F1,

F2, and Mode/Alarm. The R/L,

,

, A/M,

,

, and F3 push buttons are not applicable.

TOTALIZER TAG NAME

(A092)

CURRENT VALUE

(ACTUAL TOTAL-H032)

ENGINEERING UNITS

(A093)

MODE - ALARM RESET

F2 - PAGE IN LIST OR

PAGE FORWARD

F3 - JUMP TO NEXT

DISPLAY GROUP OR

PAGE BACK

HORN OVERLAY

(A009 = ’wALARMx’,

L065 = 1, AND L063 = 0)

Figure 4-13. Displays 23 to 30 - Totalizer Displays

4-29

53MC5000 Process Control Station

4.9 DISPLAY 31 - LOCATOR GRID

The Locator Grid is illustrated in Figure 4-14. It is used as a reference to determine the location of the current display being viewed relative to the other displays configured in the display list. The Locator Grid is invoked by pressing and holding the F1 or F2 push buttons while viewing the current display. (The current display should have been on the screen for a short time, otherwise the next display in the list will appear.) The current display reappears when the F1 or F2 push button is released. The Locator Grid can also be viewed just like any other display if it is configured in the display list (see Table 5-15, System Module for the Number of Groups [B017], Number of Displays per

Group [B018], and Display List [B021-B084] datapoint definitions). Configuring the Locator Grid in the display list does not eliminate the ability to momentarily invoke it as described above. Three push buttons are required to function for the Locator Grid Display: F1, F2, and Mode/Alarm. The

R/L,

,

, A/M,

,

, and F3 push buttons are not applicable. The grid in Figure 4-14 is typical for

Control Strategy 41, Four Loop Controller as described in Table 4-2, Generated Display Lists. It is two columns (groups) by five rows (displays within group) for a total of 10 displays. The illuminated cell in the display illustration indicates Four Loop CON0 - CON3 was the current display when the Locator Grid was invoked. Notice that the corresponding grid location in the table is shaded. The maximum size that any Locator Grid display can be is eight columns by eight rows for

64 cells (displays).

Pressing

F2

Pages to

Next

Display in

Group

Pressing F1 Jumps to Another Group

Group 1 Group 2

Four Loop CON0 -

CON3

Single Loop CON0 with

Horizontal Trend

Single Loop CON1 with

Horizontal Trend

Single Loop CON2 with

Horizontal Trend

Single Loop CON3 with

Horizontal Trend

Alarm Summary

System Status

Status Module 0

Status Module 1

Four Loop CON0 -

CON3

MODE/

ALARM

RESET

F2 - PAGE

IN LIST OR

PAGE FORWARD

F1 - JUMP TO NEXT

DISPLAY GROUP OR

PAGE BACK

Figure 4-14. Display 31- Locator Grid

4-30

Section 4. Operator Displays

4.10 POINT DISPLAY 32 - FOUR LOOP DISPLAY

The Four Loop Display is illustrated in Figure 4-15. A typical alarm indication is shown on sheet 1 of the illustration, followed by the display with item call-outs on sheet 2. The Four Loop Display has four abbreviated single bar graphs that appear simultaneously. Each bar graph represents an individual PID controller (CON module). A bar graph has a fifty segment vertical axis. Left of the vertical axis is the process variable bar. On the right side of the vertical axis is the setpoint arrowhead. The top line of the display has the unit tag name. Immediately beneath the unit tag name and above each vertical axis are the status indicators (e.g., M, A, R, and L, etc.). There is a selection pointer that appears below the bar graph bases and it is toggled from one bar graph to another with the F3 push button. The selection pointer indicates which bar graph can be manipulated with the keypad push buttons. Also, values in the four legend lines below the selection pointer change to reflect conditions of the selected bar graph loop. The four legends are CON-X, where X = 0-3,

SP for the setpoint value, PV for the process variable value, and OUT for the output value. If any of the process variable bars move beyond its configured alarm limits, its vertical axis starts flashing to identify the CON module with the alarm condition. If the horn overlay is configured (e.g., A009 =

’wALARMx’ or some suitable message, L065 = 1, and L063 = 0), then it blinks in reverse video.

The configured alarm limits do not appear as alarm indicators on each bar graph. All of the push buttons are active for the Four Loop Display.

HORN

OVERLAY

(A009 =

’wALARMx’,

L065 = 1, AND

L063 = 0)

FLASHING

VERTICAL AXIS

(SHOWN OFF)

IDENTIFIES

CON-0 MODULE

Figure 4-15. Point Display 32 - Four Loop Display (Sheet 1 of 2)

4-31

53MC5000 Process Control Station

CON-0

CON-1

CON-2

CON-3

UNIT TAG NAME (A008)

M = MANUAL, L = LOCAL

STATUS INDICATORS

PUSH BUTTONS (PBs)

AFFECT ONLY THE

SELECTED CON BAR

GRAPH

R/L = REMOTE/LOCAL

SETPOINT CONTROL PB

L = SETPOINT UP ARROW PB

50 SEGMENT VERTICAL

AXIS LINE

SETPOINT

PROCESS VARIABLE BAR

SELECTION POINTER

(TOGGLED BY F3)

L = SETPOINT DOWN ARROW

PB

AUTO/MANUAL OUTPUT

SELECTOR PB

M = DECREASE OUTPUT PB

M = INCREASE OUTPUT PB

LEGENDS - CON AND VALUES

CHANGE WHEN SELECTION

POINTER IS MOVED TO NEXT

BAR GRAPH

CON-X = CONTROL

MODULE

SP = SETPOINT

MODE - ALARM RESET

F3 - CON SELECTION POINTER TOGGLE

PV = PROCESS VARIABLE

OUT = OUTPUT VALUE

F2 - PAGE IN LIST OR PAGE FORWARD

F1 - NEXT DISPLAY GROUP OR PAGE BACK

4-32

Figure 4-15. Point Display 32 - Four Loop Display (Sheet 2 of 2)

Section 5. Configuration Parameters

5.0 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS

The configuration parameters provide the latitude to define the controller’s

personality attributes

, so that while still functioning within its designed specifications, it can perform application requirements with greater refinement. Typical configuration parameters are the fine tuning variables to set the controller’s responsiveness; the indicator zero point and span; the display tag names; engineering units of the process variable; and alarm limits, etc.

IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO DEFINE

ALL OF THE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS

, as commonly used default values may not have to be altered, certain parameter selections eliminate others, and the process application itself may not require specific controller attributes. Although all resident in a memory database as

datapoints

, the configuration parameters are clustered into modular groups as shown in Figure 5-1.

5.1 READY TO USE CONTROL STRATEGIES

Ready to use control strategies are listed in Table 5-1. More information about these control strategies is provided in their respective sections.

Table 5-1. Ready to Use Control Strategies

CS

1

20

41

Title

Single Loop Controller

Two Loop Controller

Four Loop Controller

Section

6

11

15

5.2 DATAPOINT TYPES

A parameter can be any one of six data types. Each data type represents a specific data format: integers, alphanumeric text strings, etc. A database module containing multiple parameters can have a mix of data types. The data types are defined in Table 5-2 as follows:

Table 5-2. Datapoint Types

Type Byte

Size

L

B

C

H

A

F

Format

1 Bit Represents a single binary bit that can have the value of 0 or 1.

1 Represents a positive integer with values from 0 to 255.

3

5

Represents real analog (floating point) values that have a resolution of one part in 32,768 (15 bits) and a dynamic range of

±

10

38

.

Represents high precision analog (floating point) values that have a resolution of one part in 2 billion (31 bits) and a dynamic range of

±

10

38

.

10 Represents text strings that can be 10 characters long.

5 Represents text strings that can be 5 characters long.

5-1

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Input

Modules

AI0

AI1

AI2

AI3

AI4

AI5

AI6

AI7

AI8

CON0

CON1

CON2

CON3

General Modules

SDT0

SDT1

Output

Modules

AO0

AO1

AO2

AO3

Multi I/O

Analog

Option

Multi I/O

Analog Option

Single

Channel

Analog

Input

Option

PAR0 TREND0 TOT0

PAR1 TREND1 TOT1

PAR2 TREND2 TOT2

PAR3 TREND3 TOT3

PAR4 TREND4 TOT4

PAR5 TREND5 TOT5

PAR6 TREND6 TOT6

PAR7 TREND7 TOT7

Control Algorithms

6DI/4DO

Option

16DI/DO

Option

(16 Modules

Maximum on

ITB)

DI8

DI9

DI10

DI11

DI12

DI13

DI14

DI15

DI16

DI0

DI1

DI2

DI3

DI4

DI5

DI6

DI7

DI17

FIX 1 (B000 = 1) Flexible Control Strategy or FIX 99 (B000 = 99) F-CIM or FIXs 2-89 & 101-255 (B000 = FIX Number)

F-TRAN DO8

DO9

DO10

DO11

DO12

DO13

DO14

DO15

DO16

DO0

DO1

DO2

DO3

DO4

DO5

DO6

DO7

DO17

6DI/4DO

Option

16DI/DO

Option (16

Modules

Maximum on

ITB)

External Communications

Mini DIN Configuration Port

Standard Communications (Datalink) (RS-485) COMM

MicroLink (RS-485) EXT0-23, COMM

= Does not require an Expansion Board with Option Cards and

associated ITBs (is provided with all controllers).

Notes: AI0-8 = Analog Input Modules, DI0-17 = Contact Closure

Input Modules, CON0-3 = Controller Modules, SDT0&1 = Status

Display Modules, PAR0-7 = Parameter Display Modules,

TREND0-7 = Trend Modules, TOT0-7 = Totalizer Modules

SYS = System Module, AO0-3 = Analog Output Modules,

DO0-17 = Contact Closure Output Modules,

COMM = Communication Module, EXT0-23 = External I/O Module

Figure 5-1. Database Modules

Micro-

Link

Option

5-2

Section 5. Configuration Parameters

5.3 CONFIGURING THE DATABASE MODULES

The datapoints in the database modules must be changed to reflect required alterations in the factory standard configuration or when the controller is re-configured. There are generally six datapoint parameter types contained in the eleven database modules. The parameter types affect network communications, display indications, input-output signals, trending, totalizing, and responsiveness of the controller. The eleven database modules of the 53MC5000A controller are described in Table 5-3. The 53MC5000B controller has a slightly re-organized menu structure in addition to a "module-mode" menu entry of datapoint values (refer to Section 3.12.4) but the basic function is identical. If the controller is to be connected to a MicroLink or Datalink network the Communication Module should be configured first. By configuring the Communication Module first, the remaining datapoint values can be entered using one of the personal computer application packages described in the in-text table for Section 3.2.

Table 5-3 is also a pointer to the descriptions of the database modules; the descriptions are presented as Tables 5-4 through 5-15. (Middle gray tone shading in any table cell means it is not applicable. Light gray tone shading in the default cell of a datapoint description indicates the datapoint contents are left unchanged after default. Black shading in the default cell of a datapoint description indicates the field contents are unpredictable after default.)

In cases where a parameter may be entered in either datapoint and module-mode modes, the selection value is shown in the following format:

datapoint value - module-mode selection for example: 0 - SNGL.

REFERENCE TABLES

REFERENCE VERSIONS OF ALL OF THE DATAPOINT MODULE TABLES

CAN BE FOUND AT THE BEGINNING OF APPENDIX D AS TABLES D-2

THROUGH D-13.

Table 5-3. Database Modules

Name

Analog In

Modules

Analog Out

Modules

Discrete In

Modules

1 of 2

Purpose

These modules are used to configure the voltage input characteristics

(e.g., input voltage range) and how the input signals are interpreted

(linear or square root representation). The nine Analog Input (AI0-8)

Modules can be configured separately.

The primary purpose of these modules are to set the 0 - 20 mA output signals relative to the displayed percent outputs. The four Analog

Output (AO0-3) Modules can be configured separately.

These modules allow the action of the DIs to be reversed (normally a closed contact = 1, but can be change to = 0). The 18 Contact

Closure Input (DI0-17) Modules can be configured separately.

See

Table

5-4

5-5

5-6

5-3

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 5-3. Database Modules

2 of 2

Name Purpose

Discrete Out

Modules

External

Module

Control

Modules

Status

Modules

Parameter

Modules

Trend Modules

These modules allow the action of a DOs to be reversed (normally a closed contact = 1, but can be changed to = 0). The 18 Contact

Closure Output (DO0-17) Modules can be configured separately.

This module provides the ability to transfer data to/from other MICRO-

DCI controllers or instruments through the MicroLink peer-to-peer communications network. It provides 24 (0-23) tasks, each capable of performing a read, write, or bidirectional operation.

The primary purpose of these modules are to affect the action of the control algorithms and the content of the control loop displays. They are used to set the controller’s responsiveness, Alarm Limits 1 & 2,

Alarm Dead Band, and the range limits (e.g., 0 - 100, -20 - 80.), etc.

There are four Controller Modules (CON0-3) that can be configured separately, one for each control loop display.

There are two Status Modules that can be configured separately.

Each module displays eight logical status indicators that can also generate alarms when enabled.

These modules provide quick push button display access to any three selected datapoints for viewing or modifying (e.g., Alarm Limits 1 & 2 and Alarm Dead Band) without the necessity of entering Engineer mode and addressing the datapoints. There are eight Parameter

Display Modules that can be configured separately.

There are eight Trend Modules that can be configured separately.

Each Trend Module provides storage of the last 80 samples of the specified input. The first four Trend Modules can be attached to the four CON Modules if the Trend Rate datapoint in the appropriate CON

Module is non-zero. When a Trend Module is attached to its appropriate CON Module, height, rate, mode, span, zero, and designator parameters are overwritten with values from the CON

Module.

Totalizer Modules There are eight totalizer modules that can be configured separately.

Each module provides a

totalization

(integration) of a specified input.

Sampling occurs once a second, whenever the input parameter contains a valid datapoint specification.

System Module This module contains unit level parameters for controlling overall operations as well as selecting and enabling various features. It is used to select the desired controller operating algorithm and execute rate, build the display list, configure Datalink, Microlink, and gateway parameters (to configure the MicroLink and gateway parameters, see

Instruction Bulletin 53MC9011, Revision 2, MicroLink.)

See

Table

5-7

5-8

5-9

5-10

5-11

5-12

5-13

5-14

5-4

5.4 ANALOG INPUT MODULES (AI0-8)

The Analog Input Modules (AI0-8) are used to configure the characteristics of each input. Inputs AI4 through AI8 are active only if the appropriate hardware option is installed. The nine Analog Input Modules are listed in Table 5-4. Each module can be configured separately.

Table 5-4. Analog Input Modules (AI0-8)

Title Definition

Analog Input This is the value in engineering units of the measured input after all signal conditioning has been applied.

Engineering

Span

This value determines the upper range the analog input represents in engineering units. The upper range value equals Engineering

Zero plus Engineering Span.

Engineering

Zero

Digital Filter

Index

This is the lower range value.

This entry controls a first order filter that is applied to the input signal.

The time constant is entered as an index value as follows:

0 - None (no effect),

1 - 0.05 s 6 - 3.1 s 11 - 102 s

2 - 0.1 s 7 - 6.3 s 12 - 205 s

3 - 0.3 s 8 - 12.7 s 13 - 410 s

4 - 0.7 s 9 - 25.5 s 14 - 819 s

5 - 1.5 s 10 - 51.1 s 15 - 1638 s

Signal Base This value specifies the signaling range of the input.

0 - 4-20 mA (1 - 5V)

1 - 0-20 mA (0 - 5V)

Atom

AI

(0-8)

SPAN

(0-8)

ZERO

(0-8)

DFILT

(0-8)

BASE

(0-8)

1 of 3

AI0 AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6 AI7 AI8 Default

H000 H001 H002 H003 H004 H005 H006 H007 H008 0

C256 C257 C258 C259 C260 C261 C262 C263 C264 100/0

C276 C277 C278 C279 C280 C281 C282 C283 C284

B269 B270 B271 B272 B273 B274 B275 B276 B277

L416 L417 L418 L419 L420 L421 L422 L423 L424

0

3

0

Table 5-4. Analog Input Modules (AI0-8)

Title

Square Root

Signal

Calibrate

Zero

Calibrate

Span

Frequency

Input

Definition

This value specifies the characteristics of the signaling input as either linear or square root.

0 - Linear

1 - Square Root

When square root is selected, input signals less than 1% after linearization (10% input range) force the input to its zero value.

This is the calibration zero adjustment. This parameter is factory set and should not need adjustment under normal operation. See Section 18.4 for additional information.

This is the calibration span adjustment. This parameter is factory set and should not need adjustment under normal operation. See Section 18.4 for additional information.

This specifies whether the signaling input is a voltage or frequency.

0 - Voltage

1 - Frequency

The value of the input becomes

(Span X Freq) + Zero

See Section 1, Specifications, for duty cycle input requirements.

Atom

SQRT

(0-8)

CIZ

(0-8)

CIS

(0-8)

FREQ

(0-8)

2 of 3

AI0 AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6 AI7 AI8 Default

L440 L441 L442 L443 L444 L445 L446 L447 L448 0

B263 B264 B265 B266

C296 C297 C298 C299

L468 L469 L470 L471 0

Table 5-4. Analog Input Modules (AI0-8)

Title

Scan Pulse

Count

Pulse

Total

Tag Name

Engineering

Units

Definition

When the input is configured for a frequency input, this number represents the number of pulses received since the last time the

F-TRAN program was started.

This value is the summation of the

SCAN PULSE COUNTS (e.g. for

AI5, the value in C66 is added to

H66). The count value resets to 0.0

when it reaches 10,000,000.

It is an assignable 10 character name for the analog input.

It is assignable as units of measure the AI represents (e.g., GPM for gallons/minute).

Atom

AIPI

(5-7)

AIPC

(5-7)

EU

AI0 AI1 AI2 AI3

3 of 3

AI4 AI5 AI6 AI7 AI8 Default

C066 C065 C064 0

H066 H065 H064

TAG A224 A225 A226 A227 A228 A229 A230 A231 A232

A298 A299 A300 A301 A302 A303 A304 A305 A306

0

5.5 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULES (AO0-3)

The Analog Output Modules (AO0-3) are used to configure the characteristics of each output. Outputs AO2 and AO3 are active only if the appropriate hardware option is installed. The four Analog Output Modules are provided in Table 5-5. Each one can be configured separately.

Table 5-5. Analog Output Modules (AO0-3)

Title

Analog Output

Signal Base

Calibrate Zero

Calibrate Span

Tag Name

Definition

The value in this datapoint represents the percent of output to be generated by hardware (e.g., 100% output = 20 mA).

This value specifies the signaling range of the output:

0 - 4-20 mA

1 - 0-20 mA

This is the calibration zero adjustment.

This parameter is factory set and should not need adjustment under normal operation. See Section 18.4 for additional information.

This is the calibration span adjustment.

This parameter is factory set and should not need adjustment under normal operation. See Section 18.4 for additional information.

It is an assignable 10 character name for the analog output (AO0).

Atom

AO

(0-3)

BASE

(0-3)

COZ

(0-3)

COS

(0-3)

TAG

AO0

C000

L472

B267

C300

A244

AO1

C001

L473

B268

C301

A245

AO2

C002

L474

AO3

C003

Default

0

L475 0

A246 A247

5.6 DISCRETE INPUT MODULES (DI0-17)

The Discrete Input Modules (DI0-17) generate logic levels based on the applied voltages or contact condition on the associated terminals. Inputs DI2-17 are active only when the appropriate hardware options are installed. The 18 Discrete Input Modules are provided in

Table 5-6. Each one can be configured separately (total combined DIs and DOs for controller cannot exceed 18).

Table 5-6. Discrete Input Modules (DI0-17)

Title Definition

Discrete Input This is an indication of the applied signal level after INV conditioning (see below).

Input Invert

Tag Name

Title

This parameter specifies the signaling protocol to use for the

DI value (see above):

0 - 1-ON

1 - 0-ON

Input: Open, 4-24VDC (OFF)

INV 0, 1-ON DI=0

INV 1, 0-ON DI=1

Input: Closed, <1VDC (ON)

INV 0, 1-ON DI=1

INV 1, 0-ON DI=0

It is an assignable 10 character name for the contact control input.

Definition

Atom

DI

(0-8)

DI

0

DI

1

DI

2

DI

3

DI

4

DI

5

DI

6

DI

7

DI

8

L000 L001 L002 L003 L004 L005 L006 L007 L008

INV

(0-8)

L264 L265 L266 L267 L268 L269 L270 L271 L272

TAG A262 A263 A264 A265 A266 A267 A268 A269 A270

Discrete Input

Input Invert

Tag Name

Same as above.

Default

0

0

Atom DI

9

DI

10

DI

11

DI

12

DI

13

DI

14

DI

15

DI

16

DI

17

DI

(9-17)

INV

(9-17)

L009

L273

L010

L274

L011

L275

L012

L276

L013

L277

L014

L278

L015

L279

L016

L280

L017

L281

TAG A271 A272 A273 A274 A275 A276 A277 A278 A279

Default

0

0

5.7 DISCRETE OUTPUT MODULES (DO0-17)

The Discrete Output Modules (DO0-17) convert a logic level to a hardware contact condition. Outputs DO2-17 are active only when the appropriate hardware options are installed. The 18 Discrete Output Modules are provided in Table 5-7. Each one can be configured separately (total combined DIs and DOs for controller cannot exceed 18).

Table 5-7. Discrete Output Modules (DO0-17)

Title Definition Atom

Discrete Output The value in this datapoint represents the condition to be generated by the hardware.

Output Invert This parameter specifies the output signaling protocol used for the DO value (see above):

0 - 1-ON

1 - 0-ON

Output: Open,

INV 0, 1-ON DO=0

INV 1, 0-ON DO=1

Output: Closed,

INV 0, 1-ON DO=1

INV 1, 0-ON DO=0

Tag Name It is an assignable 10 character name for the contact control output.

Title Definition

DO

(0-8)

INV

(0-8)

DO

0

DO

1

DO

2

DO

3

DO

4

DO

5

DO

6

DO

7

DO

8

L024 L025 L026 L027 L028 L029 L030 L031 L032

L288 L289 L290 L291 L292 L293 L294 L295 L296

TAG A280 A281 A282 A283 A284 A285 A286 A287 A288

Discrete Output

Output Invert

Tag Name

Same as above.

Default

0

0

Atom DO

9

DO

10

DO

11

DO

12

DO

13

DO

14

DO

15

DO

16

DO

17

DO

(9-17)

INV

(9-17)

L033

L297

L034

L298

L035

L299

L036

L300

L037

L301

L038

L302

L039

L303

L040

L304

L041

L305

TAG A289 A290 A291 A292 A293 A294 A295 A296 A297

Default

0

0

5.8 EXTERNAL MODULE (TASKS 0-23)

The External Module provides a total of 24 (0-23) tasks that are used to transfer data between the controller and networked devices.

Each task is capable of performing a read, write, or bidirectional operation. To configure an External Module task, the following parameters listed in Table 5-8 must be specified:

A Remote Point(er) to the external device and its variable data, for example, 10H002 in a MicroLink peer-to-peer network would point to the variable data of datapoint H002 in instrument 10 and similarly, PIC203.PV in a HART network would point to the variable data in the instrument tagged PIC203.

A Local Point(er) to the 53MC5000 Controller datapoint address that is either the data source for write and bidirectional operations or the variable data destination for a read operation. For example, C100 would access the controller PV for CON Module 0.

A Scan time, which determines the rate at which the task is repeated.

A Mode that specifies the type of data transfer (write, read, or bidirectional).

A Status, which does not have to be configured, as it indicates if the task execution was successfully completed within the defined scan time or not.

An example of a Task 0 read operation that accesses AI2 (datapoint H002) from controller 10 on the MicroLink network and stores the data into datapoint H092 in the local controller is as follows:

➀ REMOTE POINT, A128 = 10H002; ➁ LOCAL POINT, F352 = H092; ➂ SCAN, B400 = 5 FOR FIVE SECONDS; ➃ MODE, B424 = 1

TO READ THE VARIABLE DATA FROM THE ADDRESSED CONTROLLER AND WRITE IT TO THE DATAPOINT INDIRECTLY AD-

DRESSED BY THE LOCAL POINT; ➄ STATUS, L200 = 0 OR 1 (NOT CONFIGURED, IT IS AN INDICATOR).

This task configuration will have the following result:

➂ Every Scan of 5 seconds,

➃ Read

➀ AI2 from controller 10

➃ and write it

➁ to H092 as specified by the Local Point.

➄ The Task Status remains a 1 to indicate a successful operation.

Table 5-8. External Module (Tasks 0-23)

Title

Remote

Point

Definition

This parameter specifies the device and variable (or variable data source) to be accessed by the task. The format of the specification is dependent on the network being used.

Local

Point

The Remote Point and Local Point parameters must specify identical data types.

This parameter specifies the datapoint within the controller or instrument that is accessed by the task.

Scan

Mode

The Remote Point and Local Point parameters must specify identical data types.

Specifies the rate at which the task is executed. The time in seconds (0-255) that the task is to be repeated is loaded into this datapoint.

A value of 0 stops task execution.

This parameter indicates the type of access performed by the task:

0 - Off (No access performed).

1 - Read (from Remote Point and write to Local Point).

2 - Write (Read from Local Point and write to Remote

Point).

3 - Bider (Bidirectional. If the Local Point value changes, write that value to the Remote Point; otherwise, read the Remote Point value and write it to the Local Point).

Status Indicates the result of the last scheduled execution of the task:

0 - failed

1 - successful

Atom

RPT

(0-7)

2 of 2

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

A128 A130 A132 A134 A136 A138 A140 A142

LPT

(0-7)

F352 F353 F354 F355 F356 F357 F358 F359

SCAN

(0-7)

B400 B401 B402 B403 B404 B405 B406 B407

MODE

(0-7)

B424 B425 B426 B427 B428 B429 B430 B431

STAT

(0-7)

L200 L201 L202 L203 L204 L205 L206 L207

Table 5-8. External Module (Tasks 0-23)

Definition Title

Remote

Point

Local

Point

Scan

Same as above.

Mode

Status

Title

Remote

Point

Local

Point

Scan

Mode

Status

Definition

Same as above.

2 of 2

Atom

RPT

(8-15)

LPT

(8-15)

SCAN

(8-15)

MODE

(8-15)

STAT

(8-15)

Atom

RPT

(16-23)

LPT

(16-23)

SCAN

(16-23)

MODE

(16-23)

STAT

(16-23)

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

A144 A146 A148 A150 A152 A154 A156 A158

F360 F361 F362 F363 F364 F365 F366 F367

B408 B409 B410 B411 B412 B413 B414 B415

B432 B433 B434 B435 B436 B437 B438 B439

L208 L209 L210 L211 L212 L213 L214 L215

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

A160 A162 A164 A166 A168 A170 A172 A174

F368 F369 F370 F371 F372 F373 F374 F375

B416 B417 B418 B419 B420 B421 B422 B423

B440 B441 B442 B443 B444 B445 B446 B447

L216 L217 L218 L219 L220 L221 L222 L223

5.9 CONTROLLER MODULES (CON0-3)

These modules affect the action of the control algorithms, the control loop displays, and control related functions (e.g., Auto Enable, etc.).

There are four Controller Modules (CON0-3) that can be configured separately, one for each control loop display. The number of control loops provided by a controller is model number dependent.

Table 5-9. Controller Modules (CON0-3)

Title

Control Alarm Mode

Definition

This parameter specifies the Alarm action (PA1

& PA2) of the two Alarm Limits (PL1 & PL2):

0 - H/L PA1: High when PV> PL1

PA2: Low when PV< PL2

1 - OFF - None

2 - H/- PA1: High when PV> PL1

PA2: not affected

3 - -/L PA1: not affected

PA2: Low when PV< PL1

4 - H/HH PA1: High when PV> PL1

PA2: Hi-Hi when PV> PL2

5 - L/LL PA1: Low when PV< PL1

PA2: Lo-Lo when PV< PL2

6 - DEV PA1: Hi-Dev when Dev > PL1

PA2: Lo-Dev when Dev < PL2

(Examples are in the cell that follows.)

Atom

AIX

(0-3)

1 of 9

CON0 CON1 CON2 CON3 Default

B335 B340 B345 B350 1

Table 5-9. Controller Modules (CON0-3)

2 of 9

Title Definition Atom CON0 CON1 CON2 CON3 Default

Alarm Examples:

B335 PV PL1 PL2 Alarm Setpoint Notes

(C103) (C104)

0 >60 60 HIGH Alarm Limit 1 is set for 60. If PV exceeds 60 = HIGH alarm.

0 <40 40 LOW Alarm Limit 2 is set for 40. If PV falls below 40 = LOW alarm.

2 >60 60 HIGH Alarm Limit 1 is set for 60. If PV exceeds 60 = HIGH alarm.

2 <40 40 N/A Alarm Limit 2 is set for 40. If PV falls below 40 = no alarm condition.

3 >60 60 N/A Alarm Limit 1 is set for 60. If PV exceeds 60 = no alarm condition.

3 <40 40 LOW Alarm Limit 2 is set for 40. If PV falls below 40 = LOW alarm.

4 >60 60 HIGH Alarm Limit 1 is set for 60. If PV exceeds 60 = HIGH alarm.

4 >70 70 HI-HI Alarm Limit 2 is set for 70. If PV exceeds 70 = HI-HI alarm.

5 <40 40 LOW Alarm Limit 1 is set for 40. If PV falls below 40 = LOW alarm.

5 <30 30 LO-LO Alarm Limit 2 is set for 30. If PV falls below 30 = LO-LO alarm.

6 >50 10 HI-DEV 40 Alarm Limit 1 = 10, Setpoint at 40. If PV exceeds 50 = HI-DEV alarm.

6 <30 -10 LO-DEV 40 Alarm Limit 2 = -10, Setpoint at 40. If PV falls below 30 = LO-DEV alarm.

Trend Rate

Trend Mode

This parameter defines the sampling rate of the process variable trend display in seconds.

Valid inputs are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15,

20, 30, and 60 seconds. When this value is non-zero, the corresponding Trend Module monitors PV (See Note below).

This parameter specifies the mode of the process variable trend as follows:

0 - INST. (use instantaneous samples)

1 - AVG. (average of 1 second samples)

2 - MAX. (maximum from 1 second samples)

3 - MIN. (minimum from 1 second samples)

CTR

(0-3)

CTM

(0-3)

B336 B341 B346 B351 B336 = 2

B341,

B346, and

B351 = 0.

B337 B342 B347 B352 0

Table 5-9. Controller Modules (CON0-3)

Title

Setpoint Mode

Control Display Mode

SP Track Status

Output Track Status

Reverse Switch

Definition

This parameter specifies how the setpoint increase and decrease push buttons function when the controller is in remote:

0 - STD (push buttons have no effect).

1 - K-SP (push buttons adjust Remote Setpoint

Ratio, K1 - C113, etc.).

2 - B-SP (push buttons adjust Remote Setpoint

Bias, B1 - C112, etc.).

This parameter controls the type of point display that is used with the CON module.

0 - STD (Standard PID).

1 - IND (Indicator).

2 - LDR (Manual Loader).

3 - RCTRL (Ratio Controller).

4 - SEL (Automatic/Manual Station).

5 - RSEL (Ratio Automatic/Manual Station).

1 indicates the setpoint comes from Setpoint

Track Value (STV). 0 indicates the setpoint comes from the setpoint push buttons or is a

Remote Setpoint (RSP) dependent on the value of Remote Status (RMT).

1 indicates the output comes from the Output

Track Value (OTV). A 0 indicates the output comes from the output push buttons or the

Control Output (CO). Output Track Status is dependent on the value of Auto Status (AUT).

0 - DIR (When set to a 0 , the controller output increases as the process variable increases).

1 - REV (When set to a 1 , the controller output decreases as the process variable increases).

Atom

SPM

(0-3)

3 of 9

CON0 CON1 CON2 CON3 Default

B338 B343 B348 B353 0

CDM

(0-3)

B339 B344 B349 B354

SPTS

(0-3)

L104 L128 L152 L176

OVTS

(0-3)

L105 L129 L153 L177

RSW

(0-3)

L106 L130 L154 L178

0

0

0

1

Table 5-9. Controller Modules (CON0-3)

Auto Status

Title

Remote Status

Reverse Valve

Alarm A Active

Definition

When Output Track Status (OVTS) is 0 , 1 indicates Control Output (CO) is selected as the output. 0 indicates the output comes from the output push buttons.

When the Setpoint Track Status (SPTS) is 0 , 1 indicates the setpoint is derived from the

Remote Setpoint (RSP). 0 indicates it comes from the setpoint push buttons.

This parameter specifies the location of

Open/Close indicators in the control display.

1 means that 20 mA closes the valve. 0 indicates that 20 mA opens the valve.

See Control Alarm Mode (AIX).

Alarm B Active See Control Alarm Mode (AIX).

Auto Switch

Remote Switch

Auto Enable

This parameter is used in conjunction with

Auto Enable (AE) to allow the Control Output

(OUT) to become the auto/manual generator result Output (OUT).

This parameter is used in conjunction with

Remote Setpoint Enable (RE) to allow the modified Remote Setpoint to become the setpoint value to the setpoint generator.

When this parameter is set to a 1 , the Control

Output (CO) becomes the auto/manual generator result Output (OUT) if the Auto

Switch (SWA) is set to a 1 by the A/M push button or user program (F-TRAN, FCIM, or

FCS wire list).

Atom

AUT

(0-3)

4 of 9

CON0 CON1 CON2 CON3 Default

L107 L131 L155 L179 0

RMT

(0-3)

L108 L132 L156 L180

RSV

(0-3)

L109 L133 L157 L181

PA1

(0-3)

PA2

(0-3)

SWA

(0-3)

L110 L134 L158 L182

L111 L135 L159 L183

L112 L136 L160 L184

SWR

(0-3)

L113 L137 L161 L185

AE

(0-3)

L114 L138 L162 L186

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

Table 5-9. Controller Modules (CON0-3)

Title

Remote Setpoint Enable

Setpoint Track Switch

Definition

When this parameter is set to a 1 , the modified

Remote Setpoint is allowed to become the setpoint value of the setpoint generator if the

Remote Switch (SWR) is set to a 1 by the R/L push button or user program (F-TRAN, FCIM, or FCS wire list). See also remote setpoint modifiers Remote Setpoint Bias (B1) and

Remote Setpoint Ratio (K1).

See Setpoint Track Enable (STE).

Output Track Switch

SP Track Enable

Output Track Enable

See Output Track Enable (OTE).

When this parameter is configured to a 1 , the controller’s setpoint can be forced to match

Setpoint Track Value (STV) whenever the

Setpoint Track Switch (SWSPT) is a 0 . Based on the input sources for STP and SWSPT, process variable tracking, setpoint fallback, and setpoint override, as well as other setpoint schemes can be implemented in the local setpoint generator.

When this parameter is configured to a 1 , the controller’s setpoint can be forced to match

Output Track Value (OTV) whenever the

Output Track Switch (SWOVT) is a 0 . Based on the input sources for OTV and SWOVT, output fallback, and output override, as well as other output schemes can be implemented in the auto/manual switch generator.

Atom

RE

(0-3)

SWSPT

(0-3)

SWOVT

(0-3)

STE

(0-3)

L116 L140 L164 L188

L117 L141 L165 L189

L118 L142 L166 L190

OTE

(0-3)

5 of 9

CON0 CON1 CON2 CON3 Default

L115 L139 L163 L187 0

L119 L143 L167 L191

0

0

0

0

Table 5-9. Controller Modules (CON0-3)

Title

Manual Fallback Disable

Hard Manual Limit

Control Track Command

Definition

0 - OFF

1 - ON

A value of 1 during power-up means the controller auto/manual selector remains unchanged from when power was removed. A value of 0 causes the controller to always power-up with the selector in the manual position.

0 - OFF

1 - ON

A 1 causes the Output High and Low Limits

(OH, OL) to be applied to the output in manual operation. 0 means the output value is not limited in manual operation.

Used internally by the controller.

Control Alarm Acknowledge Used internally by the controller.

Alarm AA Past State Used internally by the controller.

Alarm AB Past State

Process Variable

Used internally by the controller.

The process variable used in the PID algorithm.

Setpoint

Output

Alarm Limit 1

Alarm Limit 2

The output of the setpoint generator.

The output of the Auto/Manual Selector.

This parameters is the point (in engineering units) where an alarm is triggered.

This parameters is the point (in engineering units) where an alarm is triggered.

Atom

MFD

(0-3)

6 of 9

CON0 CON1 CON2 CON3 Default

L120 L144 L168 L192 0

HML

(0-3)

LB

(0-3)

PV

(0-3)

SP

(0-3)

OUT

(0-3)

CTC

(0-3)

AK

(0-3)

LA

(0-3)

PL1

(0-3)

PL2

(0-3)

L122 L146 L170 L194

L123 L147 L171 L195

L125 L149 L173 L197

L126 L150 L174 L198

L127 L151 L175 L199

C100 C136 C172 C208

C101 C137 C173 C209

C102 C138 C174 C210

C103 C139 C175 C211

C104 C140 C176 C212

1

0

0

0

100

0

0

0

0

0

Table 5-9. Controller Modules (CON0-3)

Title

Alarm Dead Band

Proportional Band

Reset Time

Rate Time

Output High Limit

Output Low Limit

Definition

This parameter sets the activation/deactivation gap for the alarm. This value (in engineering units) defines an area of hysteresis at the alarm point.

This parameter is the percent of error required to move the output full scale for proportional action. It modifies the controller response in standard PID terms.

This parameter represents the number of minutes per repeat of integral action. It modifies the controller response in standard

PID terms.

This parameter value represents the minutes that proportional action is advanced (derivative action).

These values specify the maximum and minimum controller output value in percent.These values are applied to the output in manual operation when Hard Manual

Limiting (HML) is set to 1 .

Atom

ADB

(0-3)

PB

(0-3)

TR

(0-3)

7 of 9

CON0 CON1 CON2 CON3 Default

C105 C141 C177 C213 2

C106 C142 C178 C214

C107 C143 C179 C215

TD

(0-3)

C108 C144 C180 C216

OH (0-3) C109 C145 C181 C217

OL (0-3) C110 C146 C182 C218

100

0

0

100

0

Manual Reset

Remote SP Bias

Remote SP Ratio

This parameter determines the position of the valve (output) when the instrument is in

Automatic mode and the error is zero. (only in effect when TR = 0.)

This parameter and Remote SP Ratio (K1) allow the remote setpoint to be modified prior to input at the setpoint generator.

SP = [RSP X K1] + B1

This parameter and Remote SP Bias (B1) allow the Remote Setpoint (RSP) Input to be modified prior to input at the setpoint generator.

SP = [RSP X K1] + B1

MR

(0-3)

B1

(0-3)

K1

(0-3)

C111 C147 C183 C219

C112 C148 C184 C220

C113 C149 C185 C221

50

0

1

Table 5-9. Controller Modules (CON0-3)

Control Zone

Title Definition

This parameter defines a gap or dead band on either side of the setpoint. When the process variable is within this gap, proportional and integral output changes are suppressed.

Note that derivative changes are based on the PV and are therefore not affected.

Controller Span

Controller Lower Range

Setpoint Slew Rate

Output Slew Rate

Control Setpoint

Remote Setpoint

Atom

CZ

(0-3)

8 of 9

CON0 CON1 CON2 CON3 Default

C114 C150 C186 C222 0

These two parameters set the upper and lower values on the controller display. They permit the control action to be defined over a range independent of the process variable input range. They also determine the speed at which the setpoint changes when the up or down arrow push buttons are pressed.

This parameter imposes a ramp limit on the setpoint. When configured to a non-zero value, the setpoint used in the PID algorithm is allowed to change each scan time only by the amount configured. The final value of the setpoint is always displayed on the units display.

This value is the maximum output change in percent allowed for the PID algorithm. A zero disables output slewing. This value has no effect on the manual operation of the output.

The setpoint value that has setpoint slewing applied and is used internally to calculate the deviation for the PID function.

The value used to determine the setpoint when

Remote Status (RMT) is a 1 and Setpoint

Track Status (SPTS) is a 0 .

SP = [RSP x K1] + B1

IR (0-3) C115 C151 C187 C223

ILR (0-3) C116 C152 C188 C224

T1

(0-3)

T3

(0-3)

TSP

(0-3)

RSP

(0-3)

C117 C153 C189 C225

C118 C154 C190 C226

C119 C155 C191 C227

C120 C156 C192 C228

100

0

0

0

0

0

Table 5-9. Controller Modules (CON0-3)

Title

Deviation

Feed Forward

Control Output

Definition

The output of the deviation module and it equals Process Variable (PV) minus Control

Setpoint (TSP) modified by Control Zone (CZ).

This parameter is a bias value added to the output as necessitated by the process for proper control.

The output of the PID function.

Partial Output Term

Setpoint High Limit

Setpoint Low Limit

Reset Feedback

Setpoint Track Value

Output Track Value

Reset Generator

Rate Generator

Control Tagname

Engineering Units

Used internally by the controller

These two parameters are configured to indicate the maximum and minimum controller setpoint values allowed. They are applied to the final output of the setpoint generator and therefore affect the remote and track setpoint results.See Remote Setpoint Enable (RE) and

Setpoint Tracking Enable (STE).

A term used by the PID function to calculate the output.

The output of the Setpoint Generator when

Setpoint Track Status (SPTS) equals 1 .

The output of the Auto/Manual Selector when

Output Track Status (OVTS) equals 1 .

Used internally by the controller

Used internally by the controller

This is an assignable 10 character name that appears on the displays.

This is an assignable 10 character units of measure associated with the Process Variable

(PV).

SL (0-3) C126 C162 C198 C234

RF

(0-3)

STV

(0-3)

OTV

(0-3)

RN

(0-3)

DN

(0-3)

TAG

EU

Atom

DV

(0-3)

CON0 CON1 CON2 CON3

C121 C157 C193 C229

FF

(0-3)

C122 C158 C194 C230

CO

(0-3)

PN

(0-3)

C123

C124

C159

C160

C195

C196

C231

C232

SH (0-3) C125 C161 C197 C233

9 of 9

Default

0

0

0

0

100

0

C127 C163 C199 C235

C128 C164 C200 C236

C129 C165 C201 C237

0

0

0

H020 H023 H026 H029

H021 H024 H027 H030

0

0

A000 A002 A004 A006 CON-

0/1/2/3

A001 A003 A005 A007 PERCENT

5.10 STATUS MODULES (SDT0 AND SDT1)

There are two Status Modules (SDM) that can be configured separately. The two Status Modules each provide indication and push button access control for eight logical points in the controller. How the indicators appear for given conditions and alarms is dependent upon the configuration selections entered in the Status Modules. The display handler index numbers for the discrete status displays are 21 and 22, which correspond to status modules SDT0 and SDT1 respectively.

Table 5-10. Status Modules (SDT0 and SDT1)

Title

Tag

Point 1 Name

Point 2 Name

Point 3 Name

Point 4 Name

Point 5 Name

Point 6 Name

Point 7 Name

Point 8 Name

Point 0 State

Point 1 State

Point 2 State

Point 3 State

Point 4 State

Point 5 State

Point 6 State

Point 7 State

Definition

This parameter is a 10 character assignable name.

This is a 10 character name (e.g., PUMP ALARM) of the status point or two 5 character words (e.g., ON OFF, IN

OUT, START STOP). Each status point of an SDM has an associated name.

This parameter indicates the current condition of the individual points, which can be either 0 or 1 . It can be set to a 0 or 1 with the push buttons at the discrete status display or by F-TRAN, FCIM,or FCS execution.

1 of 4

Atom SDT0 SDT1 Default

TAG A054 A063 SDT0 , SDT1

STA A055 A064 SDT0 = A, SDT1 = I

STB A056 A065 SDT0 = B, SDT1 = J

STC A057 A066 SDT0 = C, SDT1 = K

STD A058 A067 SDT0 = D, SDT1 = L

STE A059 A068 SDT0 = E, SDT1 = M

STF A060 A069 SDT0 = F, SDT1 = N

STG A061 A070 SDT0 = G, SDT1 = O

STH A062 A071 SDT0 = H, SDT1 = P

SSA L336 L344 0

SSB L337 L345

SSC L338 L346

0

0

SSD L339 L347

SSE L340 L348

SSF L341 L349

SSG L342 L350

SSH L343 L351

0

0

0

0

0

Table 5-10. Status Modules (SDT0 and SDT1)

Title

Point 0 Mode

Point 1 Mode

Definition

Mode (SM) indicates how the Point Name is displayed, which is also affected by three other parameters: SDT

Alarm Enable (SA), SDT State (SS), and SDT Alarm

Acknowledge (SK). Dependent upon the contents of all four of these parameters,

0 - SNGL

1 - DUAL

Point 2 Mode

Point 3 Mode

Point 4 Mode the Point Name can be displayed as 10 characters (1-

10), the first 5 characters (1-5), or the second 5 characters (6-10). Display modes include normal video, reverse video, or blinking reverse video. A flashing horn overlay can also be displayed at the top of the discrete status presentation. The number of Point Name characters displayed for a particular display mode, given the contents of the four parameters, are as follows:

Flashing

Normal Reverse Blinking Horn

MASK Video Video Video Overlay

Point 5 Mode

Point 6 Mode

000X 1-10 - - No

001X - 1-10 - No

010X 1-10 - - No

0110 - - 1-10 Yes

100X 1-5 - - No

101X 6-10 - - No

110X 1-5 - - No

1110 - - 6-10 Yes

Point 7 Mode

Atom SDT0 SDT1

SMA L352 L360

SMB L353 L361

SMC L354 L362

SMD L355 L363

SME L356 L364

SMF L357 L365

SMG L358 L366

SMH L359 L367

Default

0

2 of 4

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Table 5-10. Status Modules (SDT0 and SDT1)

Title

Point 0 Alarm Enable

Point 1 Alarm Enable

Point 2 Alarm Enable

Point 3 Alarm Enable

Point 4 Alarm Enable

When this value is a 1

Definition

, the Horn bit (L065) is set when the corresponding SDT State changes from and SDT Alarm Acknowledge = 0 .

0 to 1 . The displayed Point Name flashes as long as SDT State = 1

Point 5 Alarm Enable

Point 6 Alarm Enable

Point 7 Alarm Enable

0 - OFF

1 - ON

SDT Alarm Acknowledge 0 This parameter is set to 1 whenever State (SS) changes

SDT Alarm Acknowledge 1 from 0 to 1. It indicates an unacknowledged alarm and

SDT Alarm Acknowledge 2 must be cleared to 0 to acknowledge the alarm.

SDT Alarm Acknowledge 3

SDT Alarm Acknowledge 4

SDT Alarm Acknowledge 5

SDT Alarm Acknowledge 6

SDT Alarm Acknowledge 7

SDT Last State Info 0 This parameter is used internally by the Controller.

SDT Last State Info 1

SDT Last State Info 2

SDT Last State Info 3

SDT Last State Info 4

SDT Last State Info 5

SDT Last State Info 6

SDT Last State Info 7

Atom SDT0 SDT1

SAA L368 L376

SAB L369 L377

SAC L370 L378

SAD L371 L379

SAE L372 L380

SAF L373 L381

SAG L374 L382

SAH L375 L383

SKA L384 L392

SKB L385 L393

SKC L386 L394

SKD L387 L395

SKE L388 L396

SKF L389 L397

SKG L390 L398

SKH L391 L399

SLA L400 L408

SLB L401 L409

SLC L402 L410

SLD L403 L411

SLE L404 L412

SLF L405 L413

SLG L406 L414

SLH L407 L415

Default

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

3 of 4

Table 5-10. Status Modules (SDT0 and SDT1)

Title

Modify Disable 0

Modify Disable 1

Modify Disable 2

Modify Disable 3

Modify Disable 4

Modify Disable 5

Modify Disable 6

Modify Disable 7

Definition

When set to a 1 , this parameter inhibits the operator from modifying the state of the corresponding individual points with the push buttons. (The arrow indicator on the SDT display skips over the inhibited points when the up/down faceplate push buttons are pressed.)

When set to a 0 , the operator can alter the state of the individual corresponding points with the push buttons.

0 - NO

1 - YES

Atom SDT0 SDT1

SDA L320 L328

SDB L321 L329

SDC L322 L330

SDD L323 L331

SDE L324 L332

SDF L325 L333

SDG L326 L334

SDH L327 L335

Display This is the index number for the display that provides access through the status module.

21 22

Default

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

4 of 4

5.11 PARAMETER MODULES

These modules provide quick operator access to any three selected datapoints (e.g., Alarm Limits 1 & 2 and Alarm Dead Band) without the necessity of entering Engineer mode and addressing the datapoints. There are eight Parameter Modules (0-7) that can be configured separately.

Table 5-11. Parameter Modules

Title

Title

Point 1

Name

Point 2

Name

Point 3

Name

Point 1

Designator

Point 2

Designator

Point 3

Designator

Modify

Disable

Definition

It is an assignable 10 character name that appears with the parameter display.

It is an assignable 10 character name for the Point

1 Designator.

It is an assignable 10 character name for the Point

2 Designator.

It is an assignable 10 character name for the Point

3 Designator.

A database datapoint whose contents will be displayed under the Point 1 Name (e.g., C103 to display the Alarm Limit 1 setting).

A database datapoint whose contents will be displayed under the Point 2 Name (e.g., C104 to display the Alarm Limit 2 setting).

A database datapoint whose contents will be displayed under the Point 3 Name (e.g., C105 to display the Alarm Dead Band).

When this value is 1 , the datapoints in this module can not be altered with the push buttons. The values of these datapoints are only for display purposes. When this value is 0 , the datapoints in this module can be altered by the operator with the push buttons when this module is displayed.

Display This is the index number for the display that provides access through the parameter module.

Atom 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Default

TAG A010 A014 A018 A022 A026 A030 A034 A038

PNA

(0-7)

PNB

(0-7)

PNC

(0-7)

PDA

(0-7)

A011 A015 A019 A023 A027 A031 A035 A039

A012 A016 A020 A024 A028 A032 A036 A040

A013 A017 A021 A025 A029 A033 A037 A041

F084 F087 F090 F093 F096 F099 F102 F105

PDB

(0-7)

F085 F088 F091 F094 F097 F100 F103 F106

PDC

(0-7)

F086 F089 F092 F095 F098 F101 F104 F107

PMD

(0-7)

L312 L313 L314 L315 L316 L317 L318 L319 0

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

5.12 TREND MODULES

There are eight configurable Trend Modules that can be configured separately. Each Trend Module provides storage of the last 80 samples of the specified input (the last 40 samples are displayed on the point trend line). The first four Trend Modules are attached to the

CON Modules if the Trend Rate datapoint in the CON Module is non-zero. If the trend is attached to a CON Module, then height, rate, mode, span, zero, and designator parameters are overwritten with values from the CON Module.

Table 5-12. Trend Modules

Title

Trend

Rate

Trend

Span

Definition

This parameter defines the recording rate in seconds of the selected datapoint. Valid inputs are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,

6, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30, and 60 seconds. A value of 0 turns off the trending.

Samples outside this range are recorded at the limits.

When controlled by the CON module, values for these datapoints come from the Controller Span and

Controller Lower Range.

This parameter is used internally by the controller.

Trend

Work

Area

Tag A 10 character assignable name to identify each trend.

Atom

TRR

(0-7)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Default

B355 B358 B361 B364 B367 B370 B373 B376 0

TRS

(0-7)

C303 C305 C307 C309 C311 C313 C315 C317

TRW

(0-7)

H056 H057 H058 H059 H060 H061 H062 H063

TAG A072 A074 A076 A078 A080 A082 A084 A086

0

0

Trend

Eng

Unit

Trend

Point

Designator

A 10 character assignable name that indicates the units of measure which are being trended.

This parameter designates the datapoint to be recorded. It can contain any L, B, C, or H datapoint specifier. When controlled by the CON module, this parameter is set to the PV (specified datapoint) of the associated CON module.

EU A073 A075 A077 A079 A081 A083 A085 A087

TRP

(0-7)

F176 F177 F178 F179 F180 F181 F182 F183

Table 5-12. Trend Modules

Title

Trend

Mode

Trend

Height

Trend

Zero

Definition

This parameter specifies the sampling method used to record the selected datapoint. The time between successive samples for an individual trend is one second regardless of the Trend Rate (TRR - B355, etc.) value. The recorded value is a representation of all the samples within the specified recorded rate time interval. The available representations are as follows:

0 - INST.

1 - AVG.

2 - MAX.

3 - MIN.

0 = Instantaneous value. (If TRR = 5, then samples at every 5th second are recorded in the trend.)

1 = Average value. (If TRR = 5, then 5 samples are accumulated for 5 seconds and averaged. The average value is recorded in the trend.)

2 = Maximum value. (If TRR = 5, then each sample is tested to be greater than every second for 5 seconds and the result will be the largest value, which is recorded in the trend.)

3 = Minimum value. (If TRR = 5, then each sample is tested to be less than every second for 5 seconds and the result will be the lowest value, which is recorded in the trend.)

This parameter specifies the displayed height assigned to a full scale sampled value, which determines resolution and size of the trend display. When controlled by a CON module, this value is fixed at 50 .

These two parameters set the upper and lower trend display values in engineering units. The lowest value is displayed as 0 and the highest value corresponds to the height of the trend display.

Atom

TRM

(0-7)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Default

B356 B359 B362 B365 B368 B371 B374 B377 0

TRH

(0-7)

B357 B360 B363 B366 B369 B372 B375 B378

TRZ

(0-7)

C302 C304 C306 C308 C310 C312 C314 C316

47

0

5.13 TOTALIZER MODULES

There are eight Totalizer Modules that can be configured separately. Each module provides a

totalization

(integration) of a specified input. Sampling occurs once a second whenever the input parameter contains a valid datapoint specification.

Table 5-13. Totalizer Modules

Parameter

Tag

Engineering Units

Input

Scale Factor

Definition

It is an assignable 10 character name that is associated with each totalizer.

Each totalizer has an assignable 10 character name that appears on the display as the units of measure.

This parameter designates the datapoint to be totalized. it can be any B, C, or H datapoint, e.g.,

C100 for totalizing CON0 PV.

The value of the input is multiplied by this parameter prior to being summed to the running total. This parameter is used for both scaling and time interval integration. For example, if AI0 is in M gallons/day, in order to totalize in k gallons the scale factor (SF) would be:

SF = [Units Conversion] X [Time Base Conversion]

SF = [1000 k gal / M gal] X [(1 day/24 hrs) X (1 hr/60 mins) X (1 min/60 sec) X (1 sec/sample)] =

1000/86400 = 0.01157

Note: The time between totalizer updates is one second.

TMPT

(0-7)

F216 F217 F218 F219 F220 F221 F222 F223

TMF

(0-7)

1 of 2

Symbol 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Default

TAG A092 A094 A096 A098 A100 A102 A104 A106

EU A093 A095 A097 A099 A101 A103 A105 A107

C318 C320 C322 C324 C326 C328 C330 C332 0

Rollover

Value

Dropout

Value

Reset

This parameter specifies the maximum value of the totalizer. When the total reaches this value it is reset to 0.0; however, totalizing continues. This value must be a positive number.

When the input value is less than this value, no change in the total occurs.

This parameter acts like a momentary switch. When this parameter is set to 1 the total is forced to 0.0 and then this parameter is reset to 0 .

TMM

(0-7)

H048 H049 H050 H051 H052 H053 H054 H055

TMD

(0-7)

TMR

(0-7)

C319 C321 C323 C325 C327 C329 C331 C333

L232 L233 L234 L235 L236 L237 L238 L239

0

0

0

Table 5-13. Totalizer Modules

Parameter

Actual

Total

Output

Pulse

Display

Definition

This parameter indicates the integer value of the total accumulation.

This value is pulsed to a 1 for one scan each time the actual total reaches the rollover value.

This is the index number for the display that provides access through the totalizer module.

2 of 2

Symbol 0

TO

(0-7)

TMP

(0-7)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

H032 H033 H034 H035 H036 H037 H038 H039

L224 L225 L226 L227 L228 L229 L230 L231

Default

0

0

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

5.14 SYSTEM MODULE

This module controls and monitors the loading, scheduling and execution of the operations algorithms; as well as the display appearance, network communications, counter/timer settings and hardware status indicators.

Table 5-14. System Module

Title Definition Atom Datapoint

TAG A008

1 of 6

Default

MC

5000

Unit Tag

Name

Function

Index

Function

Index

Match

Scan

Index

Scan File

Overrun

Counter

Background

Program

This parameter indicates the name that is displayed as the Controller Name and should not be confused with the loop tag names.

The operational algorithm of the unit is selected by the value of this parameter.

0 = No Control Algorithm Execution.

1 = Execute Flexible Control Strategy (or Custom EPROM).

2 - 89 = Execute User F-TRAN Program (or Custom EPROM).

90 - 96 = Reserved.

97 = Display Test.

98 = Default Database.

99 = Execute F-CIM Module.

100 = Special Approval (Custom EPROM).

101 - 255 = Execute User F-TRAN Program.

The AOs will be forced to 0 mA, all of the DOs will be forced open, and datapoint B000 will be set to 0 whenever datapoint B333 contains a value other than 0 that does not match the value of datapoint B000. For example, B000 = 1 to indicate FIX 1 is functioning and B333 = 1, any undesirable event that causes the value of B000 to change, and therefore alter the controller FIX operating mode, will cause a forced output condition, as B333

B000. B000 will be set to 0.

This parameter determines the frequency of execution of the operation selected. The repetition period equals B003 X 50 mS . This value should be set to the smallest value possible without causing the Scan File Overrun Counter (OVR - B004) to increment. For example, setting this value to 2 , means 100 mS (2 X 50 mS) is allocated per scan to complete the necessary input, output, and algorithm functions required by the selected FIX, FCS wire list (Link List), F-CIM module, or F-TRAN program.

This parameter is incremented whenever the execution of the control algorithm exceeds the repetition period specified in Scan Index (SCAN - B003). Each time an increment occurs, one pass of the control algorithm is skipped. In order to stop overruns, increase the value of the

Scan Index (SCAN - B003).

This parameter is used to implement the EASY TUNE algorithm. When set to 1 EASY TUNE operation is initiated.

FIX

FXM

SCAN B003

OVR

B000

B333

B004

BACK B008

0

0

1

0

0

Table 5-14. System Module

Title

2 of 6

Definition Atom Datapoint

Background

Scan Index

Background

Overrun

Counter

Power-Up

Status

Link List

Load

This parameter directs how often the display is renewed and when activated with Background

Program (BACK - B008), the period for executing the EASY-TUNE algorithm. The period realized equals B006 X B003 X 50 mS .

This parameter is incremented whenever the execution time of the display program and background program exceed the repetition rate realized by SCAN X BSCAN. Each time an increment occurs, one pass of the display update and background program is skipped. In order to stop overruns, increase the value of the Scan Index (SCAN - B003) or the Background Scan

Index (BSCAN - B006).

This datapoint is forced to 1 whenever a unit power-up sequence is initiated. If the value is cleared to 0, it may be monitored to detect unexpected power cycling or restart activity.

This parameter loads the Control Strategy Wirelists. Configuring this value forces the FIX to 0 and installs the selected wirelist and any associated database changes, then returns the value to 0 . If a non-existent control strategy is selected, the default wirelist is loaded.

Model

Number Low

Model

Number High

Unit

Identifier

License Key

Process

Control

Station

Display

Type

This datapoint contains the first 10 characters of the controller model number.

This datapoint contains the remaining controller model number characters starting from the eleventh character.

This parameter contains the unique identifier code assigned to the unit. The value is obtained from hardware.

This atom contains the key code to activate functionality. The value is initially assigned at the factory.Upgrade keys may be loaded in the field.

This atom indicates which processor controller hardware is attached. It is assigned by internal code and must not be overwritten.

0 - Standard

1 - Enhanced

This atom indicates which display hardware is attached. It is assigned an internal code and must not be overwritten.

0 - Standard Display [48 x 96]

1 - HiRes Display [96 x 192

BSCAN B006

BOVR B007

PWRUP L066

LLD

UID

B016

A190

A191

A318

LKEY A319

PCS B093

DSPT B094

Default

1

0

0

0

Table 5-14. System Module

Title Definition

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

The value in each of these datapoints identifies the option card type occupying that slot. The value codes are:

1 = 6 Digital Input/4 Digital Output card

2 = Single Channel Analog Input (AI8) card

3 = Multichannel Analog I/O card

4 = 16 Digital Input/Digital Output card

5 = HART Modem Option card

128 = MicroLink card

129 = Auxiliary Processor Board (APB) Slot 5

Seconds

Minutes

Hours

Day

Month

Year

Counter

Mode

Instrument

Address

Run time counter/clock. These values increment in the time-units specified.

This parameter controls the operation of the RTC (run-time counter). When set, this bit value indicates that the RTC is to adjust for Leap Year treating YEAR value as years since 1900.

Additionally, in a 53MC5xxxBxxxxxxxxxx unit, the RTC atoms will continue counting during power-off when the atom is set.

It identifies the address of the controller or instrument on the network. Each unit connected to the network must have its own unique address. Valid addresses are from

0 - 31.

Atom Datapoint

SLT1 B095

3 of 6

Default

0

SLT2 B096 0

SLT3 B097

SLT4 B098

0

0

SLT5 B099

SEC B257

MIN B258

HOURS B259

DAY B260

MONTH B261

YEAR B262

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

CMODE L075 0

IA B001 0

Table 5-14. System Module

Title Definition

This datapoint value designates the baud rate (data transfer rate) of the Datalink network. The baud rate must be the same for all of the instruments connected to the same Datalink network.

Datapoint values and their corresponding baud rates are as follows:

Baud Rate

No Parity

No Byte

Stuffing

Datalink

Disable

Initialization

Message

Value Baud Rate Value Baud Rate

255 28800 9 28800 Example: Entering a 6 or a 253

254 14400 8 14400 in this datapoint selects 9600

N/A N/A 7 19200 baud.

253 9600 6 9600

250 4800 5 4800

244 2400 4 2400

232 1200 3 1200

208 600 2 600

160 300 1 300

N/A N/A 0 110

This datapoint indicates if parity generation and checking should be turned on or off. It is set to

0 for even parity serial byte protocol. It is set to 1 for no parity protocol.

When set to a 1 , this datapoint disables the standard F&P communication protocol feature which inserts a 00 (NUL) byte after every 7EH (SOH) that is not the beginning of a message. (This permits user written communications software to determine the number of bytes to expect in a response message.) It must be set to 0 when using F&P communications software or equipment.

When set to 0 , it permits full Datalink communication capabilities. When set to 1 , it disables

Datalink communication capabilities.

If datapoints A188 and A189 are configured to NON-NULL values, their contents will be transmitted onto the Datalink network at reset/power-up. Prior to transmitting, a delay based on the unit’s instrument address is observed. There is a one second delay between the transmission of datapoint A188 and datapoint A189 contents. Datapoints A188 and A189 can be configured as two NULL TERMINATED strings up to 10 characters each. For example, to initialize a Hayes compatible modem to Auto Answer, datapoint A188 would be configured to appear as follows: A188

L

ATS0=4

C

R

. This seven character string is an Auto Answer command that directs the modem to respond to calls on the fourth ring. Datapoint A189 is left at all NULL

VALUES for this example.

4 of 6

Atom Datapoint

Default

BR

CP

CB

DLD

IMA

IMB

B002 253

L256

L258

L257

0

0

0

A188

A189

NULL

NULL

Table 5-14. System Module

Title

Display

Program

Display

Brightness

Alarm

Disable

Alarm

Line

Display

List

Definition

5 of 6

Atom Datapoint

DSPL B005

Default

3 This value is the current display program index number.

This parameter controls the display screen intensity. For Model 53MC5000A controllers and

Model 53MC5000B controllers with the Low-Res display, index values from 0 to 7 determine brightest (0) to dimmest (7) intensity. This parameter has negligible effect on display brightness in 53MC5000B controller models with the Hi-Res display.

Alarm line annunciation can be inhibited. Normally when datapoint L065 is a 1, the contents of datapoint A009 are superimposed over the current display. If datapoint L063 is set to a 1, no superimposing will occur.

The value placed in this parameter will be presented at the top of the display whenever an unacknowledged alarm condition exists.

These datapoints contain the index numbers of the displays to be presented in the desired sequence. The display list is organized such that each group of displays is made of consecutive datapoints with one group immediately following the preceding group. The display list allows entries for up to 8 groups with 8 displays each. Index numbers correspond to any user written display program (see Customization Guide 53MC5000) or to the list of preprogrammed standard displays that is provided in Section 4.

A display list example of preprogrammed standard displays for a two loop controller (CON0 and

CON1) with a locator grid that has three display groups (three columns) and three displays per group (three rows) would be as follows:

B21 = 1 Alarm Summary (Column 1, Row 1)

B22 = 7 Two Loop CON0 and CON1 (Column 1, Row 2)

B23 = 21 Status Module 0 (Column 1, Row 3)

B24 = 14 Parameter Module 1 (Column 2, Row 1)

B25 = 9 Single Loop CON0 with Horizontal Trend (Column 2, Row 2)

B26 = 13 Parameter Module 0 (Column 2, Row 3)

B27 = 18 Parameter Module 5 (Column 3, Row 1)

B28 = 10 Single Loop CON1 with Horizontal Trend (Column 3, Row 2)

B29 = 17 Parameter Module 4 (Column 3, Row 3)

BRGT

NALIN L063

ALINE

B012

B021-

B084

4

0

A009 ALARM

Table 5-14. System Module

Title Definition

6 of 6

Atom Datapoint

Default

Number of

Groups

Number of

Displays

Per Group

This parameter dictates the number of groups that the display list represents. In the pop-up locator grid, this parameter represents the number of columns in the matrix. Valid numbers are from 1 to 8. When B017 contains a 1, F1 is the page forward push button and F2 is the page backward push button. When B017 contains a number greater than 1, F1 is the next group push button and F2 is the next display push button.

An example would be a two loop controller (CON0 and CON1) where it is desirable to have three display groups (three display grid columns): datapoint B017 would be configured to 3.

This parameter is the number of displays contained within each group. Each group must have the same number of displays. In the pop-up locator grid, this parameter represents the number of rows in the matrix. Valid numbers are from 1 to 8.

An example would be a two loop controller (CON0 and CON1) where it is desirable to have three display groups, each containing three displays (three display grid columns and three display grid rows): datapoint B017 above = 3 and datapoint B018 would also be configured to 3.

MDG

MDS

B017

B018

Loop Select Control Module Selector (CON-0 = 0, CON-1 = 1, CON-2 = 2, CON-3 = 3)

Control

Mode

PID Control Mode

1 - P, 2 - PI, 3 - PID, 4 - PD

If the ratio of Process Dead Time (Wp) and Process Time Constant (Tp) is greater than 0.5, then this datapoint should be set to 3 for PID Control Mode.

Limit Settling

Time

PV

Excursion

Limit

This parameter corresponds to the time, in seconds, allowed for the process to settle and for the preliminary step-response to be detected.

Maximum Allowable Excursion of PV in EASY-TUNE (%)

Setting C380 will prevent excessive change in PV.

Output Step

Preliminary

PV Step

Disturbance

Step Size Change in Controller Output (

±

%)

Set large enough to cause significant but allowable PV changes. (See C378 above.)

Excursion Limit for Preliminary Step Disturbance (%)

The step size chosen for C381 will cause a PV change which depends on the process gain as well as C381 itself. C378 should be set to approximately 1/4 of that expected change. (See

C381 below.)

LPS

CM

TLIM

DPV

B385

B386

C387

C380

DOUT C381

DPPV C378

1

5

0

0

0

0

0

2

Table 5-14. System Module

Title

Parameter

Modify

Automatic

Tuning

Parameter

Entry

Status

Definition Atom Datapoint

Default

Enable Tuning Parameter Limits

0 - no limits checked, 1 - limits below apply

C385 lowest % PB

C386 highest % PB

C387 lowest T

R

(minutes)

C388 highest T

R

(minutes)

C389 lowest T

D

(minutes)

C390 highest T

D

(minutes)

PLIM L520

Automatic Tuning Parameter

1 - upon successful completion of the EASY-TUNE sequence,

new tuning parameters will be entered.

0 - new tuning parameters will not be entered but available for review.

This parameter presents the state of the EZ-TUNE procedure or, when a failure occurs, the error condition code as shown below:

EASY-TUNE Normal Successful Status Display

B387 = Description

1

2

3

Settling time & finding initial steady-state values

Initial step disturbance to the process

Preliminary process characterization (Disturbance is removed)

4

5

0

Finding second steady-state values (Disturbance is re-applied)

Finding process characteristics (Disturbance is removed)

EASY-TUNE has successfully completed

APLD L522

ESTAT B387

1

0

0

Table 5-14. System Module

Title

Status

(Cont.)

Definition Atom Datapoint

EASY-TUNE Unsuccessful Status Display

B387 = Description Suggested Action or Cause/Retry

51 Controller output was saturated.

Controller output was saturated at the start.

52 Saturation would have occurred Reverse the sign of step size

if EASY-TUNE had continued.

configured in C381.

53 PV excursion exceeded the limit.

Reduce the step size magnitude in

C381 or increase MAX PV excursion limit in C380.

54 Controller output was changed

externally, i.e. deliberately or

accidentally.

55 A time-out had occurred when

Don’t change output manually or through the F-Tran program.

Increase the digital filter index

B387 was 1.

56 A time-out had occurred when

B387 was 2.

57 A time-out had occurred when

B387 was 3.

58 A time-out had occurred when

B387 was 4.

59 A time-out had occurred when

B387 was 5.

60 L521 was set to 1.

61 Tuning parameter limit(s) were

exceeded and used in the

controller.

and/or the limiting time in C379.

Either increase the limiting settling time in C379, increase C381 or decrease C378.

Disturbance may have occurred during EASY-TUNE.

Disturbance may have occurred during EASY-TUNE.

Disturbance may have occurred during EASY-TUNE.

EASY-TUNE was deliberately terminated.

Widen the tuning parameter limits in C385-C390 or set L520 to 0.

ESTAT B387

Default

0

53MC5000 Process Control Station

5.16 CONFIGURATION SUMMARY

Figure 5-2 illustrates the general approach to customizing and configuring the controller.

INSTALL CONTROLLER PER

SECTION 2, INSTALLATION.

CHOOSE A CONTROL STRATEGY AS DESCRIBED IN SECTIONS 6 - 15.

STANDARD FACTORY CON-

FIGURATION AS DESCRIBED

IN SECTION 6 FOR CS1, 11

FOR CS20, OR 15 FOR CS41?

YES NO

CONFIGURE TABLE 5-14, COMMUNICATION MODULE (SO THAT

REMAINING CONFIGURATION CAN BE DONE AT PERSONAL COMPU-

TER USING ONE OF THE SOFTWARE APPLICATION PACKAGES

LISTED IN THE TABLE OF SECTION 3.2). CONFIGURE TABLE 5-4,

ANALOG INPUT MODULES; TABLE 5-5, ANALOG OUTPUT MODULES;

TABLE 5-9, CONTROLLER MODULES; TABLE 5-6, CONTACT CLOSURE

INPUT MODULES; AND TABLE 5-7, CONTACT CLOSURE OUTPUT

MODULES.

ADD DISPLAYS BY CHANGING THE DISPLAY LIST IN TABLE 5-15,

SYSTEM AND MISCELLANEOUS MODULE. CONFIGURE TABLE 5-10,

STATUS DISPLAY MODULES; TABLE 5-11, PARAMETER MODULES;

AND TABLE 5-13,

MODIFY A CONTROL

STRATEGY FROM SECTIONS

6 - 15 WITH FCS (SEE FCS

GUIDE).

DESIGN A NEW CONTROL

STRATEGY WIRELIST USING

FCS (SEE FCS GUIDE).

DESIGN A NEW CONTROL

STRATEGY USING F-CIM

(SEE CUSTOMIZATION GUIDE).

DESIGN A NEW CONTROL

STRATEGY USING F-TRAN

(SEE CUSTOMIZATION

GUIDE).

TUNE PER SECTION 16,

TUNNING PID PARAMETERS

OR SECTION 17, EASY-TUNE.

IN

SERVICE

Figure 5-2. Configuration Summary

5-40

Section 6. CS1 - Single Loop Controller

6.0 CS1 - SINGLE LOOP CONTROLLER

6.1 CS1 - SINGLE LOOP (PID) CONTROLLER

A single loop 53MC5000 Controller is configured at the factory for CS1 operation to provide the standard displays listed in Table 6-2 and the default datapoint settings listed in Table 6-3. As a

Single Loop (PID) Controller, the Proportional Band is set at 100%; the Process Variable AI0 is scaled 0-100% for a linear 4-20 mA input signal; and AO0 is set as a reverse action (PV above setpoint causes decreasing value) control signal over a 4-20 mA signalling range. These settings may be altered and additional Control Strategy 1 (CS1) functions can be activated as necessitated by the process application.

The Single Loop PID Controller is used in the majority of process applications. It calculates an output from the difference between a Process Variable (PV) feedback signal sent from a Field Transmitter (FT) (e.g., flow meter) and a setpoint (SP) value. The output is calculated with the controller

PID algorithm, which has P roportional, I ntegral, and D erivative terms. The effect these terms have on the output calculation is determined by the PID datapoint configuration selections. After the output is calculated, it is applied to a final control element (e.g., valve) to restore process flow to the setpoint value. The controller output can be augmented with Additive Feed Forward (FF), which adds a remotely generated analog value to the output, or it can be forced to track an analog input signal. The output can also be set locally at the controller, whereby the PID algorithm calculated output is not used. The setpoint can be set locally at the controller, set to track the primary variable, or it can originate from a remote source. Datapoints must be configured to activate Additive

Feed Forward, Output Tracking, Setpoint Tracking, and Remote Setpoint. If the alarm limit datapoints are configured, the controller will activate an alarm annunciator whenever the PV exceeds the configured tolerable limits of change. A typical low-resolution display Single Loop (PID) Controller process application is illustrated in Figure 6-1.

AI1 - REMOTE SETPOINT

AI2 - ADDITIVE FEED FORWARD

AI3 - TRACKING

DI0 - FORCE OUTPUT TRACKING

(OPEN CONTACT)

DI1 - REMOTE SETPOINT ENABLE

(CLOSED CONTACT)

AI0 - PROCESS VARIABLE

FT

PUMP

AO1 - RETRANSMITTED PV

DO0 - PROCESS ALARM 1

DO1 - PROCESS ALARM 2

AO0 - CONTROL OUTPUT

VALVE

Figure 6-1. Typical CS1 Single Loop Controller Application

6-1

53MC5000 Process Control Station

6.2 CS1 CONTROL SIGNALS

Loading CS1 connects the 53MC5000 Controller function blocks for operation as a standard Single

Loop Controller. As shown in Figure 6-1, up to ten control signals are available; however, only two are essential for operation: they are AI0 - Process Variable, and AO0 - Control Output. If the other eight signals are not required, then their respective datapoints should be left at the default values.

Table 6-1 below describes the ten signals in CS1.

Table 6-1. CS1 Control Signals

Control

Signal

AI0 - Process

Variable Input

AI1 - Remote

Setpoint Input

AI2 - Additive

Feed Forward

Input

AI3 - Tracking

Input

AO0 - Control

Output

AO1 -

Retransmitted

PV

DI0 - Force

Output

Tracking

Definition

This analog input signal represents the value of the process to be manipulated by the controller. It is compared to the control setpoint to determine the Control Output value.

This analog input signal represents the value to be used as the control setpoint when remote setpoint operation is selected with the faceplate push buttons and enabled by DI1.

This analog input signal value is added to the

PID result to make up the Control Output value when Auto operation is active.

This analog input signal value becomes the

Control Output value when the Force Output

Tracking contact input is open and datapoint

L119 (Enable Output Tracking) is configured to a 1.

This is the 4-20 mA output signal that drives the final control element.

This output signal reflects the Process Variable

Input signal value over a 4-20 mA range.

Cord

Set

ITB

TB1-1 (+)

TB1-2 (-)

TB1-3

TB1-5 (+)

TB1-6 (-)

TB1-7

TB1-9

TB1-10 (+)

TB1-11 (-)

TB1-13

TB1-14 (+)

TB1-15 (-)

TB1-17 (+)

TB1-18 (-)

TB1-19 (+)

TB1-20 (-)

DI1 - Remote

Setpoint

Enable

DO0 - Process

Alarm 1

DO1 - Process

Alarm 2

When an open contact is present on this input, the Control Output value is forced to match the

Tracking Input value when datapoint L119

(Enable Output Tracking) is configured to a 1.

When a closed contact is present on this input, the operator can select the setpoint value to be set by the value of the Remote Setpoint Input with the R/L push button.

This contact is closed when the Process

Variable value is not within the C103 value setting (Alarm Limit 1 datapoint); otherwise, the contact is open.

This contact is closed when the Process

Variable value is not within the C104 value setting (Alarm Limit 2 datapoint); otherwise, the contact is open.

TB2-1 (+)

TB2-2 (-)

TB2-3 (+)

TB2-4 (-)

TB2-5 (+)

TB2-6 (-)

TB2-7 (+)

TB2-8 (-)

Rear

Term

Board

1 (+)

2 (-)

3

Signal

+24 V

AI0

SC

4 (+)

5 (-)

6

1

7 (+)

8 (-)

4

9 (+)

8 (-)

10 (+)

11 (-)

12 (+)

11 (-)

13 (+)

14 (-)

15 (+)

14 (-)

16 (+)

17 (-)

18 (+)

17 (-)

+24 V

AI1

SC

+24 V

AI2

SC

+24 V

AI3

SC

AO0

PC

AN01

PC

DI0

PC

DI1

PC

DO0

PC

DO1

PC

6-2

Section 6. CS1 - Single Loop Controller

6.3 CS1 STANDARD DISPLAYS

Loading CS1 preconfigures the System Module display list for five displays. The five displays are listed in Table 6-2 with appropriate reference sections, figure numbers, and configuration tables. A configuration table is not listed for the Single Loop CON0 display, as that information is provided in this section. To configure the Single Loop CON0 with Horizontal Trend, Parameter, and System

Status displays, reference the Section 4 and Section 5 information listed in the table.

Table 6-2. CS1 Standard Displays

Title

Single Loop CON0

Single Loop CON0 with Horizontal Trend

Parameter Module 0 - PID datapoints

Parameter Module 1 - Alarm Limits

System Status

See

Section

4.3 and

4.3.1

4.5

4.6

4.6

4.2

Section 4

Figure

4-3 sheet 1

4-10 sheet 2

4-11

4-11

4-2

Section 5

Table

5-9

5-11

5-11

5-15

6.4 CS1 DATAPOINT CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS

See Figure 6-2 and Table 6-3 to configure datapoints for CS1 - Single Loop (PID) Controller. Table 6-3 also lists the Section 5 modules that can be referenced for more detailed definitions of the datapoints when required. A datapoint does not have to be configured if the default value listed in Table 6-3 is appropriate for the process application.

It should be noted that if all of the

CS1 setpoint and output functions are configured, controller operating precedence is as follows:

Setpoint priority - Setpoint Tracking, Remote Setpoint, and local setpoint setting with the faceplate push buttons.

Output priority - Output Tracking, Auto (PID) Output, and local output setting with the faceplate push buttons.

6-3

53MC5000 Process Control Station

REMOTE SETPOINT RELATED

DATAPOINTS

AFFECTED BY THE SETPOINT

RELATED DATAPOINTS

REMOTE SETPOINT ENABLE (L115)

REMOTE SETPOINT BIAS (B1) (C112)

REMOTE SETPOINT RATIO (K1) (C113)

AI1 ENGINEERING SPAN (C257)

AI1 ENGINEERING ZERO (C277)

AI1 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B270)

AI1 0-5 V INPUT (L417)

AI1 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L441)

MISCELLANEOUS DATAPOINTS

TAGNAME (A000) [CON-0]

ENGINEERING UNITS (A001)

[PERCENT]

REVERSE VALVE (L109) [C] [O]

ALARMS RELATED DATAPOINTS

CONTROL ALARM MODE (B335)

0 - HIGH/LOW

1 - NONE

2 - HIGH/NONE

3 - NONE/LOW

4 - HIGH/HI-HI

5 - LOW/LO-LO

6 - HI SP DEVIATION/LO SP

DEVIATION

ALARM LIMIT 1 (C103)

ALARM LIMIT 2 (C104)

ALARM DEAD BAND (C105)

AI1 - REMOTE SETPOINT

DI1 - REMOTE SETPOINT ENABLE

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L265])

DO0 - PROCESS ALARM 1

(CONTACT OUTPUT INVERT [L288])

AI2 - ADDITIVE FEED FORWARD

ADDITIVE FEED FORWARD

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI2 ENGINEERING SPAN (C258)

AI2 ENGINEERING ZERO (C278)

AI2 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B271)

AI2 0-5 V INPUT (L418)

AI2 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L442)

AIO - PROCESS VARIABLE

DO1 - PROCESS ALARM 2

(CONTACT OUTPUT INVERT [L289])

AO1 - RETRANSMITTED PV

(0-20 mA OUTPUT [L473])

DI0 - FORCE OUTPUT TRACKING

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L264])

AI3 - TRACKING INPUT

OUTPUT TRACKING RELATED

DATAPOINTS

SETPOINT RELATED DATAPOINTS

ENABLE OUTPUT TRACKING (L119)

AI3 ENGINEERING SPAN (C259)

AI3 ENGINEERING ZERO (C279)

AI3 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B272)

AI3 0-5 V INPUT (L419)

AI3 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L443)

CONTROL ZONE (C114)

SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT (C125)

SETPOINT LOW LIMIT (C126)

SETPOINT SLEW RATE (C117)

SETPOINT TRACKING

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AO0 - CONTROLLER OUT

OUTPUT RELATED DATAPOINTS

AO0 0-20 mA OUTPUT (L472)

MANUAL FALLBACK DISABLE (L120)

HARD MANUAL LIMIT (L122)

OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT (C109)

OUTPUT LOW LIMIT (C110)

OUTPUT SLEW RATE (C118)

CON0 CONTROL RELATED DATA-

POINTS (SEE SECTION 16, TUNING,

OR SECTION 17, EASY-TUNE, TO

TUNE PID DATAPOINTS)

PROCESS VARIABLE

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AFFECTED BY THE SETPOINT

RELATED DATAPOINTS

SP TRACK ENABLE (L118)

AI0 ENGINEERING SPAN (C256)

AI0 ENGINEERING ZERO (C276)

AI0 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B269)

AI0 0-5 V INPUT (L416)

AI0 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L440)

NOTE; BRACKETS [XXXX] CONTAIN DATA SHOWN IN RECTANGLES ON

THE DISPLAY.

PROPORTIONAL BAND (C106) (P)

RESET TIME (C107) (I)

RATE TIME (C108) (D)

MANUAL RESET (C111)

REVERSE SWITCH (L106)

AUTO ENABLE (L114)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C115) [100]

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE

(C116) [0]

Figure 6-2. CS1 Single Loop CON0 Datapoints

6-4

Section 6. CS1 - Single Loop Controller

Table 6-3. CS1 Single Loop CON0 Datapoints

1 of 5

Datapoint

C256

C276

B269

L416

L440

L115

Table

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

Module

AI0

AI0

AI0

AI0

AI0

Title and Function

AI0 - Process Variable

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Engineering Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the PV transducer upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the PV transducer lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the PV transducer signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the PV transducer. 1 = 0 - 5 V range; 0 = 1 - 5 V range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the PV transducer is a nonlinear differential pressure (DP) cell that provides a squared signal value. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

AI1 - Remote Setpoint (Is affected by the Setpoint Related Datapoints.)

5-9 CON0 Remote Setpoint Enable - This datapoint is controlled by DI0.

When DI0 is a closed contact, this datapoint is set to 1 to allow the modified Remote Setpoint to become the value used as the control setpoint if the R/L push button is in

Remote.

C112 5-9 CON0 Remote Setpoint Bias (B1) - This datapoint and Remote

Setpoint Ratio (K1) allow the Remote Setpoint input to be modified by the Setpoint Generator.

Setpoint = [Remote Setpoint X Ratio] + Bias

SP = [RSP X K1] + B1

Default

100

0

3

0

0

0

0

C113

C257

C277

B270

L417

5-9

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

CON0

AI1

AI1

AI1

AI1

The B1 and K1 datapoints are modified when the input signal must be scaled to match the setpoint range desired.

Remote Setpoint Ratio (K1) - See Remote Setpoint bias (B1) above.

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Engineering Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Remote Setpoint upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Remote Setpoint lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Remote Setpoint signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Remote Setpoint signal. 1 = 0 - 5 V input range;

0 = 1 - 5 V input range.

1

0

0

3

0

6-5

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 6-3. CS1 Single Loop CON0 Datapoints

2 of 5

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

AI1 - Remote Setpoint (Is affected by the Setpoint Related Datapoints.) (Cont)

L441 5-4 AI1 Square Root Signal - It is used if the Remote Setpoint input is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

AI2 - Additive Feed Forward

C258 5-4 AI2

C278

B271

L418

L442

L119

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-9

AI2

AI2

AI2

AI2

CON0

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to

Engineering Zero, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Additive Feed Forward upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Additive Feed Forward lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Additive Feed Forward signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Additive Feed Forward signal. 1 = 0 - 5 V input range; 0 = 1 - 5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Additive Feed Forward input is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

AI3 - Tracking Input (Output Tracking)

Output Track Enable - This datapoint must be configured to a

1 so that Output Tracking can be enabled when DI0 is an open contact.

Default

0

0

0

3

0

0

0

C259

C279

B272

L419

L443

L472

L120

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-5

5-9

AI3

AI3

AI3

AI3

AI3

AO0

CON0

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Engineering Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the tracking input upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the tracking input lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the tracking input signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the tracking input signal. 1 = 0 - 5 V input range;

0 = 1 - 5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the tracking input is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

AO0 - Control Out

0-20 mA Output - 0 = 4-20 mA signal; 1 = 0-20 mA signal.

Enter a value to match the output valve requirements.

Manual Fallback Disable - 0 = always power up in manual;

1 = auto/manual selector unchanged at power up.

0

0

0

0

3

0

0

6-6

Section 6. CS1 - Single Loop Controller

Table 6-3. CS1 Single Loop CON0 Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

L122

C109

C110

C118

C106

C107

C108

C111

L106

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

Title and Function

AO0 - Control Out (Cont)

Hard Manual Limit - 1 = apply output limits to the final output of the Auto-Manual Generator. It affects both the manual push buttons and the controller’s result. 0 = do not apply limits.

Output High Limit - Sets maximum Control Output signal value in engineering units.

Output Low Limit - Sets minimum Control Output signal value in engineering units.

Output Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the output value. When configured to a non-zero value, the output from the Auto-Selector is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. A zero disables output slewing. It does not affect manual operation.

CON0 Control Related Datapoints

Proportional Band - Is the percent of error required to move the output full scale for proportional action.

Reset Time - Is the number of minutes per repeat of integral action. It is mutually exclusive with Manual Reset.

Rate Time - Represents the minutes proportional action is advanced.

Manual Reset - It determines output valve position when the controller is in Auto and the error = 0. It is mutually exclusive with Reset Time.

Reverse Switch - 0 = Control Output

if PV

; 1 = Control

Output

if PV

.

3 of 5

Default

1

100

0

0

100

0

0

50

1

L114

C115

5-9

5-9

CON0

CON0

1

100

C116

L473

L264

5-9

5-5

5-6

CON0

AO1

DI0

Auto Enable - Controller output is from the PID algorithm when set to 1 and A/M push button is in Auto.

Controller Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Controller Lower Range value, will produce the control upper range value in engineering units.

Controller Lower Range - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the control lower range value.

AO1 - Retransmitted PV

0-20 mA Output - 0 = 4-20 mA signal; 1 = 0-20 mA signal.

Enter a value that matches the required Process Variable input signal range of the chained controller or device.

DI0 - Force Output Tracking

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Force Output Tracking is enabled if DI0 is open (and datapoint L119 - Enable Output

Tracking = 1). Set to 1 to reverse the DI0 condition required to activated output tracking (DI0 closed = Force Output

Tracking).

0

0

0

6-7

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 6-3. CS1 Single Loop CON0 Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

L265

L288

5-6

5-7

DI1

DO0

Title and Function

DI1 - Remote Setpoint Enable

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Remote Setpoint Enable is permitted if DI1 is closed (datapoint L115 - Remote Setpoint

Enable is set to 1 by DI1). Set to 1 to reverse the DI1 condition required to activate remote setpoint (DI1 open =

Remote Setpoint Enable).

DO0 - Process Alarm 1

Contact Output Invert - Normally, Process Alarm 1 is enabled if DO0 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the DO0 condition required to activate Process Alarm 1 (DO0 open = the PV value is not within the C103 limit).

4 of 5

Default

0

0

L289 5-7 DO1

DO1 - Process Alarm 2

Output Invert - Normally, Process Alarm 2 is enabled if DO1 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the DO1 condition required to activate Process Alarm 2 (DO1 open = the PV value is not within the C104 limit).

0

B335

C103

C104

C105

C114

C125

C126

C117

L118

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

Alarms Related Datapoints

Control Alarm Mode - Used to select one of six alarm types or none. See Table 5-9 for details and examples.

Alarm Limit 1 - Point in engineering units where an alarm is triggered because the PV is not within the limit value set in

C103.

Alarm Limit 2 - Point in engineering units where an alarm is triggered because the PV is not within the limit value set in

C104.

Alarm Dead Band - Sets the activation/deactivation gaps for the alarm limit points. It is in engineering units.

Setpoint Related Datapoints

Control Zone - A gap on both sides of setpoint. When PV is within this gap, the proportional and integral output changes are suppressed. Derivative output is unaffected.

Setpoint High Limit - It is the maximum control setpoint value allowed.

Setpoint Low Limit - It is the minimum control setpoint value allowed.

Setpoint Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the setpoint.

When configured to a non-zero value, the setpoint used in the PID algorithm is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. The final value of the setpoint always appears on the units display. A zero disables setpoint slewing.

SP Track Enable - 1 = allow setpoint to track the process variable when in manual.

1

100

0

2

0

100

0

0

0

6-8

Section 6. CS1 - Single Loop Controller

Table 6-3. CS1 Single Loop CON0 Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

A000

A001

L109

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON0

CON0

CON0

5 of 5

Title and Function

Miscellaneous Datapoints

Tagname - Assignable 10 character name.

Default

Engineering Units - Assignable 10 character designator.

Reverse Valve - Bottom of display output valve action indicators: 1 = [O] [C] display order, 0 = [C] [O] display order.

CON-

0

PER-

CENT

0

6-9

53MC5000 Process Control Station

6.5 CS1 SOFT-WIRE LIST MODIFICATIONS

Table 6-4 lists values that can be entered into designated soft-wire list datapoints to alter CS1 functionality.

Table 6-4. CS1 Soft-Wire List Modifications

To force control to manual on a momentary contact closure of DI0:

Set B133 = 97

To set controller output to a fixed value while DI0 is an open contact:

Set B160 = 129 and Set C129 to desired value.

To force the output to track AI3 while DI0 is a closed contact and to set the controller to manual when the tracking operation is ended by opening the DI0 contact:

Set B133 = 0, Set B129 = 128, and Set B159 = 97.

DO0 indicates either Process Alarm 1 or Process Alarm 2 active, and DO1 indicates the Totalizer

0 rollover pulse:

Set B172 = 1 and Set B106 = 224.

DO0 indicates remote and auto while DO1 indicates Process Alarm 1:

Set B170 = 107, Set B171 = 108, Set B172 = 2, and Set B106 = 110.

Multiplying Feed Forward (FF)

(

OUT

=

OUT

×

FF

SCALE

×

MULTIPLIER

)

:

Disable Feed Forward by setting B155 = 122, and C122 = 0.0,

Disable Output Tracking by setting L119 = 0,

Set B165 = 6,

Set C79 - Multiplier for desired output response, and

Set C81 - Scaler to make FF Signal 0 - 1

FF

C81

 .

For control PV compensated gas flow (linear) with AI2 - pressure and AI3 - temperature:

Disable Feed Forward by setting B155 = 122 and C122 = 0.0,

Disable Output Tracking by setting L119 = 0,

Set B122 = 18, and

Set C354, C356 - C359 as required (see IB 53MC5000 Flexible Control Strategies

for compensated gas flow information).

For control PV compensated gas flow (square root) with AI2 - pressure and AI3 - temperature:

Disable Feed Forward by setting B155 = 122 and C122 = 0.0,

Disable Output Tracking by setting L119 = 0,

Set B122 = 19, and

Set C354 - C359 as required (see IB 53MC5000 Flexible Control Strategies

for compensated gas flow information).

To make an Integral (I) only controller:

Set B155 = 122, Set B163 = 30, Set B165 = 2, Set C122 = 0.0,

Set C79 = 1.0, Set C80 = 1.0, and Set C106 = 100.0.

6-10

Section 7. CS2 - Analog Backup Controller

7.0 CS2 - ANALOG BACKUP

CONTROLLER

7.1 CS2 - ANALOG BACKUP CONTROLLER

The Analog Backup Controller is used in operations where a remote computer is normally controlling the final element directly. In this process configuration, the controller functions as a signal selector and automatic backup unit to the computer. The controller assumes process control in the event of a signaled computer failure. The Analog Backup Controller operates as a Single Loop

(PID) Controller (see Section 6) when driving the process final element (e.g., output valve). While in backup and automatic, the controller continually adjusts its output to match the AI3 Control Element Feedback signal so that transfer to online operation is bumpless in the event of computer failure. Selection of the computer or backup controller signals to the process final element is performed by the controller’s DO modules (DO1 and DO2) in conjunction with blocking diodes (see circuit diagram on next page). The computer drives the final process element when remote operation is selected at the controller faceplate with the R/L push button and if the contact of DI0 is closed; otherwise, the computer’s control signal is diverted and the output from the controller is the active signal to the process final element. AO1 indicates whether the computer or the controller is driving the final element (20 mA output = computer, 4 mA output = controller). Unless DI1 input is closed, the controller is not permitted to operate in automatic mode. A typical low-resolution display Analog Backup Controller is illustrated in Figure 7-1, and the DO Output Diverter Circuit is illustrated in Figure 7-2.

AI1 - NOT USED

AI2 - ADDITIVE FEED FORWARD

DI0 - COMPUTER READY

(CLOSED CONTACT)

DI1 - AUTO ENABLE

(CLOSED CONTACT)

AI0 - PROCESS VARIABLE

AI3 - CONTROL

ELEMENT FEEDBACK

FT

AO1 - COMPUTER CONTROL STATUS

DO0 - COMPUTER OUTPUT DIVERTER

DO1 - BACKUP OUTPUT DIVERTER

AO0

BACKUP

CONTROL

OUTPUT

HOST

COMPUTER

DIVERTER (SEE

FIGURE 7-2)

VALVE

PUMP

Figure 7-1. Typical CS2 Analog Backup Controller Application

7-1

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Figure 7-2. DO Output Diverter Circuit

7.2 CS2 CONTROL SIGNALS

Loading CS2 connects the 53MC5000 Controller function blocks for operation as an Analog

Backup Controller. As shown in Figure 7-1, up to nine control signals are available. Table 7-1 below describes the nine signals in CS2.

Table 7-1. CS2 Control Signals

AI1

Control

Signal

AI0 - Process

Variable

AI2 - Additive

Feed Forward

Input

AI3 - Control

Element

Feedback

AO0 - Backup

Control Output

AO1 -

Computer

Control Status

DI0 - Computer

Ready

DI1 - Auto

Enable

Definition

This analog input signal represents the value of the process to be manipulated by the controller.

It is compared to the control setpoint to determine the Control Output value.

Not used.

This analog input signal value is added to the

PID result to make up the Control Output value when Auto operation is active.

A feedback signal from the diverter circuit to the controller that indicates the position of the final element (valve) so that if operation transfer to the controller becomes necessary, it will be bumpless.

This is the 4-20 mA output signal that drives the final control element if operation is transferred from the computer to the controller.

It indicates whether the computer (20 mA output) or the controller (4 mA) is driving the final element (valve).

It enables the computer to drive the final element if it is a closed contact and if R is selected with the faceplate R/L push button.

It enables the controller to drive the final element if it is a closed contact and if L is selected with the faceplate R/L push button.

Cord

Set

ITB

TB1-1 (+)

TB1-2 (-)

TB1-3

TB1-9

TB1-10 (+)

TB1-11 (-)

TB1-13

TB1-14 (+)

TB1-15 (-)

TB1-17 (+)

TB1-18 (-)

TB1-19 (+)

TB1-20 (-)

TB2-1 (+)

TB2-2 (-)

TB2-3 (+)

TB2-4 (-)

Rear

Term

Board

1 (+)

2 (-)

3

1

7 (+)

8 (-)

4

9 (+)

8 (-)

10 (+)

11 (-)

12 (+)

11 (-)

13 (+)

14 (-)

15 (+)

14 (-)

1 of 2

Signal

+24 V

AI0

SC

+24 V

AI2

SC

+24 V

AI3

SC

AO0

PC

AN01

PC

DI0

PC

DI1

PC

7-2

Section 7. CS2 - Analog Backup Controller

Table 7-1. CS2 Control Signals

Control

Signal

DO0 -

Computer

Output Diverter

DO1 - Backup

Output Diverter

Definition

When open, the computer output path is through the diverter circuit diode to the final element

(valve).

When open, the controller output path is through the diverter circuit diode to the final element

(valve).

Cord

Set

ITB

TB2-5 (+)

TB2-6 (-)

TB2-7 (+)

TB2-8 (-)

2 of 2

Rear

Term

Board

16 (+)

17 (-)

Signal

DO0

PC

18 (+)

17 (-)

DO1

PC

7.3 CS2 STANDARD DISPLAYS

Loading CS2 preconfigures the System Module display list for five displays. The five displays are listed in Table 7-2 with appropriate reference sections, figure numbers, and configuration tables. A configuration table is not listed for the Analog Backup Controller Single Loop CON0 display, as that information is provided in this section. To configure the Single Loop CON0 with Horizontal Trend,

Parameter, and System Status displays, reference the Section 4 and Section 5 information listed in the table.

Table 7-2. CS2 Standard Displays

Title

Analog Backup Controller (Single Loop CON0)

Single Loop CON0 with Horizontal Trend

Parameter Module 0 - PID datapoints

Parameter Module 1- Alarm Limits

System Status

See

Section

4.3 and

4.3.1

4.5

4.6

4.6

4.2

Section 4

Figure

4-3 sheet 1

Section 5

Table

4-10 sheet 2

4-11

4-11

4-2

5-9

5-11

5-11

5-15

7.4 CS2 DATAPOINT CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS

See Figure 7-3 and Table 7-3 to configure datapoints for CS2 - Analog Backup Controller.

Table 7-3 also lists the Section 5 modules that can be referenced for more detailed definitions of the datapoints when required. A datapoint does not have to be configured if the default value listed in Table 7-3 is appropriate for the process application.

Loading CS2 initializes the Engineering Span (C259) to 100 for AI3 (Control Element Feedback). Also, the DO0 (Computer Output

Diverter) Contact Input Invert (L288) is set to 1 and datapoint C078 (Math A - K3) is set to 100.0.

7-3

53MC5000 Process Control Station

MISCELLANEOUS DATAPOINTS

(SHOWN IN RECTANGLES ON THE

DISPLAY)

CONTROL TAGNAME (A000)

[CON-0]

ENGINEERING UNITS (A001)

[PERCENT]

REVERSE VALVE (L109) [C] [O]

ALARMS RELATED DATAPOINTS

CONTROL ALARM MODE (B335)

0 - HIGH/LOW

1 - NONE

2 - HIGH/NONE

3 - NONE/LOW

4 - HIGH/HI-HI

5 - LOW/LO-LO

6 - HI SP DEVIATION/LO SP

DEVIATION

ALARM LIMIT 1 (C103)

ALARM LIMIT 2 (C104)

ALARM DEAD BAND (C105)

DI1 - AUTO ENABLE

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L265])

DO0 - COMPUTER OUTPUT

DIVERTER

AI2 - ADDITIVE FEED FORWARD

ADDITIVE FEED FORWARD

RELATED DATAPOINTS DO1 - BACKUP OUTPUT

DIVERTER

AI2 ENGINEERING SPAN (C258)

AI2 ENGINEERING ZERO (C278)

AI2 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B271)

AI2 0-5 V INPUT (L418)

AI2 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L442)

AO1 - COMPUTER CONTROL

STATUS

(20 mA = COMPUTER CONTROL,

4 mA = MC5000 CONTROL)

DI0 - COMPUTER READY

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L264])

AI3 - CONTROL ELEMENT

FEEDBACK

AIO - PROCESS VARIABLE

PROCESS VARIABLE

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI0 ENGINEERING SPAN (C256)

AI0 ENGINEERING ZERO (C276)

AI0 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B269)

AI0 0-5 V INPUT (L416)

AI0 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L440)

NOTE; BRACKETS [XXXX] CONTAIN DATA SHOWN IN RECTANGLES ON

THE DISPLAY.

AO0 - BACKUP CONTROL

OUTPUT

OUTPUT RELATED DATAPOINTS

SETPOINT RELATED DATAPOINTS

CONTROL ZONE (C114)

SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT (C125)

SETPOINT LOW LIMIT (C126)

SETPOINT SLEW RATE (C117)

AO0 0-20 mA OUTPUT (L472)

MANUAL FALLBACK DISABLE (L120)

HARD MANUAL LIMIT (L122)

OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT (C109)

OUTPUT LOW LIMIT (C110)

OUTPUT SLEW RATE (C118)

CON0 CONTROL RELATED DATA-

POINTS (SEE SECTION 16, TUNING,

OR SECTION 17, EASY-TUNE, TO

TUNE PID DATAPOINTS)

PROPORTIONAL BAND (C106)

RESET TIME (C107)

RATE TIME (C108)

MANUAL RESET (C111)

REVERSE SWITCH (L106)

AUTO ENABLE (L114)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C115) [100]

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE

(C116) [0]

Figure 7-3. CS2 Analog Backup Controller Datapoints

7-4

Section 7. CS2 - Analog Backup Controller

Table 7-3. CS2 Analog Backup Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

C256

C276

B269

L416

L440

C258

C278

B271

L418

L442

C259

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

AI0

AI0

AI0

AI0

AI0

AI2

AI2

AI2

AI2

AI2

AI3

1 of 3

Title and Function

AI0 - Process Variable

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Engineering Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the PV transducer upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the PV transducer lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the PV transducer signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the PV transducer. 1 = 0 - 5 V range; 0 = 1 - 5 V range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the PV transducer is a nonlinear differential pressure (DP) cell that provides a squared signal value. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

AI2 - Additive Feed Forward

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to

Engineering Zero, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Additive Feed Forward upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Additive Feed Forward lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Additive Feed Forward signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Additive Feed Forward signal. 1 = 0 - 5 V input range; 0 = 1 - 5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Additive Feed Forward input is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

AI3 - Control Element Feedback

Engineering Span - Set to 100 by CS2.

Default

100

0

3

0

0

0

0

3

0

0

0

L472

L120

L122

5-5

5-9

5-9

AO0

CON0

CON0

AO0 - Backup Control Output

0-20 mA Output - 0 = 4-20 mA signal; 1 = 0-20 mA signal.

Enter a value to match the output valve requirements.

Manual Fallback Disable - 0 = always power up in manual;

1 = auto/manual selector unchanged at power up.

Hard Manual Limit - 1 = apply output limits to the final output of the Auto-Manual Generator. It affects both the manual push buttons and the controller’s result. 0 = do not apply limits.

0

0

1

7-5

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 7-3. CS2 Analog Backup Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

C109

C110

C118

C106

C107

C108

C111

L106

L114

C115

C116

L473

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-5

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

AO1

Title and Function

AO0 - Backup Control Output (Cont)

Output High Limit - Sets maximum Control Output signal value in engineering units.

Output Low Limit - Sets minimum Control Output signal value in engineering units.

Output Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the output value. When configured to a non-zero value, the output from the Auto-Selector is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. A zero disables output slewing. It does not affect manual operation.

CON0 Control Related Datapoints

Proportional Band - Is the percent of error required to move the output full scale for proportional action.

Reset Time - Is the number of minutes per repeat of integral action. It is mutually exclusive with Manual Reset.

Rate Time - Represents the minutes proportional action is advanced.

Manual Reset - It determines output valve position when the controller is in Auto and the error = 0. It is mutually exclusive with Reset Time.

Reverse Switch - 0 = Control Output

if PV

; 1 = Control

Output

if PV

.

Auto Enable - Controller output is from the PID algorithm when set to 1 and A/M push button is in Auto.

Controller Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Controller Lower Range value, will produce the control upper range value in engineering units.

Controller Lower Range - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the control lower range value.

AO1 - Computer Control Status

0-20 mA Output - 20 mA indicates computer control; 4 mA indicates 53MC5000 control.

2 of 3

Default

100

0

0

100

0

0

50

1

1

100

0

0

L264

L265

L024

5-6

5-6

5-7

DI0

DI1

DO0

DI0 - Computer Ready

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Computer Ready is enabled if DI0 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the required DI0 condition (DI0 open = Computer Ready) so that the computer can drive the final element.

DI1 - Auto Enable

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Auto Enable is permitted if

DI0 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the DI1 condition required to permit Auto Enable (DI1 open = Auto Enable).

DO0 - Computer Output Diverter

When open, the computer output path is through the diverter circuit diode to the final element. It is always in an opposite state from DO1. (Not configurable.)

0

0

0

7-6

Section 7. CS2 - Analog Backup Controller

Table 7-3. CS2 Analog Backup Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

L025

B335

C103

C104

C105

C114

C125

C126

C117

A000

A001

L109

5-7

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

DO1

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

3 of 3

Title and Function

DO1 - Backup Output Diverter

When open, the controller output path is through the diverter circuit diode to the final element. It is always in an opposite state from DO0. (Not configurable.)

Alarms Related Datapoints

Control Alarm Mode - Used to select one of six alarm types or none. See Table 5-9 for details and examples.

Alarm Limit 1 - Point in engineering units where an alarm is triggered because the PV is not within the limit value set in

C103.

Alarm Limit 2 - Point in engineering units where an alarm is triggered because the PV is not within the limit value set in

C104.

Alarm Dead Band - Sets the activation/deactivation gaps for the alarm limit points. It is in engineering units.

Setpoint Related Datapoints

Control Zone - A gap on both sides of setpoint. When PV is within this gap, the proportional and integral output changes are suppressed. Derivative output is unaffected.

Setpoint High Limit - It is the maximum control setpoint value allowed.

Setpoint Low Limit - It is the minimum control setpoint value allowed.

Setpoint Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the setpoint.

When configured to a non-zero value, the setpoint used in the PID algorithm is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. The final value of the setpoint always appears on the units display. A zero disables setpoint slewing.

Miscellaneous Datapoints

Tagname - Assignable 10 character name.

Default

0

1

100

0

2

0

100

0

0

Engineering Units - Assignable 10 character designator.

Reverse Valve - Bottom of display output valve action indicators: 1 = [O] [C] display order, 0 = [C] [O] display order.

CON-

0

PER-

CENT

0

7-7

NOTES:

53MC5000 Process Control Station

7-8

Section 8. CS3 - Ratio (PID) Controller

8.0 CS3 - RATIO (PID) CONTROLLER

8.1 CS3 - RATIO (PID) CONTROLLER

The Ratio (PID) Controller is used where one variable, called the controlled variable, must be automatically maintained in definite proportion to another variable, called the wild variable. Field transmitters (e.g, flow meters) must be installed in each variable line. Signals from the controlled and wild variable transmitters (AI0 and AI1 respectively) are received by the Ratio Controller which compares them and calculates the required correction that is applied as an output signal (AO0) to a final control element (e.g., valve) in the controlled variable line. The final element in the controlled variable line is moved to alter line throughput so that the predetermined ratio between the two lines is maintained. The predetermined ratio is set at the controller faceplate with the Ratio/Local (R/L) push button in R . While in Ratio control, the setpoint push buttons are used to set the desired ratio value which alters the K1 term in the setpoint calculation expression. Altering the ratio value also causes the ratio tick-bar on the display to move. The ratio tick-bar is immediately covered by the setpoint arrow indicator when the setpoint push button is released. Because the K1 value is part of the setpoint calculation expression, altering the ratio setting indirectly affects the setpoint value. When the R/L push button is in Local ( L ) control, the setpoint push buttons modify only the setpoint value. In Local control, the controlled variable line functions as a standard Single

Loop (PID) Controller (see Section 6). To minimize sudden process changes, adjust the local setpoint value to cause the setpoint indicator to cover the ratio tick-bar before switching to ratio control.

A typical low-resolution display Ratio (PID) Controller is illustrated in Figure 8-1.

AI2 - ADDITIVE FEED FORWARD

DI0 - FORCE OUTPUT TRACKING

(OPEN CONTACT)

DI1 - RATIO ENABLE

(CLOSED CONTACT)

AI1 - WILD VARIABLE

AI0 - CONTROLLED

VARIABLE

AO1 - NOT USED

DO0 - PROCESS ALARM 1

DO1 - PROCESS ALARM 2

AO0 CONTROL

OUTPUT

FT VALVE

CONTROLLED LINE

FT

BLENDING

PHASE OF

PROCESS

WILD LINE

Figure 8-1. Typical CS3 Ratio Controller Application

8-1

53MC5000 Process Control Station

8.2 CS3 CONTROL SIGNALS

Loading CS3 connects the 53MC5000 Controller function blocks for operation as a Ratio (PID) Controller. As shown in Figure 8-1, CS3 provides nine control signals which are described in Table 8-1:

Table 8-1. CS3 Control Signals

Control

Signal

AI0 -

Controlled

Variable

AI1 - Wild

Variable

AI2 - Additive

Feed Forward

Input

AI3 - Tracking

Input

AO0 - Control

Output

AO1

DI0 - Force

Output

Tracking

DI1 - Ratio

Enable

DO0 - Process

Alarm 1

DO1 - Process

Alarm 2 a 1.

Definition

This analog input signal represents the value of the process variable from the controlled line that must be maintained in proportion to the wild variable.

This analog input signal represents the value of the process variable from the wild line.

This analog input signal value is added to the

PID result to make up the Control Output value when Auto operation is active.

This analog input signal value becomes the

Control Output value when the Force Output

Tracking contact input is open and datapoint

L119 (Enable Output Tracking) is configured to

This is the 4-20 mA output signal that drives the final control element.

Not used.

When an open contact is present on this input, the Control Output valve is forced to match the

Tracking Input value when datapoint L119

(Enable Output Tracking) is configured to a 1.

When a closed contact is present on this input, the operator can select Ratio operation with the

R/L faceplate push button.

This contact is closed when the Process

Variable value is not within the C103 value setting (Alarm Limit 1 datapoint); otherwise, the contact is open.

This contact is closed when the Process

Variable value is not within the C104 value setting (Alarm Limit 2 datapoint); otherwise, the contact is open.

Cord

Set

ITB

TB1-1 (+)

TB1-2 (-)

TB1-3

TB1-5 (+)

TB1-6 (-)

TB1-7

TB1-9

TB1-10 (+)

TB1-11 (-)

TB1-13

TB1-14 (+)

TB1-15 (-)

TB1-17 (+)

TB1-18 (-)

TB2-1 (+)

TB2-2 (-)

TB2-3 (+)

TB2-4 (-)

TB2-5 (+)

TB2-6 (-)

TB2-7 (+)

TB2-8 (-)

Rear

Term

Board

1 (+)

2 (-)

3

4 (+)

5 (-)

6

1

7 (+)

8 (-)

4

9 (+)

8 (-)

10 (+)

11 (-)

13 (+)

14 (-)

15 (+)

14 (-)

16 (+)

17 (-)

18 (+)

17 (-)

Signal

+24 V

AI0

SC

+24 V

AI1

SC

+24 V

AI2

SC

+24 V

AI3

SC

AO0

PC

DI0

PC

DI1

PC

DO0

PC

DO1

PC

8-2

Section 8. CS3 - Ratio (PID) Controller

8.3 CS3 STANDARD DISPLAYS

Loading CS3 preconfigures the System Module display list for five displays. The five displays are listed in Table 8-2 with appropriate reference sections, figure numbers, and configuration tables. A configuration table is not listed for the Ratio Controller Single Loop CON0 display, as that information is provided in this section. To configure the Single Loop CON0 (Ratio) with Horizontal Trend,

Parameter, and System Status displays, reference the Section 4 and Section 5 information listed in the table.

Table 8-2. CS3 Standard Displays

Title

Ratio Controller (Point Display 3, CDM = 3)

Single Loop with Horizontal Trend (Ratio)

Parameter Module 0 - PID datapoints

Parameter Module 1- Alarm Limits

System Status

See

Section

4.3 and

4.3.4

4.5

4.6

4.6

4.2

Section 4

Figure

4-6

4-10 sheet 2

4-11

4-11

4-2

Section 5

Table

5-9

5-11

5-11

5-15

8.4 CS3 DATAPOINT CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS

See Figure 8-2 and Table 8-3 to configure datapoints for CS3 - Ratio (PID) Controller.

Table 8-3 also lists the Section 5 modules that can be referenced for more detailed definitions of the datapoints when required. A datapoint does not have to be configured if the default value listed in Table 8-3 is appropriate for the process application.

Loading CS3 initializes the Engineering Span (C257) to 100 for AI1 (Wild Variable). Also, the CON0 Display Mode (B339) is set to

3; the CON0 Setpoint Mode (B338) is set to 1; and datapoint C081 (Math B - K3) is set to 1.0.

8-3

53MC5000 Process Control Station

OUTPUT TRACKING RELATED

DATAPOINTS

ENABLE OUTPUT TRACKING (L119)

AI3 ENGINEERING SPAN (C259)

AI3 ENGINEERING ZERO (C279)

AI3 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B272)

AI3 0-5 V INPUT (L419)

AI3 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L443)

MISCELLANEOUS DATAPOINTS

(SHOWN IN RECTANGLES ON THE

DISPLAY)

CONTROL TAGNAME (A000)

[CON-0]

ENGINEERING UNITS (A001)

[PERCENT]

REVERSE VALVE (L109) [C] [O]

ALARMS RELATED DATAPOINTS

CONTROL ALARM MODE (B335)

0 - HIGH/LOW

1 - NONE

2 - HIGH/NONE

3 - NONE/LOW

4 - HIGH/HI-HI

5 - LOW/LO-LO

6 - HI SP DEVIATION/LO SP

DEVIATION

ALARM LIMIT 1 (C103)

ALARM LIMIT 2 (C104)

ALARM DEAD BAND (C105)

AI3 - TRACKING INPUT

DI0 - FORCE OUTPUT TRACKING

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L264])

AI2 - ADDITIVE FEED FORWARD

ADDITIVE FEED FORWARD

RELATED DATAPOINTS

DO0 - PROCESS ALARM 1

(CONTACT OUTPUT INVERT [L288])

AI2 ENGINEERING SPAN (C258)

AI2 ENGINEERING ZERO (C278)

AI2 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B271)

AI2 0-5 V INPUT (L418)

AI2 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L442)

DO1 - PROCESS ALARM 2

(CONTACT OUTPUT INVERT [L289])

AO1 - NOT USED

DI1 - RATIO ENABLE

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L265])

AI1 - WILD VARIABLE

AIO - CONTROLLED VARIABLE

CONTROLLED VARIABLE

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI0 ENGINEERING SPAN (C256)

AI0 ENGINEERING ZERO (C276)

AI0 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B269)

AI0 0-5 V INPUT (L416)

AI0 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L440)

WILD VARIABLE

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI1 ENGINEERING SPAN (C257)

AI1 ENGINEERING ZERO (C277)

AI1 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B270)

AI1 0-5 V INPUT (L417)

AI1 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L441)

AO0 - CONTROL OUTPUT

OUTPUT RELATED DATAPOINTS

SETPOINT RELATED DATAPOINTS

CONTROL ZONE (C114)

SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT (C125)

SETPOINT LOW LIMIT (C126)

SETPOINT SLEW RATE (C117)

AO0 0-20 mA OUTPUT (L472)

MANUAL FALLBACK DISABLE (L120)

HARD MANUAL LIMIT (L122)

OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT (C109)

OUTPUT LOW LIMIT (C110)

OUTPUT SLEW RATE (C118)

CON0 CONTROL RELATED DATA-

POINTS (SEE SECTION 16, TUNING,

OR SECTION 17, EASY-TUNE, TO

TUNE PID DATAPOINTS)

PROPORTIONAL BAND (C106)

RESET TIME (C107)

RATE TIME (C108)

MANUAL RESET (C111)

REVERSE SWITCH (L106)

AUTO ENABLE (L114)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C115) [100]

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE

(C116) [0]

NOTE; BRACKETS [XXXX] CONTAIN DATA SHOWN IN RECTANGLES ON

THE DISPLAY.

Figure 8-2. CS3 Ratio Controller Datapoints

8-4

Section 8. CS3 - Ratio (PID) Controller

Table 8-3. CS3 Ratio Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

C256

C276

B269

L416

L440

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

AI0

AI0

AI0

AI0

AI0

1 of 4

Title and Function

AI0 - Process Variable

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Engineering Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the PV transducer upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the PV transducer lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the PV transducer signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the PV transducer. 1 = 0 - 5 V range; 0 = 1 - 5 V range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the PV transducer is a nonlinear differential pressure (DP) cell that provides a squared signal value. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

Default

100

0

3

0

0

C257

C277

B270

L417

L441

C258

C278

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

AI1

AI1

AI1

AI1

AI1

AI2

AI2

AI1 - Wild Variable

Engineering Span - This value is set to 100 by CS3; however, it can be changed. Enter a value, that when added to the Engineering Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Wild

Variable transducer upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Wild Variable transducer lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Wild Variable signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Wild Variable transducer. 1 = 0 - 5 V input range; 0 = 1 - 5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Wild Variable transducer input is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

AI2 - Additive Feed Forward

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to

Engineering Zero, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Additive Feed Forward upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Additive Feed Forward lower range signal value.

0

0

3

0

0

0

0

8-5

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 8-3. CS3 Ratio Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

B271

L418

L442

5-4

5-4

5-4

AI2

AI2

AI2

2 of 4

Title and Function

AI2 - Additive Feed Forward (Cont)

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Additive Feed Forward signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Additive Feed Forward signal. 1 = 0 - 5 V input range; 0 = 1 - 5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Additive Feed Forward input is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

Default

3

0

0

L119

C259

C279

B272

L419

L443

L472

5-9

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-5

CON0

AI3

AI3

AI3

AI3

AI3

AO0

AI3 - Tracking Input (Output Tracking)

Output Track Enable - This datapoint must be configured to a

1 so that Output Tracking can be enabled when DI0 is an open contact.

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Engineering Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the tracking input upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the tracking input lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the tracking input signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the tracking input signal. 1 = 0 - 5 V input range;

0 = 1 - 5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the tracking input is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

AO0 - Control Out

0-20 mA Output - 0 = 4-20 mA signal; 1 = 0-20 mA signal.

Enter a value to match the output valve requirements.

0

0

0

3

0

0

0

L120

L122

C109

C110

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

Manual Fallback Disable - 0 = always power up in manual;

1 = auto/manual selector unchanged at power up.

Hard Manual Limit - 1 = apply output limits to the final output of the Auto-Manual Generator. It affects both the manual push buttons and the controller’s result. 0 = do not apply limits.

Output High Limit - Sets maximum Control Output signal value in engineering units.

Output Low Limit - Sets minimum Control Output signal value in engineering units.

0

1

100

0

8-6

Section 8. CS3 - Ratio (PID) Controller

Table 8-3. CS3 Ratio Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

C118

C106

C107

C108

C111

L106

L114

C115

C116

L264

L265

L288

L289

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-6

5-6

5-7

5-7

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

DI0

DI1

DO0

DO1

Title and Function

AO0 - Control Out (Cont)

Output Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the output value. When configured to a non-zero value, the output from the Auto-Selector is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. A zero disables output slewing. It does not affect manual operation.

CON0 Control Related Datapoints

Proportional Band - Is the percent of error required to move the output full scale for proportional action.

Reset Time - Is the number of minutes per repeat of integral action. It is mutually exclusive with Manual Reset.

Rate Time - Represents the minutes proportional action is advanced.

Manual Reset - It determines output valve position when the controller is in Auto and the error = 0. It is mutually exclusive with Reset Time.

Reverse Switch - 0 = Control Output

if PV

; 1 = Control

Output

if PV

.

Auto Enable - Controller output is from the PID algorithm when set to 1 and A/M push button is in Auto.

Controller Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Controller Lower Range value, will produce the control upper range value in engineering units.

Controller Lower Range - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the control lower range value.

DI0 - Force Output Tracking

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Force Output Tracking is enabled if DI0 is open (and datapoint L119 - Enable Output

Tracking = 1). Set to 1 to reverse the DI0 condition required to activated output tracking (DI0 closed = Force Output

Tracking).

DI1 - Ratio Enable

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Ratio Enable is permitted if

DI1 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the DI1 condition required to activate Ratio Enable (DI1 open = Ratio Enable).

DO0 - Process Alarm 1

Contact Output Invert - Normally, Process Alarm 1 is enabled if DO0 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the DO0 condition required to activate Process Alarm 1 (DO0 open = the PV value is not within the C103 limit).

DO1 - Process Alarm 2

Output Invert - Normally, Process Alarm 2 is enabled if DO1 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the DO1 condition required to activate Process Alarm 2 (DO1 open = the PV value is not within the C104 limit).

3 of 4

Default

0

100

0

0

50

1

1

100

0

0

0

0

0

8-7

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 8-3. CS3 Ratio Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

B335

C103

C104

C105

C114

C125

C126

C117

A000

A001

L109

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

4 of 4

Title and Function

Alarms Related Datapoints

Control Alarm Mode - Used to select one of six alarm types or none. See Table 5-9 for details and examples.

Alarm Limit 1 - Point in engineering units where an alarm is triggered because the PV is not within the limit value set in

C103.

Alarms Related Datapoints (Cont)

Alarm Limit 2 - Point in engineering units where an alarm is triggered because the PV is not within the limit value set in

C104.

Alarm Dead Band - Sets the activation/deactivation gaps for the alarm limit points. It is in engineering units.

Setpoint Related Datapoints

Control Zone - A gap on both sides of setpoint. When PV is within this gap, the proportional and integral output changes are suppressed. Derivative output is unaffected.

Setpoint High Limit - It is the maximum control setpoint value allowed.

Setpoint Low Limit - It is the minimum control setpoint value allowed.

Setpoint Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the setpoint.

When configured to a non-zero value, the setpoint used in the PID algorithm is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. The final value of the setpoint always appears on the units display. A zero disables setpoint slewing.

Miscellaneous Datapoints

Tagname - Assignable 10 character name.

Default

1

100

0

2

0

100

0

0

Engineering Units - Assignable 10 character designator.

Reverse Valve - Bottom of display output valve action indicators: 1 = [O] [C] display order, 0 = [C] [O] display order.

CON-

0

PER-

CENT

0

8-8

Section 9. CS4 - Automatic/Manual Station

9.0 CS4 - AUTOMATIC/MANUAL STATION

9.1 CS4 - AUTOMATIC/MANUAL STATION

The Automatic/Manual Station operates as a standard auto/manual selector and a manual loader.

Automatic throughput is enabled when DI1 is closed, DI0 is closed (no Output Tracking), and A

(Auto) is selected with the A/M faceplate push button. Automatic throughput is overridden when

DI1 is open. In automatic, the signal on AI0 is passed through to the station’s output. Transfer from automatic to manual is bumpless. Manual operation occurs when M is selected with the A/M push button. In manual, the station output is controlled with the faceplate output push buttons.

The station’s output tracks AI3 when an open contact appears on DI0 and Output Tracking (L119) is enabled. There is no PID control performed by the Automatic/Manual Station; however, the station monitors an Alarmed Variable on AI2. AI2 alarmed conditions are signaled with DO0 and

DO1. A typical low-resolution display Automatic/Manual Station is illustrated in Figure 9-1.

AO1 - NOT USED

DO0 - PROCESS ALARM 1

DO1 - PROCESS ALARM 2

AI3 - TRACKING INPUT

DI0 - FORCE OUTPUT TRACKING

(OPEN CONTACT)

AI0 - AUTO INPUT

DI1 - AUTO ENABLE

(CLOSED CONTACT)

AI1 - NOT USED

AI2 - ALARMED VARIABLE

FT

PUMP

AO0 - STATION OUTPUT

VALVE

AI0 - AUTO INPUT

MAN-

UAL IN-

OPEN

DI1

CLOSED

A

A/M

M

AI3 - TRACKING INPUT

(L119 = 1) OPEN

(CS4 = NO PID CONTROL)

CLOSED

DI0

AO0 - STATION OUTPUT

(SHOWN WITH AI3 DRIVING THE OUTPUT)

AI2 - ALARMED VARIABLE

Figure 9-1. Typical CS4 Automatic/Manual Station Application

DO0 -

PROCESS

ALARM 1

DO1 -

PROCESS

ALARM 2

(ALARM

LIMITS

SHOWN

HIGH/LOW)

9-1

53MC5000 Process Control Station

9.2 CS4 CONTROL SIGNALS

Loading CS4 connects the 53MC5000 Controller function blocks for operation as an Automatic/

Manual Station. As shown in Figure 9-1, CS4 provides eight control signals which are described in

Table 9-1:

Table 9-1. CS4 Control Signals

Control

Signal

AI0 - Auto

Input

AI1

AI2 - Alarmed

Variable

AI3 - Tracking

Input

Definition

This analog signal is gated through as the AO0

Station Output if DI0 and DI1 are both closed

(DI0 closed = no Output Tracking and DI1 closed = Enable Auto). Also, A (Auto) must be selected with the A/M faceplate push button.

Not used.

It is the designated input variable that is checked to be within acceptable process limits.

Cord

Set

ITB

TB1-1 (+)

TB1-2 (-)

TB1-3

This analog input signal value becomes the

Station Output value when the Force Output

Tracking contact input is open and datapoint

L119 (Enable Output Tracking) is configured to a

1.

It is the selected analog 4-20 mA output signal that is sent to the final control element.

TB1-9

TB1-10 (+)

TB1-11 (-)

TB1-13

TB1-14 (+)

TB1-15 (-)

TB1-17 (+)

TB1-18 (-)

Rear

Term

Board

1 (+)

2 (-)

3

1

7 (+)

8 (-)

4

9 (+)

8 (-)

10 (+)

11 (-)

AO0 -

Station

Output

AO1

DI0 - Force

Output

Tracking

13 (+)

14 (-)

DI1 - Auto

Enable

DO0 - Process

Alarm 1

DO1 - Process

Alarm 2

Not used.

When an open contact is present on this input, the Station Output value is forced to match the

Tracking Input value when datapoint L119

(Enable Output Tracking) is configured to a 1.

When a closed contact is present on this input and Auto is selected with the A/M faceplate push button, it enables the Auto Input analog signal value on AI0 to be selected as the AO0 Station

Output.

This contact is closed when the Alarmed

Variable value is not within the C103 value setting (Alarm Limit 1 datapoint); otherwise, the contact is open.

This contact is closed when the Alarmed

Variable value is not within the C104 value setting (Alarm Limit 2 datapoint); otherwise, the contact is open.

TB2-1 (+)

TB2-2 (-)

TB2-3 (+)

TB2-4 (-)

TB2-5 (+)

TB2-6 (-)

TB2-7 (+)

TB2-8 (-)

15 (+)

14 (-)

16 (+)

17 (-)

18 (+)

17 (-)

Signal

+24 V

AI0

SC

+24 V

AI2

SC

+24 V

AI3

SC

AO0

PC

DI0

PC

DI1

PC

DO0

PC

DO1

PC

9-2

Section 9. CS4 - Automatic/Manual Station

9.3 CS4 STANDARD DISPLAYS

Loading CS4 preconfigures the System Module display list for five displays. The five displays are listed in Table 9-2 with appropriate reference sections, figure numbers, and configuration tables. A configuration table is not listed for the Auto/Manual Point Display 3, as that information is provided in this section. To configure the Single Loop CON0 with Horizontal Trend, Parameter, and System

Status displays, reference the Section 4 and Section 5 information listed in the table.

Table 9-2. CS4 Standard Displays

Title

Auto/Manual Point Display 3 (CDM = 4)

Single Loop with Horizontal Trend - As shown below, the trend module for the Automatic/Manual Station is slightly different than the one illustrated in Figure 4-10.

Parameter Module 0 - PID datapoints are not applicable for this control strategy; therefore, this parameter module can be ignored or reconfigured to display three other datapoints that are frequently referenced.

Parameter Module 1- Alarm Limits

System Status

See

Section

4.3 and

4.3.5

4.5

4.6

Section 4

Figure

4-7

4-10 sheet 2 and figure below

4-11

Section 5

Table

5-9

5-11

4.6

4.2

4-11

4-2

5-11

5-15

AI2 - ALARMED VARIABLE

AI0 - AUTO INPUT

AO0 - STATION OUTPUT

80 S 0.0

PERCENT

A

IN 50.56

OV 62.33

(THERE IS NO SETPOINT

VALUE IN THE BOTTOM

LEGEND)

9.4 CS4 DATAPOINT CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS

See Figure 9-2 and Table 9-3 to configure datapoints for CS4 - Automatic/Manual Station.

Table 9-3 also lists the Section 5 modules that can be referenced for more detailed definitions of the datapoints when required. A datapoint does not have to be configured if the default value listed in Table 9-3 is appropriate for the process application.

Loading CS4 sets the CON0 display mode to 4 (CON Display Mode datapoint B339 = 4).

9-3

53MC5000 Process Control Station

OUTPUT TRACKING RELATED

DATAPOINTS

ENABLE OUTPUT TRACKING (L119)

AI3 ENGINEERING SPAN (C259)

AI3 ENGINEERING ZERO (C279)

AI3 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B272)

AI3 0-5 V INPUT (L419)

AI3 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L443)

AI3 - TRACKING INPUT

DI0 - FORCE OUTPUT TRACKING

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L264])

AI2 - ALARMED VARIABLE

ALARMED VARIABLE

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI2 ENGINEERING SPAN (C258)

AI2 ENGINEERING ZERO (C278)

AI2 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B271)

AI2 0-5 V INPUT (L418)

AI2 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L442)

DI1 - AUTO ENABLE

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L265])

AI1 - NOT USED

AIO - AUTO INPUT

AUTO INPUT

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI0 ENGINEERING SPAN (C256)

AI0 ENGINEERING ZERO (C276)

AI0 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B269)

AI0 0-5 V INPUT (L416)

AI0 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L440)

MISCELLANEOUS DATAPOINTS

(SHOWN IN RECTANGLES ON THE

DISPLAY)

CONTROL TAGNAME (A000)

[CON-0]

ENGINEERING UNITS (A001)

[PERCENT]

NOTE: BRACKETS [XXXX] CONTAIN DATA SHOWN IN RECTANGLES ON

THE DISPLAY.

ALARMS RELATED DATAPOINTS

CONTROL ALARM MODE (B335)

0 - HIGH/LOW

1 - NONE

2 - HIGH/NONE

3 - NONE/LOW

4 - HIGH/HI-HI

5 - LOW/LO-LO

6 - HI SP DEVIATION/LO SP

DEVIATION

ALARM LIMIT 1 (C103)

ALARM LIMIT 2 (C104)

ALARM DEAD BAND (C105)

DO0 - PROCESS ALARM 1

(CONTACT OUTPUT INVERT [L288])

DO1 - PROCESS ALARM 2

(CONTACT OUTPUT INVERT [L289])

AO1 - NOT USED

AO0 - STATION OUTPUT

STATION OUTPUT RELATED

DATAPOINTS

AO0 0-20 mA OUTPUT (L472)

MANUAL FALLBACK DISABLE (L120)

HARD MANUAL LIMIT (L122)

OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT (C109)

OUTPUT LOW LIMIT (C110)

CON0 CONTROL RELATED DATA-

POINTS

CONTROLLER SPAN (C115) [100]

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE

(C116) [0]

Figure 9-2. CS4 Automatic/Manual Station Datapoints

9-4

Section 9. CS4 - Automatic/Manual Station

Table 9-3. CS4 Automatic/Manual Station Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

C256

C276

B269

L416

L440

C258

C278

B271

L418

L442

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

AI0

AI0

AI0

AI0

AI0

AI2

AI2

AI2

AI2

AI2

Title and Function

AI0 - Auto Input

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Engineering Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Auto Input upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Auto Input lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Auto Input signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the voltage range of the Auto Input signal. 1 = 0 - 5 V range; 0 = 1 - 5 V range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Auto Input signal is a squared value. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

AI2 - Alarmed Variable

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to

Engineering Zero, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Alarmed Variable upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Alarmed Variable lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Alarmed Variable signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the voltage range of the Alarmed Variable signal. 1 = 0 - 5 V input range; 0 = 1 -

5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Alarmed Variable input is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

1 of 3

Default

100

0

3

0

0

0

0

3

0

0

L119

C259

C279

B272

5-9

5-4

5-4

5-4

CON0

AI3

AI3

AI3

AI3 - Tracking Input (Output Tracking)

Output Track Enable - This datapoint must be configured to a

1 so that Output Tracking can be enabled when DI0 is an open contact.

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Engineering Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the tracking input upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the tracking input lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the tracking input signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0

0

0

3

9-5

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 9-3. CS4 Automatic/Manual Station Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

AI3 - Tracking Input (Output Tracking) (Cont)

L419 5-4 AI3

L443 5-4 AI3

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the tracking input signal. 1 = 0 - 5 V input range;

0 = 1 - 5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the tracking input is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

AO0 - Station Output

L472

L120

L122

C109

C110

5-5

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

AO0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

0-20 mA Output - 0 = 4-20 mA signal; 1 = 0-20 mA signal.

Enter a value to match the output valve requirements.

Manual Fallback Disable - 0 = always power up in manual;

1 = auto/manual selector unchanged at power up.

Hard Manual Limit - 1 = apply output limits to the final output of the Auto-Manual Generator. It affects both the manual push buttons and the controller’s result. 0 = do not apply limits.

Output High Limit - Sets maximum Station Output signal value in engineering units.

Output Low Limit - Sets minimum Station Output signal value in engineering units.

CON0 Control Related Datapoints

C115 5-9 CON0

C116

L264

L265

L288

L289

5-9

5-6

5-6

5-7

5-7

CON0

DI0

DI1

DO0

DO1

Controller Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Controller Lower Range value, will produce the control upper range value in engineering units.

Controller Lower Range - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the control lower range value.

DI0 - Force Output Tracking

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Force Output Tracking is enabled if DI0 is open (and datapoint L119 - Enable Output

Tracking = 1). Set to 1 to reverse the DI0 condition required to activated output tracking (DI0 closed = Force Output

Tracking).

DI1 - Auto Enable

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Auto Enable is permitted if

DI1 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the DI1 condition required to activate Auto Enable (DI1 open = Auto Enable).

DO0 - Process Alarm 1

Contact Output Invert - Normally, Process Alarm 1 is enabled if DO0 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the DO0 condition required to activate Process Alarm 1 (DO0 open = the

Alarmed Variable value is not within the C103 limit).

DO1 - Process Alarm 2

Output Invert - Normally, Process Alarm 2 is enabled if DO1 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the DO1 condition required to activate Process Alarm 2 (DO1 open = the Alarmed Variable value is not within the C104 limit).

2 of 3

Default

0

0

0

0

1

100

0

100

0

0

0

0

0

9-6

Section 9. CS4 - Automatic/Manual Station

Table 9-3. CS4 Automatic/Manual Station Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

B335

C103

C104

C105

A000

A001

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

3 of 3

Title and Function

Alarms Related Datapoints

Control Alarm Mode - Used to select one of six alarm types or none. See Table 5-9 for details and examples.

Alarm Limit 1 - Point in engineering units where an alarm is triggered because the Alarmed Variable is not within the limit value set in C103.

Alarm Limit 2 - Point in engineering units where an alarm is triggered because the Alarmed Variable is not within the limit value set in C104.

Alarm Dead Band - Sets the activation/deactivation gaps for the alarm limit points. It is in engineering units.

Miscellaneous Datapoints

Tagname - Assignable 10 character name.

Engineering Units - Assignable 10 character designator.

Default

1

100

0

2

CON-

0

PER-

CENT

9-7

NOTES:

53MC5000 Process Control Station

9-8

Section 10. CS5 - Ratio Automatic/Manual Station

10.0 CS5 - RATIO AUTOMATIC/MANUAL

STATION

10.1 CS5 - RATIO AUTOMATIC/MANUAL STATION

The Ratio Automatic/Manual Station operates as a combination auto/manual selector, a manual loader, and a ratio station. Transfer from automatic to manual is bumpless after which the output may be manipulated with the faceplate output push buttons. In automatic, the signal on AI0 is modified by the ratio value, then passed through to the station’s output at AO0. A closed contact on DI1 forces the value of the ratio to match AI1. When DI1 has an open contact, the ratio value is set by the faceplate setpoint push buttons. The station’s output tracks AI3 when an open contact appears on DI0 and output tracking is enabled (L119 = 1). The station also provides alarming based on an independent signal, AI2. Alarm conditions are reflected by DO0 and DO1. A typical low-resolution display Ratio Automatic/Manual Station is illustrated in Figure 10-1.

AI3 - TRACKING INPUT

DI0 - FORCE OUTPUT TRACKING

(OPEN CONTACT)

AO1 - NOT USED

DO0 - PROCESS ALARM 1

DO1 - PROCESS ALARM 2

AI0 - AUTO INPUT

DI1 - SELECT REMOTE RATIO

(CLOSED CONTACT)

AI1 - REMOTE RATIO INPUT

AI2 - ALARMED VARIABLE

AO0 - STATION OUTPUT

FT

VALVE

PUMP

MANUAL

INPUT

(L119 = 1)

AI0 - AUTO INPUT

M

A

AI3 - TRACKING INPUT

A/M

OPEN

AI1 - REMOTE RATIO INPUT

SETPOINT

PUSH BUTTONS

CLOSED

DI1

(K1)

OPEN

CLOSED

DI0

AO0 - STATION OUTPUT

(SHOWN WITH AI0 AND AI1

DRIVING THE OUTPUT)

(CS5 = NO PID CONTROL)

AI2 - ALARMED VARIABLE

DO0 -

PROCESS

ALARM 1

DO1 -

PROCESS

ALARM 2

(ALARM

LIMITS

SHOWN

HIGH/LOW)

Figure 10-1. Typical CS5 Ratio Automatic/Manual Station Application

10-1

53MC5000 Process Control Station

10.2 CS5 CONTROL SIGNALS

Loading CS5 connects the 53MC5000 Controller function blocks for operation as a Ratio Automatic

/Manual Station. As shown in Figure 10-1, CS5 provides nine control signals which are described in Table 10-1:

Table 10-1. CS5 Control Signals

Control

Signal

AI0 - Auto

Input

AI1 - Remote

Ratio Input

AI2 - Alarmed

Variable

AI3 - Tracking

Input

Definition

This analog signal is gated through as the AO0

Station Output if DI0 and DI1 are both closed

(DI0 closed = no Output Tracking and DI1 closed = Enable Auto). Also, A (Auto) must be selected with the A/M faceplate push button.

This analog input signal value alters the K1 ratio value which is used to modify the AI0 input before it is passed through as the AO0 Station

Output.

It is the designated input variable that is checked to be within acceptable process limits.

Cord

Set

ITB

TB1-1 (+)

TB1-2 (-)

TB1-3

TB1-5 (+)

TB1-6 (-)

TB1-7

This analog input signal value becomes the

Station Output value when the Force Output

Tracking contact input is open and datapoint

L119 (Enable Output Tracking) is configured to a

1.

It is the selected analog 4-20 mA output signal that is sent to the final control element.

TB1-9

TB1-10 (+)

TB1-11 (-)

TB1-13

TB1-14 (+)

TB1-15 (-)

TB1-17 (+)

TB1-18 (-)

Rear

Term

Board

1 (+)

2 (-)

3

4 (+)

5 (-)

6

1

7 (+)

8 (-)

4

9 (+)

8 (-)

10 (+)

11 (-)

AO0 -

Station

Output

AO1

DI0 - Force

Output

Tracking

13 (+)

14 (-)

DI1 - Auto

Enable

DO0 - Process

Alarm 1

DO1 - Process

Alarm 2

Not used.

When an open contact is present on this input, the Station Output value is forced to match the

Tracking Input value when datapoint L119

(Enable Output Tracking) is configured to a 1.

When a closed contact is present on this input and Auto is selected with the A/M faceplate push button, it enables the Auto Input analog signal value on AI0 to be selected as the AO0 Station

Output.

This contact is closed when the Alarmed

Variable value is not within the C103 value setting (Alarm Limit 1 datapoint); otherwise, the contact is open.

This contact is closed when the Alarmed

Variable value is not within the C104 value setting (Alarm Limit 2 datapoint); otherwise, the contact is open.

TB2-1 (+)

TB2-2 (-)

TB2-3 (+)

TB2-4 (-)

TB2-5 (+)

TB2-6 (-)

TB2-7 (+)

TB2-8 (-)

15 (+)

14 (-)

16 (+)

17 (-)

18 (+)

17 (-)

Signal

+24 V

AI0

SC

+24 V

AI1

SC

+24 V

AI2

SC

+24 V

AI3

SC

AO0

PC

DI0

PC

DI1

PC

DO0

PC

DO1

PC

10-2

Section 10. CS5 - Ratio Automatic/Manual Station

10.3 CS5 STANDARD DISPLAYS

Loading CS5 preconfigures the System Module display list for five displays. The five displays are listed in Table 10-2 with appropriate reference sections, figure numbers, and configuration tables.

A configuration table is not listed for the Ratio Auto/Manual Point Display 3, as that information is provided in this section. To configure the Single Loop CON0 with Horizontal Trend, Parameter, and System Status displays, reference the Section 4 and Section 5 information listed in the table.

Table 10-2. CS5 Standard Displays

Title

Ratio Auto/Manual Point Display 3 (CDM = 5)

Single Loop with Horizontal Trend - As shown below, the trend module for the Ratio Automatic/Manual Station is slightly different than the one illustrated in Figure 4-10.

Parameter Module 0 - PID datapoints are not applicable for this control strategy; therefore, this parameter module can be ignored or reconfigured to display three other datapoints that are frequently referenced.

Parameter Module 1- Alarm Limits

System Status

See

Section

4.3 and

4.3.6

4.5

4.6

Section 4

Figure

4-8

4-10 sheet 2 and figure below

4-11

Section 5

Table

5-9

5-11

4.6

4.2

4-11

4-2

5-11

5-15

AI2 - ALARMED VARIABLE

AI0 - AUTO INPUT

AO0 - STATION OUTPUT

80 S 0.0

PERCENT

AR

IN 50.56

OV 62.33

(THERE IS NO SETPOINT

VALUE IN THE BOTTOM

LEGEND)

10.4 CS5 DATAPOINT CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS

See Figure 10-2 and Table 10-3 to configure datapoints for CS5 - Ratio Automatic/Manual Station.

Table 10-3 also lists the Section 5 modules that can be referenced for more detailed definitions of the datapoints when required. A datapoint does not have to be configured if the default value listed in Table 10-3 is appropriate for the process application.

Loading CS5 initializes the Engineering Span (C257) to 100 for AI1 (Remote Ratio Input), it sets the CON0 Display Mode (B339) to

5, and sets the CON0 Setpoint Mode (B338) to 1.

10-3

53MC5000 Process Control Station

OUTPUT TRACKING RELATED

DATAPOINTS

ENABLE OUTPUT TRACKING (L119)

AI3 ENGINEERING SPAN (C259)

AI3 ENGINEERING ZERO (C279)

AI3 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B272)

AI3 0-5 V INPUT (L419)

AI3 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L443)

AI3 - TRACKING INPUT

DI0 - FORCE OUTPUT TRACKING

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L264])

AI2 - ALARMED VARIABLE

ALARMED VARIABLE

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI2 ENGINEERING SPAN (C258)

AI2 ENGINEERING ZERO (C278)

AI2 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B271)

AI2 0-5 V INPUT (L418)

AI2 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L442)

DI1 - SELECT REMOTE RATIO

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L265])

AI1 - REMOTE RATIO INPUT

AIO - AUTO INPUT

AUTO INPUT

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI0 ENGINEERING SPAN (C256)

AI0 ENGINEERING ZERO (C276)

AI0 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B269)

AI0 0-5 V INPUT (L416)

AI0 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L440)

REMOTE RATIO INPUT

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI0 ENGINEERING SPAN (C257)

AI0 ENGINEERING ZERO (C277)

AI0 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B270)

AI0 0-5 V INPUT (L417)

AI0 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L441)

MISCELLANEOUS DATAPOINTS

(SHOWN IN RECTANGLES ON THE

DISPLAY)

CONTROL TAGNAME (A000)

[CON-0]

ENGINEERING UNITS (A001)

[PERCENT]

ALARMS RELATED DATAPOINTS

CONTROL ALARM MODE (B335)

0 - HIGH/LOW

1 - NONE

2 - HIGH/NONE

3 - NONE/LOW

4 - HIGH/HI-HI

5 - LOW/LO-LO

6 - HI SP DEVIATION/LO SP

DEVIATION

ALARM LIMIT 1 (C103)

ALARM LIMIT 2 (C104)

ALARM DEAD BAND (C105)

DO0 - PROCESS ALARM 1

(CONTACT OUTPUT INVERT [L288])

DO1 - PROCESS ALARM 2

(CONTACT OUTPUT INVERT [L289])

AO1 - NOT USED

AO0 - STATION OUTPUT

STATION OUTPUT RELATED

DATAPOINTS

AO0 0-20 mA OUTPUT (L472)

MANUAL FALLBACK DISABLE (L120)

HARD MANUAL LIMIT (L122)

OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT (C109)

OUTPUT LOW LIMIT (C110)

CON0 CONTROL RELATED DATA-

POINTS

CONTROLLER SPAN (C115) [100]

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE

(C116) [0]

NOTE: BRACKETS [XXXX] CONTAIN DATA SHOWN IN RECTANGLES ON THE DISPLAY.

Figure 10-2. CS5 Ratio Automatic/Manual Station Datapoints

10-4

Section 10. CS5 - Ratio Automatic/Manual Station

Table 10-3. CS5 Ratio Automatic/Manual Station Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

C256

C276

B269

L416

L440

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

AI0

AI0

AI0

AI0

AI0

Title and Function

AI0 - Auto Input

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Engineering Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Auto Input upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Auto Input lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Auto Input signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the voltage range of the Auto Input signal. 1 = 0 - 5 V range; 0 = 1 - 5 V range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Auto Input signal is a squared value. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

1 of 3

Default

100

0

3

0

0

C257

C277

B270

L417

L441

C258

C278

B271

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

AI1

AI1

AI1

AI1

AI1

AI2

AI2

AI2

AI1 - Remote Ratio Input

AI1 Engineering Span - Set to 100 by CS5; however, it can be changed. Enter a value, that when added to the

Engineering Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Remote Ratio Input upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Remote Ratio Input lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Remote Ratio Input signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Remote Ratio Input signal. 1 = 0 - 5 V input range; 0 = 1 - 5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Remote Ratio input is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

AI2 - Alarmed Variable

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to

Engineering Zero, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Alarmed Variable upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Alarmed Variable lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Alarmed Variable signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0

0

3

0

0

0

0

3

10-5

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 10-3. CS5 Ratio Automatic/Manual Station Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

L418

L442

L119

C259

C279

B272

L419

L443

L472

L120

L122

C109

C110

C115

C116

5-4

5-4

5-9

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-5

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

AI2

AI2

CON0

AI3

AI3

AI3

AI3

AI3

AO0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

Title and Function

AI2 - Alarmed Variable (Cont)

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the voltage range of the Alarmed Variable signal. 1 = 0 - 5 V input range; 0 = 1 -

5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Alarmed Variable input is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

AI3 - Tracking Input (Output Tracking)

Output Track Enable - This datapoint must be configured to a

1 so that Output Tracking can be enabled when DI0 is an open contact.

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Engineering Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the tracking input upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the tracking input lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the tracking input signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the tracking input signal. 1 = 0 - 5 V input range;

0 = 1 - 5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the tracking input is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

AO0 - Station Output

0-20 mA Output - 0 = 4-20 mA signal; 1 = 0-20 mA signal.

Enter a value to match the output valve requirements.

Manual Fallback Disable - 0 = always power up in manual;

1 = auto/manual selector unchanged at power up.

Hard Manual Limit - 1 = apply output limits to the final output of the Auto-Manual Generator. It affects both the manual push buttons and the controller’s result. 0 = do not apply limits.

Output High Limit - Sets maximum Station Output signal value in engineering units.

Output Low Limit - Sets minimum Station Output signal value in engineering units.

CON0 Control Related Datapoints

Controller Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Controller Lower Range value, will produce the control upper range value in engineering units.

Controller Lower Range - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the control lower range value.

2 of 3

Default

0

0

0

0

0

3

0

0

0

0

1

100

0

100

0

10-6

Section 10. CS5 - Ratio Automatic/Manual Station

Table 10-3. CS5 Ratio Automatic/Manual Station Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

L264

L265

L288

L289

B335

C103

C104

C105

A000

A001

5-6

5-6

5-7

5-7

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

DI0

DI1

DO0

DO1

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

3 of 3

Title and Function

DI0 - Force Output Tracking

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Force Output Tracking is enabled if DI0 is open (and datapoint L119 - Enable Output

Tracking = 1). Set to 1 to reverse the DI0 condition required to activated output tracking (DI0 closed = Force Output

Tracking).

DI1 - Select Remote Ratio

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Select Remote Ratio is permitted if DI1 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the DI1 condition required to permit Select Remote Ratio (DI1 open =

Select Remote Ratio).

DO0 - Process Alarm 1

Contact Output Invert - Normally, Process Alarm 1 is enabled if DO0 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the DO0 condition required to activate Process Alarm 1 (DO0 open = the

Alarmed Variable value is not within the C103 limit).

DO1 - Process Alarm 2

Output Invert - Normally, Process Alarm 2 is enabled if DO1 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the DO1 condition required to activate Process Alarm 2 (DO1 open = the Alarmed Variable value is not within the C104 limit).

Alarms Related Datapoints

Control Alarm Mode - Used to select one of six alarm types or none. See Table 5-9 for details and examples.

Alarm Limit 1 - Point in engineering units where an alarm is triggered because the Alarmed Variable is not within the limit value set in C103.

Alarm Limit 2 - Point in engineering units where an alarm is triggered because the Alarmed Variable is not within the limit value set in C104.

Alarm Dead Band - Sets the activation/deactivation gaps for the alarm limit points. It is in engineering units.

Miscellaneous Datapoints

Tagname - Assignable 10 character name.

Engineering Units - Assignable 10 character designator.

Default

0

0

0

0

1

100

0

2

CON-

0

PER-

CENT

10-7

NOTES:

53MC5000 Process Control Station

10-8

Section 11. CS20 - Two Loop Controller

11.0 CS20 - TWO LOOP CONTROLLER

11.1 CS20 - TWO LOOP CONTROLLER

A two loop 53MC5000 Controller is configured at the factory for CS20 operation to provide the standard displays listed in Table 11-2 and the default datapoint settings listed in Table 11-3. As a

Two Loop (PID) Controller, each loop Proportional Band is set at 100%; the Process Variables AI0-

1 are scaled 0-100% for linear 4-20 mA input signals; and AO0-1 are set as reverse action (PV above setpoint causes decreasing value) control signals over a 4-20 mA signalling range. These settings may be altered and additional Control Strategy 20 (CS20) functions can be activated as necessitated by the process application. The Two Loop Controller provides two identical standard

PID controllers with both control loops fully independent of each other. The input/output signals for the two control loops are identical: Process Variable (PV), Remote Setpoint, Remote Setpoint Enable, Control Output, and Process Alarms.

Just as with the standard Single Loop (PID) Controller, only the Process Variable and Control Output of each loop are required for control purposes; the other signals do not have to be connected or configured

. Each loop calculates an output from the difference between its Process Variable feedback signal sent from a Field Transmitter (FT) (e.g, flow meter) and its setpoint (SP) value. After the output is calculated, it is applied to a final control loop element (e.g, valve) to restore process flow to the loop setpoint value.

Validate the controller model number to ensure it has the necessary two loop hardware capabilities.

A typical low-resolution display Two Loop Controller process application is illustrated in Figure 11-1.

DO0 - PROCESS ALARMS LOOP 1

DO1 - PROCESS ALARMS LOOP 2

AI2 - REMOTE SETPOINT LOOP 1

AI3 - REMOTE SETPOINT LOOP 2

DI0 - REMOTE ENABLE LOOP 1

(CLOSED CONTACT)

DI1 - REMOTE ENABLE LOOP 2

(CLOSED CONTACT)

AI1 - PROCESS

VARIABLE LOOP 2

AI0 - PROCESS

VARIABLE LOOP 1

AO1 - CONTROL

OUTPUT LOOP 2

AO0 - CONTROL

OUTPUT LOOP 1

PUMP

FT

LOOP 1

VALVE

PUMP

FT

VALVE

LOOP 2

Figure 11-1. Typical CS20 Two Loop Controller Application

11-1

53MC5000 Process Control Station

11.2 CS20 CONTROL SIGNALS

Loading CS20 connects the 53MC5000 Controller function blocks for operation as two standard

PID controllers. As shown in Figure 11-1, up to ten control signals are available; however, only two are essential for each loop controller: they are the Process Variable and the Control Output. If the other six control signal functions are not needed, then their respective datapoints should be left at the default values. Table 11-1 below describes the ten signals in CS20.

Table 11-1. CS20 Control Signals

Control

Signal

AI0 - Process

Variable Loop 1

AI1 - Process

Variable Loop 2

AI2 - Remote

Setpoint Loop 1

AI3 - Remote

Setpoint Loop 2

AO0 - Control

Output Loop 1

Definition

This analog input signal represents the value of the Loop 1 process to be manipulated by the controller. It is compared to the Loop 1 control setpoint to determine the Control Output Loop 1 value.

This analog input signal represents the value of the Loop 2 process to be manipulated by the controller. It is compared to the Loop 2 control setpoint to determine the Control Output Loop 2 value.

This analog input signal represents the value to be used as the Loop 1 control setpoint when remote setpoint operation is selected with the faceplate push buttons and enabled by DI0.

This analog input signal represents the value to be used as the Loop 2 control setpoint when remote setpoint operation is selected with the faceplate push buttons and enabled by DI1.

This is the 4-20 mA output signal that drives the Loop 1 final control element.

Cord

Set

ITB

TB1-1 (+)

TB1-2 (-)

TB1-3

TB1-5 (+)

TB1-6 (-)

TB1-7

TB1-9

TB1-10 (+)

TB1-11 (-)

TB1-13

TB1-14 (+)

TB1-15 (-)

TB1-17 (+)

TB1-18 (-)

Rear

Term

Board

1 (+)

2 (-)

3

4 (+)

5 (-)

6

1

7 (+)

8 (-)

4

9 (+)

8 (-)

10 (+)

11 (-)

1 of 2

Signal

+24 V

AI0

SC

+24 V

AI1

SC

+24 V

AI2

SC

+24 V

AI3

SC

AO0

PC

AO1 - Control

Output Loop 2

This is the 4-20 mA output signal that drives the Loop 2 final control element.

TB1-19 (+)

TB1-20 (-)

12 (+)

11 (-)

DI0 - Remote

Enable Loop 1

DI1 - Remote

Enable Loop 2

DO0 - Process

Alarms Loop 1

When a closed contact is present on this input, the operator can select the setpoint value to be set by the value of the Loop 1 Remote Setpoint input with the R/L push button.

When a closed contact is present on this input, the operator can select the setpoint value to be set by the value of the Loop 2 Remote Setpoint input with the R/L push button.

This contact is closed when the Loop 1 Process

Variable value is not within the C103 and C104 datapoint values (Loop 1 Alarm Limits 1 and 2); otherwise, the contact is open.

TB2-1 (+)

TB2-2 (-)

TB2-3 (+)

TB2-4 (-)

TB2-5 (+)

TB2-6 (-)

13 (+)

14 (-)

15 (+)

14 (-)

16 (+)

17 (-)

AN01

PC

DI0

PC

DI1

PC

DO0

PC

11-2

Section 11. CS20 - Two Loop Controller

Table 11-1. CS20 Control Signals

Control

Signal

DO1 - Process

Alarms Loop 2

Definition

This contact is closed when the Loop 2 Process

Variable value is not within the C139 and C140 datapoint values (Loop 2 Alarm Limits 1 and 2); otherwise, the contact is open.

Cord

Set

ITB

TB2-7 (+)

TB2-8 (-)

2 of 2

Rear

Term

Board

18 (+)

17 (-)

Signal

DO1

PC

11.3 CS20 STANDARD DISPLAYS

Loading CS20 preconfigures the System Module display list for ten displays. The ten displays are listed in Table 11-2 with appropriate reference sections, figure numbers, and configuration tables.

A configuration table is not listed for the Two Loop CON0 and CON1 display, as that information is provided in this section. To configure the Horizontal Trend, Parameter, and System Status displays, reference the Section 4 and Section 5 information listed in the table. The Single Loop

CON0 and Single Loop CON1 displays will automatically be configured when the Two Loop CON0 and CON1 display is configured, with the exception of the Reverse Valve and Engineering Units datapoints. These datapoints will also be covered in this section with the Two Loop CON0 and

CON1 display information.

Table 11-2. CS20 Standard Displays

Title

Single Loop CON0

Single Loop CON0 with Horizontal Trend

Parameter Module 0 - PID datapoints

Parameter Module 1 - Alarm Limits

System Status

Single Loop CON1

Single Loop CON1 with Horizontal Trend

Parameter Module 5 - PID datapoints

Parameter Module 6 - Alarm Limits

Two Loop CON0 and CON1

See

Section

4.3 and

4.3.1

4.5

4.6

4.6

4.2

4.3 and

4.3.1

4.5

4.6

4.6

4.4

Section 4

Figure

4-3 sheet 1

4-10 sheet 2

4-11

4-11

4-2

4-3 sheet 1

4-10 sheet 2

4-11

4-11

4-9 sheet 2

Section 5

Table

5-9

5-11

5-11

5-15

5-9

5-11

5-11

11.4 CS20 DATAPOINT CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS

See Figure 11-2 and Table 11-3 to configure datapoints for CS20 - Two Loop Controller. Table 11-

3 also lists the Section 5 modules that can be referenced for more detailed definitions of the datapoints when required. A datapoint does not have to be configured if the default value listed in

Table 11-3 is appropriate for the process application.

Loading CS20 initializes the Engineering

Span (C257) to 100 for AI1 (Process Variable Loop 2).

11-3

53MC5000 Process Control Station

AI0 - PROCESS VARIABLE LOOP 1

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI0 ENGINEERING SPAN (C256)

AI0 ENGINEERING ZERO (C276)

AI0 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B269)

AI0 0-5 V INPUT (L416)

AI0 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L440)

AIO - PROCESS VARIABLE LOOP 1

AI1 - PROCESS VARIABLE LOOP 2

AI1 - PROCESS VARIABLE LOOP 2

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI1 ENGINEERING SPAN (C257) = 100

AI1 ENGINEERING ZERO (C277)

AI1 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B270)

AI1 0-5 V INPUT (L417)

AI1 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L441)

DI0 - REMOTE ENABLE LOOP 1

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L264])

DI1 - REMOTE ENABLE LOOP 2

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L265])

AI2 - REMOTE SETPOINT LOOP 1

AI2 - ROMOTE SETPOINT LOOP 1 RELATED DATAPOINTS

AFFECTED BY THE SETPOINT RELATED DATAPOINTS

REMOTE SETPOINT ENABLE (L115)

REMOTE SETPOINT BIAS (B1) (C112)

REMOTE SETPOINT RATIO (K1) (C113)

AI2 ENGINEERING SPAN (C258)

AI2 ENGINEERING ZERO (C278)

AI2 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B271)

AI2 0-5 V INPUT (L418)

AI2 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L442)

AI3 - REMOTE SETPOINT LOOP 2

AI3 - ROMOTE SETPOINT LOOP 2 RELATED DATAPOINTS

AFFECTED BY THE SETPOINT RELATED DATAPOINTS

REMOTE SETPOINT ENABLE (L139)

REMOTE SETPOINT BIAS (B1) (C148)

REMOTE SETPOINT RATIO (K1) (C149)

AI3 ENGINEERING SPAN (C259)

AI3 ENGINEERING ZERO (C279)

AI3 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B272)

AI3 0-5 V INPUT (L419)

AI3 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L443)

SETPOINT RELATED DATAPOINTS

CONTROL ZONE (C114, C150)

SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT (C125, C161)

SETPOINT LOW LIMIT (C126, C162)

SETPOINT SLEW RATE (C117, C153)

DOUBLE DATAPOINTS: (LOOP 1, LOOP 2)

Figure 11-2. CS20 Two Loop Controller Datapoints (Sheet 1 of 2)

11-4

Section 11. CS20 - Two Loop Controller

MISCELLANEOUS DATAPOINTS (SHOWN IN

RECTANGLES ON THE DISPLAY)

CONTROL TAGNAME (A000, A002) [CON-0,

CON-1]

ENGINEERING UNITS (A001, A003) [PERCENT]

(NOT SHOWN)

REVERSE VALVE (L109, L133) [C] [O] (NOT

SHOWN)

AO0 - CONTROL OUTPUT LOOP 1 RELATED DATAPOINTS

AO0 0-20 mA OUTPUT (L472)

MANUAL FALLBACK DISABLE (L120)

HARD MANUAL LIMIT (L122)

OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT (C109)

OUTPUT LOW LIMIT (C110)

OUTPUT SLEW RATE (C118)

CON0 CONTROL RELATED DATAPOINTS (SEE SECTION 16,

TUNING, OR SECTION 17, EASY-TUNE, TO TUNE PID DATA-

POINTS)

PROPORTIONAL BAND (C106) (P)

RESET TIME (C107) (I)

RATE TIME (C108) (D)

MANUAL RESET (C111)

REVERSE SWITCH (L106)

AUTO ENABLE (L114)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C115) [100]

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE (C116) [0]

AO0 - CONTROL OUTPUT LOOP 1

DO0 - PROCESS ALARMS LOOP 1

(CONTACT OUTPUT INVERT [L288])

DO1 - PROCESS ALARMS LOOP 2

(CONTACT OUTPUT INVERT [L289])

AO1 - CONTROL OUTPUT LOOP 2

ALARMS RELATED DATAPOINTS

CONTROL ALARM MODE (B335, B340)

0 - HIGH/LOW

1 - NONE

2 - HIGH/NONE

3 - NONE/LOW

4 - HIGH/HI-HI

5 - LOW/LO-LO

6 - HI SP DEVIATION/LO SP

DEVIATION

ALARM LIMIT 1 (C103, C139)

ALARM LIMIT 2 (C104, C140)

ALARM DEAD BAND (C105, C141)

AO1 - CONTROL OUTPUT LOOP 2 RELATED DATAPOINTS

AO1 0-20 mA OUTPUT (L473)

MANUAL FALLBACK DISABLE (L144)

HARD MANUAL LIMIT (L146)

OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT (C145)

OUTPUT LOW LIMIT (C146)

OUTPUT SLEW RATE (C154)

CON1 CONTROL RELATED DATAPOINTS (SEE SECTION 16, TUN-

ING, OR SECTION 17, EASY-TUNE, TO TUNE PID DATAPOINTS)

PROPORTIONAL BAND (C142) (P)

RESET TIME (C143) (I)

RATE TIME (C144) (D)

MANUAL RESET (C147)

REVERSE SWITCH (L130)

AUTO ENABLE (L138)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C151) [100]

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE (C152) [0]

DOUBLE DATAPOINTS: (LOOP 1, LOOP 2)

NOTE: BRACKETS [XXXX] CONTAIN DATA SHOWN IN

RECTANGLES ON THE DISPLAY.

Figure 11-2. CS20 Two Loop Controller Datapoints (Sheet 2 of 2)

11-5

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 11-3. CS20 Two Loop Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

C256

C276

B269

L416

L440

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

AI0

AI0

AI0

AI0

AI0

Title and Function

AI0 - Process Variable Loop 1

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Engineering Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Loop 1 PV transducer upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 1 PV transducer lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Loop 1 PV transducer signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Loop 1 PV transducer. 1 = 0 - 5 V range; 0 = 1 -

5 V range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Loop 1 PV transducer is a nonlinear differential pressure (DP) cell that provides a squared signal value. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

1 of 6

Default

100

0

3

0

0

C257

C277

B270

L417

L441

L115

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

AI1

AI1

AI1

AI1

AI1

AI1 - Process Variable Loop 2

Engineering Span - Set to 100 by CS20; however, it can be changed. Enter a value, that when added to the Engineering

Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Loop 2 PV transducer upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 2 PV transducer lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Loop 2 PV transducer signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Loop 2 PV transducer. 1 = 0 - 5 V range; 0 = 1 -

5 V range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Loop 2 PV transducer is a nonlinear differential pressure (DP) cell that provides a squared signal value. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

100

(CS20)

0

3

0

0

AI2 - Remote Setpoint Loop 1 (Is affected by Setpoint Related Datapoints)

5-9 CON0 Remote Setpoint Enable - This datapoint is controlled by DI0.

When DI0 is a closed contact, this datapoint is set to 1 to allow the modified Loop 1 Remote Setpoint to become the value used as the control setpoint if the R/L push button is in

Remote.

0

11-6

Section 11. CS20 - Two Loop Controller

Table 11-3. CS20 Two Loop Controller Datapoints

2 of 6

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

AI2 - Remote Setpoint Loop 1 (Is affected by Setpoint Related Datapoints) (Cont)

Default

C112

C113

C258

C278

B271

L418

L442

5-9

5-9

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

CON0

CON0

AI2

AI2

AI2

AI2

AI2

Remote Setpoint Bias (B1) - This datapoint and Remote

Setpoint Ratio (K1) allow the Remote Setpoint input to be modified by the Setpoint Generator.

Setpoint = [Remote Setpoint X Ratio] + Bias

SP = [RSP X K1] + B1

The B1 and K1 datapoints are modified when the input signal must be scaled to match the setpoint range desired.

Remote Setpoint Ratio (K1) - See Remote Setpoint bias (B1) above.

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to

Engineering Zero, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Loop 1 Remote

Setpoint upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 1 Remote Setpoint lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Loop 1 Remote Setpoint signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Loop 1 Remote Setpoint signal. 1 = 0 - 5 V input range; 0 = 1 - 5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Loop 1 Remote Setpoint input is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

0

1

0

0

3

0

0

L139

C148

C149

C259

AI3 - Remote Setpoint Loop 2 (Is affected by Setpoint Related Datapoints)

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-4

CON1

CON1

CON1

AI3

Remote Setpoint Enable - This datapoint is controlled by DI1.

When DI1 is a closed contact, this datapoint is set to 1 to allow the modified Loop 2 Remote Setpoint to become the value used as the control setpoint if the R/L push button is in

Remote.

Remote Setpoint Bias (B1) - This datapoint and Remote

Setpoint Ratio (K1) allow the Remote Setpoint input to be modified by the Setpoint Generator.

Setpoint = [Remote Setpoint X Ratio] + Bias

SP = [RSP X K1] + B1

The B1 and K1 datapoints are modified when the input signal must be scaled to match the setpoint range desired.

Remote Setpoint Ratio (K1) - See Remote Setpoint bias (B1) above.

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to

Engineering Zero, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Loop 2 Remote

Setpoint upper range signal value.

0

0

1

0

11-7

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 11-3. CS20 Two Loop Controller Datapoints

3 of 6

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

AI3 - Remote Setpoint Loop 2 (Is affected by Setpoint Related Datapoints) (Cont)

Default

C279 5-4 AI3 0

B272

L419

L443

5-4

5-4

5-4

AI3

AI3

AI3

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 2 Remote Setpoint lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Loop 2 Remote Setpoint signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Loop 2 Remote Setpoint signal. 1 = 0 - 5 V input range; 0 = 1 - 5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Loop 2 Remote Setpoint input is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

AO0 - Control Output Loop 1

3

0

0

L472

L120

L122

C109

C110

C118

5-5

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

AO0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

0-20 mA Output - 0 = 4-20 mA signal; 1 = 0-20 mA signal.

Enter a value to match the Loop 1 output valve requirements.

Manual Fallback Disable - 0 = always power up in manual for

Loop 1; 1 = auto/manual selector unchanged at power up.

Hard Manual Limit - 1 = apply output limits to the final output of the Auto-Manual Generator for Loop 1. It affects both the manual push buttons and the controller’s result. 0 = do not apply limits.

Output High Limit - Sets maximum Loop 1 Control Output signal value for in engineering units.

Output Low Limit - Sets minimum Loop 1 Control Output signal value in engineering units.

Output Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the output value. When configured to a non-zero value, the output from the Auto-Selector for Loop 1 is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. A zero disables output slewing.

It does not affect manual operation.

0

0

1

100

0

0

C106

C107

C108

C111

L106

L114

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0 Control Loop 1 Related Datapoints

Proportional Band - Is the Loop 1 percent of error required to move the output full scale for proportional action.

Reset Time - Is the number of minutes per repeat of integral action for Loop 1. It is mutually exclusive with Manual Reset.

Rate Time - Represents the minutes Loop 1 proportional action is advanced.

Manual Reset - It determines Loop 1 output valve position when the controller is in Auto and the error = 0. It is mutually exclusive with Reset Time.

Reverse Switch - 0 = Loop 1 Control Output

if Loop 1 PV

; 1 = Loop 1 Control Output

if Loop 1 PV

.

Auto Enable - Controller output is from the Loop 1 PID algorithm when set to 1 and A/M push button is in Auto.

100

0

0

50

1

1

11-8

Section 11. CS20 - Two Loop Controller

Table 11-3. CS20 Two Loop Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

CON0 Control Loop 1 Related Datapoints (Cont)

C115

C116

5-9

5-9

CON0

CON0

Controller Span - Enter a value, that when added to the Loop

1 Controller Lower Range value, will produce the Loop 1 control upper range value in engineering units.

Controller Lower Range - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 1 control lower range value.

4 of 6

Default

100

0

L473

L144

L146

C145

5-5

5-9

5-9

5-9

AO1

CON1

CON1

CON1

AO1 - Control Output Loop 2

0-20 mA Output - 0 = 4-20 mA signal; 1 = 0-20 mA signal.

Enter a value to match the Loop 2 output valve requirements.

Manual Fallback Disable - 0 = always power up in manual for

Loop 2; 1 = auto/manual selector unchanged at power up.

Hard Manual Limit - 1 = apply output limits to the final output of the Auto-Manual Generator for Loop 2. It affects both the manual push buttons and the controller’s result. 0 = do not apply limits.

Output High Limit - Sets maximum Loop 2 Control Output signal value in engineering units.

0

0

1

100

C146

C154

C142

C143

C144

C147

L130

L138

C151

C152

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

Output Low Limit - Sets minimum Loop 2 Control Output signal value in engineering units.

Output Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the output value. When configured to a non-zero value, the output from the Auto-Selector for Loop 2 is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. A zero disables output slewing.

It does not affect manual operation.

CON1 Control Loop 2 Related Datapoints

Proportional Band - Is the Loop 2 percent of error required to move the output full scale for proportional action.

Reset Time - Is the number of minutes per repeat of integral action for Loop 2. It is mutually exclusive with Manual Reset.

Rate Time - Represents the minutes Loop 2 proportional action is advanced.

Manual Reset - It determines the Loop 2 output valve position when the controller is in Auto and the error = 0. It is mutually exclusive with Reset Time.

Reverse Switch - 0 = Loop 2 Control Output

if Loop 2 PV

; 1 = Loop 2 Control Output

if Loop 2 PV

.

Auto Enable - Controller output is from the Loop 2 PID algorithm when set to 1 and A/M push button is in Auto.

Controller Span - Enter a value, that when added to the Loop

2 Controller Lower Range value, will produce the Loop 2 control upper range value in engineering units.

Controller Lower Range - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 2 control lower range value.

0

0

100

0

0

50

1

1

100

0

11-9

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 11-3. CS20 Two Loop Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

L264

L265

L288

L289

B335,

B340

5-6

5-6

5-7

5-7

5-9

DI0

DI1

DO0

DO1

CON0

CON1

Title and Function

DI0 - Remote Enable Loop 1

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Remote Enable Loop 1 is permitted if DI0 is closed (datapoint L115 - Remote Setpoint

Enable is set to 1 by DI0). Set to 1 to reverse the DI0 condition required to permit Remote Enable Loop 1 (DI0 open = Remote Enable Loop 1).

DI1 - Remote Enable Loop 2

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Remote Enable Loop 2 is permitted if DI1 is closed (datapoint L139 - Remote Setpoint

Enable is set to 1 by DI1). Set to 1 to reverse the DI1 condition required to permit Remote Enable Loop 2 (DI1 open = Remote Enable Loop 2).

DO0 - Process Alarm Loop 1

Contact Output Invert - Normally, Process Alarm Loop 1 is enabled if DO0 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the DO0 condition required to activate Process Alarm Loop 1 (DO0 open = the Loop 1 PV value is not within the C103, C104

Alarm Limits).

DO1 - Process Alarm Loop 2

Contact Output Invert - Normally, Process Alarm Loop 2 is enabled if DO1 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the DO1 condition required to activate Process Alarm Loop 2 (DO1 open = the Loop 2 PV value is not within the C139, C140

Alarm Limits).

Alarms Related Datapoints (Loop 1, Loop 2)

Control Alarm Mode - Used to select one of six alarm types or none. See Table 5-9 for details and examples.

5 of 6

Default

0

0

0

0

1

C103,

C139

5-9

C104,

C140

5-9

C105,

C141

5-9

C114,

C150

5-9

C125,

C161

C126,

C162

5-9

5-9

CON0

CON1

CON0,

CON1

CON0,

CON1

Alarm Limit 1 - Point in engineering units where an alarm is triggered because the loop PV is not within the limit value set in the datapoint.

100

Alarm Limit 2 - Point in engineering units where an alarm is triggered because the loop PV is not within the limit value set in the datapoint.

Alarm Dead Band - Sets the activation/deactivation gaps for the alarm limit points. It is in engineering units.

0

2

CON0,

CON1

CON0,

CON1

CON0,

CON1

Setpoint Related Datapoints (Loop 1, Loop 2)

Control Zone - A gap on both sides of setpoint. When PV is within this gap, the proportional and integral output changes are suppressed. Derivative output is unaffected.

Setpoint High Limit - It is the maximum loop control setpoint value allowed.

Setpoint Low Limit - It is the minimum loop control setpoint value allowed.

0

100

0

11-10

Section 11. CS20 - Two Loop Controller

Table 11-3. CS20 Two Loop Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

Setpoint Related Datapoints (Loop 1, Loop 2) (Cont)

C117,

C153

5-9 CON0,

CON1

Setpoint Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the setpoint.

When configured to a non-zero value, the setpoint used in the PID algorithm is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. The final value of the setpoint always appears on the units display. A zero disables setpoint slewing.

Miscellaneous Datapoints (Loop 1, Loop 2)

A000,

A002

A001,

A003

5-9

5-9

CON0,

CON1

CON0,

CON1

Tagname - Assignable 10 character name.

L109,

L133

5-9 CON0,

CON1

Engineering Units - Assignable 10 character designator.

(Engineering Units appear on the Single Loop CON0 and

Single Loop CON1 displays only.)

Reverse Valve - Bottom of display loop output valve action indicators: 1 = [O] [C] display order, 0 = [C] [O] display order. (Reverse Valve indicators appear on the Single Loop

CON0 and Single Loop CON1 displays only.)

6 of 6

Default

0

CON-

0, 1

PER-

CENT

0

11-11

NOTES:

53MC5000 Process Control Station

11-12

Section 12. CS21 - Two Loop Cascade Controller

12.0 CS21 - TWO LOOP CASCADE

CONTROLLER

12.1 CS21 - TWO LOOP CASCADE CONTROLLER

The Two Loop Cascade Controller provides two standard PID controllers that function as a primary and secondary controller in one unit. The output of the primary controller, based on its setpoint and process variable, becomes the setpoint input to the secondary controller. This controller setup is suited to process applications where the primary loop is usually slow, having changes that occur over a long time duration, and the secondary loop is much faster, with rapid changes (disturbances) that affect the primary loop. The Two Loop Cascade Controller overcomes the slow process time lags of the primary loop by providing immediate response to changes in the secondary loop, which minimizes their affect on the primary loop. Transfer between local and cascade control in the Two Loop Cascade Controller is bumpless and balanceless because the primary controller’s output is forced to match the secondary controller’s setpoint when the secondary controller is in local mode. A typical low-resolution display Two Loop Cascade Controller application is illustrated in

Figure 12-1 where the temperature (primary variable) of a liquid in a tank is maintained by regulating cold water flow to adjust tank jacket temperature (secondary variable).

Ensure the controller is capable of supporting more than one control loop by comparing the model number of the controller (found on the controller tag) with the model number breakdown provided in Section 1.

AI1 - REMOTE SETPOINT PRIMARY

AI3 - ADDITIVE FEED FORWARD

SECONDARY

DI0 - CASCADE ENABLE

(CLOSED CONTACT)

DI1 - REMOTE ENABLE PRIMARY

(CLOSED CONTACT)

AI2 - PROCESS

VARIABLE (SECONDARY)

DO0 - PROCESS ALARMS

SECONDARY

DO1 - PROCESS ALARMS

PRIMARY

AN01 - SECONDARY SETPOINT

TRANSMIT

AI0 - PROCESS

VARIABLE (PRIMARY)

AO0 - CONTROL

OUTPUT (SECONDARY)

TT

A

2

TT

A

1

B

A

1

, B, C = PRIMARY LOOP

A

2

, B, C = SECONDARY LOOP

VALVE

C

PUMP

COLD

WATER

Figure 12-1. Typical CS21 Two Loop Cascade Controller Application

12-1

53MC5000 Process Control Station

12.2 CS21 CONTROL SIGNALS

Loading CS21 connects the 53MC5000 Controller function blocks for operation as a Two Loop Cascade Controller. As shown in Figure 12-1, CS21 provides ten control signals which are described in Table 12-1.

Table 12-1. CS21 Control Signals

Control

Signal

AI0 - Process

Variable

(Primary)

AI1 - Remote

Setpoint

Primary

AI2 - Process

Variable

(Secondary)

AI3 - Additive

Feed Forward

Secondary

AO0 - Control

Output

(Secondary)

AO1 -

Secondary

Setpoint

Transmit

DI0 -

Cascade

Enable

DI1 - Remote

Enable

Primary

Definition

This analog input signal represents the value of the primary process loop to be manipulated by the controller. It is compared to the primary control setpoint to determine the setpoint value for the secondary process loop.

This analog input signal represents the value to be used as the primary loop control setpoint when remote setpoint operation is selected with the faceplate push buttons and enabled by DI0.

This analog input signal represents the value of the secondary process loop to be manipulated by the controller. It is compared to the secondary control setpoint to determine the

Control Output (Secondary).

This analog input signal value is added to the secondary PID result to make up the Control

Output value when Auto operation is active.

This is the 4-20 mA output signal that drives the final control element.

Cord

Set

ITB

TB1-1 (+)

TB1-2 (-)

TB1-3

TB1-5 (+)

TB1-6 (-)

TB1-7

TB1-9

TB1-10 (+)

TB1-11 (-)

TB1-13

TB1-14 (+)

TB1-15 (-)

TB1-17 (+)

TB1-18 (-)

Rear

Term

Board

1 (+)

2 (-)

3

4 (+)

5 (-)

6

1

7 (+)

8 (-)

4

9 (+)

8 (-)

10 (+)

11 (-)

This output signal reflects the setpoint input value to the secondary from the primary output.

TB1-19 (+)

TB1-20 (-)

12 (+)

11 (-)

When a closed contact is present on this input, cascade operation is enabled if the R/L push button is in Remote.

When a closed contact is present on this input, the operator can select the setpoint value to be set by the value of the Remote Setpoint

Primary input with the R/L push button.

TB2-1 (+)

TB2-2 (-)

TB2-3 (+)

TB2-4 (-)

13 (+)

14 (-)

15 (+)

14 (-)

1 of 2

Signal

+24 V

AI0

SC

+24 V

AI1

SC

+24 V

AI2

SC

+24 V

AI3

SC

AO0

PC

AN01

PC

DI0

PC

DI1

PC

DO0 - Process

Alarms

Secondary

This contact is closed when the secondary loop

Process Variable value is not within the C103 and C104 datapoint values (secondary loop

Alarm Limits 1 and 2); otherwise, the contact is open.

TB2-5 (+)

TB2-6 (-)

16 (+)

17 (-)

DO0

PC

12-2

Section 12. CS21 - Two Loop Cascade Controller

Table 12-1. CS21 Control Signals

Control

Signal

DO1 - Process

Alarms

Primary

Definition

This contact is closed when the primary loop

Process Variable value is not within the C139 and C140 datapoint values (primary loop Alarm

Limits 1 and 2); otherwise, the contact is open.

Cord

Set

ITB

TB2-7 (+)

TB2-8 (-)

2 of 2

Rear

Term

Board

18 (+)

17 (-)

Signal

DO1

PC

12.3 CS21 STANDARD DISPLAYS

Loading CS21 preconfigures the System Module display list for ten displays. The ten displays are listed in Table 12-2 with appropriate reference sections, figure numbers, and configuration tables.

A configuration table is not listed for the Two Loop CON0 and CON1 display, as that information is provided in this section. To configure the Horizontal Trend, Parameter, and System Status displays, reference the Section 4 and Section 5 information listed in the table. The Single Loop

CON0 and Single Loop CON1 displays will automatically be configured when the Two Loop CON0 and CON1 display is configured, with the exception of the Reverse Valve and Engineering Units datapoints. These datapoints will also be covered in this section with the Two Loop CON0 and

CON1 display information.

Table 12-2. CS21 Standard Displays

Title

Single Loop CON0

Single Loop CON0 with Horizontal Trend

Parameter Module 0 - PID datapoints

Parameter Module 1 - Alarm Limits

System Status

Single Loop CON1

Single Loop CON1 with Horizontal Trend

Parameter Module 5 - PID datapoints

Parameter Module 6 - Alarm Limits

Two Loop CON0 and CON1

See

Section

4.3 and 4.3.1

4.5

4.6

4.6

4.2

4.3 and 4.3.1

4.5

4.6

4.6

4.4

Section 4

Figure

4-3 sheet 1

4-10 sheet 2

4-11

4-11

4-2

4-3 sheet 1

4-10 sheet 2

4-11

4-11

4-9 sheet 2

Section 5

Table

5-9

5-11

5-11

5-15

5-9

5-11

5-11

12.4 CS21 DATAPOINT CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS

See Figure 12-2 and Table 12-3 to configure datapoints for CS21 - Two Loop Cascade Controller.

Table 12-3 also lists the Section 5 modules that can be referenced for more detailed definitions of the datapoints when required. A datapoint does not have to be configured if the default value listed in Table 12-3 is appropriate for the process application.

Loading CS21 initializes the Engineering Span (C258) to 100 for AI2 (Process Variable Secondary). Also, C088 (Math E - K1) is set to 1.0 and C089 (Math E - K2) is set to -1.0. The CON0

OUT (primary), which is the secondary setpoint input, must be properly scaled by configuring CON1 datapoints C148 (B1) and C149 (K1).

Both datapoints are listed in Table 12-3 under CON1 Control Related Datapoints (Secondary).

12-3

53MC5000 Process Control Station

AI0 - PROCESS VARIABLE PRIMARY

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI0 ENGINEERING SPAN (C256)

AI0 ENGINEERING ZERO (C276)

AI0 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B269)

AI0 0-5 V INPUT (L416)

AI0 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L440)

AIO - PROCESS VARIABLE PRIMARY

AI1 - REMOTE SETPOINT PRIMARY

AI1 - ROMOTE SETPOINT PRIMARY RELATED DATAPOINTS

AFFECTED BY THE SETPOINT RELATED DATAPOINTS

REMOTE SETPOINT ENABLE (L115)

REMOTE SETPOINT BIAS (B1) (C112)

REMOTE SETPOINT RATIO (K1) (C113)

AI1 ENGINEERING SPAN (C257)

AI1 ENGINEERING ZERO (C277)

AI1 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B270)

AI1 0-5 V INPUT (L417)

AI1 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L441)

DI0 - CASCADE ENABLE

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L264])

DI1 - REMOTE ENABLE

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L265])

AI2 - PROCESS VARIABLE SECONDARY

AI2 - PROCESS VARIABLE SECONDARY

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI2 ENGINEERING SPAN (C258)

AI2 ENGINEERING ZERO (C278)

AI2 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B271)

AI2 0-5 V INPUT (L418)

AI2 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L442)

AI3 - ADDITIVE FEED FORWARD SECONDARY

AI3 - ADDITIVE FEED FORWARD SECONDARY

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI3 ENGINEERING SPAN (C259)

AI3 ENGINEERING ZERO (C279)

AI3 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B272)

AI3 0-5 V INPUT (L419)

AI3 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L443)

SETPOINT RELATED DATAPOINTS

CONTROL ZONE (C114, C150)

SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT (C125, C161)

SETPOINT LOW LIMIT (C126, C162)

SETPOINT SLEW RATE (C117, C153)

DOUBLE DATAPOINTS: (PRIMARY, SECONDARY)

Figure 12-2. CS21 Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints

(Sheet 1 of 2)

12-4

Section 12. CS21 - Two Loop Cascade Controller

MISCELLANEOUS DATAPOINTS (SHOWN IN

RECTANGLES ON THE DISPLAY)

CONTROL TAGNAME (A000, A002) [CON-0,

CON-1]

ENGINEERING UNITS (A001, A003) [PERCENT]

(NOT SHOWN)

REVERSE VALVE (L109, L133) [C] [O] (NOT

SHOWN)

AO0 - CONTROL OUTPUT SECONDARY

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AO0 0-20 mA OUTPUT (L472)

MANUAL FALLBACK DISABLE (L144)

HARD MANUAL LIMIT (L146)

OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT (C145)

OUTPUT LOW LIMIT (C146)

OUTPUT SLEW RATE (C154)

CON1 CONTROL RELATED DATAPOINTS (SEE SECTION 16,

TUNING, OR SECTION 17, EASY-TUNE, TO TUNE PID DATA-

POINTS)

PROPORTIONAL BAND (C142) (P)

RESET TIME (C143) (I)

RATE TIME (C144) (D)

MANUAL RESET (C147)

REVERSE SWITCH (L130)

AUTO ENABLE (L138)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C151) [100]

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE (C152) [0]

REMOTE SETPOINT BIAS (B1) (C148)

REMOTE SETPOINT RATIO (K1) (C149)

AO0 - CONTROL OUTPUT SECONDARY

DO0 - PROCESS ALARMS SECONDARY

(CONTACT OUTPUT INVERT [L288])

DO1 - PROCESS ALARMS PRIMARY

(CONTACT OUTPUT INVERT [L289])

AO1 - SECONDARY SETPOINT TRANSMIT

AO1 - SECONDARY SETPOINT TRANSMIT

RELATED DATAPOINTS

ALARMS RELATED DATAPOINTS

AO1 0-20 mA OUTPUT (L473)

MANUAL FALLBACK DISABLE (L120)

HARD MANUAL LIMIT (L122)

OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT (C109)

OUTPUT LOW LIMIT (C110)

OUTPUT SLEW RATE (C118)

CONTROL ALARM MODE (B335, B340)

0 - HIGH/LOW

1 - NONE

2 - HIGH/NONE

3 - NONE/LOW

4 - HIGH/HI-HI

5 - LOW/LO-LO

6 - HI SP DEVIATION/LO SP

DEVIATION

CON0 CONTROL RELATED DATAPOINTS (SEE SECTION 16, TUN-

ING, OR SECTION 17, EASY-TUNE, TO TUNE PID DATAPOINTS)

PROPORTIONAL BAND (C106) (P)

RESET TIME (C107) (I)

RATE TIME (C108) (D)

MANUAL RESET (C111)

REVERSE SWITCH (L106)

AUTO ENABLE (L114)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C115) [100]

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE (C116) [0]

ALARM LIMIT 1 (C103, C139)

ALARM LIMIT 2 (C104, C140)

ALARM DEAD BAND (C105, C141)

DOUBLE DATAPOINTS: (PRIMARY, SECONDARY)

NOTE: BRACKETS [XXXX] CONTAIN DATA SHOWN IN

RECTANGLES ON THE DISPLAY.

Figure 12-2. CS21 Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints

(Sheet 2 of 2)

12-5

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 12-3. CS21 Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints

Datapoint

C256

C276

B269

L416

L440

Table Module Title and Function

AI0 - Process Variable Primary

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

AI0

AI0

AI0

AI0

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Engineering Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the PV Primary transducer upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the PV Primary transducer lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the PV Primary transducer signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the PV Primary transducer. 1 = 0 - 5 V range; 0 = 1

- 5 V range.

5-4 AI0 Square Root Signal - It is used if the PV Primary transducer is a nonlinear differential pressure (DP) cell that provides a squared signal value. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

AI1 - Remote Setpoint Primary (Is affected by Setpoint Related Datapoints)

L115

C112

5-9

5-9

CON0

CON0

Remote Setpoint Enable - This datapoint is controlled by DI1.

When DI1 is a closed contact, this datapoint is set to 1 to allow the modified Primary Remote Setpoint to become the value used as the control setpoint if the R/L push button is in

Remote.

Remote Setpoint Bias (B1) - This datapoint and Remote

Setpoint Ratio (K1) allow the Remote Setpoint input to be modified by the Setpoint Generator.

Setpoint = [Remote Setpoint X Ratio] + Bias

SP = [RSP X K1] + B1

1 of 6

Default

100

0

3

0

0

0

0

C113

C257

C277

B270

L417

5-9

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

CON0

AI1

AI1

AI1

AI1

The B1 and K1 datapoints are modified when the input signal must be scaled to match the setpoint range desired.

Remote Setpoint Ratio (K1) - See Remote Setpoint bias (B1) above.

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to

Engineering Zero, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Primary Remote

Setpoint upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Primary Remote Setpoint lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Primary Remote Setpoint signal. See Table

5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Primary Remote Setpoint. 1 = 0 - 5 V range; 0 =

1 - 5 V range.

1

0

0

3

0

12-6

Section 12. CS21 - Two Loop Cascade Controller

Table 12-3. CS21 Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints

2 of 6

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

AI1 - Remote Setpoint Primary (Is affected by Setpoint Related Datapoints) (Cont)

Default

L441 5-4 AI1 0 Square Root Signal - It is used if the Primary Remote

Setpoint is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0

= input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

AI2 - Process Variable Secondary

C258

C278

B271

L418

L442

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

AI2

AI2

AI2

AI2

AI2

Engineering Span - Set to 100 by CS21; however, it can be changed. Enter a value, that when added to the Engineering

Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Secondary PV transducer upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Secondary PV transducer lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Secondary PV signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Secondary PV signal. 1 = 0 - 5 V input range; 0

= 1 - 5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Secondary PV input is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

0

0

3

0

0

C259

C279

B272

L419

L443

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

AI3

AI3

AI3

AI3

AI3

AI3 - Additive Feed Forward Secondary

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to

Engineering Zero, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Additive Feed Forward upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Additive Feed Forward lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Additive Feed Forward signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Additive Feed Forward signal. 1 = 0 - 5 V input range; 0 = 1 - 5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Additive Feed Forward input is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

0

0

3

0

0

L472 5-5 AO0

AO0 - Control Output (Secondary)

0-20 mA Output - 0 = 4-20 mA signal; 1 = 0-20 mA signal.

Enter a value to match the Secondary Control Output valve requirements.

0

12-7

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 12-3. CS21 Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

L144

L146

C145

C146

C154

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

Title and Function

AO0 - Control Output (Secondary) (Cont)

Manual Fallback Disable - 0 = always power up in manual for

Secondary Control Output; 1 = auto/manual selector unchanged at power up.

Hard Manual Limit - 1 = apply output limits to the final output of the Loop 1 Auto-Manual Generator. Affects both the manual push buttons and the controller’s result. 0 = do not apply limits.

Output High Limit - Sets maximum Secondary Control Output signal value in engineering units.

Output Low Limit - Sets minimum Secondary Control Output signal value in engineering units.

Output Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the output value. When configured to a non-zero value, the output from the Auto-Selector is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. A zero disables output slewing. It does not affect manual operation.

3 of 6

Default

0

1

100

0

0

C142

C143

C144

C147

L130

L138

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1 Control Related Datapoints (Secondary)

Proportional Band - Is the percent of error required to move the Secondary Control Output full scale for proportional action.

Reset Time - Is the number of minutes per repeat of integral action for the Secondary Control Output. It is mutually exclusive with Manual Reset.

Rate Time - Represents the minutes Secondary Control

Output proportional action is advanced.

Manual Reset - It determines Secondary Control Output valve position when the controller is in Auto and the error =

0. It is mutually exclusive with Reset Time.

CON1 Reverse Switch - 0 = Secondary Control Output

if

Secondary PV

; 1 = Secondary Control Output

if

Secondary PV

.

CON1 Auto Enable - Controller output is from the Secondary

Control Output PID algorithm when set to 1 and the A/M push button is in Auto.

100

0

0

50

1

1

C151 5-9 CON1 100

C152 5-9 CON1

Controller Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Secondary Control Lower Range value, will produce the

Secondary Control upper range value in engineering units.

Controller Lower Range - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Secondary Control lower range value.

0

12-8

Section 12. CS21 - Two Loop Cascade Controller

Table 12-3. CS21 Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

CON1 Control Related Datapoints (Secondary) (Cont)

C148 5-9 CON1 Remote Setpoint Bias (B1) - This datapoint and Remote

Setpoint Ratio (K1) allow the primary CON0

OUT input to be modified by the CON1 Setpoint Generator.

Setpoint = [CON0

OUT X Ratio] + Bias

SP = [CON0

OUT X K1] + B1

4 of 6

Default

0

The B1 and K1 datapoints are modified when the input signal must be scaled to match the setpoint range desired.

C149

L473

L120

L122

C109

C110

C118

C106

C107

C108

C111

5-9

5-5

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON1

AO1

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

0-20 mA Output - 0 = 4-20 mA signal; 1 = 0-20 mA signal.

Enter a value that matches the required setpoint input signal range of the chained controller.

Manual Fallback Disable - 0 = always power up in manual for

Secondary Setpoint; 1 = auto/manual selector unchanged at power up.

Hard Manual Limit - 1 = apply output limits to the final output of the Auto-Manual Generator for the Secondary Setpoint..

Affects both the manual push buttons and the controller’s result. 0 = do not apply limits.

Output High Limit - Sets the maximum Secondary Setpoint output signal value in engineering units.

Output Low Limit - Sets minimum Secondary Setpoint output signal value in engineering units.

Output Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the Secondary

Setpoint value. When configured to a non-zero value, the output from the Auto-Selector is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. A zero disables output slewing.

It does not affect manual operation.

CON0 Control Related Datapoints (Secondary Setpoint Transmit)

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

Remote Setpoint Ratio (K1) - See Remote Setpoint bias (B1) above.

AO1 - Secondary Setpoint Transmit

Proportional Band - Is the Primary PV percent of error required to move the Secondary Setpoint Transmit output full scale for proportional action.

Reset Time - Is the number of minutes per repeat of integral action for Secondary Setpoint Transmit. It is mutually exclusive with Manual Reset.

Rate Time - Represents the minutes Secondary Setpoint

Transmit proportional action is advanced.

Manual Reset - It determines the Secondary Setpoint

Transmit value when the controller is in Auto and the error =

0 (difference between the Primary PV and Primary Setpoint =

0). It is mutually exclusive with Reset Time.

1

0

0

1

100

0

0

100

0

0

50

12-9

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 12-3. CS21 Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints

Datapoint

L106

L114

Table Module Title and Function

CON0 Control Related Datapoints (Secondary Setpoint Transmit) (Cont)

5-9 CON0 Reverse Switch - 0 = Secondary Setpoint Transmit

if

Primary PV

; 1 = Secondary Setpoint Transmit

if Primary

PV

.

5-9 CON0

C115

C116

5-9

5-9

CON0

CON0

Auto Enable - Secondary Setpoint Transmit output is from the Primary PID algorithm when set to 1 and the A/M push button is in Auto.

Controller Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Primary Controller Lower Range value, will produce the

Primary Controller upper range value in engineering units.

Controller Lower Range - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Primary Controller lower range value.

L264 5-6 DI0

DI0 - Cascade Enable

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Cascade Enable is permitted if DI0 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the DI0 condition required to permit Cascade Enable (DI0 open = Cascade

Enable).

DI1 - Remote Enable Primary

L265 5-6 DI1

L288

L289

5-7

5-7

DO0

DO1

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Remote Enable Primary is permitted if DI1 is closed (datapoint L115 - Remote Setpoint

Enable is set to 1 by DI1). Set to 1 to reverse the DI1 condition required to permit Remote Enable Primary (DI1 open = Remote Enable Primary).

DO0 - Process Alarms Secondary

Contact Output Invert - Normally, Process Alarms Secondary is enabled if DO0 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the DO0 condition required to activate Process Alarms Secondary

(DO0 open = the Secondary PV value is not within the C139,

C140 Alarm Limits).

DO1 - Process Alarms Primary

Contact Output Invert - Normally, Process Alarms Primary is enabled if DO1 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the DO1 condition required to activate Process Alarms Primary (DO1 open = the Primary PV value is not within the C103, C104

Alarm Limits).

Alarms Related Datapoints (Primary, Secondary)

B335,

B340

C103,

C139

C104,

C140

C105,

C141

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON0

CON1

CON0

CON1

CON0,

CON1

CON0,

CON1

Control Alarm Mode - Used to select one of six alarm types or none. See Table 5-9 for details and examples.

Alarm Limit 1 - Point in engineering units where an alarm is triggered because the loop PV is not within the limit value set in the datapoint.

Alarm Limit 2 - Point in engineering units where an alarm is triggered because the PV is not within the limit value set in the datapoint.

Alarm Dead Band - Sets the activation/deactivation gaps for the alarm limit points. It is in engineering units.

5 of 6

Default

1

1

100

0

0

0

0

0

1

100

0

2

12-10

Section 12. CS21 - Two Loop Cascade Controller

Table 12-3. CS21 Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints

6 of 6

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

Setpoint Related Datapoints (Primary, Secondary)

C114,

C150

C125,

C161

C126,

C162

C117,

C153

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON0,

CON1

CON0,

CON1

CON0,

CON1

CON0,

CON1

Control Zone - A gap on both sides of setpoint. When PV is within this gap, the proportional and integral output changes are suppressed. Derivative output is unaffected.

Setpoint High Limit - It is the maximum setpoint value allowed.

Setpoint Low Limit - It is the minimum setpoint value allowed.

Setpoint Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the setpoint.

When configured to a non-zero value, the setpoint used in the PID algorithm is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. The final value of the setpoint always appears on the units display. A zero disables setpoint slewing.

A000,

A002

A001,

A003

L109,

L133

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON0,

CON1

CON0,

CON1

CON0,

CON1

Miscellaneous Datapoints (Primary, Secondary)

Tagname - Assignable 10 character name.

Engineering Units - Assignable 10 character designator.

(Engineering Units appear on the Single Loop CON0 and

Single Loop CON1 displays only.)

Reverse Valve - Bottom of display loop output valve action indicators: 1 = [O] [C] display order, 0 = [C] [O] display order. (Reverse Valve indicators appear on the Single Loop

CON0 and Single Loop CON1 displays only.)

Default

0

100

0

0

CON-

0, 1

PER-

CENT

0

12-11

NOTES:

53MC5000 Process Control Station

12-12

Section 13. CS22 - Two Loop Override Controller

13.0 CS22 - TWO LOOP OVERRIDE

CONTROLLER

13.1 CS22 - TWO LOOP OVERRIDE CONTROLLER

The Two Loop Override Controller provides two standard PID controllers that function as two interdependent variables, Primary and Limiting, to control a single final element (e.g., valve). Neither variable may exceed a safe limit. The outputs of both PIDs are fed into a high/low selector that determines which output will drive the final element. The output of the selector is fed back to the Primary Variable Loop and the Limiting Variable Loop, holding the unselected loop near the active control output range. The default operation for this control strategy is as a high limit (low selector)

Two Loop Override Controller. As a high limit (low selector) override controller, the lowest output value is selected to drive the final element via AO0.

After CS22 is started

, to configure it for low limit (high selector) Two Loop Override Controller operation, configure datapoints C088 to 1.0,

C089 to 2.0, and B202 to 102. As a low limit (high selector) Two Loop Override Controller, the highest output is selected to drive the final control element. A typical low-resolution display high limit (low selector) Two Loop Override Controller process application is illustrated in Figure 13-1.

In this application the valve is normally adjusted in response to Primary Variable (flow) disturbances unless the Limiting Variable (pressure) Loop has the lowest output (assumes reverse action between the pressure process variable and the loop output). When this happens, the valve is closed to reduce pressure. Pressure is the Limiting Variable because it is the more critical value.

Ensure the controller is capable of supporting more than one control loop by comparing the model number of the controller (found on the controller tag) with the model number breakdown provided in Section 1.

AI1 - REMOTE SETPOINT PRIMARY

AI3 - REMOTE SETPOINT LIMITING

DI0 - REMOTE ENABLE PRIMARY

(CLOSED CONTACT)

DI1 - REMOTE ENABLE LIMITING

(CLOSED CONTACT)

AI2 - LIMITING

VARIABLE LOOP

AI0 - PRIMARY

VARIABLE LOOP

DO0 - PROCESS ALARMS PRIMARY

DO1 - PROCESS ALARMS LIMITING

AO1 - OVERRIDE STATUS

AO0 - CONTROL

OUTPUT LIMITING

FT

VALVE

PT

Figure 13-1. Typical CS22 Two Loop Override Controller Application

13-1

53MC5000 Process Control Station

13.2 CS22 CONTROL SIGNALS

Loading CS22 connects the 53MC5000 Controller function blocks for operation as two standard

PID controllers. As shown in Figure 13-1, CS22 provides ten control signals which are described in Table 13-1.

Table 13-1. CS22 Control Signals

Control

Signal

AI0 - Primary

Variable Loop

AI1 - Remote

Setpoint

Primary

AI2 - Limiting

Variable Loop

AI3 - Remote

Setpoint

Limiting

AO0 - Control

Output Limiting

AO1 - Override

Status

DI0 - Remote

Enable Primary

DI1 - Remote

Enable Limiting

DO0 - Process

Alarms Primary

Definition

This analog input signal represents the value of the primary loop process to be manipulated by the controller. It is compared to the primary setpoint to determine the Primary Variable Loop value that is compared to the Limiting Variable

Loop value for control of the final element.

This analog input signal represents the value to be used as the primary setpoint when remote setpoint operation is selected with the faceplate push buttons and enabled by DI0.

This analog input signal represents the value of the limiting loop process to be manipulated by the controller. It is compared to the limiting setpoint to determine the Limiting Variable Loop value that is compared to the Primary Variable

Loop value for control of the final element.

This analog input signal represents the value to be used as the limiting setpoint when remote setpoint operation is selected with the faceplate push buttons and enabled by DI1.

This is the 4-20 mA output signal that drives the final control element.

This signal indicates which one of the two loops is driving the final control element. When control is from the primary loop, output is 4 mA; when control is from the limiting loop, output is

20 mA.

When a closed contact is present on this input, the operator can select the setpoint value to be set by the value of the Remote Setpoint Primary input with the R/L push button.

When a closed contact is present on this input, the operator can select the setpoint value to be set by the value of the Remote Setpoint Limiting input with the R/L push button.

This contact is closed when the Primary

Variable value is not within the C103 and C104 datapoint values (Loop 1 Alarm Limits 1 and 2); otherwise, the contact is open.

Cord

Set

ITB

TB1-1 (+)

TB1-2 (-)

TB1-3

TB1-5 (+)

TB1-6 (-)

TB1-7

TB1-9

TB1-10 (+)

TB1-11 (-)

TB1-13

TB1-14 (+)

TB1-15 (-)

TB1-17 (+)

TB1-18 (-)

TB1-19 (+)

TB1-20 (-)

TB2-1 (+)

TB2-2 (-)

TB2-3 (+)

TB2-4 (-)

TB2-5 (+)

TB2-6 (-)

Rear

Term

Board

1 (+)

2 (-)

3

4 (+)

5 (-)

6

1

7 (+)

8 (-)

4

9 (+)

8 (-)

10 (+)

11 (-)

12 (+)

11 (-)

13 (+)

14 (-)

15 (+)

14 (-)

16 (+)

17 (-)

1 of 2

Signal

+24 V

AI0

SC

+24 V

AI1

SC

+24 V

AI2

SC

+24 V

AI3

SC

AO0

PC

AN01

PC

DI0

PC

DI1

PC

DO0

PC

13-2

Section 13. CS22 - Two Loop Override Controller

Table 13-1. CS22 Control Signals

Control

Signal Definition

DO1 - Process

Alarms Limiting

This contact is closed when the Limiting

Variable value is not within the C139 and C140 datapoint values (Loop 2 Alarm Limits 1 and 2); otherwise, the contact is open.

Cord

Set

ITB

TB2-7 (+)

TB2-8 (-)

2 of 2

Rear

Term

Board

18 (+)

17 (-)

Signal

DO1

PC

13.3 CS22 STANDARD DISPLAYS

Loading CS22 preconfigures the System Module display list for ten displays. The ten displays are listed in Table 13-2 with appropriate reference sections, figure numbers, and configuration tables.

A configuration table is not listed for the Two Loop CON0 and CON1 display, as that information is provided in this section. To configure the Horizontal Trend, Parameter, and System Status displays, reference the Section 4 and Section 5 information listed in the table. The Single Loop

CON0 and Single Loop CON1 displays will automatically be configured when the Two Loop CON0 and CON1 display is configured, with the exception of the Reverse Valve and Engineering Units datapoints. These datapoints will also be covered in this section with the Two Loop CON0 and

CON1 display information.

Table 13-2. CS22 Standard Displays

Title

Single Loop CON0

Single Loop CON0 with Horizontal Trend

Parameter Module 0 - PID datapoints

Parameter Module 1 - Alarm Limits

System Status

Single Loop CON1

Single Loop CON1 with Horizontal Trend

Parameter Module 5 - PID datapoints

Parameter Module 6 - Alarm Limits

Two Loop CON0 and CON1

See

Section

4.3 and 4.3.1

4.5

4.6

4.6

4.2

4.3 and 4.3.1

4.5

4.6

4.6

4.4

Section 4

Figure

4-3 sheet 1

4-10 sheet 2

4-11

4-11

4-2

4-3 sheet 1

4-10 sheet 2

4-11

4-11

4-9 sheet 2

Section 5

Table

5-9

5-11

5-11

5-15

5-9

5-11

5-11

13.4 CS22 DATAPOINT CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS

See Figure 13-2 and Table 13-3 to configure datapoints for CS22 - Two Loop Override Controller.

Table 13-3 also lists the Section 5 modules that can be referenced for more detailed definitions of the datapoints when required. A datapoint does not have to be configured if the default value listed in Table 13-3 is appropriate for the process application.

Loading CS22 initializes the Engineering Span (C258) to 100 for AI2 (Limiting Variable Loop) and sets C078 (Math A-K3) to 100.0.

Also, C089 (Math E-K2) is set to 1.0 and B202 is set to 138 for high limit override control.

13-3

53MC5000 Process Control Station

AI0 - PRIMARY VARIABLE LOOP

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI0 ENGINEERING SPAN (C256)

AI0 ENGINEERING ZERO (C276)

AI0 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B269)

AI0 0-5 V INPUT (L416)

AI0 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L440)

AIO - PRIMARY VARIABLE LOOP

AI1 - REMOTE SETPOINT PRIMARY

AI1 - REMOTE SETPOINT PRIMARY RELATED DATAPOINTS

AFFECTED BY THE SETPOINT RELATED DATAPOINTS

REMOTE SETPOINT ENABLE (L115)

REMOTE SETPOINT BIAS (B1) (C112)

REMOTE SETPOINT RATIO (K1) (C113)

AI1 ENGINEERING SPAN (C257)

AI1 ENGINEERING ZERO (C277)

AI1 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B270)

AI1 0-5 V INPUT (L417)

AI1 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L441)

DI0 - REMOTE ENABLE PRIMARY

DI1 - REMOTE ENABLE LIMITING

AI2 - LIMITING VARIABLE LOOP

AI2 - LIMITING VARIABLE LOOP

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI2 ENGINEERING SPAN (C258) = 100

AI2 ENGINEERING ZERO (C278)

AI2 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B271)

AI2 0-5 V INPUT (L418)

AI2 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L442)

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L264])

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L265])

SETPOINT RELATED DATAPOINTS

CONTROL ZONE (C114, C150)

SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT (C125, C161)

SETPOINT LOW LIMIT (C126, C162)

SETPOINT SLEW RATE (C117, C153)

AI3 - REMOTE SETPOINT LIMITING

AI3 - ROMOTE SETPOINT LIMITING RELATED DATAPOINTS

AFFECTED BY THE SETPOINT RELATED DATAPOINTS

REMOTE SETPOINT ENABLE (L139)

REMOTE SETPOINT BIAS (B1) (C148)

REMOTE SETPOINT RATIO (K1) (C149)

AI3 ENGINEERING SPAN (C259)

AI3 ENGINEERING ZERO (C279)

AI3 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B272)

AI3 0-5 V INPUT (L419)

AI3 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L443)

DOUBLE DATAPOINTS: (PRIMARY, LIMITING)

Figure 13-2. CS22 Two Loop Override Controller Datapoints

(Sheet 1 of 2)

13-4

Section 13. CS22 - Two Loop Override Controller

MISCELLANEOUS DATAPOINTS (SHOWN IN

RECTANGLES ON THE DISPLAY)

CONTROL TAGNAME (A000, A002) [CON-0,

CON-1]

ENGINEERING UNITS (A001, A003) [PERCENT]

(NOT SHOWN)

REVERSE VALVE (L109, L133) [C] [O]

(NOT SHOWN)

AO0 - CONTROL OUTPUT LIMITING

PRIMARY LOOP RELATED DATAPOINTS

AO0 0-20 mA OUTPUT (L472)

MANUAL FALLBACK DISABLE (L120)

HARD MANUAL LIMIT (L122)

OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT (C109)

OUTPUT LOW LIMIT (C110)

OUTPUT SLEW RATE (C118)

CON0 CONTROL RELATED DATAPOINTS (SEE SECTION 16,

TUNING, OR SECTION 17, EASY-TUNE, TO TUNE PID DATA-

POINTS)

PROPORTIONAL BAND (C106) (P)

RESET TIME (C107) (I)

RATE TIME (C108) (D)

MANUAL RESET (C111)

REVERSE SWITCH (L106)

AUTO ENABLE (L114)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C115) [100]

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE (C116) [0]

AO0 - CONTROL OUTPUT LIMITING

AO1 - OVERRIDE STATUS

4 mA (OR 0 mA) = PRIMARY LOOP CONTROLS AO0

20 mA = LIMITING LOOP CONTROLS AO0

DO0 - PROCESS ALARMS PRIMARY

(CONTACT OUTPUT INVERT [L288])

DO1 - PROCESS ALARMS LIMITING

(CONTACT OUTPUT INVERT [L289])

ALARMS RELATED DATAPOINTS

CONTROL ALARM MODE (B335, B340)

0 - HIGH/LOW

1 - NONE

2 - HIGH/NONE

3 - NONE/LOW

4 - HIGH/HI-HI

5 - LOW/LO-LO

6 - HI SP DEVIATION/LO SP

DEVIATION

ALARM LIMIT 1 (C103, C139)

ALARM LIMIT 2 (C104, C140)

ALARM DEAD BAND (C105, C141)

DOUBLE DATAPOINTS: (PRIMARY, LIMITING)

NOTE: BRACKETS [XXXX] CONTAIN DATA

SHOWN IN RECTANGLES ON THE DISPLAY.

AO0 - CONTROL OUTPUT LIMITING

LIMITING LOOP RELATED DATAPOINTS

MANUAL FALLBACK DISABLE (L144))

HARD MANUAL LIMIT (L146)

OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT (C145)

OUTPUT LOW LIMIT (C146)

OUTPUT SLEW RATE (C154)

CON1 CONTROL RELATED DATAPOINTS (SEE SECTION 16,

TUNING, OR SECTION 17, EASY-TUNE, TO TUNE PID DATA-

POINTS)

PROPORTIONAL BAND (C142) (P)

RESET TIME (C143) (I)

RATE TIME (C144) (D)

MANUAL RESET (C147)

REVERSE SWITCH (L130)

AUTO ENABLE (L138)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C151) [100]

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE (C152) [0]

Figure 13-2. CS22 Two Loop Override Controller Datapoints

(Sheet 2 of 2)

13-5

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 13-3. CS22 Two Loop Override Controller Datapoints

Datapoint

C256

C276

B269

L416

L440

L115

C112

C113

C257

C277

B270

L417

Table

5-4

5-4

5-4

Module

AI0

AI0

AI0

Title and Function

AI0 - Primary Variable Loop

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Engineering Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Primary Variable

Loop transducer upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Primary Variable Loop transducer lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Primary Variable Loop transducer signal. See

Table 5-4 for input values.

5-4

5-4

AI0

AI0

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Primary Variable Loop transducer. 1 = 0 - 5 V range; 0 = 1 - 5 V range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Primary Variable Loop transducer is a nonlinear differential pressure (DP) cell that provides a squared signal value. 0 = input is already linear;

1 = square root to restore linearization.

AI1 - Remote Setpoint Primary (Is affected by Setpoint Related Datapoints)

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

CON0

CON0

CON0

AI1

AI1

AI1

AI1

Remote Setpoint Enable - This datapoint is controlled by

DI0. When DI0 is a closed contact, this datapoint is set to 1 to allow the modified Primary Variable Loop Remote

Setpoint to become the value used as the control setpoint if the R/L push button is in Remote.

Remote Setpoint Bias (B1) - This datapoint and Remote

Setpoint Ratio (K1) allow the Remote Setpoint input to be modified by the Setpoint Generator.

Setpoint = [Remote Setpoint X Ratio] + Bias

SP = [RSP X K1] + B1

The B1 and K1 datapoints are modified when the input signal must be scaled to match the setpoint range desired.

Remote Setpoint Ratio (K1) - See Remote Setpoint bias (B1) above.

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Engineering Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Primary Variable

Loop Remote Setpoint upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Primary Variable Loop Remote

Setpoint lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Primary Variable Loop Remote Setpoint signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the voltage range of the Primary Variable Loop Remote Setpoint signal. 1 = 0 - 5

V range; 0 = 1 - 5 V range.

1 of 5

Default

100

0

3

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

3

0

13-6

Section 13. CS22 - Two Loop Override Controller

Table 13-3. CS22 Two Loop Override Controller Datapoints

2 of 5

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

Default

AI1 - Remote Setpoint Primary (Is affected by Setpoint Related Datapoints) (Cont)

L441 5-4 AI1 0 Square Root Signal - It is used if the Primary Variable Loop

Remote Setpoint signal is a squared nonlinear value. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

AI2 - Limiting Variable Loop

C258 5-4 AI2 Engineering Span - Set to 100 by CS22; however, it can be changed. Enter a value, that when added to the

Engineering Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Limiting Variable

Loop transducer upper range signal value.

0

C278

B271

L418

L442

L139

C148

C149

C259

C279

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

AI2

AI2

AI2

AI2

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Limiting Variable Loop transducer lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Limiting Variable Loop transducer signal. See

Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Limiting Variable Loop transducer signal. 1 = 0

- 5 V input range; 0 = 1 - 5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Limiting Variable Loop transducer is a nonlinear differential pressure (DP) cell that provides a squared signal value. 0 = input is already linear;

1 = square root to restore linearization.

AI3 - Remote Setpoint Limiting (Is affected by Setpoint Related Datapoints)

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-4

5-4

CON1

CON1

CON1

AI3

AI3

Remote Setpoint Enable - This datapoint is controlled by

DI1. When DI1 is a closed contact, this datapoint is set to 1 to allow the modified Limiting Variable Loop Remote

Setpoint to become the value used as the control setpoint if the R/L push button is in Remote.

Remote Setpoint Bias (B1) - This datapoint and Remote

Setpoint Ratio (K1) allow the Remote Setpoint input to be modified by the Setpoint Generator.

Setpoint = [Remote Setpoint X Ratio] + Bias

SP = [RSP X K1] + B1

The B1 and K1 datapoints are modified when the input signal must be scaled to match the setpoint range desired.

Remote Setpoint Ratio (K1) - See Remote Setpoint bias (B1) above.

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to

Engineering Zero, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Limiting Variable Loop

Remote Setpoint upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Limiting Variable Loop Remote

Setpoint lower range signal value.

0

3

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

13-7

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 13-3. CS22 Two Loop Override Controller Datapoints

3 of 5

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

Default

AI3 - Remote Setpoint Limiting (Is affected by Setpoint Related Datapoints) (Cont)

B272 5-4 AI3 3

L419

L443

5-4

5-4

AI3

AI3

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Limiting Variable Loop Remote Setpoint signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Limiting Variable Loop Remote Setpoint signal.

1 = 0 - 5 V input range; 0 = 1 - 5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Limiting Variable Loop

Remote Setpoint input is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

AO0 - Control Output Limiting (Primary, Limiting)

0

0

L472 5-5 AO0 0

L120,

L144

L122,

L146

C109

C145

C110,

C146

C118,

C154

C106

C107

C108

C111

L106

L114

C115

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON0,

CON1

CON0,

CON1

CON0,

CON1

CON0,

CON1

CON0,

CON1

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

0-20 mA Output - 0 = 4-20 mA signal; 1 = 0-20 mA signal.

Enter a value to match the output valve requirements.

Manual Fallback Disable - 0 = always power up in manual; 1

= auto/manual selector unchanged at power up.

Hard Manual Limit - 1 = apply output limits to the final output of the Auto-Manual generator. Affects both the manual push buttons and the controller’s result. 0 = do not apply limits.

Output High Limit - Sets maximum Control Output Limiting signal value for in engineering units.

Output Low Limit - Sets minimum Control Output Limiting signal value in engineering units.

Output Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the output value. When configured to a non-zero value, the output from the Auto-Selector is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. A zero disables output slewing. It does not affect manual operation.

CON0 Control Related Datapoints

Proportional Band - Is the percent of error required to move the output full scale for proportional action.

Reset Time - Is the number of minutes per repeat of integral action. It is mutually exclusive with Manual Reset.

Rate Time - Represents the minutes proportional action is advanced.

Manual Reset - It determines the output valve position when the controller is in Auto and the error = 0. It is mutually exclusive with Reset Time.

Reverse Switch - 0 = Control Output Limiting

if Primary

Variable

; 1 = Control Output Limiting

if Primary

Variable

.

Auto Enable - Controller output is from a PID algorithm when set to 1 and A/M push button is in Auto.

Controller Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Primary Controller Lower Range value, will produce the control upper range value in engineering units.

0

1

100

0

0

100

0

0

50

1

1

100

13-8

Section 13. CS22 - Two Loop Override Controller

Table 13-3. CS22 Two Loop Override Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

C116

C142

C143

C144

C147

L130

L138

C151

C152

L473

L264

L265

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-5

5-6

5-6

CON0

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

AO1

DI0

DI1

Title and Function

CON1 Control Related Datapoints

Controller Lower Range - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Primary Control Lower Range value.

Proportional Band - Is the percent of error required to move the output full scale for proportional action.

Reset Time - Is the number of minutes per repeat of integral action. It is mutually exclusive with Manual Reset.

Rate Time - Represents the minutes proportional action is advanced.

Manual Reset - It determines the output valve position when the controller is in Auto and the error = 0. It is mutually exclusive with Reset Time.

Reverse Switch - 0 = Control Output Limiting

if Limiting

Variable

; 1 = Control Output Limiting

if Limiting

Variable

.

Auto Enable - Controller output is from a PID algorithm when set to 1 and A/M push button is in Auto.

Controller Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Limiting Controller Lower Range value, will produce the control upper range value in engineering units.

Controller Lower Range - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Limiting Control Lower Range value.

AO1 - Override Status

0-20 mA Output - 0 = 4-20 mA signal; 1 = 0-20 mA signal.

If left at the default value of 0, then 4 mA = Primary Variable

Loop controls AO0 output and 20 mA = Limiting Variable

Loop controls AO0 output.

If configured to a 1, then 0 mA = Primary Variable Loop controls AO0 output and 20 mA = Limiting Variable Loop controls AO0 output.

DI0 - Remote Enable Primary

Contact Input Invert - Normally, the Primary Variable Loop

Remote Enable is permitted if DI0 is closed (datapoint L115 -

Remote Setpoint Enable is set to 1 by DI0). Set to 1 to reverse the DI0 condition required to permit the Primary

Variable Loop Remote Enable (DI0 open = Primary Variable

Loop Remote Enable).

DI1 - Remote Enable Limiting

Contact Input Invert - Normally, the Limiting Variable Loop

Remote Enable is permitted if DI1 is closed (datapoint L139 -

Remote Setpoint Enable is set to 1 by DI1). Set to 1 to reverse the DI1 condition required to permit the Limiting

Variable Loop Remote Enable (DI1 open = Limiting Variable

Loop Remote Enable).

4 of 5

Default

0

100

0

0

50

1

1

100

0

0

0

0

13-9

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 13-3. CS22 Two Loop Override Controller Datapoints

Datapoint

L288

L289

B335,

B340

C103,

C139

C104,

C140

C105,

C141

Table

5-7

5-7

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

Module

DO0

Title and Function

DO0 - Process Alarms Primary

Contact Output Invert - Normally, Process Alarms Primary is enabled if DO0 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the DO0 condition required to activate Process Alarms Primary (DO0 open = the Primary Variable value is not within the C103,

C104 Alarm Limits).

DO1 - Process Alarms Limiting

DO1 Contact Output Invert - Normally, Process Alarms Limiting is enabled if DO1 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the DO1 condition required to activate Process Alarms Limiting (DO1 open = the Limiting Variable value is not within the C139,

C140 Alarm Limits).

Alarms Related Datapoints (Primary, Limiting)

CON0

CON1

CON0

CON1

CON0,

CON1

CON0,

CON1

Control Alarm Mode - Used to select one of six alarm types or none. See Table 5-9 for details and examples.

Alarm Limit 1 - Point in engineering units where an alarm is triggered because the loop PV is not within the limit value set in the datapoint.

Alarm Limit 2 - Point in engineering units where an alarm is triggered because the loop PV is not within the limit value set in the datapoint.

Alarm Dead Band - Sets the activation/deactivation gaps for the alarm limit points. It is in engineering units.

Setpoint Related Datapoints (Primary, Limiting)

C114,

C150

C125,

C161

C126,

C162

C117,

C153

A000,

A002

A001,

A003

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON0,

CON1

CON0,

CON1

CON0,

CON1

CON0,

CON1

CON0,

CON1

CON0,

CON1

Control Zone - A gap on both sides of setpoint. When PV is within this gap, the proportional and integral output changes are suppressed. Derivative output is unaffected.

Setpoint High Limit - It is the maximum loop control setpoint value allowed.

Setpoint Low Limit - It is the minimum loop control setpoint value allowed.

Setpoint Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the setpoint.

When configured to a non-zero value, the setpoint used in the PID algorithm is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. The final value of the setpoint always appears on the units display. A zero disables setpoint slewing.

Miscellaneous Datapoints (Primary, Limiting)

Tagname - Assignable 10 character name.

L109,

L133

5-9 CON0,

CON1

Engineering Units - Assignable 10 character designator.

(Engineering Units appear on the Single Loop CON0 and

Single Loop CON1 displays only.)

Reverse Valve - Bottom of display loop output valve action indicators: 1 = [O] [C] display order, 0 = [C] [O] display order. (Reverse Valve indicators appear on the Single Loop

CON0 and Single Loop CON1 displays only.)

5 of 5

Default

0

0

1

100

0

2

0

100

0

0

CON-

0, 1

PER-

CENT

0

13-10

Section 14. CS40 - Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller

14.0 CS40 - DUAL TWO LOOP CASCADE

CONTROLLER

14.1 CS40 - DUAL TWO LOOP CASCADE CONTROLLER

The Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller provides four standard PID controllers that function as two cascade pairs. Each cascade pair is arranged with a primary and related secondary controller.

Transfer between local and cascade control in each cascade pair is bumpless and balanceless because each pair’s primary controller output is forced to match the secondary controller setpoint when the secondary controller is in local mode. (See Section 12, Two Loop Cascade Controller for process application description.) A typical low-resolution display Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller application is illustrated in Figure 14-1.

Ensure the controller is capable of supporting four control loops by comparing the model number of the controller (found on the controller tag) with the model number breakdown provided in Section 1.

D

1

, E, F = #2 PRIMARY LOOP

D

2

, E, F = #2 SECONDARY LOOP

TT

D

2

TT

D

1

PUMP

AI1 - #2 PRIMARY

PROCESS VARIABLE

AI3 - #2 SECONDARY

PROCESS VARIABLE

DI1 - #2 CASCADE ENABLE

(CLOSED CONTACT)

DI0 - #1 CASCADE ENABLE

(CLOSED CONTACT)

AI2 - #1 SECONDARY PROCESS VARIABLE

AI0 - #1 PRIMARY

PROCESS VARIABLE

TT A

2

TT A

1

F

VALVE

STEAM

E

AO1 #2 SECONDARY

CONTROL OUTPUT

DO1 - #2 SECONDARY PROCESS

ALARMS

DO0 - #1 SECONDARY PROCESS

ALARMS

AO0 - #1 SECONDARY

CONTROL OUTPUT

A

1

, B, C = #1 PRIMARY LOOP

A

2

, B, C = #1 SECONDARY LOOP

B

VALVE

C

COLD

WATER

PUMP

Figure 14-1. Typical CS40 Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller

Application

14-1

53MC5000 Process Control Station

14.2 CS40 CONTROL SIGNALS

Loading CS40 connects the 53MC5000 Controller function blocks for operation as a Dual Two

Loop Cascade Controller. As shown in Figure 14-1, CS40 provides ten control signals which are described in Table 14-1 as follows:

Table 14-1. CS40 Control Signals

Control

Signal Definition

AI0 - #1 Primary

Process

Variable

AI1 - #2

Primary

Process

Variable

AI2 - #1

Secondary

Process

Variable

AI3 - #2

Secondary

Process

Variable

This analog input signal represents the value of the #1 Primary Process Variable to be manipulated by the controller. It is compared to the #1 Primary Setpoint to determine the setpoint value for the #1 Secondary Process

Variable loop.

This analog input signal represents the value of the #2 Primary Process Variable to be manipulated by the controller. It is compared to the #2 Primary Setpoint to determine the setpoint value for the #2 Secondary Process

Variable loop.

This analog input signal represents the value of the #1 Secondary Process Variable to be manipulated by the controller. It is compared to the #1 Secondary Setpoint to determine the #1

Secondary Control Output.

This analog input signal represents the value of the #2 Secondary Process Variable to be manipulated by the controller. It is compared to the #2 Secondary Setpoint to determine the #2

Secondary Control Output.

This is the 4-20 mA output signal that drives the

#1 final control element.

AO0 - #1

Secondary

Control Output

AO1 - #2

Secondary

Control Output

DI0 - #1

Cascade

Enable

DI1 - #2

Cascade

Enable

DO0 - # 1

Secondary

Process

Alarms

This is the 4-20 mA output signal that drives the

#2 final control element.

When a closed contact is present on this input, cascade #1 operation is enabled if the R/L push button is in Remote.

When a closed contact is present on this input, cascade #2 operation is enabled if the R/L push button is in Remote.

This contact is closed when the #1 Secondary

Process Variable value is not within the C175 and C176 datapoint values (#1 Secondary

Alarm Limits 1 and 2); otherwise, the contact is open.

Cord

Set

ITB

TB1-1 (+)

TB1-2 (-)

TB1-3

TB1-5 (+)

TB1-6 (-)

TB1-7

TB1-9

TB1-10 (+)

TB1-11 (-)

TB1-13

TB1-14 (+)

TB1-15 (-)

TB1-17 (+)

TB1-18 (-)

TB1-19 (+)

TB1-20 (-)

TB2-1 (+)

TB2-2 (-)

TB2-3 (+)

TB2-4 (-)

TB2-5 (+)

TB2-6 (-)

Rear

Term

Board

1 (+)

2 (-)

3

4 (+)

5 (-)

6

1

7 (+)

8 (-)

4

9 (+)

8 (-)

10 (+)

11 (-)

12 (+)

11 (-)

13 (+)

14 (-)

15 (+)

14 (-)

16 (+)

17 (-)

1 of 2

Signal

+24 V

AI0

SC

+24 V

AI1

SC

+24 V

AI2

SC

+24 V

AI3

SC

AO0

PC

AO1

PC

DI0

PC

DI1

PC

DO0

PC

14-2

Section 14. CS40 - Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller

Table 14-1. CS40 Control Signals

Control

Signal

DO1 - #2

Secondary

Process

Alarms

Definition

This contact is closed when the #2 Secondary

Process Variable value is not within the C211 and C212 datapoint values (#2 Secondary

Alarm Limits 1 and 2); otherwise, the contact is open.

Cord

Set

ITB

TB2-7 (+)

TB2-8 (-)

2 of 2

Rear

Term

Board

18 (+)

17 (-)

Signal

DO1

PC

14.3 CS40 STANDARD DISPLAYS

Loading CS40 preconfigures the System Module display list for ten displays. The ten displays are listed in Table 14-2 with appropriate reference sections, figure numbers, and configuration tables.

A configuration table is not listed for the Four Loop CON0 - CON3 display, as that information is provided in this section. To configure the Horizontal Trend, System Status, and Status Module displays, reference the Section 4 and Section 5 information listed in the table. The Alarm Summary display does not have to be configured; however, it is described and illustrated in Section 4.

Table 14-2. CS40 Standard Displays

Title

Four Loop CON0 - CON3

Single Loop CON0 with Horizontal Trend

Single Loop CON1 with Horizontal Trend

Single Loop CON2 with Horizontal Trend

Single Loop CON3 with Horizontal Trend

Alarm Summary

System Status

Status Module 0

Status Module 1

Four Loop CON0 - CON3

See

Section

4.10

4.5

4.5

4.5

4.5

4.1

4.2

4.7

4.7

4.10

Section 4

Figure

4-15

4-10 sheet 2

4-10 sheet 2

4-10 sheet 2

4-10 sheet 2

4-1

4-2

4-12

4-12

4-15

Section 5

Table

5-9 and 5-12

5-9 and 5-12

5-9 and 5-12

5-9 and 5-12

5-15

5-10

5-10

14.4 CS40 DATAPOINT CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS

See Figure 14-2 and Table 14-3 to configure datapoints for CS40 - Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller. Table 14-3 also lists the Section 5 modules that can be referenced for more detailed definitions of the datapoints when required. A datapoint does not have to be configured if the default value listed in Table 14-3 is appropriate for the process application.

Loading CS40 initializes the Engineering Spans to 100 for AIs 1-3 (C257, C258, and C259). Also, C076 (Math A -

K1) is set to 1.0, C077 (Math A - K2) is set to -1.0, C085 (Math D - K1) is set to 1.0, and C086

(Math D - K2) is set to -1.0. The CON0

OUT and CON1

OUT signals, which are the secondary setpoint inputs, must be properly scaled by configuring datapoints C184 (B1) and C185 (K1) for the #1

Secondary Control Output; and by configuring C220 (B1) and C221 (K1) for the #2 Secondary Control Output. These datapoints are listed in Table 14-3 under their respective CON

OUT Datapoints.

14-3

53MC5000 Process Control Station

AI0 - #1 PRIMARY PROCESS VARIABLE

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI0 ENGINEERING SPAN (C256)

AI0 ENGINEERING ZERO (C276)

AI0 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B269)

AI0 0-5 V INPUT (L416)

AI0 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L440)

AIO - #1 PRIMARY PROCESS VARIABLE

AI1 - #2 PRIMARY PROCESS VARIABLE

AI1 - #2 PRIMARY PROCESS VARIABLE

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI1 ENGINEERING SPAN (C257)

AI1 ENGINEERING ZERO (C277)

AI1 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B270)

AI1 0-5 V INPUT (L417)

AI1 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L441)

DI0 - #1 CASCADE ENABLE

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L264])

DI1 - #2 CASCADE ENABLE

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L265])

AI2 - #1 SECONDARY PROCESS VARIABLE

AI2 - #1 SECONDARY PROCESS VARIABLE

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI2 ENGINEERING SPAN (C258)

AI2 ENGINEERING ZERO (C278)

AI2 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B271)

AI2 0-5 V INPUT (L418)

AI2 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L442)

AI3 - #2 SECONDARY PROCESS VARIABLE

AI3 - #2 SECONDARY PROCESS VARIABLE

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI3 ENGINEERING SPAN (C259)

AI3 ENGINEERING ZERO (C279)

AI3 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B272)

AI3 0-5 V INPUT (L419)

AI3 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L443)

SETPOINT RELATED DATAPOINTS

MULTIPLE DATAPOINTS: (LOOP 1, LOOP 2,

LOOP 3, LOOP 4 )

CONTROL ZONE (C114, C150, C186, C222)

SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT (C125, C161, C197, C233)

SETPOINT LOW LIMIT (C126, C162, C198, C234)

SETPOINT SLEW RATE (C117, C153, C189, C225)

14-4

Figure 14-2. CS40 Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints

(Sheet 1 of 3)

Section 14. CS40 - Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller

MISCELLANEOUS DATAPOINTS (SHOWN IN

RECTANGLES ON THE DISPLAY)

MULTIPLE DATAPOINTS: (LOOP 1, LOOP 3)

UNIT TAGNAME (A008) [ABB MC5000]

CONTROL TAGNAME (A000,A004)

[CON-0, CON-2]

ENGINEERING UNITS (A001, A005)

[PERCENT] (FOR TREND DISPLAYS)

ALARMS RELATED DATAPOINTS

#1 CONTROL ALARM MODE (B345)

0 - HIGH/LOW, 1 - NONE, 2 - HIGH/NONE,

3 - NONE/LOW, 4 - HIGH/HI-HI, 5 - LOW/LO-LO

6 - HI SP DEVIATION/LO SP DEVIATION

#1 SECONDARY ALARM LIMIT 1 (C175)

#1 SECONDARY ALARM LIMIT 2 (C176)

#1 SECONDARY ALARM DEAD BAND (C177)

DO0 - #1 SECONDARY PROCESS ALARMS

(CONTACT OUTPUT INVERT [L288])

AO0 - #1 SECONDARY CONTROL OUTPUT

CON0

OUT (SETPOINT FROM LOOP 1 TO LOOP 3) RELATED DATAPOINTS

MANUAL FALLBACK DISABLE (L120)

HARD MANUAL LIMIT (L122)

OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT (C109)

OUTPUT LOW LIMIT (C110)

OUTPUT SLEW RATE (C118)

PROPORTIONAL BAND (C106) (P)

RESET TIME (C107) (I)

RATE TIME (C108) (D)

MANUAL RESET (C111)

REVERSE SWITCH (L106)

AUTO ENABLE (L114)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C115)[100] (FOR TREND DISPLAYS)

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE (C116) [0] (FOR TREND DISPLAYS)

AO0 - #1 SECONDARY CONTROL OUTPUT (LOOP 3) RELATED DATAPOINTS

AO0 0-20 mA OUTPUT (L472)

MANUAL FALLBACK DISABLE (L168)

HARD MANUAL LIMIT (L170)

OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT (C181)

OUTPUT LOW LIMIT (C182)

OUTPUT SLEW RATE (C190)

CON2 #1 SECONDARY CONTROL OUTPUT (LOOP 3) RELATED DATAPOINTS

PROPORTIONAL BAND (C178) (P)

RESET TIME (C179) (I)

RATE TIME (C180) (D)

MANUAL RESET (C183)

REVERSE SWITCH (L154)

AUTO ENABLE (L162)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C187)[100] (FOR TREND DISPLAYS)

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE (C188) [0] (FOR TREND DISPLAYS)

REMOTE SETPOINT BIAS (B1) (C184)

REMOTE SETPOINT RATIO (K1) (C185)

NOTES: SEE SECTION 16, TUNING, OR SECTION 17, EASY-TUNE, TO TUNE PID DATAPOINTS.

BRACKETS [XXXX] CONTAIN DATA SHOWN IN RECTANGLES ON THE DISPLAY.

Figure 14-2. CS40 Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints

(Sheet 2 of 3)

14-5

53MC5000 Process Control Station

MISCELLANEOUS DATAPOINTS (SHOWN IN

RECTANGLES ON THE DISPLAY)

MULTIPLE DATAPOINTS: ( LOOP 2, LOOP 4 )

UNIT TAGNAME (A008) [ABB MC5000]

CONTROL TAGNAME ( A002, A006)

[CON-1, CON-3]

ENGINEERING UNITS (A003, A007)

[PERCENT] (FOR TREND DISPLAYS)

ALARMS RELATED DATAPOINTS

#2 CONTROL ALARM MODE (B350)

0 - HIGH/LOW, 1 - NONE, 2 - HIGH/NONE, 3 - NONE/LOW

4 - HIGH/HI-HI, 5 - LOW/LO-LO, 6 - HI SP DEVIATION/LO SP

DEVIATION

#2 SECONDARY ALARM LIMIT 1 (C211)

#2 SECONDARY ALARM LIMIT 2 (C212)

#2 SECONDARY ALARM DEAD BAND (C213)

DO1 - #2 SECONDARY PROCESS ALARMS

(CONTACT OUTPUT INVERT [L289])

AO1 - #2 SECONDARY CONTROL OUTPUT

CON1

OUT (SETPOINT FROM LOOP 2 TO LOOP 4) RELATED DATAPOINTS

MANUAL FALLBACK DISABLE (L144)

HARD MANUAL LIMIT (L146)

OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT (C145)

OUTPUT LOW LIMIT (C146)

OUTPUT SLEW RATE (C154)

PROPORTIONAL BAND (C142) (P)

RESET TIME (C143) (I)

RATE TIME (C144) (D)

MANUAL RESET (C147)

REVERSE SWITCH (L130)

AUTO ENABLE (L138)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C151)[100] (FOR TREND DISPLAYS)

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE (C152) [0] (FOR TREND DISPLAYS)

AO1 - #2 SECONDARY CONTROL OUTPUT (LOOP 4) RELATED DATAPOINTS

AO1 0-20 mA OUTPUT (L473)

MANUAL FALLBACK DISABLE ( L192)

HARD MANUAL LIMIT (L194)

OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT (C217)

OUTPUT LOW LIMIT (C218)

OUTPUT SLEW RATE (C226)

CON3 #2 SECONDARY CONTROL OUTPUT (LOOP 4) RELATED DATAPOINTS

PROPORTIONAL BAND (C214) (P)

RESET TIME (C215) (I)

RATE TIME (C216) (D)

MANUAL RESET (C219)

REVERSE SWITCH ( L178)

AUTO ENABLE (L186)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C223)[100] (FOR TREND DISPLAYS)

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE (C224, [0] (FOR TREND DISPLAYS)

REMOTE SETPOINT BIAS (B1) (C220)

REMOTE SETPOINT RATIO (K1) (C221)

NOTES: SEE SECTION 16, TUNING, OR SECTION 17, EASY-TUNE, TO TUNE PID DATAPOINTS.

BRACKETS [XXXX] CONTAIN DATA SHOWN IN RECTANGLES ON THE DISPLAY.

Figure 14-2. CS40 Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints

(Sheet 3 of 3)

14-6

Section 14. CS40 - Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller

Table 14-3. CS40 Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

C256

C276

B269

L416

L440

C257

C277

B270

L417

L441

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

AI0

AI0

AI0

AI0

AI0

AI1

AI1

AI1

AI1

AI1

Title and Function

AI0 - #1 Primary Process Variable

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Engineering Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the #1Primary Variable transducer upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the #1 Primary Variable transducer lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the #1 Primary Variable transducer signal. See

Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the #1 Primary Variable transducer. 1 = 0 - 5 V range; 0 = 1 - 5 V range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the #1 Primary Variable transducer is a nonlinear differential pressure (DP) cell that provides a squared signal value. 0 = input is already linear;

1 = square root to restore linearization.

AI1 - #2 Primary Process Variable

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to

Engineering Zero, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the #2 Primary Variable transducer upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the #2 Primary Variable transducer lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the #2 Primary Variable transducer signal. See

Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the #2 Primary Variable transducer. 1 = 0 - 5 V range; 0 = 1 - 5 V range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the #2 Primary Variable transducer is a nonlinear differential pressure (DP) cell that provides a squared signal value. 0 = input is already linear;

1 = square root to restore linearization.

1 of 7

Default

100

0

3

0

0

0

0

3

0

0

C258

C278

5-4

5-4

AI2

AI2

AI2 - #1 Secondary Process Variable

Engineering Span - Set to 100 by CS40; however, it can be changed. Enter a value, that when added to the Engineering

Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the #1 Secondary Variable transducer upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the #1 Secondary Variable transducer lower range signal value.

0

0

14-7

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 14-3. CS40 Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints

2 of 7

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

AI2 - #1 Secondary Process Variable (Cont)

B271 5-4 AI2

L418

L442

5-4

5-4

AI2

AI2

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the #1 Secondary Variable transducer signal. See

Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the #1 Secondary Variable transducer signal. 1 = 0 -

5 V input range; 0 = 1 - 5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the #1 Secondary Variable transducer is a nonlinear differential pressure (DP) cell that provides a squared signal value. 0 = input is already linear;

1 = square root to restore linearization.

AI3 - #2 Secondary Process Variable

C259 5-4 AI3

C279

B272

L419

L443

L120

L122

C109

C110

L106

L114

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

AI3

AI3

AI3

AI3

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Engineering Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the #2 Secondary Variable transducer upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the #2 Secondary Variable transducer lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the #2 Secondary Variable transducer signal. See

Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the #2 Secondary Variable transducer signal. 1 = 0 -

5 V input range; 0 = 1 - 5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the #2 Secondary Variable transducer is a nonlinear differential pressure (DP) cell that provides a squared signal value. 0 = input is already linear;

1 = square root to restore linearization.

CON0

OUT (Setpoint from Loop 1 to Loop 3)

Manual Fallback Disable - 0 = always power up Loop 1 in manual; 1 = Loop 1 auto/manual selector unchanged at power up.

Hard Manual Limit - 1 = apply output limits to the final output of the Loop 1 Auto-Manual Generator. Affects both the manual push buttons and the controller’s result. 0 = do not apply limits.

Output High Limit - Sets maximum CON0

OUT signal value in engineering units.

Output Low Limit - Sets minimum CON0

OUT signal value in engineering units.

Reverse Switch - 0 = CON0

OUT

if PV

;

1 = CON0

OUT

if PV

.

Auto Enable - Output is from the PID algorithm when set to 1 and the A/M push button is in Auto.

Default

3

0

0

0

0

3

0

0

0

1

100

0

1

1

14-8

Section 14. CS40 - Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller

Table 14-3. CS40 Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

CON0

OUT (Setpoint from Loop 1 to Loop 3) (Cont)

C106 5-9 CON0 Proportional Band - Is the percent of error required to move the CON0

OUT full scale for proportional action.

C107 5-9 CON0

C108

C111

C115

C116

C118

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

Reset Time - Is the number of minutes per repeat of integral action. It is mutually exclusive with Manual Reset.

Rate Time - Represents the minutes proportional action is advanced.

Manual Reset - It determines output valve position when the controller Loop 1 is in Auto and the error = 0. It is mutually exclusive with Reset Time.

Controller Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Loop 1 Control Lower Range value, will produce the Control upper range value in engineering units.

Controller Lower Range - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 1 Control lower range value.

Output Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the output value (setpoint from Loop 1 to Loop 3). When configured to a non-zero value, the output from the Loop 1 Auto-Selector is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. A zero disables output slewing. It does not affect manual operation.

L472

L168

L170

C181

C182

C190

C178

C179

C180

5-5

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

AO0

CON2

CON2

CON2

CON2

CON2

AO0 - #1 Secondary Control Output (Loop 3)

0-20 mA Output - 0 = 4-20 mA signal; 1 = 0-20 mA signal.

Enter a value to match the Loop 3 output valve requirements.

Manual Fallback Disable - 0 = always power up Loop 3 in manual; 1 = auto/manual selector unchanged at power up.

Hard Manual Limit - 1 = apply output limits to the final output of the Loop 3 Auto-Manual Generator. Affects both the manual push buttons and the controller’s result. 0 = do not apply limits.

Output High Limit - Sets maximum Loop 3 output signal value in engineering units.

Output Low Limit - Sets minimum Loop 3 output signal value in engineering units.

Output Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the output value. When configured to a non-zero value, the output from the Loop 3 Auto-Selector is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. A zero disables output slewing. It does not affect manual operation.

CON 2 #1 Secondary Control Output (LOOP 3) Related Datapoints

CON2

CON2

CON2

Proportional Band - Is the percent of error required to move the Loop 3 output full scale for proportional action.

Reset Time - Is the number of minutes per repeat of integral action. It is mutually exclusive with Manual Reset.

Rate Time - Represents the minutes proportional action is advanced.

3 of 7

Default

100

0

0

50

100

0

0

0

0

1

100

0

0

100

0

0

14-9

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 14-3. CS40 Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

CON 2 #1 Secondary Control Output (LOOP 3) Related Datapoints (Cont)

C183 5-9 CON2

L154

L162

C187

C188

C184

C185

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON2

CON2

CON2

CON2

CON2

CON2

Manual Reset - It determines output valve position when the controller Loop 3 is in Auto and the error = 0. It is mutually exclusive with Reset Time.

Reverse Switch - 0 = Loop 3 output

if PV

; 1 = Loop 3 output

if PV

.

Auto Enable - Output is from the PID algorithm when set to 1 and the A/M push button is in Auto.

Controller Span - Enter a value, that when added to the Loop

3 Control Lower Range value, will produce the Control upper range value in engineering units.

Controller Lower Range - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 3 Control lower range value.

Remote Setpoint Bias (B1) - This datapoint and Remote

Setpoint Ratio (K1) allow the CON0

OUT to be modified by the CON2 Setpoint Generator.

Secondary Setpoint = [CON0

OUT X Ratio] + Bias

Secondary SP = [CON0

OUT X K1] + B1

Remote Setpoint Ratio (K1) - See Remote Setpoint Bias (B1) above.

CON1

OUT (Setpoint from Loop 2 to Loop 4)

L144

L146

C145

C146

C154

C142

C143

C144

L130

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

Manual Fallback Disable - 0 = always power up Loop 2 in manual; 1 = Loop 2 auto/manual selector unchanged at power up.

Hard Manual Limit - 1 = apply output limits to the final output of the Loop 2 Auto-Manual Generator. Affects both the manual push buttons and the controller’s result. 0 = do not apply limits.

Output High Limit - Sets maximum CON1

OUT signal value in engineering units.

Output Low Limit - Sets minimum CON1

OUT signal value in engineering units.

Output Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the output value (setpoint from Loop 2 to Loop 4). When configured to a non-zero value, the output from the Loop 2 Auto-Selector is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. A zero disables output slewing. It does not affect manual operation.

Proportional Band - Is the percent of error required to move the CON1

OUT full scale for proportional action.

Reset Time - Is the number of minutes per repeat of integral action. It is mutually exclusive with Manual Reset.

Rate Time - Represents the minutes proportional action is advanced.

Reverse Switch - 0 = CON1

OUT

if PV

;

1 = CON1

OUT

if PV

.

4 of 7

Default

50

1

1

100

0

0

1

0

1

100

0

0

100

0

0

1

14-10

Section 14. CS40 - Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller

Table 14-3. CS40 Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

CON1

OUT (Setpoint from Loop 2 to Loop 4) (Cont)

C147 5-9 CON1 Manual Reset - It determines output valve position when the controller Loop 2 is in Auto and the error = 0. It is mutually exclusive with Reset Time.

L138 5-9 CON1

C115

C152

5-9

5-9

CON1

CON1

Auto Enable - Output is from the PID algorithm when set to 1 and the A/M push button is in Auto.

Controller Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Loop 2 Control Lower Range value, will produce the Control upper range value in engineering units.

Controller Lower Range - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 2 Control lower range value.

L473

L192

L194

C217

C218

C226

C214

5-5

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

AO1

CON3

CON3

CON3

CON3

CON3

AO1 - #2 Secondary Control Output (Loop 4)

0-20 mA Output - 0 = 4-20 mA signal; 1 = 0-20 mA signal.

Enter a value to match the Loop 4 output valve requirements.

Manual Fallback Disable - 0 = always power up Loop 4 in manual; 1 = auto/manual selector unchanged at power up.

Hard Manual Limit - 1 = apply output limits to the final output of the Loop 4 Auto-Manual Generator. Affects both the manual push buttons and the controller’s result. 0 = do not apply limits.

Output High Limit - Sets maximum Loop 4 output signal value in engineering units.

Output Low Limit - Sets minimum Loop 4 output signal value in engineering units.

Output Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the output value. When configured to a non-zero value, the output from the Loop 4 Auto-Selector is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. A zero disables output slewing. It does not affect manual operation.

CON 3 #2 Secondary Control Output (LOOP 4) Related Datapoints

CON3 Proportional Band - Is the percent of error required to move the Loop 4 output full scale for proportional action.

C215

C216

C219

L178

L186

C221

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON3

CON3

CON3

CON3

CON3

CON3

Reset Time - Is the number of minutes per repeat of integral action. It is mutually exclusive with Manual Reset.

Rate Time - Represents the minutes proportional action is advanced.

Manual Reset - It determines output valve position when the controller Loop 4 is in Auto and the error = 0. It is mutually exclusive with Reset Time.

Reverse Switch - 0 = Loop 4 output

if PV

; 1 = Loop 4 output

if PV

.

Auto Enable - Output is from the PID algorithm when set to 1 and the A/M push button is in Auto.

Remote Setpoint Ratio (K1) - See Remote Setpoint Bias (B1) above.

5 of 7

Default

50

1

100

0

0

0

1

100

0

0

100

0

0

50

1

1

1

14-11

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 14-3. CS40 Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

CON 3 #2 Secondary Control Output (LOOP 4) Related Datapoints (Cont)

C223

C224

C220

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON3

CON3

CON3

Controller Span - Enter a value, that when added to the Loop

4 Control Lower Range value, will produce the Control upper range value in engineering units.

Controller Lower Range - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 4 Control lower range value.

Remote Setpoint Bias (B1) - This datapoint and Remote

Setpoint Ratio (K1) allow the CON1

OUT to be modified by the CON3 Setpoint Generator.

Secondary Setpoint = [CON1

OUT X Ratio] + Bias

Secondary SP = [CON1

OUT X K1] + B1

6 of 7

Default

100

0

0

L264 5-6 DI0

DI0 - #1 Cascade Enable

Contact Input Invert - Normally, #1 Cascade Enable is permitted if DI0 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the DI0 condition required to permit #1 Cascade Enable (DI0 open =

#1 Cascade Enable).

0

L265

L288

L289

5-6

5-7

5-7

B345,

B350

C175,

C211

5-9

5-9

C176,

C212

5-9

C177,

C213

5-9

DI1

DI1 - #2 Cascade Enable

Contact Input Invert - Normally, #2 Cascade Enable is permitted if DI1 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the DI1 condition required to permit #2 Cascade Enable (DI1 open =

#2 Cascade Enable).

DO0 - #1 Secondary Process Alarms

DO0 Contact Output Invert - Normally, #1 Secondary Process

Alarms is enabled if DO0 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the

DO0 condition required to activate #1 Secondary Process

Alarms (DO0 open = the Secondary PV value is not within the C175, C176 Alarm Limits).

DO1 - #2 Secondary Process Alarms

DO1 Contact Output Invert - Normally, #2 Secondary Process

Alarms is enabled if DO1 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the

DO1 condition required to activate #2 Secondary Process

Alarms (DO1 open = the Secondary PV value is not within the C211, C212 Alarm Limits).

Alarms Related Datapoints (#1 Secondary, #2 Secondary)

CON2

CON3

CON2

CON3

CON2,

CON3

CON2,

CON3

Control Alarm Mode - Used to select one of six alarm types or none. See Table 5-9 for details and examples.

Alarm Limit 1 - Point in engineering units where an alarm is triggered because the loop PV is not within the limit value set in the datapoint.

Alarm Limit 2 - Point in engineering units where an alarm is triggered because the PV is not within the limit value set in the datapoint.

Alarm Dead Band - Sets the activation/deactivation gaps for the alarm limit points. It is in engineering units.

0

0

0

1

100

0

2

14-12

Section 14. CS40 - Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller

Table 14-3. CS40 Dual Two Loop Cascade Controller Datapoints

7 of 7

A000,

A002,

A004,

A006

A001,

A003,

A005,

A007

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

Setpoint Related Datapoints (Loops 1, 2, 3, 4)

C114,

C150,

C186,

C222

C125,

C161,

C197,

C233

C126,

C162,

C198,

C234

C117,

C153,

C189,

C225

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON0,

CON1,

CON2,

CON3

CON0,

CON1,

CON2,

CON3

CON0,

CON1,

CON2,

CON3

CON0,

CON1,

CON2,

CON3

Control Zone - A gap on both sides of setpoint. When PV is within this gap, the proportional and integral output changes are suppressed. Derivative output is unaffected.

Setpoint High Limit - It is the maximum setpoint value allowed.

Setpoint Low Limit - It is the minimum setpoint value allowed.

Setpoint Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the setpoint.

When configured to a non-zero value, the setpoint used in the PID algorithm is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. The final value of the setpoint always appears on the units display. A zero disables setpoint slewing.

Miscellaneous Datapoints (Loops 1, 2, 3, 4)

A008

5-9

Unit Tagname - Assignable 10 character name, e.g.,

ABB MC5000.

Tagname - Assignable 10 character name.

5-9

CON0,

CON1,

CON2,

CON3

CON0,

CON1,

CON2,

CON3

Engineering Units - Assignable 10 character designator.

(Appears on Trend displays.)

Default

0

100

0

0

CON-

0, 1,

2, 3

PER-

CENT

14-13

NOTES:

53MC5000 Process Control Station

14-14

Section 15. CS41 - Four Loop Controller

15.0 CS41 - FOUR LOOP CONTROLLER

15.1 CS41 - FOUR LOOP CONTROLLER

A four loop 53MC5000 Controller is configured at the factory for CS41 operation to provide the standard displays listed in Table 15-2 and the default datapoint settings listed in Table 15-3. As a

Four Loop (PID) Controller, each loop Proportional Band is set at 100%; the Process Variables AI0-

7 are scaled 0-100% for linear 4-20 mA input signals; and AO0-1 are set as reverse action (PV above setpoint causes decreasing value) control signals over a 4-20 mA signalling range. These settings may be altered and additional Control Strategy 41 (CS41) functions can be activated as necessitated by the process application. The Four Loop Controller provides four identical standard

PID controllers. All four sets of input/output signals for the control loops are identical: Process Variable (PV), Remote Setpoint, Remote Setpoint Enable, Force Fallback, Control Output, and Process

Alarms.

Just as with the standard Single Loop (PID) Controller, only the Process Variable and Control Output of each loop are required for control purposes; the other signals do not have to be connected or configured.

Each loop calculates an output from the difference between its Process

Variable feedback signal and its setpoint (SP) value. After the output is calculated, it is applied to a final control loop element (e.g, valve) to restore process flow to the loop setpoint value.

Validate the controller model number to ensure it has the necessary four loop hardware capabilities

. A typical low-resolution display Four Loop Controller process application is illustrated in Figure 15-1.

CCI0 - REMOTE SP ENABLE LOOP 1

CCI1 - REMOTE SP ENABLE LOOP 2

CCI2 - REMOTE SP ENABLE LOOP 3

CCI3 - REMOTE SP ENABLE LOOP 4

CCI4 - FORCE FALLBACK LOOP 1

CCI5 - FORCE FALLBACK LOOP 2

CCI6 - FORCE FALLBACK LOOP 3

CCI7 - FORCE FALLBACK LOOP 4

AI2 - REMOTE SETPOINT LOOP 1

AI3 - REMOTE SETPOINT LOOP 2

AI6 - REMOTE SETPOINT LOOP 3

AI7 - REMOTE SETPOINT LOOP 4

AI5 - PV LOOP 4

AI4 - PV LOOP 3

AI1 - PV LOOP 2

AI0 - PV

LOOP 1

FT

LOOP 1 VALVE

CCO0 - PROCESS ALARMS LOOP 1

CCO1 - PROCESS ALARMS LOOP 2

CCO2 - PROCESS ALARMS LOOP 3

CCO3 - PROCESS ALARMS LOOP 4

AO3 - CONTROL OUTPUT LOOP 4

AO2 - CONTROL OUTPUT LOOP 3

AO1 - CONTROL

OUTPUT LOOP 2

AO0 -

CONTROL

OUTPUT

LOOP 1

FT

LOOP 2 VALVE

FT

LOOP 3 VALVE

FT

LOOP 4 VALVE

Figure 15-1. Typical CS41 Four Loop Controller Application

15-1

53MC5000 Process Control Station

15.2 CS41 CONTROL SIGNALS

Loading CS41 connects the 53MC5000 Controller function blocks for operation as four standard

PID controllers. As shown in Figure 15-1, CS41 provides 24 control signals which are described in

Table 15-1 as follows:

Table 15-1. CS41 Control Signals

1 of 3

Control

Signal

AI0 - Process

Variable Loop 1

AI1 - Process

Variable Loop 2

AI2 - Remote

Setpoint Loop 1

AI3 - Remote

Setpoint Loop 2

AI4 - Process

Variable Loop 3

AI5 - Process

Variable Loop 4

AI6 - Remote

Setpoint Loop 3

AI7 - Remote

Setpoint Loop 4

AO0 - Control

Output Loop 1

Definition

This analog input signal represents the value of the Loop 1 process to be manipulated by the controller. It is compared to the Loop 1 control setpoint to determine the Control

Output Loop 1 value.

This analog input signal represents the value of the Loop 2 process to be manipulated by the controller. It is compared to the Loop 2 control setpoint to determine the Control

Output Loop 2 value.

This analog input signal represents the value to be used as the Loop 1 control setpoint when remote setpoint operation is selected with the R/L push button and enabled by CCI0.

This analog input signal represents the value to be used as the Loop 2 control setpoint when remote setpoint operation is selected with the R/L push button and enabled by CCI1.

This analog input signal represents the value of the Loop 3 process to be manipulated by the controller. It is compared to the Loop 3 control setpoint to determine the Control

Output Loop 3 value.

This analog input signal represents the value of the Loop 4 process to be manipulated by the controller. It is compared to the Loop 4 control setpoint to determine the Control

Output Loop 4 value.

This analog input signal represents the value to be used as the Loop 3 control setpoint when remote setpoint operation is selected with the R/L push button and enabled by CCI2.

This analog input signal represents the value to be used as the Loop 4 control setpoint when remote setpoint operation is selected with the R/L push button and enabled by CCI3.

This is the 4-20 mA output signal to drive the

Loop 1 final control element.

Cord

Set

ITB

TB1-1 (+)

TB1-2 (-)

TB1-3

TB1-5 (+)

TB1-6 (-)

TB1-7

TB1-9

TB1-10 (+)

TB1-11 (-)

TB1-13

TB1-14 (+)

TB1-15 (-)

Analog

ITB

TB1

Analog

ITB

TB1

Analog

ITB

TB1

Analog

ITB

TB1

TB1-17 (+)

TB1-18 (-)

1 (+)

2 (-)

3

Rear

Term

Board

4 (+)

5(-)

6

1

7 (+)

8 (-)

4

9 (+)

8 (-)

TB1-1

TB1-2 (+)

TB1-3 (-)

TB1-5

TB1-6 (+)

TB1-7 (-)

TB1-9

TB1-10 (+)

TB1-11 (-)

TB1-13

TB1-14 (+)

TB1-15 (-)

10 (+)

11 (-)

Signal

+24 V

AI0

SC

+24 V

AI1

SC

+24 V

AI2

SC

+24 V

AI3

SC

+24 V

AI4

SC

+24 V

AI5

SC

+24 V

AI6

SC

+24 V

AI7

SC

AO0

PC

15-2

Section 15. CS41 - Four Loop Controller

Table 15-1. CS41 Control Signals

Control

Signal

AO1 - Control

Output Loop 2

AO2 - Control

Output Loop 3

AO3 - Control

Output Loop 4

CCI0 - Remote

SP Enable

Loop 1

CCI1 - Remote

SP Enable

Loop 2

CCI2 - Remote

SP Enable

Loop 3

CCI3 - Remote

SP Enable

Loop 4

CCI4 - Force

Fallback Loop 1

CCI5 - Force

Fallback Loop 2

CCI6 - Force

Fallback Loop 3

CCI7 - Force

Fallback Loop 4

CCO0 -

Process Alarms

Loop 1

CCO1 -

Process Alarms

Loop 2

Definition

This is the 4-20 mA output signal to drive the

Loop 2 final control element..

This is the 4-20 mA output signal to drive the

Loop 3 final control element.

This is the 4-20 mA output signal to drive the

Loop 4 final control element.

When a closed contact is present on this input, the operator can select the setpoint value to be set by the value of the Remote

Setpoint Loop 1 input with the R/L push button.

When a closed contact is present on this input, the operator can select the setpoint value to be set by the value of the Remote

Setpoint Loop 2 input with the R/L push button.

When a closed contact is present on this input, the operator can select the setpoint value to be set by the value of the Remote

Setpoint Loop 3 input with the R/L push button.

When a closed contact is present on this input, the operator can select the setpoint value to be set by the value of the Remote

Setpoint Loop 4 input with the R/L push button.

When an open contact is present on this input, the operator can select the Loop 1 setpoint and output fallback values with the R/L push button.

When an open contact is present on this input, the operator can select the Loop 2 setpoint and output fallback values with the R/L push button.

When an open contact is present on this input, the operator can select the Loop 3 setpoint and output fallback values with the R/L push button.

When an open contact is present on this input, the operator can select the Loop 4 setpoint and output fallback values with the R/L push button.

This contact is closed when the Loop 1 PV value is not within Alarm Limits 1 and 2 (C103 and C104); otherwise, the contact is open.

This contact is closed when the Loop 2 PV value is not within Alarm Limits 1 and 2 (C139 and C140); otherwise, the contact is open.

Cord

Set

ITB

TB1-19 (+)

TB1-20 (-)

Analog

ITB TB3

Analog

ITB TB3

TB2-1 (+)

TB2-2 (-)

TB2-3 (+)

TB2-4 (-)

6DI/4DO

ITB

TB1

6DI/4DO

ITB

TB1

6DI/4DO

ITB

TB1

6DI/4DO

ITB

TB1

6DI/4DO

ITB

TB1

6DI/4DO

ITB

TB1

TB2-5 (+)

TB2-6 (-)

TB2-7 (+)

TB2-8 (-)

Rear

Term

Board

12 (+)

11 (-)

TB3-1 (+)

TB3-2 (-)

TB3-3 (+)

TB3-4 (-)

13 (+)

14 (-)

15 (+)

14 (-)

TB1-1

TB1-2

TB1-3

TB1-4

TB1-5

TB1-6

TB1-7

TB1-8

TB1-9

TB1-10

TB1-11

TB1-12

TB1-13

TB1-14

TB1-15

TB1-16

TB1-17

TB1-18

16 (+)

17 (-)

18 (+)

17 (-)

2 of 3

Signal

AO1

PC

AO2

PC

AO3

PC

CCI0

PC

CCI1

PC

CCI2A

CCI2B

PC

CCI3A

CCI3B

PC

CCI4A

CCI4B

PC

CCI5A

CCI5B

PC

CCI6A

CCI6B

PC

CCI7A

CCI7B

PC

CCO0

PC

CCO1

PC

15-3

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 15-1. CS41 Control Signals

Control

Signal Definition

CCO2 -

Process Alarms

Loop 3

CCO3 -

Process Alarms

Loop 4

This contact is closed when the Loop 3 PV value is not within Alarm Limits 1 and 2 (C175 and C176); otherwise, the contact is open.

This contact is closed when the Loop 4 PV value is not within Alarm Limits 1 and 2 (C211 and C212); otherwise, the contact is open.

3 of 3

Cord

Set

ITB

6DI/4DO

ITB

TB2

6DI/4DO

ITB

TB2

Rear

Term

Board

TB2-1 (+)

TB2-2 (-)

TB2-3 (+)

TB2-4 (-)

Signal

CCO2+

CC02-

CCO3+

CC03-

15.3 CS41 STANDARD DISPLAYS

Loading CS41 preconfigures the System Module display list for ten displays. The ten displays are listed in Table 15-2 with appropriate reference sections, figure numbers, and configuration tables.

A configuration table is not listed for the Four Loop CON0 - CON3 display, as that information is provided in this section. To configure the Horizontal Trend, System Status, and Status Module displays, reference the Section 4 and Section 5 information listed in the table. The Alarm Summary display does not have to be configured; however, it is described and illustrated in Section 4.

Table 15-2. CS41 Standard Displays

Title

Four Loop CON0 - CON3

Single Loop CON0 with Horizontal Trend

Single Loop CON1 with Horizontal Trend

Single Loop CON2 with Horizontal Trend

Single Loop CON3 with Horizontal Trend

Alarm Summary

System Status

Status Module 0

Status Module 1

Four Loop CON0 - CON3

See

Section

4.10

4.5

4.5

4.5

4.5

4.1

4.2

4.7

4.7

4.10

Section 4

Figure

4-15

4-10 sheet 2

4-10 sheet 2

4-10 sheet 2

4-10 sheet 2

4-1

4-2

4-12

4-12

4-15

Section 5

Table

5-9 and 5-12

5-9 and 5-12

5-9 and 5-12

5-9 and 5-12

5-15

5-10

5-10

15.4 CS41 DATAPOINT CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS

See Figure 15-2 and Table 15-3 to configure datapoints for CS41 - Four Loop Controller.

Table 15-3 also lists the Section 5 modules that can be referenced for more detailed definitions of the datapoints when required. A datapoint does not have to be configured if the default value listed in Table 15-3 is appropriate for the process application.

Loading CS41 initializes the Engineering Spans AI1-7 to 100 (C257 - C263). When an open contact is present on CCI4, CCI5,

CCI6, or CCI7 (Force Fallback Loops 1-4), the loop’s output and setpoint are forced to fallback values contained in the CON0-3 modules Output Track Value (OTV) and Setpoint Track Value (STV) datapoints (OTV = C129, C165, C201, and C237; STV = C128, C164, C200, and C236) only if the

CON0-3 modules Output Track Enable (OTE) and Setpoint Track Enable (STE) datapoints are configured to 1 (OTE = L119, L143, L167, and L191; STE = L118, L142, L166, and L190).

15-4

Section 15. CS41 - Four Loop Controller

AI0 - PROCESS VARIABLE LOOP 1

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI0 ENGINEERING SPAN (C256)

AI0 ENGINEERING ZERO (C276)

AI0 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B269)

AI0 0-5 V INPUT (L416)

AI0 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L440)

AIO - PROCESS VARIABLE LOOP 1

AI1 - PROCESS VARIABLE LOOP 2

AI1 - PROCESS VARIABLE LOOP 2

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI1 ENGINEERING SPAN (C257)

AI1 ENGINEERING ZERO (C277)

AI1 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B270)

AI1 0-5 V INPUT (L417)

AI1 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L441)

CCI4 - FORCE FALLBACK LOOP 1

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L268])

(OUTPUT TRACK VALUE [C129])

(SETPOINT TRACK VALUE [C128])

(OUTPUT TRACK ENABLE [L119])

(SETPOINT TRACK ENABLE [L118])

CCI5 - FORCE FALLBACK LOOP 2

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L269])

(OUTPUT TRACK VALUE [C165])

(SETPOINT TRACK VALUE [C164])

(OUTPUT TRACK ENABLE [L143])

(SETPOINT TRACK ENABLE [L142])

CCI0 - REMOTE SP ENABLE LOOP 1 (CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L264])

CCI1 - REMOTE SP ENABLE LOOP 2 (CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L265])

AI2 - REMOTE SETPOINT LOOP 1

AI2 - ROMOTE SETPOINT LOOP 1 RELATED DATAPOINTS

AFFECTED BY THE SETPOINT RELATED DATAPOINTS

REMOTE SETPOINT ENABLE (L115)

AI2 ENGINEERING SPAN (C258)

AI2 ENGINEERING ZERO (C278)

AI2 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B271)

AI2 0-5 V INPUT (L418)

AI2 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L442)

REMOTE SETPOINT BIAS (B1) (C112)

REMOTE SETPOINT RATIO (K1) (C113)

LOOP 1 AND LOOP 2 SETPOINT

RELATED DATAPOINTS

CONTROL ZONE (C114, C150)

SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT (C125, C161)

SETPOINT LOW LIMIT (C126, C162)

SETPOINT SLEW RATE (C117, C153)

AI3 - REMOTE SETPOINT LOOP 2

AI3 - ROMOTE SETPOINT LOOP 2 RELATED DATAPOINTS

AFFECTED BY THE SETPOINT RELATED DATAPOINTS

REMOTE SETPOINT ENABLE (L139)

AI3 ENGINEERING SPAN (C259)

AI3 ENGINEERING ZERO (C279)

AI3 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B272)

AI3 0-5 V INPUT (L419)

AI3 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L443)

REMOTE SETPOINT BIAS (B1) (C148)

REMOTE SETPOINT RATIO (K1) (C149)

MULTIPLE DATAPOINTS: (LOOPS 1 AND 2)

Figure 15-2. CS41 Four Loop Controller Datapoints (Sheet 1 of 4)

15-5

53MC5000 Process Control Station

AI4 - PROCESS VARIABLE LOOP 3

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI4 ENGINEERING SPAN (C260)

AI4 ENGINEERING ZERO (C280)

AI4 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B273)

AI4 0-5 V INPUT (L420)

AI4 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L444)

AI4 - PROCESS VARIABLE LOOP 3

AI5 - PROCESS VARIABLE LOOP 4

AI5 - PROCESS VARIABLE LOOP 4

RELATED DATAPOINTS

AI5 ENGINEERING SPAN (C261)

AI5 ENGINEERING ZERO (C281)

AI5 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B274)

AI5 0-5 V INPUT (L421)

AI5 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L445)

CCI6 - FORCE FALLBACK LOOP 3

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L270])

(OUTPUT TRACK VALUE [C201])

(SETPOINT TRACK VALUE [C200])

(OUTPUT TRACK ENABLE [L167])

(SETPOINT TRACK ENABLE [L166])

CCI7 - FORCE FALLBACK LOOP 4

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L271])

(OUTPUT TRACK VALUE [C237])

(SETPOINT TRACK VALUE [C236])

(OUTPUT TRACK ENABLE [L191])

(SETPOINT TRACK ENABLE [L190])

CCI2 - REMOTE SP ENABLE LOOP 3 (CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L266])

CCI3 - REMOTE SP ENABLE LOOP 4

(CONTACT INPUT INVERT [L267])

AI6 - REMOTE SETPOINT LOOP 3

AI6 - ROMOTE SETPOINT LOOP 3 RELATED DATAPOINTS

AFFECTED BY THE SETPOINT RELATED DATAPOINTS

REMOTE SETPOINT ENABLE (L163)

AI6 ENGINEERING SPAN (C262)

AI6 ENGINEERING ZERO (C282)

AI6 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B275)

AI6 0-5 V INPUT (L422)

AI6 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L446)

REMOTE SETPOINT BIAS (B1) (C184)

REMOTE SETPOINT RATIO (K1) (C185)

AI7 - REMOTE SETPOINT LOOP 4

AI7 - ROMOTE SETPOINT LOOP 4 RELATED DATAPOINTS

AFFECTED BY THE SETPOINT RELATED DATAPOINTS

REMOTE SETPOINT ENABLE (L187)

AI7 ENGINEERING SPAN (C263)

AI7 ENGINEERING ZERO (C283)

AI7 DIGITAL FILTER INDEX (B276)

AI7 0-5 V INPUT (L423)

AI7 SQUARE ROOT SIGNAL (L447)

REMOTE SETPOINT BIAS (B1) (C220)

REMOTE SETPOINT RATIO (K1) (C221)

LOOP 3 AND LOOP 4 SETPOINT

RELATED DATAPOINTS

CONTROL ZONE (C186, C222)

SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT (C197, C233)

SETPOINT LOW LIMIT (C198, C234)

SETPOINT SLEW RATE (C189, C225)

MULTIPLE DATAPOINTS: (LOOPS 3 AND 4)

Figure 15-2. CS41 Four Loop Controller Datapoints (Sheet 2 of 4)

15-6

Section 15. CS41 - Four Loop Controller

LOOP 1 AND LOOP 2

MISCELLANEOUS DATAPOINTS (SHOWN IN

RECTANGLES ON THE DISPLAY)

UNIT TAGNAME (A008) [ABB MC5000]

CONTROL TAGNAME (A000, A002) [CON-0,

CON-1]

ENGINEERING UNITS (A001, A003) [PERCENT]

(FOR TREND DISPLAYS)

AO0 - CONTROL OUTPUT LOOP 1 RELATED DATAPOINTS

AO0 0-20 mA OUTPUT (L472)

MANUAL FALLBACK DISABLE (L120)

HARD MANUAL LIMIT (L122)

OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT (C109)

OUTPUT LOW LIMIT (C110)

OUTPUT SLEW RATE (C118)

CON0 CONTROL RELATED DATAPOINTS (SEE SECTION 16,

TUNING, OR SECTION 17, EASY-TUNE, TO TUNE PID DATA-

POINTS)

PROPORTIONAL BAND (C106) (P)

RESET TIME (C107) (I)

RATE TIME (C108) (D)

MANUAL RESET (C111)

REVERSE SWITCH (L106)

AUTO ENABLE (L114)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C115) [100] (FOR TREND DISPLAYS)

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE (C116) [0]

(FOR TREND DISPLAYS)

AO0 - CONTROL OUTPUT LOOP 1

CCO0 - PROCESS ALARMS LOOP 1

(CONTACT OUTPUT INVERT [L288])

CCO1 - PROCESS ALARMS LOOP 2

(CONTACT OUTPUT INVERT [L289])

LOOP 1 AND LOOP 2

ALARMS RELATED DATAPOINTS

CONTROL ALARM MODE (B335, B340)

0 - HIGH/LOW

1 - NONE

2 - HIGH/NONE

3 - NONE/LOW

4 - HIGH/HI-HI

5 - LOW/LO-LO

6 - HI SP DEVIATION/LO SP

DEVIATION

ALARM LIMIT 1 (C103, C139)

ALARM LIMIT 2 (C104, C140)

ALARM DEAD BAND (C105, C141)

AO1 - CONTROL OUTPUT LOOP 2

AO1 - CONTROL OUTPUT LOOP 2 RELATED DATAPOINTS

AO1 0-20 mA OUTPUT (L473)

MANUAL FALLBACK DISABLE (L144)

HARD MANUAL LIMIT (L146)

OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT (C145)

OUTPUT LOW LIMIT (C146)

OUTPUT SLEW RATE (C154)

CON1 CONTROL RELATED DATAPOINTS (SEE SECTION 16, TUN-

ING, OR SECTION 17, EASY-TUNE, TO TUNE PID DATAPOINTS)

PROPORTIONAL BAND (C142) (P)

RESET TIME (C143) (I)

RATE TIME (C144) (D)

MANUAL RESET (C147)

REVERSE SWITCH (L130)

AUTO ENABLE (L138)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C151) [100] (FOR TREND DISPLAYS)

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE (C152) [0]

(FOR TREND DISPLAYS)

MULTIPLE DATAPOINTS: (LOOPS 1 AND 2)

Figure 15-2. CS41 Four Loop Controller Datapoints (Sheet 3 of 4)

15-7

53MC5000 Process Control Station

LOOP 3 AND LOOP 4

MISCELLANEOUS DATAPOINTS (SHOWN IN

RECTANGLES ON THE DISPLAY)

UNIT TAGNAME (A008) [ABB MC5000]

CONTROL TAGNAME (A004, A006) [CON-0,

CON-1]

ENGINEERING UNITS (A005, A007) [PERCENT]

(NOT SHOWN)

AO2 - CONTROL OUTPUT LOOP 3 RELATED DATAPOINTS

AO2 0-20 mA OUTPUT (L474)

MANUAL FALLBACK DISABLE (L168)

HARD MANUAL LIMIT (L170)

OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT (C181)

OUTPUT LOW LIMIT (C182)

OUTPUT SLEW RATE (C190)

CON3 CONTROL RELATED DATAPOINTS (SEE SECTION 16,

TUNING, OR SECTION 17, EASY-TUNE, TO TUNE PID DATA-

POINTS)

PROPORTIONAL BAND (C178) (P)

RESET TIME (C179) (I)

RATE TIME (C180) (D)

MANUAL RESET (C183)

REVERSE SWITCH (L154)

AUTO ENABLE (L162)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C187) [100] (FOR TREND DISPLAYS)

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE (C188) [0]

(FOR TREND DISPLAYS)

AO2 - CONTROL OUTPUT LOOP 3

CCO2 - PROCESS ALARMS LOOP 3

(CONTACT OUTPUT INVERT [L290])

CCO3 - PROCESS ALARMS LOOP 4

(CONTACT OUTPUT INVERT [L291])

LOOP 3 AND LOOP 4

ALARMS RELATED DATAPOINTS

CONTROL ALARM MODE (B345, B350)

0 - HIGH/LOW

1 - NONE

2 - HIGH/NONE

3 - NONE/LOW

4 - HIGH/HI-HI

5 - LOW/LO-LO

6 - HI SP DEVIATION/LO SP

DEVIATION

ALARM LIMIT 1 (C175, C211)

ALARM LIMIT 2 (C176, C212)

ALARM DEAD BAND (C177, C213)

AO3 - CONTROL OUTPUT LOOP 4

AO3 - CONTROL OUTPUT LOOP 4 RELATED DATAPOINTS

AO3 0-20 mA OUTPUT (L475)

MANUAL FALLBACK DISABLE (L192)

HARD MANUAL LIMIT (L194)

OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT (C217)

OUTPUT LOW LIMIT (C218)

OUTPUT SLEW RATE (C226)

CON4 CONTROL RELATED DATAPOINTS (SEE SECTION 16, TUN-

ING, OR SECTION 17, EASY-TUNE, TO TUNE PID DATAPOINTS)

PROPORTIONAL BAND (C214) (P)

RESET TIME (C215) (I)

RATE TIME (C216) (D)

MANUAL RESET (C219)

REVERSE SWITCH (L178)

AUTO ENABLE (L186)

CONTROLLER SPAN (C223) [100] (FOR TREND DISPLAYS)

CONTROLLER LOWER RANGE (C224) [0]

(FOR TREND DISPLAYS)

MULTIPLE DATAPOINTS: (LOOPS 3 AND 4)

Figure 15-2. CS41 Four Loop Controller Datapoints (Sheet 4 of 4)

15-8

Section 15. CS41 - Four Loop Controller

Table 15-3. CS41 Four Loop Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

C256

C276

B269

L416

L440

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

AI0

AI0

AI0

AI0

AI0

Title and Function

AI0 - Process Variable Loop 1

Engineering Span - Enter a value, that when added to the

Engineering Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Loop 1 PV transducer upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 1 PV transducer lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Loop 1 PV transducer signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Loop 1 PV transducer. 1 = 0 - 5 V range; 0 = 1 -

5 V range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Loop 1 PV transducer is a nonlinear differential pressure (DP) cell that provides a squared signal value. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

1 of 13

Default

100

0

3

0

0

C257

C277

B270

L417

L441

L115

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

AI1

AI1

AI1

AI1

AI1

AI1 - Process Variable Loop 2

Engineering Span - Set to 100 by CS41; however, it can be changed. Enter a value, that when added to the Engineering

Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Loop 2 PV transducer upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 2 PV transducer lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Loop 2 PV transducer signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Loop 2 PV transducer. 1 = 0 - 5 V range; 0 = 1 -

5 V range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Loop 2 PV transducer is a nonlinear differential pressure (DP) cell that provides a squared signal value. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

100

(CS41)

0

3

0

0

AI2 - Remote Setpoint Loop 1 (Is affected by Setpoint Related Datapoints)

5-9 CON0 Remote Setpoint Enable - This datapoint is controlled by

CCI0. When CCI0 is a closed contact, this datapoint is set to

1 to allow the modified Loop 1 Remote Setpoint to become the value used as the control setpoint if the R/L push button is in Remote.

0

15-9

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 15-3. CS41 Four Loop Controller Datapoints

2 of 13

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

AI2 - Remote Setpoint Loop 1 (Is affected by Setpoint Related Datapoints) (Cont)

Default

C112

C113

C258

C278

B271

L418

L442

5-9

5-9

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

CON1

CON1

AI2

AI2

AI2

AI2

AI2

Remote Setpoint Bias (B1) - This datapoint and Remote

Setpoint Ratio (K1) allow the Remote Setpoint input to be modified by the Setpoint Generator.

Setpoint = [Remote Setpoint X Ratio] + Bias

SP = [RSP X K1] + B1

The B1 and K1 datapoints are modified when the input signal must be scaled to match the setpoint range desired.

Remote Setpoint Ratio (K1) - See Remote Setpoint bias (B1) above.

Engineering Span - Set to 100 by CS41; however, it can be changed. Enter a value, that when added to Engineering

Zero, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Loop 1 Remote Setpoint upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 1 Remote Setpoint lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Loop 1 Remote Setpoint signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Loop 1 Remote Setpoint signal. 1 = 0 - 5 V input range; 0 = 1 - 5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Loop 1 Remote Setpoint input is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

0

1

100

(CS41)

0

3

0

0

L139

C148

C149

C259

AI3 - Remote Setpoint Loop 2 (Is affected by Setpoint Related Datapoints)

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-4

CON1

CON1

CON1

AI3

Remote Setpoint Enable - This datapoint is controlled by

CCI1. When CCI1 is a closed contact, this datapoint is set to

1 to allow the modified Loop 2 Remote Setpoint to become the value used as the control setpoint if the R/L push button is in Remote.

Remote Setpoint Bias (B1) - This datapoint and Remote

Setpoint Ratio (K1) allow the Remote Setpoint input to be modified by the Setpoint Generator.

Setpoint = [Remote Setpoint X Ratio] + Bias

SP = [RSP X K1] + B1

The B1 and K1 datapoints are modified when the input signal must be scaled to match the setpoint range desired.

Remote Setpoint Ratio (K1) - See Remote Setpoint bias (B1) above.

Engineering Span - Set to 100 by CS41; however, it can be changed. Enter a value, that when added to Engineering

Zero, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Loop 2 Remote Setpoint upper range signal value.

0

0

1

100

(CS41)

15-10

Section 15. CS41 - Four Loop Controller

Table 15-3. CS41 Four Loop Controller Datapoints

3 of 13

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

AI3 - Remote Setpoint Loop 2 (Is affected by Setpoint Related Datapoints) (Cont)

Default

C279

B272

L419

L443

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

AI3

AI3

AI3

AI3

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 2 Remote Setpoint lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Loop 2 Remote Setpoint signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Loop 2 Remote Setpoint signal. 1 = 0 - 5 V input range; 0 = 1 - 5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Loop 2 Remote Setpoint input is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

0

3

0

0

C260

C280

B273

L420

L444

C261

C281

B274

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

AI4

AI4

AI4

AI4

AI4

AI5

AI5

AI5

AI4 - Process Variable Loop 3

Engineering Span - Set to 100 by CS41; however, it can be changed. Enter a value, that when added to the Engineering

Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Loop 3 PV transducer upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 3 PV transducer lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Loop 3 PV transducer signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Loop 3 PV transducer. 1 = 0 - 5 V range; 0 = 1 -

5 V range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Loop 3 PV transducer is a nonlinear differential pressure (DP) cell that provides a squared signal value. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

100

(CS41)

0

3

0

0

AI5 - Process Variable Loop 4

Engineering Span - Set to 100 by CS41; however, it can be changed. Enter a value, that when added to the Engineering

Zero value, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Loop 4 PV transducer upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 4 PV transducer lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Loop 4 PV transducer signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

100

(CS41)

0

3

15-11

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 15-3. CS41 Four Loop Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

L421

L445

5-4

5-4

AI5

AI5

Title and Function

AI5 - Process Variable Loop 4 (Cont)

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Loop 4 PV transducer. 1 = 0 - 5 V range; 0 = 1 -

5 V range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Loop 4 PV transducer is a nonlinear differential pressure (DP) cell that provides a squared signal value. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

4 of 13

Default

0

0

L163

C184

C185

C262

AI6 - Remote Setpoint Loop 3 (Is affected by Setpoint Related Datapoints)

5-9 CON2 Remote Setpoint Enable - This datapoint is controlled by

CCI2. When CCI2 is a closed contact, this datapoint is set to

1 to allow the modified Loop 3 Remote Setpoint to become the value used as the control setpoint if the R/L push button is in Remote.

5-9 CON1

5-9

5-4

CON1

AI6

0

Remote Setpoint Bias (B1) - This datapoint and Remote

Setpoint Ratio (K1) allow the Remote Setpoint input to be modified by the Setpoint Generator.

Setpoint = [Remote Setpoint X Ratio] + Bias

SP = [RSP X K1] + B1

The B1 and K1 datapoints are modified when the input signal must be scaled to match the setpoint range desired.

Remote Setpoint Ratio (K1) - See Remote Setpoint bias (B1) above.

Engineering Span - Set to 100 by CS41; however, it can be changed. Enter a value, that when added to Engineering

Zero, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Loop 3 Remote Setpoint upper range signal value.

0

1

100

(CS41)

C282

B275

L422

L446

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

AI6

AI6

AI6

AI6

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 3 Remote Setpoint lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Loop 3 Remote Setpoint signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Loop 3 Remote Setpoint signal. 1 = 0 - 5 V input range; 0 = 1 - 5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Loop 3 Remote Setpoint input is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

0

3

0

0

15-12

Section 15. CS41 - Four Loop Controller

Table 15-3. CS41 Four Loop Controller Datapoints

5 of 13

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

AI7 - Remote Setpoint Loop 4 (Is affected by Setpoint Related Datapoints)

L187 5-9 CON3 Remote Setpoint Enable - This datapoint is controlled by

CCI3. When CCI3 is a closed contact, this datapoint is set to

1 to allow the modified Loop 4 Remote Setpoint to become the value used as the control setpoint if the R/L push button is in Remote.

C220 5-9 CON1

C221

C263

C283

B276

L423

L447

L472

L120

L122

C109

C110

5-9

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-5

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON1

AI7

AI7

AI7

AI7

AI7

AO0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

Default

0

Remote Setpoint Bias (B1) - This datapoint and Remote

Setpoint Ratio (K1) allow the Remote Setpoint input to be modified by the Setpoint Generator.

Setpoint = [Remote Setpoint X Ratio] + Bias

SP = [RSP X K1] + B1

The B1 and K1 datapoints are modified when the input signal must be scaled to match the setpoint range desired.

Remote Setpoint Ratio (K1) - See Remote Setpoint bias (B1) above.

Engineering Span - Set to 100 by CS41; however, it can be changed. Enter a value, that when added to Engineering

Zero, will produce an upper range value in engineering units that represents the Loop 4 Remote Setpoint upper range signal value.

Engineering Zero - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 4 Remote Setpoint lower range signal value.

Digital Filter Index - This is a first order filter that can be applied to the Loop 4 Remote Setpoint signal. See Table 5-4 for input values.

0-5 V Input - Enter a value that matches the signal voltage range of the Loop 4 Remote Setpoint signal. 1 = 0 - 5 V input range; 0 = 1 - 5 V input range.

Square Root Signal - It is used if the Loop 4 Remote Setpoint input is a squared signal value that must be linearized. 0 = input is already linear; 1 = square root to restore linearization.

0

1

100

(CS41)

0

3

0

0

AO0 - Control Output Loop 1

0-20 mA Output - 0 = 4-20 mA signal; 1 = 0-20 mA signal.

Enter a value to match the Loop 1 output valve requirements.

Manual Fallback Disable - 0 = always power up in manual for

Loop 1; 1 = auto/manual selector unchanged at power up.

Hard Manual Limit - 1 = apply output limits to the final output of the Loop 1 Auto-Manual Generator. Affects both the manual push buttons and the controller’s result. 0 = do not apply limits.

Output High Limit - Sets maximum Loop 1 Control Output signal value for in engineering units.

Output Low Limit - Sets minimum Loop 1 Control Output signal value in engineering units.

0

0

1

100

0

15-13

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 15-3. CS41 Four Loop Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

C118 5-9 CON0

Title and Function

AO0 - Control Output Loop 1 (Cont)

Output Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the output value. When configured to a non-zero value, the output from the Loop 1 Auto-Selector is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. A zero disables output slewing. It does not affect manual operation.

6 of 13

Default

0

C106

C107

C108

C111

L106

L114

C115

C116

L473

L144

L146

C145

C146

C154

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-5

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

CON0

AO1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON0 Control Loop 1 Related Datapoints

Proportional Band - Is the Loop 1 percent of error required to move the output full scale for proportional action.

Reset Time - Is the number of minutes per repeat of integral action for Loop 1. It is mutually exclusive with Manual Reset.

Rate Time - Represents the minutes Loop 1 proportional action is advanced.

Manual Reset - It determines Loop 1 output valve position when the controller is in Auto and the error = 0. It is mutually exclusive with Reset Time.

Reverse Switch - 0 = Loop 1 Control Output

if Loop 1 PV

; 1 = Loop 1 Control Output

if Loop 1 PV

.

Auto Enable - Controller output is from the Loop 1 PID algorithm when set to 1 and A/M push button is in Auto.

Controller Span - Enter a value, that when added to the Loop

1 Controller Lower Range value, will produce the Loop 1 control upper range value in engineering units.

Controller Lower Range - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 1 control lower range value.

100

0

0

50

1

1

100

0

AO1 - Control Output Loop 2

0-20 mA Output - 0 = 4-20 mA signal; 1 = 0-20 mA signal.

Enter a value to match the Loop 2 output valve requirements.

Manual Fallback Disable - 0 = always power up in manual for

Loop 2; 1 = auto/manual selector unchanged at power up.

Hard Manual Limit - 1 = apply output limits to the final output of the Loop 2 Auto-Manual Generator. Affects both the manual push buttons and the controller’s result. 0 = do not apply limits.

Output High Limit - Sets maximum Loop 2 Control Output signal value in engineering units.

Output Low Limit - Sets minimum Loop 2 Control Output signal value in engineering units.

Output Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the output value. When configured to a non-zero value, the output from the Loop 2 Auto-Selector is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. A zero disables output slewing. It does not affect manual operation.

0

0

1

100

0

0

15-14

Section 15. CS41 - Four Loop Controller

Table 15-3. CS41 Four Loop Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

C142

C143

C144

C147

L130

L138

C151

C152

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

Title and Function

CON1 Control Loop 2 Related Datapoints

Proportional Band - Is the Loop 2 percent of error required to move the output full scale for proportional action.

Reset Time - Is the number of minutes per repeat of integral action for Loop 2. It is mutually exclusive with Manual Reset.

Rate Time - Represents the minutes Loop 2 proportional action is advanced.

Manual Reset - It determines the Loop 2 output valve position when the controller is in Auto and the error = 0. It is mutually exclusive with Reset Time.

Reverse Switch - 0 = Loop 2 Control Output

if Loop 2 PV

; 1 = Loop 2 Control Output

if Loop 2 PV

.

Auto Enable - Controller output is from the Loop 2 PID algorithm when set to 1 and A/M push button is in Auto.

Controller Span - Enter a value, that when added to the Loop

2 Controller Lower Range value, will produce the Loop 2 control upper range value in engineering units.

Controller Lower Range - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 2 control lower range value.

7 of 13

Default

100

0

0

50

1

1

100

0

L474

L168

L170

C181

C182

C190

C178

C179

C180

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-5

5-9

5-9

AO2

CON2

CON2

CON2

CON2

CON2

CON2

CON2

CON2

AO2 - Control Output Loop 3

0-20 mA Output - 0 = 4-20 mA signal; 1 = 0-20 mA signal.

Enter a value to match the Loop 3 output valve requirements.

Manual Fallback Disable - 0 = always power up in manual for

Loop 3; 1 = auto/manual selector unchanged at power up.

Hard Manual Limit - 1 = apply output limits to the final output of the Loop 3 Auto-Manual Generator. Affects both the manual push buttons and the controller’s result. 0 = do not apply limits.

Output High Limit - Sets maximum Loop 3 Control Output signal value for in engineering units.

Output Low Limit - Sets minimum Loop 3 Control Output signal value in engineering units.

Output Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the output value. When configured to a non-zero value, the output from the Loop 3 Auto-Selector is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. A zero disables output slewing. It does not affect manual operation.

0

0

1

100

0

0

CON2 Control Loop 3 Related Datapoints

Proportional Band - Is the Loop 3 percent of error required to move the output full scale for proportional action.

Reset Time - Is the number of minutes per repeat of integral action for Loop 3. It is mutually exclusive with Manual Reset.

Rate Time - Represents the minutes Loop 3 proportional action is advanced.

100

0

0

15-15

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 15-3. CS41 Four Loop Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

CON2 Control Loop 3 Related Datapoints (Cont)

C183

L154

L162

C187

C188

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON2

CON2

CON2

CON2

CON2

Manual Reset - It determines Loop 3 output valve position when the controller is in Auto and the error = 0. It is mutually exclusive with Reset Time.

Reverse Switch - 0 = Loop 3 Control Output

if Loop 3 PV

; 1 = Loop 3 Control Output

if Loop 3 PV

.

Auto Enable - Controller output is from the Loop 3 PID algorithm when set to 1 and A/M push button is in Auto.

Controller Span - Enter a value, that when added to the Loop

3 Controller Lower Range value, will produce the Loop 3 control upper range value in engineering units.

Controller Lower Range - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 3 control lower range value.

8 of 13

Default

50

1

1

100

0

L475

L192

L194

C217

C218

C226

C214

C215

C216

C219

L178

L186

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-5

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

AO3

CON3

CON3

CON3

CON3

CON3

CON3

CON3

CON3

CON3

CON3

CON3

AO3 - Control Output Loop 4

0-20 mA Output - 0 = 4-20 mA signal; 1 = 0-20 mA signal.

Enter a value to match the Loop 4 output valve requirements.

Manual Fallback Disable - 0 = always power up in manual for

Loop 4; 1 = auto/manual selector unchanged at power up.

Hard Manual Limit - 1 = apply output limits to the final output of the Loop 4 Auto-Manual Generator. Affects both the manual push buttons and the controller’s result. 0 = do not apply limits.

Output High Limit - Sets maximum Loop 4 Control Output signal value in engineering units.

Output Low Limit - Sets minimum Loop 4 Control Output signal value in engineering units.

Output Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the output value. When configured to a non-zero value, the output from the Loop 4 Auto-Selector is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. A zero disables output slewing. It does not affect manual operation.

CON3 Control Loop 4 Related Datapoints

Proportional Band - Is the Loop 4 percent of error required to move the output full scale for proportional action.

Reset Time - Is the number of minutes per repeat of integral action for Loop 4. It is mutually exclusive with Manual Reset.

Rate Time - Represents the minutes Loop 4 proportional action is advanced.

Manual Reset - It determines the Loop 4 output valve position when the controller is in Auto and the error = 0. It is mutually exclusive with Reset Time.

Reverse Switch - 0 = loop 4 Control Output

if Loop 4 PV

;

1 = Loop 4 Control Output

if Loop 4 PV

.

Auto Enable - Controller output is from the Loop 4 PID algorithm when set to 1 and A/M push button is in Auto.

0

0

1

100

0

0

100

0

0

50

1

1

15-16

Section 15. CS41 - Four Loop Controller

Table 15-3. CS41 Four Loop Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

CON3 Control Loop 4 Related Datapoints (Cont)

C223

C224

5-9

5-9

CON3

CON3

Controller Span - Enter a value, that when added to the Loop

4 Controller Lower Range value, will produce the Loop 4 control upper range value in engineering units.

Controller Lower Range - Enter a value that represents in engineering units the Loop 4 control lower range value.

L264

L265

5-6

5-6

CCI0

CCI1

CCI0 - Remote SP Enable Loop 1

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Remote SP Enable Loop 1 is permitted if CCI0 is closed (datapoint L115 - Remote

Setpoint Enable is set to 1 by CCI0). Set to 1 to reverse the

CCI0 condition required to permit Remote SP Enable Loop 1

(CCI0 open = Remote SP Enable Loop 1).

CCI1 - Remote SP Enable Loop 2

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Remote SP Enable Loop 2 is permitted if CCI1 is closed (datapoint L139 - Remote

Setpoint Enable is set to 1 by CCI1). Set to 1 to reverse the

CCI1 condition required to permit Remote SP Enable Loop 2

(CCI1 open = Remote SP Enable Loop 2).

CCI2 - Remote SP Enable Loop 3

L266 5-6 CCI2

L267 5-6 CCI3

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Remote SP Enable Loop 3 is permitted if CCI2 is closed (datapoint L163 - Remote

Setpoint Enable is set to 1 by CCI2). Set to 1 to reverse the

CCI2 condition required to permit Remote SP Enable Loop 3

(CCI2 open = Remote SP Enable Loop 3).

CCI3 - Remote SP Enable Loop 4

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Remote SP Enable Loop 4 is permitted if CCI3 is closed (datapoint L187 - Remote

Setpoint Enable is set to 1 by CCI3). Set to 1 to reverse the

CCI3 condition required to permit Remote SP Enable Loop 4

(CCI3 open = Remote SP Enable Loop 4).

CCI4 - Force Fallback Loop 1

L268

C129

C128

5-6

5-6

5-6

CCI4

CON0

CON0

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Force Fallback Loop 1 is permitted if CCI4 is open. Set to 1 to reverse the CCI4 condition required to permit Force Fallback Loop 1 (CCI4 closed = Force Fallback Loop 1).

Output Track Value - The Control Output Loop 1 can be forced to match the value in this datapoint if CCI4 - Force

Fallback Loop 1 is open, L119 - Output Track Enable is configured to a 1, and Remote is selected with the R/L faceplate push button.

Setpoint Track Value - The Loop 1 setpoint can be forced to match the value in this datapoint if CCI4 - Force Fallback

Loop 1 is open, L118 - Setpoint Track Enable is configured to a 1, and Remote is selected with the R/L faceplate push button.

9 of 13

Default

100

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

15-17

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 15-3. CS41 Four Loop Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

L119

L118

L269

C165

C164

L143

L142

L270

C201

C200

5-6

5-6

5-6

5-6

5-6

5-6

5-6

5-6

5-6

5-6

CON0

CON0

CCI5

CON1

CON1

CON1

CON1

CCI6

CON2

CON2

10 of 13

Title and Function

CCI4 - Force Fallback Loop 1 (Cont)

Output Track Enable - Enter a 1 into this datapoint to force the Control Output Loop 1 value to match the value in datapoint C129 whenever CCI4 has an open condition and

Remote is selected with the R/L push button.

Setpoint Track Enable - Enter a 1 into this datapoint to force the Loop 1 setpoint value to match the value in datapoint

C128 whenever CCI4 has an open condition and Remote is selected with the R/L push button.

CCI5 - Force Fallback Loop 2

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Force Fallback Loop 1 is permitted if CCI5 is open. Set to 1 to reverse the CCI5 condition required to permit Force Fallback Loop 2 (CCI5 closed = Force Fallback Loop 2).

Output Track Value - The Control Output Loop 2 can be forced to match the value in this datapoint if CCI5 - Force

Fallback Loop 2 is open, L143 - Output Track Enable is configured to a 1, and Remote is selected with the R/L faceplate push button.

Setpoint Track Value - The Loop 2 setpoint can be forced to match the value in this datapoint if CCI5 - Force Fallback

Loop 2 is open, L142 - Setpoint Track Enable is configured to a 1, and Remote is selected with the R/L faceplate push button.

Output Track Enable - Enter a 1 into this datapoint to force the Control Output Loop 2 value to match the value in datapoint C165 whenever CCI5 has an open condition and

Remote is selected with the R/L push button.

Setpoint Track Enable - Enter a 1 into this datapoint to force the Loop 2 setpoint value to match the value in datapoint

C164 whenever CCI5 has an open condition and Remote is selected with the R/L push button.

CCI6 - Force Fallback Loop 3

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Force Fallback Loop 3 is permitted if CCI6 is open. Set to 1 to reverse the CCI6 condition required to permit Force Fallback Loop 3 (CCI6 closed = Force Fallback Loop 3).

Output Track Value - The Control Output Loop 3 can be forced to match the value in this datapoint if CCI6 - Force

Fallback Loop 3 is open, L167 - Output Track Enable is configured to a 1, and Remote is selected with the R/L faceplate push button.

Setpoint Track Value - The Loop 3 setpoint can be forced to match the value in this datapoint if CCI6 - Force Fallback

Loop 3 is open, L166 - Setpoint Track Enable is configured to a 1, and Remote is selected with the R/L faceplate push button.

Default

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

15-18

Section 15. CS41 - Four Loop Controller

Table 15-3. CS41 Four Loop Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

L167

L166

5-6

5-6

CON2

CON2

11 of 13

Title and Function

CCI6 - Force Fallback Loop 3 (Cont)

Output Track Enable - Enter a 1 into this datapoint to force the Control Output Loop 3 value to match the value in datapoint C201 whenever CCI6 has an open condition and

Remote is selected with the R/L push button.

Setpoint Track Enable - Enter a 1 into this datapoint to force the Loop 3 setpoint value to match the value in datapoint

C166 whenever CCI6 has an open condition and Remote is selected with the R/L push button.

Default

0

0

L271

C237

C236

L191

L190

L288

L289

5-6

5-6

5-6

5-6

5-6

5-7

5-7

CCI7

CON3

CON3

CON3

CON3

CCO0

CCO1

CCI7 - Force Fallback Loop 4

Contact Input Invert - Normally, Force Fallback Loop 4 is permitted if CCI7 is open. Set to 1 to reverse the CCI7 condition required to permit Force Fallback Loop 4 (CCI7 closed = Force Fallback Loop 4).

Output Track Value - The Control Output Loop 4 can be forced to match the value in this datapoint if CCI7 - Force

Fallback Loop 4 is open, L191 - Output Track Enable is configured to a 1, and Remote is selected with the R/L faceplate push button.

Setpoint Track Value - The Loop 4 setpoint can be forced to match the value in this datapoint if CCI7 - Force Fallback

Loop 4 is open, L190 - Setpoint Track Enable is configured to a 1, and Remote is selected with the R/L faceplate push button.

Output Track Enable - Enter a 1 into this datapoint to force the Control Output Loop 4 value to match the value in datapoint C237 whenever CCI7 has an open condition and

Remote is selected with the R/L push button.

Setpoint Track Enable - Enter a 1 into this datapoint to force the Loop 4 setpoint value to match the value in datapoint

C236 whenever CCI7 has an open condition and Remote is selected with the R/L push button.

CCO0 - Process Alarm Loop 1

Contact Output Invert - Normally, Process Alarm Loop 1 is enabled if CCO0 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the CCO0 condition required to activate Process Alarm Loop 1 (CCO0 open = the Loop 1 PV value is not within the C103, C104

Alarm Limits).

CCO1 - Process Alarm Loop 2

Contact Output Invert - Normally, Process Alarm Loop 2 is enabled if CCO1 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the CCO1 condition required to activate Process Alarm Loop 2 (CCO1 open = the Loop 2 PV value is not within the C139, C140

Alarm Limits).

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

15-19

53MC5000 Process Control Station

B335,

B340,

B345,

B350

C103,

C139,

C175,

C211

5-9

5-9

C104,

C140,

C176,

C212

5-9

C105,

C141,

C177,

C213

5-9

Table 15-3. CS41 Four Loop Controller Datapoints

Datapoint Table Module

L290 5-7 CCO2

Title and Function

CCO2 - Process Alarm Loop 3

Contact Output Invert - Normally, Process Alarm Loop 3 is enabled if CCO2 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the CCO2 condition required to activate Process Alarm Loop 3 (CCO2 open = the Loop 3 PV value is not within the C175, C176

Alarm Limits).

12 of 13

Default

0

L291 5-7

C114,

C150,

C186,

C222

C125,

C161,

C197,

C233

C126,

C162,

C198,

C234

5-9

5-9

5-9

CON0,

CON1,

CON2,

CON3

CON0,

CON1,

CON2,

CON3

CCO3

CCO3 - Process Alarm Loop 4

Contact Output Invert - Normally, Process Alarm Loop 4 is enabled if CCO3 is closed. Set to 1 to reverse the CCO3 condition required to activate Process Alarm Loop 4 (CCO3 open = the Loop 4 PV value is not within the C212, C213

Alarm Limits).

0

CON0,

CON1,

CON2,

CON3

CON0,

CON1,

CON2,

CON3

Alarms Related Datapoints (Loops 1, 2, 3, 4)

Control Alarm Mode - Used to select one of six alarm types or none. See Table 5-9 for details and examples.

Alarm Limit 1 - Point in engineering units where an alarm is triggered because the loop PV is not within the limit value set in the datapoint.

1

100

Alarm Limit 2 - Point in engineering units where an alarm is triggered because the loop PV is not within the limit value set in the datapoint.

0

Alarm Dead Band - Sets the activation/deactivation gaps for the alarm limit points. It is in engineering units.

2

CON0,

CON1,

CON2,

CON3

CON0,

CON1,

CON2,

CON3

CON0,

CON1,

CON2,

CON3

Setpoint Related Datapoints (Loops 1, 2, 3, 4)

Control Zone - A gap on both sides of setpoint. When PV is within this gap, the proportional and integral output changes are suppressed. Derivative output is unaffected.

Setpoint High Limit - It is the maximum loop control setpoint value allowed.

Setpoint Low Limit - It is the minimum loop control setpoint value allowed.

0

100

0

15-20

Section 15. CS41 - Four Loop Controller

Table 15-3. CS41 Four Loop Controller Datapoints

A000,

A002,

A004,

A006

A001,

A003,

A005,

A007

Datapoint Table Module Title and Function

Setpoint Related Datapoints (Loops 1, 2, 3, 4) (Cont)

C117,

C153,

C189,

C225

5-9 CON0,

CON1,

CON2,

CON3

Setpoint Slew Rate - It is a rate limit applied to the setpoint.

When configured to a non-zero value, the setpoint used in the PID algorithm is only allowed to change by this amount each scan time. The final value of the setpoint always appears on the units display. A zero disables setpoint slewing.

Miscellaneous Datapoints (Loops 1, 2, 3, 4)

A008

5-9

Unit Tagname - Assignable 10 character name, e.g.,

ABB MC5000.

Tagname - Assignable 10 character name.

5-9

CON0,

CON1,

CON2,

CON3

CON0,

CON1,

CON2,

CON3

Engineering Units - Assignable 10 character designator.

(Engineering Units appear on the Trend displays.)

13 of 13

Default

0

CON-

0, 1,

2, 3

PER-

CENT

15-21

NOTES:

53MC5000 Process Control Station

15-22

Section 16. Tuning PID Parameters

16.0 TUNING PID PARAMETERS

Tuning the controller is an iterative process to refine the Proportional Band (PB), Integral (also called Reset Time [TR]), and Derivative (TD) parameters of each active Control Module (CON-0 through CON-3). The number of active CON Modules is determined by the Control Strategy selected (e.g., CS1 - Single Loop PID Controller, would require tuning the PID parameters for only

CON-0; while CS41 - Four Loop Controller, would require tuning the PID parameters for all four

CON Modules). Values for these three datapoints in each CON module determine the proportional, integral, and derivative action of that controller loop so that its output properly alters the final control element setting to correct the effects of a disturbance to the process or setpoint change.

16.1 PROPORTIONAL ACTION (PB)

In Proportional action there is a comparative relationship between the controller loop output signal magnitude and the calculated error, which is the difference between the process variable and the setpoint.

The proportional action of a controller is set as a percentage of the proportional band (% P.B.).

Percent proportional band is the full scale through which the error signal must vary to cause full scale output variation due only to proportional control mode response. The proportionality factor between the output signal and the error is called the gain.

Gain = 100 / % P.B.

If a small percent change in error is required to cause a full scale output variation from the final control element (narrow proportional band), then the process system has a high gain. For example, with the setpoint at 50% of scale and a percent proportional band at 20%, the process variable feedback signal must vary from 40% to 60% of scale to make the final control element vary through its full stroke. The gain would be 100 / 20 = 5. If a large percent change in error is required to cause a full scale output variation from the final control element (wide proportional band), then the controller is set for low gain. The datapoints to set the % P.B. parameters for CON0 through

CON3 are C106, C142, C178, and C214; they each have a default value of 100%. The minimum value for proportional band is 2% (highest gain) and the maximum value is 1000% (lowest gain); 0 is off.

16.2 INTEGRAL ACTION (TR)

Integral action augments proportional action to cause a controller PID loop to drive its final control element until the error is completely nulled. It produces a corrective signal proportional to the deviation and the length of time the controlled variable has not been at setpoint. Integral action is expressed as the length of time in minutes required for it to produce an output change equal in magnitude to that produced by proportional action. The datapoints to set the Reset parameters for

CON0 through CON3 are C107, C143, C179, and C215; they each have a default value of 0 minutes (no integral action). The shortest repetition interval for integral action is 0.02 minutes/repeat

(maximum action) and the longest repetition interval is 200 minutes (minimum action). Each integral action datapoint (C107, C143, C179, or C215) must be 0 minutes if its respective CON Module

Manual Reset datapoint (C111, C147, C183, or C219) is used in lieu of integral action. The default value for Manual Reset is 50%. The minimum value is 0% and the maximum value is 100%.

16-1

53MC5000 Process Control Station

16.3 DERIVATIVE ACTION (TD)

Derivative action augments proportional action by responding to the rate of change of the process variable. It is used to make each controller PID loop more responsive to sudden process disturbances. The datapoints to set the Rate parameters for CON0 through CON3 are C108,

C144, C180, and C216; they each have a default value of 0 minutes. The minimum value for derivative action is 0.01 minutes and the maximum value is 8 minutes; 0 is off. The derivative time in minutes is the amount of time by which the proportional action (or proportional plus integral action) is advanced.

16.4 CONTROLLER PID LOOP TUNING

Table 16-1 provides summary information for the tuning parameters referenced in the three tuning methods that follow. The Trial and Error Method (Table 16-2) is usually preferred for process loops that respond quickly, requiring no waiting to determine steady cycling process conditions.

The Proportional Cycle Method (Table 16-3) and Step Response Method (Table 16-4) are expedient procedures for slow processes. See Figure 16-1 for the Step Response Method Curve.

Table 16-1. Summary Information for Tuning Parameters

Abbr.

P.B.

TR

TD

Datapoint (CON0, 1, 2, 3)

C106, C142, C178, C214

C107, C143, C179, C215

C108, C144, C180, C216

Min. Affect

1000%

200 min/rep.

0.01 minutes

Max. Affect

2%

0.02 min/rep.

8 minutes

Parameter

Proportional Band

Reset

Rate

Table 16-2. Trial and Error Tuning Method

Step

1

2

3

4

Procedure

Set the process to approximately normal conditions in Manual mode.

Set TR first to minimum value (0.02 minutes/rep.) for several moments, then set it to the extreme maximum (200 minutes/rep.) to lock in a fixed reset value.

Set P.B. to the widest value (1000%).

Set TD to the lowest value (0.01 minutes).

5

6

7

8

9

Switch to Auto mode ..

Slowly reduce the P.B. value from 1000% until process cycling starts.

Increase TD slowly from 0.01 minutes until process cycling stops.

Reduce P.B. until process cycling starts again.

Increase TD again until cycling stops.

10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 until no improvement can be made when TD is increased.

11 Increase P.B. to a safe margin approximately 1.5 times the value attained in steps 8 through 10.

12 Introduce automatic reset slowly by decreasing TR until cycling starts.

13 Back off TR to a safe margin of about 1.5 times the value attained in step 12.

16-2

Section 16. Tuning PID Parameters

Table 16-3. Proportional Cycle Method

5

6

3

4

7

Step

1

2

8

9

Procedure

Set the process to approximately normal conditions in Manual mode.

Set TR first to minimum value (0.02 minutes) for several moments, then set it to the extreme maximum (200 minutes) to lock in a fixed reset value.

Set P.B. to the widest value (1000%).

Set TD to the lowest value (0.01 minutes).

Switch to Auto mode ..

Slowly reduce P.B. until process cycling starts.

When a slight cycle is repeatedly established, measure the peak-to-peak period of oscillation and record it as T minutes.

Observe the P.B. setting and record it as P .

Compute the best settings as follows:

A. Proportional & Integral (PI): P.B. = 2 (P), TR = 0.8(T)

B. Proportional & Derivative (PD): P.B. = 0.8(P), TD = 0.12(T)

C. Proportional, Integral, and Derivative (PID): P.B. = 1.5(P), TR = 0.5(T),

TD = 0.12(T)

Table 16-4. Step Response Method (Ziegler-Nichols)

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Procedure (Reference Figure 16-1.)

Set the process to approximately normal conditions in Manual mode.

Introduce a 10% (approximate) step change to the manually regulated signal to the valve. Observe the magnitude of the step in percent of full signal span F . Also plot a graph of the resulting transient curve traced by the controlled variable.

Draw a straight line tangent to a point on the curve having the greatest slope (most linear).

Measure the apparent dead time L in minutes as shown in Figure 16-1.

Measure RL , the product of the slope and dead time as shown in Figure 16-1. This value should be expressed in percent of full scale span.

Compute the best settings as follows:

A. Proportional (P): P.B. = (100 RL) / F.

B. Proportional & Integral (PI): P.B. = (100 RL) / F, TR = 3L

C. Proportional, Integral, and Derivative (PID): P.B. = (80 RL) / F, TR = 2L,

TD = 0.5L.

16-3

16-4

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Figure 16-1. Typical Step Response Record

Section 17. EASY-TUNE

17.0 EASY-TUNE

The EASY-TUNE algorithm is used to help determine the optimal tuning values for the Proportional

Band (PB), Integral (TR), and Derivative (TD) parameters (called PID constants) of each Controller

Module 0 through 3 (CON0-3). The datapoints for these parameters are summarized in Table 17-1 as follows:

Table 17-1. Summary Information for Tuning Parameters

Abbr.

P.B.

TR

TD

Datapoint (CON0, 1, 2, 3)

C106, C142, C178, C214

C107, C143, C179, C215

C108, C144, C180, C216

Min. Affect

1000%

200 min./rep.

0.01 minutes

Max. Affect

2%

0.02 min./rep.

8 minutes

Parameter

Proportional Band

Reset

Rate

This section provides the necessary information to initiate the EASY-TUNE sequence, to identify the EASY-TUNE parameters, to evaluate the return status indications, and to modify the tuning criteria.

17.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

A controller functioning in a process as a pure integrator can not be tuned with EASY-TUNE, as there is only one PID value which eliminates the possibility for controller self regulation.

For processes with slow variable changes, be sure the Process Variable is at a steady state before initiating the EASY-TUNE sequence.

Disturbance to the process during the EASY-TUNE sequence may result in a false process characterization.

In some applications, a process response may not be satisfactory approximation as a first order time lag with gain and dead time.

17.2 INITIATING THE EASY-TUNE SEQUENCE

The EASY-TUNE algorithm is initiated when datapoint B008, Background Program, is set to 1 .

Datapoint B385, Control Module Selector, must be set to the appropriate CON Module number for the PID parameters being tuned (CON-0 = 0, CON-1 = 1, CON-2 = 2, and CON-3 = 3).

17.3 EASY-TUNE PARAMETERS

The EASY-TUNE parameters that must be configured to initiate the EASY-TUNE sequence are items 1, 3, 4, and 5 through 10 in Table 17-2. If using the 53MC5000B controller, some of these parameters also appear under the SYSTEM MODULE as shown in Table 5-15.

17-1

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table 17-2. EASY-TUNE Parameters

Item Datapoints

Description

1 L520

C385

C386

C387

C388

C389

C390

Enable Tuning Parameter Limits

0 - no limits checked, 1 - limits below apply lowest % PB highest % PB lowest TR (minutes) highest TR (minutes) lowest TD (minutes) highest TD (minutes)

2 L521 Abort EASY-TUNE Switch

0 - no effect, 1 - EASY-TUNE is aborted

3 L522 Automatic Tuning Parameter

1 - upon successful completion of the EASY-TUNE sequence,

new tuning parameters will be entered.

0 - new tuning parameters will not be entered but available for review.

4 B008 Enable EASY-TUNE

5 B385 Control Module Selector (CON-0 = 0, CON-1 = 1, CON-2 = 2, CON-3 =

3)

6 B386 PID Control Mode

1 - P, 2 - PI, 3 - PID, 4 - PD, 5 - I

If the ratio of Process Dead Time (Wp) and Process Time Constant (Tp) is greater than 0.5, then this datapoint should be set to 3 for PID Control

Mode.

7 C378 Excursion Limit for Preliminary Step Disturbance (%)

The step size chosen for C381 will cause a PV change which depends on the process gain as well as C381 itself. C378 should be set to approximately 1/4 of that expected change. (See C381 below.)

8 C379 Limiting Settling Time (seconds)

Set to maximum time allowed during B387 = 1 or 2. (See Table 17-3 and Figure 17-1.)

9 C380 Maximum Allowable Excursion of PV in EASY-TUNE (%)

Setting C380 will prevent excessive change in PV.

10 C381 Step Size Change in Controller Output (

±

%)

Set large enough to cause significant but allowable PV changes.

(See C378 above.)

11

12

C382

C383

C384

C391

C392

C393

C394

C395

C396

Modifiers to Tuning Criteria (see sub-section 17.5)

T

P

Time Constant modifier

K

P

Process Gain modifier

W

P

Dead-Time modifier

EASY-TUNE Results (display only):

T

P

Time Constant (seconds)

K

P

Process Gain

W

P

Dead-Time (seconds)

% PB

T

R

(minutes)

T

D

(minutes)

Default

Value

1

0

0

2

0

0

0

0.1

0.1

0.1

0

0

0

0

0

0

2

500

0

30

0

10

0

0

0

17-2

Section 17. EASY-TUNE

17.4 EASY-TUNE SEQUENCE STATUS

Once initiated, the algorithm sets the controller to Manual mode. After a period of settling time, a step change in controller output is applied and the resulting process response is observed. As summarized in Tables 17-3 and 17-4, datapoint B387, EASY-TUNE Status, will numerically show the result of the EASY-TUNE algorithm. Figure 17-1 illustrates this event sequence and correlates it to the numeric codes in B387.

Table 17-3 Normal Successful Status Display

B387

4

5

0

1

2

3

Description

Settling time and finding initial steady state values.

Initial step disturbance to the process.

Preliminary process characterization. (Disturbance is removed.)

Finding second steady state values. (Disturbance is re-applied.)

Finding process characteristics. (Disturbance is removed.)

EASY-TUNE successfully completed.

Table 17-4. EASY-TUNE Unsuccessful Status Display

B387 Description Suggested Action/Cause/Retry

51 Controller output was saturated

52 Saturation would have occurred if

EASY-TUNE had continued.

53 PV excursion exceeded the limit.

Controller output was saturated at the start.

Reverse the sign of step size configured in C381.

Reduce the step size magnitude in C381 or increase MAX PV excursion limit in C380.

Refrain from changing output.

54 Controller output was altered externally, either deliberately or aDIdentally.

55 A time-out occurred when B387 was 1. Increase the Digital Filter Index (B269) and/or the

Limiting Settling Time (C379).

56 A time-out occurred when B387 was 2. Increase the Limiting Settling Time (C379), or increase Step Size Change in Controller Output

(C381), or decrease Excursion Limit for

Preliminary Step Disturbance (C378).

57 A time-out occurred when B387 was 3. Disturbance might have occurred during EASY-

TUNE sequence.

58 A time-out occurred when B387 was 4. Disturbance might have occurred during EASY-

TUNE sequence.

59 A time-out occurred when B387 was 5. Disturbance might have occurred during EASY-

TUNE sequence.

60 Abort EASY-TUNE Switch, L521 was set to 1.

EASY-TUNE was aborted.

61 Tuning parameter limits were exceeded and used in the controller.

Widen the tuning parameter limits in C385 - C390 or set Enable Tuning Parameter Limits, L520 to 0.

17-3

Figure 17-1. EASY-TUNE Sequence Diagram

Section 17. EASY-TUNE

17.5 MODIFICATIONS TO TUNING CRITERIA

During EASY-TUNE sequence execution, each of the three algorithm variables: Time Constant

(T

P

), Process Gain (K

P

), and Dead-Time (W

P

) are altered by 10% in the

conservative

direction

(controller operating characteristics would be slower response, but less chance of oscillation and instability) before the tuning parameters are computed using the ITAE equations listed in Table

17-5. (Figure 17-2 illustrates the equation variables with respect to the response curve.) The three variables T p

, K

P

, and W

P

can be increased numerically to compute tuning parameters that are more conservative or decreased for

less conservative

tuning parameter calculations (controller operating characteristics would be faster response and greater chance of instability or oscillation).

Parameters used to alter the variables are the EASY-TUNE Modifiers, datapoints C382 (T

P

Modifier), C383 (D

P

Modifier), and C384 (W

P

Modifier). It is recommended that the values entered in

C382, C383, and C384 be between -0.5 and 0.5. The effect on the equation variables is as follows:

T

P

modified = T

P

(1 - C382)

K

P

modified = K

P

(1+ C383)

W

P

modified = W

P

(1+ C384)

Table 17-5. EASY-TUNE Equations

Mode PB in % TR (Minutes)

P 204K

P

(W

P

/T

P

)

1.084

0

TD* (Minutes)

0

PI

PID

PD**

116.4K

P

(W

P

/T

P

)

0.977

73.69K

P

(W

P

/T

P

)

0.947

54.02K

P

(W

P

/T

P

)

0.947

(T

P

/40.44)(W

P

/T

P

)

0.68

(T

P

/51.02)(W

P

/T

P

)

0.738

0

0

(T

P

/157.5)(W

P

/T

P

)

0.995

(T

P

/157.5)(W

P

/T

P

)

0.995

I** 0 T

P

[(K

P

/25)(W

P

/T

P

)

0.15

] 0

Note: Process characteristics T

P

, K

P

, and W

P

are used to compute the ideal tuning parameters aDOrding to the Minimum Integral of Absolute Error Multiplied by Time Criterion (ITAE) for P, PI, and PID modes.

*If computed to be < B003/50, then T

D

= 0.

**Empirical estimates, not based on ITAE method.

17-5

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Note: The approximation of a process step response curve by a first order time lag plus dead-time model is done by equating their values at 0.2835 and 0.6321 fraction of the total excursion.

17-6

Figure 17-2. Process Step Response Curve

Section 17. EASY-TUNE

17.6 ABORTING THE EASY-TUNE SEQUENCE

If the EASY-TUNE sequence is active and the controller output is deliberately changed, the sequence will be aborted. The original controller output and Manual or Auto mode will be restored.

Datapoint B387, EASY-TUNE Status, will be set to 54 .

If the EASY-TUNE sequence is active and datapoint L521, EASY-TUNE Abort Switch, is set to 1 , the sequence is immediately aborted. The original controller output and Manual or Auto mode will be restored. Datapoint B387, EASY-TUNE Status, will be set to 60 .

17.7 EASY-TUNE SEQUENCE COMPLETION

Upon successful completion of the EASY-TUNE sequence, the controller is returned to its original status, with or without the new tuning parameters, depending on its initial settings. If the EASY-

TUNE algorithm encounters an abnormal event, the controller is returned to its original settings and an error status is displayed in datapoint B387.

17-7

NOTES:

53MC5000 Process Control Station

17-8

Section 18. Maintenance and Parts List

18.0 MAINTENANCE AND PARTS LIST

✶ ✶ RETAIN THE INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION SHEET ✶ ✶

The factory set calibration constants for the analog inputs and analog outputs are recorded on the instrument calibration sheet. This sheet should be retained in the event one or more of the constants is inadvertently changed to the wrong value and field recalibration is necessitated.

18.1 SERVICE APPROACH

This instrument is a microprocessor based device; the data manipulation and sequencing operations are software controlled. Adjustment, diagnostic testing, and preventive maintenance of the hardware are not required.

Generally, when a process malfunction occurs, it usually manifests itself as an instrument problem even though it might be a defective process variable monitoring device, remote transmitter, or the connecting wires. These associated remote devices and the connecting wires should be checked first to ensure the problem is isolated to the instrument.

If it is determined the instrument is malfunctioning, attempting fault finding analysis beyond the board level to the integrated circuits (ICs) of the main printed circuit board (PCB) is not recommended, as it requires familiarity with CMOS technology, microprocessor functionality, and the proper test equipment. Also, ICs are static sensitive and can be damaged if not properly handled.

18.2 PARTS REPLACEMENT

The parts replacement procedures are provided in Table 18-1. When replacing parts, reference

Figure 18-1. Parts for specialized options, e.g., HART interface, are described in the documentation provided with the controller if that option is installed. Section 1.5, Related Documentation lists all controller related book numbers and titles as of the release date for this book.

WARNING

ALWAYS REMOVE POWER BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO INSTALL,

DISASSEMBLE, OR SERVICE THE CONTROLLER. FAILURE TO REMOVE

POWER MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR EQUIPMENT

DAMAGE.

ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE

USE A GROUNDED WRIST STRAP TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO IC DEVICES

WHEN HANDLING MODULES.

18-1

Section 18. Maintenance and Parts List

Table 18-1. Parts Replacement 1 of 4

Front Display Panel

The 53MC5000B controller can be equipped with one of two display types, Low Resolution (48 x 96 pixels) and High Resolution (96 x 192 pixels). The two display types may be interchanged, provided proper procedures are followed. When removing, replacing and/or exchanging face plate displays, it is always recommended to remove power from the controller.

WARNING

It is always recommended that power to the controller be removed when replacing displays. However, the 53MC5000B controller Hi-Res display may be removed with power applied provided this feature has been enabled

(Refer to Step 8 below).

Identifying a display type

Both of the display types have a label on the back side of the display with part number and serial number identified on the label. Low resolution displays are part number 698B179U01 while the

high resolution display is part number 698B275U01. The resolution of the display can also be identified by the ribbon cable on the rear of the faceplate. High resolution displays will have a dual ribbon cable.

The following paragraphs describe the procedures for removing and replacing the display types:

Step Procedure

Removing/Replacing Low-Res / Hi-Res Display

1 Remove power from the controller (See WARNING above).

2 Insert a small screwdriver into the notch at the top center of the front display panel (item 4).

3 Twist the screwdriver to release the latch and slide the bezel straight forward.

4 Disconnect the display ribbon cable (item 8) from its socket at the back of the display panel.

5

6

Reconnect the display end of the ribbon cable to the socket of the new front display panel; insert the display bottom into the controller cabinet (item 1); and push the display top toward the cabinet to latch it.

Restore power to the controller (if necessary).

Replacing a 53MC5000B Low-Res Display with a Hi-Res Display

7 Follow Steps 1-4 to remove the front display panel.

8 Follow Steps 30-33 to remove the Main PCB.

9

On the Main PCB, switch SW1 (Refer to the figure below for SW1 location) is used to apply power to the Low Resolution Display continuously. When replacing a Low Resolution with a

High Resolution Display, SW1 may be placed in the OFF position. The OFF position allows the High Resolution faceplate to be removed with power applied to the controller. The ON position requires that power be removed from the controller before the display is removed or installed.

10

Remove the low resolution display ribbon cable (614C157U01, 25 pin to 50 pin) and replace it with the High resolution ribbon cable (614C157U02, 50 pin to 50 pin).

11 Follow Steps 5 & 6 to install the new front display panel.

18-2

Section 18. Maintenance and Parts List

SW1 Location

OFF ON

SW1

MAIN PCB ASSEMBLY

Table 18-1. Parts Replacement 2 of 4

Step Procedure

Replacing a 53MC5000B Hi-Res Display with a Low-Res Display

12 Follow Steps 1-4 to remove the front display panel.

13 Follow Steps 30-33 to remove the Main PCB.

14

On the Main PCB, switch SW1 (Refer to the figure above for SW1 location) is used to apply power to the Low Resolution Display continuously. When replacing a High Resolution with a

Low Resolution Display, SW1 must be placed in the ON position. The ON position requires that power be removed from the controller before the display is removed or installed.

15

16

Remove the High Resolution display ribbon cable (614C157U02, 50 pin to 50 pin) and replace it with the Low Resolution ribbon cable (614C157U01, 25 pin to 50 pin) .

Follow Steps 5 & 6 to install the new front display panel.

Expansion Board

17 Follow steps 1-4 to remove the front display panel.

18

Use the plastic front edge board ejector to pry the expansion board (item 7) free of its options connector board (item 6) socket.

19

Carefully slide the expansion board forward to access the ribbon cable (item 9) socket behind the option cards.

20 Disconnect the ribbon cable from J11 on the expansion board.

18-3

Section 18. Maintenance and Parts List

Table 18-1. Parts Replacement 3 of 4

Step Procedure

21 Continue to slide the expansion board from the cabinet.

22

To replace the expansion board: Reconnect the expansion ribbon cable to the new expansion board J11; and slide the board fully into the cabinet. Seat the board into its socket. See step 4 to install the front display panel.

Expansion Board Option Cards

23 Follow steps 1-4 and 18-20 to remove the front display panel and expansion board.

24

25

Grasp the suspect option card (items 10, 11, 12, 13, and 15) at the edges and gently pull it free of its expansion board sockets (2 sockets). The option card may have to be rocked slightly top to bottom (not side to side).

To replace an option card: Align the card pin edges with the expansion board sockets and gently push the card in until it is seated. See steps 22, 5 & 6 to install the expansion board and front display panel.

29

Isolation Module for Analog Option Card

26 Follow steps 1-4 and 18-20 to remove the front display panel and expansion board.

27

Unscrew the isolation module (item 14) retaining screw and pull the retaining metal strip away from the screw head. (The other end of this strip is secured to the expansion board.)

Follow step 24 to remove the analog option card.

28

Pull the isolation module straight up out of its socket (item 12 or 13) on the analog option card.

To replace the isolation module: Insert the new module into the socket. The socket holes are not arrayed in a symmetrical pattern to prevent misalignment. See step 25 to install the analog option card. Insert the retaining band under the screw head and fasten the screw to hold the isolation module in place. See steps 22, 5 & 6 to install the expansion board and display panel.

30

Main PCB with Mounted Power Supply Module

NOTE

Each Controller’s Main PCB has a database configuration and possibly a program loaded into it’s RAM memory. A new or replacement board needs to have the configuration and, if necessary, the control program loaded into its RAM memory to reestablish the original control strategy and control parameters (Refer to Section 3.13). Failure to reload the database and control program will result in unpredictable controller operation.

Follow steps 1-4 and 18-20 to remove the front display panel and expansion board.

31

32

Use the plastic front edge board ejector to pry the main PCB with power supply module free of its rear terminal board socket and carefully slide the board from the cabinet.

Disconnect the expansion ribbon cable from P6 and the display ribbon cable from its edge connector.

18-4

Section 18. Maintenance and Parts List

Table 18-1. Parts Replacement 4 of 4

Step

33

Procedure

To replace the main PCB with power supply module: Connect the display ribbon cable to the edge connector and the expansion ribbon cable to P6. Slide the main PCB into the cabinet and seat the board into the rear terminal board socket. See step 22 to install the expansion board. Reference steps 5 & 6 to install the front display panel.

34

35

Power Supply Module

Follow steps 1-4, 18-20, and 31 & 32 to remove the front display panel, expansion board, and main PCB.

Remove the three retaining screws from the standoffs and carefully pull the power supply

(item 3) straight up to disconnect the connectors from the three main PCB sockets.

Note

36

37

No te

Ensure the correct power supply was ordered as a replacement: 24 V dc or 120/220/240 V ac.

To replace the power supply module: Align the power supply module three corner holes over the standoffs and the three connectors over the main PCB sockets before carefully mating the two boards together. Fasten the power supply module to the standoffs with the retaining screws. Do not use the screws to pull the boards together.

See steps 33, 22,

5 & 6 to install the main PCB, expansion board, and front display panel.

Power Supply Module Fuse

Follow steps 1-4, 18-20, and 31 & 32 to remove the front display panel, expansion board, and main PCB. The power supply module does not have to be removed from the main PCB to access the fuse.

Fuse Types

24 V dc Power Supply Module - 3 A, 250 V, Slow Blow BEL

Type 5TT3.

120/220/240 V ac Power Supply Module - 1 A, 250 V, Fast Blow

Schurter Type 034.3930.

38 Pry off the plastic fuse cover cap and pull the fuse from the holder prongs.

39

To replace a blown fuse: Gently snap the new fuse into each end of the holder prongs and push on the cover cap. Reference steps 33, 22, 5 & 6 to install the main PCB, expansion board, and front display panel.

Rear Terminal Board and Options Connector Board

40

41

42

Follow steps 1-4, 18-20, and 31 & 32 to remove the front display panel, expansion board, and main PCB.

Remove the two screws retaining the rear terminal board (item 5) or the options connector board (item 6).

To replace a rear terminal board or options connector board: Position the board in place at the rear of the controller cabinet with the screws holes aligned. Secure the board to the cabinet with the two screws. Reference steps 33, 22, 5 & 6 to install the main PCB, expansion board, and front display panel.

18-5

Figure 18-1. Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Section 18. Maintenance and Parts List

When replacing parts, should technical assistance be required, contact the nearest ABB Automation field office.

NECESSARY ORDERING INFORMATION

When communicating with ABB Automation for replacement of the main PCB, reference the unit’s serial number to ensure the correct replacement assembly is supplied. The necessary ordering information is provided on the instrument data tag and on the manufacturing specification sheet supplied with that particular controller.

In the event of a hardware malfunction, a replacement PCB can be quickly substituted for the defective assembly to minimize downtime. Contact ABB Automation for instructions before returning equipment. The defective PCB should be carefully packaged and returned, shipping charges prepaid, to the Repair Dept. of ABB Automation. Do not wrap PCBs in plastic, as it can cause static damage. It is suggested that the defective PCB be returned in the special bag in which the replacement module was supplied.

18.3 PARTS LIST

The parts lists are provided in Tables 18-2 through 18-4. Those parts in the tables that have item numbers are illustrated in Figure 18-1.

686B803U01

686B803U06

1 of 3

Table 18-2. Controller Parts List

Item

1

2

Part Number

612B395U04

686B608U01

686B608U02

686B608U03

686B608U04

686B608U05

686B608U06

686B608U07

686B608U08

686B608U09

686B608U10

Description

Case with Magnet Assembly

Main PCB - Single Loop, Standard Functionality, Standard

Chassis, Design Level A

Main PCB - Two Loops, Standard Functionality, Standard

Chassis, Design Level A

Main PCB - Two Loops, Extended Functionality, Standard

Chassis, Design Level A

Main PCB - Four Loops Standard Functionality, Expansion Ready

Chassis, Design Level A

Main PCB - Four Loops, Extended Functionality, Expansion Ready

Chassis, Design Level A

Main PCB - Single Loop, Standard Functionality, Standard

Chassis, Conformal Coating, Design Level A

Main PCB - Two Loops, Standard Functionality, Standard

Chassis, Conformal Coating, Design Level A

Main PCB - Two Loops, Extended Functionality, Standard

Chassis, Conformal Coating, Design Level A

Main PCB - Four Loops Standard Functionality, Expansion Ready

Chassis, Conformal Coating, Design Level A

Main PCB - Four Loops, Extended Functionality, Expansion Ready

Chassis, Conformal Coating, Design Level A

Main PCB, Design Level B

Main PCB, Conformal Coating, Design Level B

18-7

Section 18. Maintenance and Parts List

Table 18-2. Controller Parts List

Item

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

Part Number

164B130U03

685B736U01

164B130U04

685B736U02

698B179U01

698B179U03

698B275U01

698B275U02

686B598U01

686B598U03

614B767U01

614B767U04

686B607U01

686B607U03

614B767U02

614B767U05

686B604U01

686B605U01

677B942U01

614C157U01

614C157U02

173D135U01

686B599U01

686B600U01

686B600U02

686B606U01

686B606U02

686B612U01

686B612U02

177A128U01

177A128U02

177A128U03

177A128U04

177A128U05

177A128U06

177A128U07

177A128U08

177A128U09

177A128U10

177A128U11

2 of 3

Description

Power Supply - 120/220/240 V ac, 50/60 Hz

Power Supply - 120/220/240 V ac, 50/60 Hz, Conformal Coating

Power Supply - 24 V dc

Power Supply - 24 V dc, Conformal Coating

Front Display Panel, Lo-Resolution

Front Display Panel, Lo-Resolution, Conformal Coating

Front Display Panel, Hi-Resolution

Front Display Panel, Hi-Resolution, Conformal Coating

Standard Rear Terminal Board

Standard Rear Terminal Board, Conformal Coating

Standard Rear Terminal Board with Valve Holder

Standard Rear Terminal Board with Valve Holder, Conformal

Coating

Cord Set Connector Board

Cord Set Connector Board, Conformal Coating

Cord Set Connector Board with Valve Holder

Cord Set Connector Board with Valve Holder, Conformal Coating

Options Connector Board

Expansion PCB Option

Cable - Lo-Resolution Display to Main PCB, Design Level A

Cable - Lo-Resolution Display to Main PCB, Design Level B

Cable - Hi-Resolution Display to Main PCB, Design Level B

Cable - Main PCB to Expansion PCB

High Speed Communications PCB Option

6DI/4DO PCB Option

6DI/4DO PCB Option, Conformal Coating

Single Channel Analog Input PCB Option

Single Channel Analog Input PCB Option, Conformal Coating

Multi I/O Analog PCB Option

Multi I/O Analog PCB Option, Conformal Coating mV Input 0 to +10 mV (Analog Devices Inc. 5B30-01) mV Input 0 to +50 mV (Analog Devices Inc. 5B30-02) mV Input 0 to +100 mV (Analog Devices Inc. 5B30-03)

0 to +1 V (Analog Devices Inc. 5B31-01)

0 to +5 V (Analog Devices Inc. 5B31-02)

0 to +10 V (Analog Devices Inc. 5B31-03)

RTD 100 ohms Pt, a = 0.00385 -100

°

C to +100

°

C (Analog

Devices Inc. 5B34-01)

0 to 100

°

C (Analog Devices Inc. 5B34-02)

0 to +200

°

(Analog Devices Inc. 5B34-03)

0 to +600

°

(Analog Devices Inc. 5B34-04)

RTD 10 ohms cu, 0 to +120

°

C (10 ohms @ 0

°

C) (Analog Devices

Inc. 5B34-C-01)

18-8

Section 18. Maintenance and Parts List

Table 18-2. Controller Parts List

Item

14

15

Part Number

177A128U12

177A128U13

177A128U14

177A128U15

177A128U16

177A128U17

177A128U18

177A128U19

177A128U20

177A128U21

177A128U22

177A128U23

177A128U24

177A128U25

686B625U01

686B625U02

161M417U05

3 of 3

Description

0 to +120

°

C (10 ohms @ 25

°

C) (Analog Devices Inc. 5B34-C-02)

120 ohms ni, 0 to +300

°

C (Analog Devices Inc. 5B34-N-01)

Type J, 0 to +760

°

C (Analog Devices Inc. 5B47-J-01)

Type J, -100

°

C to +300

°

C (Analog Devices Inc. 5B47-J-02)

Type J, 0 to +500

°

C (Analog Devices Inc. 5B47-J-03)

Type K, 0 to +1000

°

C (Analog Devices Inc. 5B47-K-04)

Type K, 0 to + 500

°

C (Analog Devices Inc. 5B47-K-05)

Type T, -100

°

to +400

°

C (Analog Devices Inc. 5B47-T-06)

Type T, 0 to +200

°

C (Analog Devices Inc. 5B47-T-07)

Type E, 0 to +1000

°

C (Analog Devices Inc. 5B47-E-08)

Type R, +500

°

to +1750

°

C (Analog Devices Inc. 5B47-R-09)

Type S, +500

°

to +1750

°

C (Analog Devices Inc. 5B47-S-10)

Type B, +500

°

to +1800

°

C (Analog Devices Inc. 5B47-B-11)

0 to 20 mA (Also requires AC 1362 installed in R17) (Analog

Devices Inc. 5B32-02)

16DI/DO PCB, Option

16DI/DO PCB, Option, Conformal Coating

Precision AI resistor, 0.1%, 250 ohm

Table 18-3. Related Parts List

Part Number

686B613U01

686B613U03

686B614U01

686B614U03

686B616U01

686B616U03

686B617U01

686B628U01

686B628U02

686B622U01

686B622U02

686B599U01

686B599U02

686B615U01

677B944U01

677B944U02

677B944U03

173D109U03

355J093U01

614B836U01

Description

6DI/4DO ITB - 8.25 in. (210 mm) long

6DI/4DO ITB - 8.25 in. (210 mm) long, Conformal Coating

Dual Relay ITB - 3.5 in. (89 mm) long

Dual Relay ITB - 3.5 in. (89 mm) long, Conformal Coating

Cord Set ITB - 4.5 in. (108 mm) long

Cord Set ITB - 4.5 in. (108 mm) long, Conformal Coating

Analog ITB - 6 in. (153 mm) long

16DI/DO ITB

16DI/DO ITB, Conformal Coating

Communications ITB (COMM)

Communications ITB (COMM), Conformal Coating

Communications PCB

Communications PCB, Conformal Coating

SCADA Adapter

ITB Cable Assembly - 5 feet (1.52 m)

ITB Cable Assembly - 10 feet (3.05 m)

ITB Cable Assembly - 25 feet (7.62 m)

U.S. Power Cord - 120 V ac, 50/60 Hz

Trim Collar for Single Case

Trim Collar and Spacers for Two Cases

1 of 2

18-9

Section 18. Maintenance and Parts List

Table 18-3. Related Parts List

Part Number

614B836U02

614B836U03

614B836U04

614B836U05

614B836U06

614B836U07

614B836U08

614B836U09

614B836U010

614B836U011

614B836U012

614B836U013

614B762U02

123G001U01

612B403U01

614B94U01

614B94U02

129A003U03

614B958U02

614B767U03

677B049U01

677B049U02

677B049U03

677B049U04

677B049U05

698B182U01

698B182U02

614B890U01

698B186U01

2 of 2

Description

Trim Collar and Spacers for Three Cases

Trim Collar and Spacers for Four Cases

Trim Collar and Spacers for Five Cases

Trim Collar and Spacers for Six Cases

Trim Collar and Spacers for Seven Cases

Trim Collar and Spacers for Eight Cases

Trim Collar and Spacers for Nine Cases

Trim Collar and Spacers for Ten Cases

Trim Collar and Spacers for Eleven Cases

Trim Collar and Spacers for Twelve Cases

Trim Collar and Spacers for Thirteen Cases

Trim Collar and Spacers for Fourteen Cases

Kit of Three Plates for 3 X 6 Instrument Panel Cutout

Two panel Mounting Brackets

Panel Opening Filler Parts (used to fill panel opening if case and instrument are removed).

Gasketed clear plastic display cover kit for one controller

Gasketed clear plastic display cover kit for two side by side controllers

PVC track, 4 foot (1.2 m) long, 2.9 in. (74 mm) wide for ITB mounting

Kit, 12 adapters to mount PVC track on 32 or 35 mm DIN rail

Valve holder kit

Valve holder cable - 5 feet (1.52 m)

Valve holder cable - 10 feet (3.05 m)

Valve holder cable - 15 feet (4.57 m)

Valve holder cable - 20 feet (6.10 m)

Valve holder cable - 25 feet (7.62 m)

Hand Held Configurer

Hand Held Configurer with connector for memory module

32 KB RAM Memory Module

Hand Held Configurer cable assembly

18-10

Section 18. Maintenance and Parts List

Table 18-4. Isolated Discrete I/O Modules for the

16DI/DO ITB

OPTO 22 Part Number

G4IDC5

G4IDC5G

G4IAC5

G4IAC5A

G4IDC24

G4IAC24

G4OAC5

G4OAC5A

G4OAC5A5 (NC)

G4OAC24

G4OAC24A

G4IDC5

G4IDC5B

G4IDC5D

G4IDC5G

G4IAC5

G4IAC5A

G4IDC24

G4IAC24

G4ODC5

G4ODC5A

G4ODC24

ITB Voltage Max. Input Current

OPTO 22 AC Input Modules

5 V dc

5 V dc

5 V dc

5 V dc

24 V dc

24 V dc

25 mA

25 mA

11 mA

6.5 mA

25 mA

11 mA

OPTO 22 AC Output Modules

5 V dc

5 V dc

5 V dc

24 V dc

24 V dc

3 A

3 A

3 A

3 A

3 A

OPTO 22 DC Input Modules

5 V dc

5 V dc

5 V dc

5 V dc

5 V dc

5 V dc

24 V dc

24 V dc

25 mA

45 mA

30 mA

6 mA

11 mA

6.5 mA

25 mA

11 mA

OPTO 22 DC Output Modules

5 V dc

5 V dc

24 V dc

3 A

1 A

3 A

Input Voltage Range

12-32 V ac

35-60 V ac

90-140 V ac

180-280 V ac

10-32 V ac

90-140 V ac

12-140 V ac

24-280 V ac

24-280 V ac

12-140 V ac

24-280 V ac

10-32 V dc

4-16 V dc

2.5-28 V dc

35-60 V dc

90-140 V dc

180-280 V dc

10-32 V dc

90-140 V dc

5-60 V dc

5-200 V dc

5-60 V dc

18.4 CALIBRATION

The controller’s analog inputs (AI0-3) and analog outputs (AO0&1) normally do not require recalibration. If it becomes necessary to recalibrate the controller due to the inadvertent change of the stored calibration values, then this can be accomplished by altering their respective datapoints.

The calibration zero and span datapoint locations are as follows:

AI0 AI1 AI2 AI3 AO0 AO1

Calibrate Zero B263 B264 B265 B266 B267 B268

Calibrate Span C296 C297 C298 C299 C300 C301

Note: The spans have a nominal value of 1.0 and can be adjusted

up or down within the range of 0.8 to 1.2. The zeros have a nom-

inal value of 128 and can be adjusted up or down within the range

of 100 to 150.

18-11

Section 18. Maintenance and Parts List

AI4-7, AO2, and AO3 optional inputs and outputs are configured on the controller expansion board with the Multichannel Analog Option card. The calibration constants for these inputs and outputs reside in the board memory and not the controller memory. Consult ABB Automation for the option card calibration procedures.

AI8 is configured on the controller expansion board with the Single Channel Analog Input Option card or the Multichannel Analog Option card. The isolation modules available for these two cards are factory calibrated and have no adjustments. However, the analog/digital converter on the option cards digitizes the 0 to 5 volt signal from the module and can be recalibrated. Consult ABB

Automation for the calibration procedures for these option cards.

18.5 ERROR AND HARDWARE MALFUNCTION MESSAGES

ABB or F&P Logo - The controller is in FIX 0 because B00 was inadvertently set to 0 by an

F-TRAN program instruction or due to Main PCB malfunction.

NO DISPLAY - The Display Index, B05, is set to 0. This can be caused by setting B05 to run a non-existent display which forces a 0 for the display code.

Entire Display Flashes - The watchdog timer has timed out. A watchdog timer failure indicates analog outputs where not updated within a safety time limit due to a probable Main

PCB failure. The AOs are shorted to ground and the DOs are opened. The watchdog latch

(WD) is illustrated in the AO and DO schematic drawings of Section 5.

CPU RAM FAILURE - IC U1 failure (the Main PCB is marked to identify the location of U1).

ROM CHKS FAILURE - IC U3 failure (the Main PCB is marked to identify the location of U3).

CTRL FTR FAILURE - Control F-TRAN program had a Polish Stack error.

BACK FTR FAILURE - Background F-TRAN program had a Polish Stack error.

DSPL FTR FAILURE - Display F-TRAN program had a Polish Stack error.

18.6 RESETTING THE CONTROLLER

The controller can be reset either by cycling the power, or by carefully pressing the reset button with a thin wire, such as a paper clip, inserted through the small reset hole in the upper left corner of the front bezel. When the controller resets, it immediately checks to determine if any of the horizontal keypad push buttons are held pressed. It enters the factory test mode, defaults the database, or enters the suspend control state depending on which push button is held pressed during the reset.

This eliminates the necessity to initiate these operations by entering values into datapoints in engineer mode.

If the F1 push button is held pressed during controller reset, the controllers enters a factory test mode.

WARNING: REMOVE ALL CONNECTIONS FROM THE FACEPLATE MINI-

DIN PORT BEFORE ENTERING TEST MODE. The test mode can be exited by resetting the controller again using the paper clip with no push buttons pressed.

If the F2 push button is held pressed during controller reset, the controller database is set to the defaulted values. The defaulted values are listed in Section 5 and Appendix D. These values will replace the existing values in the datapoints that were entered to configure the control strategy. To default the database, perform the following steps:

18-12

Section 18. Maintenance and Parts List

Step

1

2

3

4

Procedure

Press the F2 push button and DO NOT RELEASE IT.

While the F2 push button is still held pressed, use a paper clip to press the reset button. DO NOT RELEASE the F2 push button.

The display goes all black and then the default display appears.

Release the F2 push button. (The database is reset to the default values with the default display present on the controller.)

If the F3 push button is held pressed during controller reset, the controller is forced to FIX 0,

Suspend Control State. In FIX 0 the control program stops, inputs continue to be measured, and totalizers and trends continue to update. Outputs reflect the contents of their associated datapoints. The ABB Automation logo appears on the display. Use the same procedure provided in the table above (press the F3 instead of F2 ).

18.7 SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION

Schematics and pin assignment illustrations are provided as follows:

Backplane:

Figure 18-2. Hand Held Configurer and Valve Holder Pin Assignments

Figure 18-3. Cord Set Connector Pin Assignments

Interconnection Terminal Boards (ITBs):

Figure 18-4. Cord Set ITB Schematic

Figure 18-5. Dual Relay ITB Schematic

Figure 18-6. 6 Digital Input/4 Digital Output (6DI/4DO) ITB Schematic

Figure 18-7. 16 Digital Input/Digital Output (16DI/DO) ITB Schematic

Figure 18-8. Analog ITB Schematic

Figure 18-9. Communication ITB Schematic

Expansion Board Option Cards:

Figure 18-10. 6 Digital Input/4 Digital Output (6DI/4DO) PCB Option

Figure 18-11. 16 Digital Input/Digital Output (16DI/DO) PCB Option

Figure 18-12. Single Channel Analog Input PCB Option

Figure 18-13. Multi I/O Analog PCB Option

Figure 18-14. High Speed Communications PCB Option

18-13

Section 18. Maintenance and Parts List

SI-6892

NOTES:

1. CONNECT A CURRENT METER BETWEEN PINS 1 AND 2 TO MEASURE AO0 CURRENT.

2. CONNECT A VOLTMETER BETWEEN PINS 4 AND 5 TO MEASURE AI0 VOLTAGE.

3. TO CONTROL THE VALVE FROM A CURRENT SOURCE OTHER THAN THE CONTROLLER,

CONNECT A CURRENT SOURCE (0-20 mA, 0-5 V dc) BETWEEN PINS 1 AND 3.

(ALLOWS CONTROLLER TO BE POWERED DOWN AND REMOVED FROM CASE WHILE

STILL MAINTAINING AO0 VALVE CONTROL FOR PROCESS.)

Figure 18-2. Hand Held Configurer and Valve Holder Pin Assignments

18-14

Section 18. Maintenance and Parts List

Figure 18-3. Cord Set Connector Pin Assignments

18-15

Section 18. Maintenance and Parts List

SC-53-1458 R0 (ITB Part Number 686B616U01)

Figure 18-4. Cord Set ITB Schematic

18-16

Section 18. Maintenance and Parts List

SC-53-1457 R1 (ITB Part Number 686B614U01)

Figure 18-5. Dual Relay ITB Schematic

18-17

Figure 18-6. 6 Digital Input/4 Digital Output ITB Schematic

Figure 18-7. 16 Digital Input/ Digital Output ITB Schematic

Figure 18-8. Analog ITB Schematic

Figure 18-9. Communication ITB Schematic

Section 18. Maintenance and Parts List

SD-53-2560

6 Digital Input/4 Digital Output (6DI/4DO) PCB Option (686B600U01)

1. This option card occupies Expansion Board slot 4 (J connectors 3 and 4).

2. It provides 6 additional Contact Closure Inputs (6 DIs) and 4 additional Contact Closure Out-

puts (4 DOs).

3. The Contact Closure modules correspond to database locations for DI2-7 and DO2-5 (See

Configuration Tables 5-6 and 5-7).

4. It requires a 6DI/4DO ITB (686B613U01) and an ITB cable that connects to controller J5.

5. The controller must be expansion ready.

6. This option is mutually exclusive with the 16 Digital Input/Digital Output (16DI/DO) option.

7. The controller model number must indicate this board is installed; otherwise, it will not be iden-

tified as active hardware (see Section 2.10.5).

Figure 18-10. 6 Digital Input/4 Digital Output (6DI/4DO) PCB Option

18-22

Section 18. Maintenance and Parts List

SD-53-2608

16 Digital Input/Digital Output (16DI/DO) PCB Option (686B625U01)

1. This option card occupies Expansion Board slot 4 (J connectors 3 and 4).

2. It provides 16 additional Contact Closure Inputs (DIs) or Contact Closure Outputs (DOs) in

any mix. Each input or output can be conditioned using the OPTO-22 G4 modules or equivalent

that are listed in the Specifications table of Section 1.

3. The Contact Closure modules correspond to database locations for DI2-17 and DO2-17 (See

Configuration Tables 5-6 and 5-7). When a module is a DI, the corresponding DO bit must

be set to 0. For example, if the first module is dedicated to DI2, then DI2 L002 must be con-

figured to 1 and DO2 L026 must be configured to 0. The reverse would be true if the first

module was dedicated to DO2.

4. It requires a 16DI/DO ITB (686B628U01) and an ITB cable that connects to controller J5.

5. The controller must be expansion ready.

6. This option is mutually exclusive with the 6 Digital Input/4 Digital Output (6DI/4DO) option.

Figure 18-11. 16 Digital Input/ Digital Output (16DI/DO) PCB Option

18-23

Section 18. Maintenance and Parts List

SD-53-2605

Single Channel Analog Input PCB Option (686B606U02)

1. This option card occupies Expansion Board slot 5 (J connectors 1 and 2).

2. It provides the ability to add Analog Input 8 (AI8). This option card requires one Group 5

Analog Device Module or equivalent that is listed in specifications Table 1-8.

3. This option corresponds to database locations for AI8 (See Configuration Table 5-4).

4. It does not require an ITB or an ITB cable. Analog Input 8 is wired directly to TB-3 on the upper

rear of the controller.

5. The controller must be expansion ready.

6. This option is mutually exclusive with the Multi I/O Analog PCB option. It is also mutually

exclusive with any option requiring the HART Modem PCB in slot 5.

7. In upper right corner of the illustration: Jumper W1 is factory set for B to C, which gives

upscale reading (very hot) for an open thermocouple. If jumper W1 is connected A to B, it gives

a downscale reading (very cold) for an open thermocouple.

Figure 18-12. Single Channel Analog Input PCB Option

18-24

Section 18. Maintenance and Parts List

SD-53-2602

Multi I/O Analog PCB Option (686B612U02)

1. This option card occupies Expansion Board slot 5 (J connectors 1 and 2).

2. This option supports the capabilities of the Single Channel Analog Input (AI8) plus it adds 4

AIs (AI4-7) and 2 AOs (AO2 and 3). If used, AI8 of this option card requires one Group

5 Analog Device Module or equivalent that is listed in the Specifications table of Section 1.

3. This option card corresponds to database locatins for AI4-8 (see Configuration Table 5-4) and

AO2 and 3 (see Configuration Table 5-5).

4. It requires a Multichannel Analog ITB (686B617U01) and an ITB cable that connects to

controller J4.

5. The controller must be expansion ready.

6. This option is mutually exclusive with the Single Channel Analog Input PCB option. It is also

mutually exclusive with any option requiring the HART Modem PCB in slot 5.

7. In upper right corner of bottom side illustration: Jumper W1 is factory set for B to C, which gives

upscale reading (very hot) for an open thermocouple. If jumper W1 is connected A to B, it gives

a downscale reading (very cold) for an open thermocouple.

Figure 18-13. Multi I/O Analog PCB Option

18-25

Section 18. Maintenance and Parts List

SC-53-2565

High Speed Communications PCB Option (686B599U01)

1. These option cards occupy Expansion Board slots 1 (J connector 9 and 10) and 2 (J connectors

7 and 8). The MicroLink Network B High Speed Communications PCB occupies slot 1 and the

MicroLink Network A High Speed Communications PCB occupies slot 2. The High Speed

Communications PCBs provide controller rear connectors J6 through J9. J6 and J7 come from

the slot 2 board, and J8 and J9 come from the slot 1 board.

2. Each PCB provides peer-to-peer communication through the External I/O Module (see Config-

uration Table 5-8). (See also IB 53MC9011, MicroLink.)

3. A Communications ITB (686B622U01) may be required as determined by the controller position

in the MicroLink network configuration. The Communication ITB is cable connected to a High

Speed Communications PCB jack, J6 through J9.

4. The controller must be expansion ready.

5. The MicroLink Network B High Speed Communication PCB option is mutually exclusive with the

slot 1 Auxiliary Processor Board (APB) and therefore any option that may require that board.

Figure 18-14. High Speed Communications PCB Option

18-26

Appendix A. Discrete Output DOs

APPENDIX A.0 DISCRETE OUTPUTS (DOs)

The tolerance ratings for the DO output switches are provided in the specifications table of Section

1 (Table 1-1). The maximum open voltage is 30 V dc and the maximum closed current is 50 mA dc. A DO will operate any external device that can be made to switch if it does not require more than 50 mA of current to the (+) terminal. Typical uses for a DO are to actuate a small relay, activate an external alarm buzzer, provide Contact Input (DI) to another controller, or provide output to an operator panel.

A.1 DO EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The discrete output DOs are solid state devices analogous to single pole, single throw switches with one terminal connected to power common. An equivalent simplified circuit for a DO is illustrated in Figure A-1; it is equivalent to an unpowered switch.

In Figure A-1, the switch is closed when the output logic bit (L24 for DO0, L25 for DO1) is set to 1 , provided that its respective invert bit (L288 for DO0, L289 for DO1) is 0 . If the invert bit is set to 1 , the output bit will cause the switch to open when it is set to 1 .

Figure A-1. DO Circuit and its Equivalent

A-1

Appendix A. Discrete Output DOs

A.2 POWER FOR DO OPERATION

If the 24 V dc supply of the controller is not already fully loaded (24 V dc, 80 mA maximum, net of internal controller requirements), it can be used as a source of power for a DO; otherwise, a separate, external 24 v dc supply must be used. In the upper circuit illustration of Figure A-2, the +24 V is obtained from TB1 screw lugs 1 or 4 (TB1-1 or TB1-4) of the controller standard rear terminal board. In the lower circuit illustration of Figure A-2, the dc electromechanical relay is actuated by an external power source when the power common path is closed by the DO.

Figure A-2. Power For DO Operation

A.3 DO WITH SOLID STATE RELAY

Figure A-3 shows a DO used to control a solid state relay. Power from the controller rear terminal board 24V dc screw lug TB1-1 or TB1-4 is through a resistor which is added to the circuit to limit the current flow and to establish the voltage across the relay when the DO switch is open.

A-2

Figure A-3. DO with Solid State Relay

Appendix A. Discrete Output DOs

A.4 OPERATING DOs IN PARALLEL

Figure A-4 illustrates two DOs connected in parallel to a single power source (controller rear terminal board 24V dc screw lug TB1-1 or TB1-4) so that any one of the two DOs can actuate the relay.

Figure A-4.. Operating DOs in Parallel

A.5 CASCADING A DO TO A DI

In Figure A-5, the DO of one controller is applied directly to the DI of another controller. When the

DO closes, the DI circuit of the second controller is complete. The voltage dropping resistor in the second controller is required for its DI operation.

Figure A-5. Cascading a DO to a DI

A-3

NOTES:

Appendix A. Discrete Output DOs

A-4

Appendix B. Communications

APPENDIX B.0 COMMUNICATIONS

B.1 STANDARD COMMUNICATIONS

Two digital communication channels are provided with the controller: 1) There is a configuration port that is an RS-232 serial interface. It is accessed via a 5 pin mini-DIN connector located under the pull-down door on the front panel. It is used to configure controller parameters for selected operational characteristics. The parameters are configured with the Hand Held Configurer (HHC) as described in Section 3, or with a customer supplied personal computer executing the appropriate software. 2) There is also an RS-422/485 serial interface used to connect the controller to a

Datalink multi-drop network. Interface connection to the Datalink network is via the rear terminal board (TB1) of the controller, pins 19 through 22, as shown in Section 2, Installation.

Information in this section applies to both the configuration port and the Datalink interface, with the following exceptions:

1.

The configuration port data rate is 9600 baud, with 8 data bits, and no parity.

2.

The configuration port powers up in standard mode suitable for use with the HHC, but can be switched to binary mode by sending the following four character sequence:

Sent 03

H

1B

H

0E

H

15

H

Echoed 0D

H

0A

H

1B

H

20

H

0E

H

20

H

15

H

Note: Numbers used in this section that are expressed in hexadecimal notation

(base 16) are identified with a subscript

H

after the number .

After echoing the 15

H

character, the controller switches to binary mode and is able to process binary communications messages from that time on. (Characters sent after the

15

H

and before the 15

H

echo are ignored.)

3.

Once the configuration port switches to binary mode, it remains in that mode as long as the connection is maintained. The connection is maintained by sending a character at least once every 30 seconds. If 30 seconds elapses without a character being received by the controller through the configuration port, the port returns to standard mode.

4.

When in binary mode, the configuration port responds to all messages regardless of the address to which they are directed.

The Datalink interface requires four conductors: a transmit pair and a receive pair. The voltage levels of each conductor pair conform to the EIA RS-422/485 standard. In accordance with this standard, the overall Datalink network distance is limited to 4000 feet when #24 AWG twisted pair wire is used to interconnect the nodes. Adapters are available to convert RS-422/485 to RS-232 or 20 mA current loops.

In a Datalink network, the controllers communicate as Responders to host or SUPERVISOR-PC queries. The host or personal computer functions as the Interrogator and acts as the central control point for the Datalink network. A maximum of 32 addressable controllers can be connected to a Datalink network. Using the SUPERVISOR-PC in a Datalink network system allows a variety of services to be implemented as described in the SUPERVISOR-PC Instruction Bulletin, 53SU5000.

B-1

53MC5000 Process Control Station

B.1.1 CONFIGURATION

To initialize the controller for binary communications, configure the controller as described in Table

B-1, Column 3 ( Set Up ).

Table B-1. Communication Module

Purpose: This module is used to configure the Datalink port parameters (e.g., baud rate, parity selection, etc.).

Title Datapoint

Set

Up

Default

Attribute

Controller

Address

B01

Baud Rate B02

S 0 It identifies the address of this controller on the Datalink network. Each unit connected to the Datalink network must have its own unique address. Valid addresses are from

0 - 31.

S 253 This datapoint value designates the baud rate (data transfer rate) of the Datalink network. The baud rate must be the same for all of the controllers connected to the same Datalink network. Datapoint values and their corresponding baud rates are as follows:

Value Baud Rate OR Value Baud Rate

255 28800 9 28800

254 14400 8 14400

N/A N/A 7 19200

253 9600 6 9600

250 4800 5 4800

244 2400 4 2400

232 1200 3 1200

208 600 2 600

160 300 1 300

N/A N/A 0 110

No Parity L256 0 0 This datapoint indicates if parity generation and checking should be turned on or off. It is set to 0 for even parity serial byte protocol. It is set to 1 for no parity protocol.

No Byte

Stuffing

L258 0 0 When set to a 1 , this datapoint disables the standard ABB

Automation communication protocol feature which inserts a 00

(NUL) byte after every 7E

H

(SOH) that is not the beginning of a message. (This permits user written communications software to determine the number of bytes to expect in a response message.) It must be set to 0 when using ABB Automation communications software or equipment.

Datalink

Disable

L257 0 0 When set to 0 , it permits full Datalink communication capabilities. When set to 1 , it disables Datalink communication capabilities.

Note: S = Select a value from the Attribute column. Use all other datapoint values as shown.

B-2

Appendix B. Communications

B.1.2 PROTOCOL

The Datalink protocol requires the host or SUPERVISOR-PC to initiate all transactions. There are two basic categories for all of the Datalink message types: Interrogate , which is used to read data from an addressed controller, and Change , which is used to alter a value in an addressed controller. The addressed controller decodes the message and provides an appropriate response.

The protocol definitions for the Datalink message types are provided in Table B-2.

Table B-2. Message Field Definitions

Atom

SOH

I.A.

CMD

NUM

Title

Start of Header

Controller Address

Command

Number

Definition

This character, 7E, denotes the beginning of a message.

The address of the controller responding to the transaction. It must be within a range of 00-1F (00-31 decimal).

Is the operation to be performed or a description of the message that follows the Command-I.A. byte. The Command-

I.A. byte has two fields: the Command field (3 bits), and the

I.A. field (5 bits). There are five commands, listed as follows:

Interrogate

Change

Change Bits

Acknowledge

Response

The commands are covered in Section B.1.3, Message Types.

The number of data bytes transferred or requested. The NUM must be in a range of 00-32 decimal.

LO-ADD Lower Address Bits The least significant 8 bits of a 16 bit controller address.

HI-ADD Higher Address Bits The most significant 8 bits of a 16 bit controller address.

DATA

XXXX

MASK

An 8 bit data byte.

Represents a variable number of data bytes.

An 8 bit byte where each bit, called a flag, is dedicated to an event that is permitted or prohibited, depending on the flag setting. If the flag is set to 0 , the event is permitted. If the flag is set to 1 , the event is prohibited.

STATE

LRC Longitudinal

Redundancy

Character

Represents the bit settings of a particular byte: which bits are set to 1 , and which bits are set to 0 .

Is a character written at the end of the message that represents the byte content of the message and is checked to ensure data was not lost in transmission. It is the sum of all bytes Modulo 256 of the message not including the SOH character or its own bit settings (LRC).

B-3

53MC5000 Process Control Station

B.1.3 MESSAGE TYPES

The types of messages that are sent between the host or SUPERVISOR-PC and the Datalink network controller are formatted as follows:

HOST OR SUPERVISOR-PC TO CONTROLLER:

1.

INTERROGATE - This message requests up to 20

H

consecutively stored bytes, beginning at the specified memory address location of the addressed controller.

01111110 E0

H

+ I.A. NUM LO ADD HI ADD LRC

2.

CHANGE - This message sends up to 20

H

bytes of new data to the addressed controller.

01111110 A0

H

+ I.A. NUM LO ADD HI ADD Data 1 XXXXXXXXX Data N LRC

3.

CHANGE BITS - This message alters only the specified bits in the specified bytes in the addressed controller. (NUM = 2n)

01111110 C0

H

+ I.A. NUM LO ADD HI ADD Mask 1 State 1 XXXX Mask N

State N LRC

4.

ACKNOWLEDGE - This message signals the addressed controller that its last echoed change message was received correctly; the controller performs the change requested.

01111110 80

H

+ I.A.

CONTROLLER TO HOST OR SUPERVISOR-PC:

1.

RESPONSE - This message furnishes the data requested by the INTERROGATE command of the Host or SUPERVISOR-PC. It is also used to echo back the previous CHANGE message of the Host or SUPERVISOR-PC.

01111110 20

H

+ I.A. NUM LO ADD HI ADD Data 1 XXXXX Data N LRC

B-4

Appendix B. Communications

B.1.4 COMMUNICATION TRANSACTION EXAMPLES

Transaction A Example - Host or SUPERVISOR-PC requests 9 bytes of data beginning at hexadecimal memory address 1000

H

from the controller at Datalink address 03.

1.

Host or SUPERVISOR-PC sends INTERROGATE message.

01111110 11100011 00001001 00000000 00010000 11111100

SOH Command NUM LO ADD HI ADD LRC

+ I.A.

2.

Controller sends RESPONSE message.

01111110 00100011 00001001 00000000 00010000 XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX LRC

SOH Command NUM LO ADD HI ADD Data 1..................Data 9

+ I.A.

Transaction B Example - Host or SUPERVISOR-PC sends two bytes of new data, to be loaded into the controller at Datalink address 03 beginning at hexadecimal memory address 1000

H

.

1.

Host sends CHANGE message.

01111110 10100011 00000010 00000000 00010000 00001000 00001100 11001001

SOH Command NUM LO ADD HI ADD Data 1 Data 2 LRC

+ I.A.

2.

Controller sends RESPONSE message.

01111110 00100011 00000010 00000000 00010000 00001000 00001100 01001001

SOH Command NUM LO ADD HI ADD Data 1 Data 2 LRC

+ I.A.

3.

Host sends ACKNOWLEDGE message.

01111110 10000011

SOH Command

+ I.A.

4.

Controller performs the change requested at end of the current program scan.

B-5

53MC5000 Process Control Station

B.1.5 CALCULATING DATA ADDRESSES

If communications software must be generated to accommodate unique Datalink applications requirements, then the controller memory address scheme must be known for proper data bit (e.g., L data type) and data byte (e.g., B, C, H, and A data types) memory location determination.

Note: Numbers used in this section that are expressed in hexadecimal notation (base 16) are identified with a subscript

H

after the number.

This memory address scheme applies only if a 6 is in memory address location 8002

H

. Memory address location 8002 H must be read and if it contains a 6 , then the address scheme that is described in Table B-3 should be applied for this controller.

Table B-3. Controller Memory Address Scheme

Data

Type

B

Base

Memory

Address

200

H

Byte

Size

Data Format

1 of 2

Address Calculation Algorithm

L

C

500

H

600

H

1

1 Bit

3

Represents a positive integer with values from 0 to 255.

A single binary bit with a logical value of 0 or 1. L datapoints are packed 8 to a byte.

Represents floating point values that have a resolution of one part in 32,768 (15 bits) and a dynamic range of

±

10

38

. The first two bytes represent a 2’s complement notation in fractional form (2

-n

) whose absolute value is between 0.5

and 0.9999. The third byte is the power of 2 in 2’s complement notation. Floating point example:

64

H

00

H

07

H

= 100

D

(Decimal)

64

H

= 0110 0100, fractional binary weights left to right are 0

= 2’s complement positive,

1 = 2

-1

= 1/2 = 0.5, 1 = 2

-2

=

1/4 = 0.25, 0=0, 0=0, 1 = 2

-5

=

1/32 = 0.03125, 0=0, and 0=0.

64

H

= 0.5+0.25+0.03125 =

0.78125. 07

H

= 128

D

. 128

D

X

0.78125

D

= 100.

Address = B Base + (B Number)

= 200

H

+ (B Number)

Address example: B012 location

= 200

H

+ 12

D

= 200

H

+ C

H

= 20C

H

Address = L Base + (L Number/8)

= 500

H

+ (L Number/8)

Remainder = bit position in byte

Address example: L014 location

= 500

H

+ 14/8 = 501

H

, bit 6

(remainder).

Address = C Base + (3 X C Number)

= 600

H

+ (3 X C Number)

Address example: C011 location

600

H

+ (3 X 11) = 600

H

+ 33

D

= 600

H

+ 21

H

= 621

H

.

B-6

Appendix B. Communications

Table B-3. Controller Memory Address Scheme

2 of 2

Data

Type

Base

Memory

Address

Byte

Size

Data Format Address Calculation Algorithm

H F00

H

5 Represents high precision floating point values that have a resolution of one part in 2 billion

(31 bits) and a dynamic range of

±

10

38

. The first four bytes represent a 2’s complement notation in fractional form (2

-n

) whose absolute value is between 0.5 and 0.9999. The fifth byte is the power of 2 in 2’s complement notation. Floating point example: 9C

H

00

H

00 H

00

H

07

H

= -100. The 2’s complement notation bit in the 9

= 1 (1001) indicating a negative number; therefore, 9C must be re-complemented . 9C = 1001

1100, change 1’s to 0’s and 0’s to 1’s = 0110 0011 and add 1=

0110 0100 (64

H

). Fractional binary weights left to right for

0110 0100 are 0 = 2’s complement positive, 1 = 2

1/2 = 0.5, 1 = 2

0=0, 0=0, 1= 2

-2

-5

= 1/32 =

-1

=

= 1/4 = 0.25,

0.03125, 0=0, 0=0. 64 H = 0.5 +

0.25 + 0.03125 = 0.78125.

07

H

=128

D

, 128

D

X 0.78125

D

=

100. A negative sign is assigned (-100) because the original 2’s complement binary bit in the 9 (1001) of 9C was set indicating a negative number.

Address =

H

Base + (5 X H Number)

= F00

H

+ (5 X

H

Number)

Address example: H001 location

F00

H

+ (5 X 1) = F00

H

+ 5

D

= F00

H

+ 5

H

= F05

H

.

A (F)* 1400

H

10 (A)

5 (F)*

The A data format represents text strings that are 10 characters long.

The F data format represents text strings that are 5 characters long.

Address = A Base + (10 X Number)

= 1400

H

+ (10 X Number)

Address example: A015 location

1400

H

+ (10 X 15) =

1400

H

+ 150

D

= 1400

H

+ 96

H

1496

H

. (For A data type.)

Address = F Base + (5 X Number)

= 1400

H

+ (5 X Number)

(For F data type within A database.)

* F data types are 5 bytes long and are mapped onto A data types.

B-7

53MC5000 Process Control Station

B.1.6 SOFTWARE CHARACTERISTICS

1.

Transparency Rule - whenever 7E hexidecimal is transmitted as anything other than

SOH, a 00 byte will be inserted directly following it (byte stuffing).

2.

All transactions are initiated by the Host or SUPERVISOR-PC.

3.

All controllers begin their response within 10 ms after the end of the transmission by the Host or SUPERVISOR-PC; otherwise, a faulty transmission may be assumed.

4.

Illegal messages received by the controllers are ignored.

5.

The maximum number of data bytes per message is 32 (decimal).

B.1.7 HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS

1.

Transmission Speed - standard rates are 110 - 28800 baud.

2.

Asynchronous by character.

3.

A character is:

1 Start bit.

8 Data bits - the Least Significant Bit (LSB) is transmitted first.

1 Even Parity bit.

1 Stop bit.

4. Line is 4-wire, shielded twisted pair, type RS-422/485.

B.1.8 DATALINK NODE LIST

Datapoints B608 through B639 are the Net D (Datalink) Node List that are used by a controller functioning as a gateway in Datalink Interrogator Mode. Normally, a controller does not require a node list for Datalink communications, as this network does not have peer-to-peer message transactions but operates only in interrogator/responder mode. However, as a gateway in Datalink Interrogator mode, the controller replaces the Datalink Supervisor-PC and initiates communication to the other nodes in the network. Because a Datalink network can have 32 devices, a datapoint exists in the Network D Node List (B608-B639) that sequentially correlates to each device address 0-

31. The node list is used by the controller to identify the device type at each network address

0-31. Presently, there are nine codes (0-8) assigned that may appear in the node list:

Table B-4. Node List Assignment Codes

Code

0

1

2

Device

Node not accessible

53MC1000

MICRO-DCI Controller

50KM2000/53MC4000

Chameleon

Code

3

4

5

Device

53SU1000 MICRO-

DCI Supervisor

53MC2000

MICRO-DCI Controller

50DK3000

Magmeter Converter

Code

6

7

8

Device

50MM1000

Mass Meter

53MC5000

MICRO-DCI Controller

Recorder Model 2345

B-8

Appendix B. Communications

The Network D Node List is as follows:

Table B-5. Network D Node List

Datapoint Code

B616

B617

B618

B619

B620

B621

B622

B623

B608

B609

B610

B611

B612

B613

B614

B615

B624

B625

B626

B627

B628

B629

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

B630

B631

B632

B633

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

22

23

24

25

B634

B635

B636

B637

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

Assignable 0-8

26

27

28

29

B638 Assignable 0-8 30

B639 Assignable 0-8 31

*Device Address not actually part of the node list.

It is added to show correlation of datapoints to

devices in the network.

Device

Address*

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

16

17

18

19

20

21

B-9

53MC5000 Process Control Station

B.1.9 INITIALIZATION MESSAGE

If datapoints A188 and A189 are configured to NON-NULL values, their contents will be transmitted onto the Datalink network at reset/power-up. Prior to transmitting, a delay based on the unit’s instrument address is observed. There is a one second delay between the transmission of datapoint

A188 and datapoint A189 contents. Datapoints A188 and A189 can be configured as two NULL

TERMINATED strings up to 10 characters each. For example, to initialize a Hayes compatible modem to Auto Answer, datapoint A188 would be configured through the faceplate push buttons to appear as follows:

A188

L

ATS0=4

C

R

This 7 character string is an Auto Answer command that directs the modem to respond to calls on the fourth ring. It is an AT command that loads the modem S0 register with a 4 to indicate a modem response on the fourth ring. Any value other than 0 in this modem register activates Auto Answer. The NULL TERMINATING values are automatically propagated into the remainder of the datapoint field by the controller. Datapoint A189 can be left at all NULL VALUES for this operation.

B-10

Appendix C. Remote Keypad

APPENDIX C.0 REMOTE KEYPAD

C.1 REMOTE KEYPAD

Support for a remote keypad, that has the same functions as the 10 push buttons on the front display panel, is activated when datapoint L72 (Remote Keypad Enable [RMTK]) is set to a 1 . Keypad entries can be made by either the front display panel push buttons or remotely via 10 normally open push buttons mounted on a board that is wired to the 6DI/4DO ITB. Figure C-1 illustrates the remote keypad wiring to the 6DI/4DO board. The 6DI/4DO signal cable (p/n

677B944U

♦♦

) is still connected from the ITB J5 to the controller J5. If a front display panel push button and a remote keypad push button are both activated simultaneously, the front panel push button will have precedence.

Figure C-1. Remote Keypad Wiring Schematic

C-1

NOTES:

53MC5000 Process Control Station

C-2

Appendix D. Database

APPENDIX D.0 DATABASE

The database contains six datapoint types. Each datapoint type represents a specific data format: whole integers, alphanumeric text strings, etc. The datapoint types are defined in Table D-1; the paste-up configuration tables are repeated in abbreviated form (no definitions) in Tables D-2 through D-13; and the database is listed in alphanumeric order in Tables D-14 through D-19.

Middle gray tone shading in any cell means it is not applicable.

Light gray tone shading in the default cell of a datapoint description indicates the datapoint contents are left unchanged after default.

Black shading in the default cell of a datapoint description indicates the field contents are unpredictable after default.

Table D-1. Datapoint Types

Type Qty Range

L

B

C

H

A

F

2048 L000 - L2047

768 B000 - B767

768 C000 - C767

128 H000 - H127

320 A000 - A319

640 F000 - F639

Byte

Size

10

Format

1 Bit

1

Represents a single binary bit that can have the value of 0 or 1.

Represents a positive integer with values from 0 to 255.

3

5

Represents a real analog (floating point) value that has a resolution of one part in 32,768 (15 bits) and a dynamic range of

±

10

38

.

Represents a high precision analog (floating point) value that has a resolution of one part in 2 billion (31 bits) and a dynamic range of

±

10

38

.

10 Represents a text string that can be 10 characters long.

Represents a text string that can be 5 characters long.

The F database is actually embedded within the A database, as an A datapoint type equals two F datapoint types.

REFERENCE TABLES

REFERENCE VERSIONS OF ALL OF THE DATAPOINT MODULE TABLES

ARE PROVIDED AS TABLES D-2 THROUGH D-13.

D-1

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table D-2. Analog Input Modules

Name Atom AI0 AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6 AI7 AI8 Default

Analog Input

Engineering Span

AI H000 H001 H002 H003 H004 H005 H006 H007 H008 0

SPAN C256 C257 C258 C259 C260 C261 C262 C263 C264 100/0

Engineering Zero ZERO C276 C277 C278 C279 C280 C281 C282 C283 C284

Digital Filter Index DFILT B269 B270 B271 B272 B273 B274 B275 B276 B277

0

3

0-5 V Input

Square Root Signal

Calibrate Zero

Calibrate Span

NOBIAS L416 L417 L418

SQRT

CIZ

CIS

L440 L441 L442

L419

L443

B263 B264 B265 B266

C296 C297 C298 C299

L420 L421 L422 L423 L424

L444 L445 L446 L447 L448

0

0

Frequency Input

Pulse Total

Tag Name

Engineering Units

Scan Pulse Count

FREQ

AIPC

L468 L469 L470 L471

H066 H065 H064

TAG A224 A225 A226 A227 A228 A229 A230 A231 A232

AIEU A298 A299 A300 A301 A302 A303 A304 A305 A306

AIPI C066 C065 C067

0

0

0

Table D-3. Analog Output Modules

Name

Analog Output

0-20 mA Output

Calibrate Zero

Calibrate Span

Tag Name

Atom

AO

OZBASE

COZ

COS

TAG

AO0

C000

L472

B267

C300

A244

AO1

C001

L473

B268

C301

A245

AO2

C002

L474

AO3

C003

L475

Default

0

0

A246 A247

Table D-4. Discrete Input Modules

Name

Discrete Input

Discrete Input

Invert

Tag Name

Name

Discrete Input

Discrete Input

Invert

Tag Name

Atom

DI

DI

0

DI

1

DI

2

DI

3

DI

4

DI

5

DI

6

DI

7

DI

8

L000 L001 L002 L003 L004 L005 L006 L007 L008

Default

0

IINV L264 L265 L266 L267 L268 L269 L270 L271 L272 0

TAG A262 A263 A264 A265 A266 A267 A268 A269 A270

Atom DI

9

DI

10

DI

11

DI

12

DI

13

DI

14

DI

15

DI

16

DI

17

DI L009 L010 L011 L012 L013 L014 L015 L016 L017

Default

0

IINV L273 L274 L275 L276 L277 L278 L279 L280 L281

TAG A271 A272 A273 A274 A275 A276 A277 A278 A279

0

D-2

Appendix D. Database

Table D-5. Discrete Output Modules

Name

Discrete Output

Discrete Output

Invert

Tag Name

Name

Discrete Output

Discrete Output

Invert

Tag Name

Atom DO

0

DO

1

DO

2

DO

3

DO

4

DO

5

DO

6

DO

7

DO

8

DO L024 L025 L026 L027 L028 L029 L030 L031 L032

Default

0

OINV L288 L289 L290 L291 L292 L293 L294 L295 L296

OINV L297 L298 L299 L300 L301 L302 L303 L304 L305

TAG A289 A290 A291 A292 A293 A294 A295 A296 A297

0

TAG A280 A281 A282 A283 A284 A285 A286 A287 A288

Atom DO

9

DO

10

DO

11

DO

12

DO

13

DO

14

DO

15

DO

16

DO

17

DO L033 L034 L035 L036 L037 L038 L039 L040 L041

Default

0

0

Table D-6. External I/O Module

Name

Remote Point

Local Point

Scan

Mode

Status

Name

Remote Point

Local Point

Scan

Mode

Status

Name

Remote Point

Local Point

Scan

Mode

Status

Atom 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

PSRC A128 A130 A132 A134 A136 A138 A140 A142

PDST F352 F353 F354 F355 F356 F357 F358 F359

PSCAN B400 B401 B402 B403 B404 B405 B406 B407

PMODE B424 B425 B426 B427 B428 B429 B430 B431

PSTAT L200 L201 L202 L203 L204 L205 L206 L207

Atom 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

PSRC A144 A146 A148 A150 A152 A154 A156 A158

PDST F360 F361 F362 F363 F364 F365 F366 F367

PSCAN B408 B409 B410 B411 B412 B413 B414 B415

PMODE B432 B433 B434 B435 B436 B437 B438 B439

PSTAT L208 L209 L210 L211 L212 L213 L214 L215

Atom 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PSRC A160 A162 A164 A166 A168 A170 A172 A174

PDST F368 F369 F370 F371 F372 F373 F374 F375

PSCAN B416 B417 B418 B419 B420 B421 B422 B423

PMODE B440 B441 B442 B443 B444 B445 B446 B447

PSTAT L216 L217 L218 L219 L220 L221 L222 L223

D-3

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table D-7. Controller (CON) Modules

Page *

General

Setpoint

Alarm

Tune

Output

1 of 2

Name

Control Tagname

Controller Span

Controller Lower Range

Trend Rate

Trend Mode

Control Display Mode

Engineering Units

Setpoint Mode

Setpoint

Remote Setpoint

Setpoint High Limit

Setpoint Low Limit

Setpoint Track Value

Remote SP Bias

Remote SP Ratio

Setpoint Slew Rate

Alarm Limit 1

Alarm Limit 2

Alarm Dead Band

Control Alarm Acknowledge

Control Alarm Mode

Proportional Band

Reset Time

Rate Time

Manual Reset

Control Zone

Reverse Switch

Feed Forward

Output

Output High Limit

Output Low Limit

Output Slew Rate

Output Track Value

Reverse Valve

Manual Fallback Disable

Hard Manual Limit

Atom CON0 CON1 CON2 CON3 Default

TAG A000 A002 A004 A006 CON-0/1/2/3

IR C115 C151 C187 C223 100

IRL C116 C152 C188 C224

CTR B336 B341 B346 B351

0

B336 = 2,

B341, B346,

& B351 = 0.

CTM B337 B342 B347 B352

CDM B339 B344 B349 B354

EU A001 A003 A005 A007

0

0

PERCENT

SPM B338 B343 B348 B353

SP C101 C137 C173 C209

RSP C120 C156 C192 C228

SH C125 C161 C197 C233

SL C126 C162 C198 C234

STV C128 C164 C200 C236

B1 C112 C148 C184 C220

K1 C113 C149 C185 C221

SSR C117 C153 C189 C225

PL1 C103 C139 C175 C211

PL2 C104 C140 C176 C212

ADB C105 C141 C177 C213

AK L125 L149 L173 L197

AIX B335 B340 B345 B350

PB C106 C142 C178 C214

TR C107 C143 C179 C215

TD C108 C144 C180 C216

MR C111 C147 C183 C219

CZ C114 C150 C186 C222

RSW L106 L130 L154 L178

FF C122 C158 C194 C230

OUT C102 C138 C174 C210

OH C109 C145 C181 C217

OL C110 C146 C182 C218

OSR C118 C154 C190 C226

OTV C129 C165 C201 C237

RSV L109 L133 L157 L181

MFD L120 L144 L168 L192

HML L122 L146 L170 L194

0

0

0

0

1

0

100

0

2

0

1

100

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

100

0

0

100

0

0

50

0

1

D-4

Appendix D. Database

Table D-7. Controller (CON) Modules

Page *

Switches

Name

Auto Switch

Remote Switch

Auto Enable

Remote Setpoint Enable

Setpoint Track Switch

Output Track Switch

SP Track Enable

Output Track Enable

SP Track Status

Output Track Status

Auto Status

Remote Status

Alarm A Active

Alarm B Active

Control Track Command

Alarm AA Past State

Alarm AB Past State

Process Variable

Control Setpoint

Deviation

Control Output

Partial Output Term

Reset Feedback

Reset Generator

Rate Generator

Control Tagname

2 of 2

Atom CON0 CON1 CON2 CON3 Default

SWA L112 L136 L160 L184

SWR L113 L137 L161 L185

AE L114 L138 L162 L186

RE L115 L139 L163 L187

SWSPT L116 L140 L164 L188

SWOVT L117 L141 L165 L189

STE L118 L142 L166 L190

OTE L119 L143 L167 L191

SPTS L104 L128 L152 L176

OVTS L105 L129 L153 L177

AUT L107 L131 L155 L179

RMT L108 L132 L156 L180

PA1 L110 L134 L158 L182

PA2 L111 L135 L159 L183

CTC L123 L147 L171 L195

LA L126 L150 L174 L198

LB L127 L151 L175 L199

PV C100 C136 C172 C208

TSP C119 C155 C191 C227

DV C121 C157 C193 C229

CO C123 C159 C195 C231

PN C124 C160 C196 C232

RF C127 C163 C199 C235

RN H020 H023 H026 H029

0

0

0

0

DN H021 H024 H027 H030 0

TAG A000 A002 A004 A006 CON-0/1/2/3

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

* For 53MC5000B Firmware only

D-5

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table D-8. Status Display Modules

Page *

Name

Mode

Alarm

Modify

Name

Status Module Title

Point 1 Name

Point 2 Name

Point 3 Name

Point 4 Name

Point 5 Name

Point 6 Name

Point 7 Name

Point 8 Name

SDT Mode 0

SDT Mode 1

SDT Mode 2

SDT Mode 3

SDT Mode 4

SDT Mode 5

SDT Mode 6

SDT Mode 7

SDT Alarm Enable 0

SDT Alarm Enable 1

SDT Alarm Enable 2

SDT Alarm Enable 3

SDT Alarm Enable 4

SDT Alarm Enable 5

SDT Alarm Enable 6

SDT Alarm Enable 7

Modify Disable 0

Modify Disable 1

Modify Disable 2

Modify Disable 3

Modify Disable 4

Modify Disable 5

Modify Disable 6

Modify Disable 7

SDT State 0

SDT State 1

SDT State 2

SDT State 3

SDT State 4

1 of 2

Atom SDT0 SDT1 Default

TAG A054 A063 SDT0 , SDT1

STA A055 A064 SDT0 = A, SDT1 = I

STB A056 A065 SDT0 = B, SDT1 = J

STC A057 A066 SDT0 = C, SDT1 = K

STD A058 A067 SDT0 = D, SDT1 = L

STE A059 A068 SDT0 = E, SDT1 = M

STF A060 A069 SDT0 = F, SDT1 = N

STG A061 A070 SDT0 = G, SDT1 = O

STH A062 A071 SDT0 = H, SDT1 = P

SMA L352 L360 0

SMB L353 L361

SMC L354 L362

0

0

SMD L355 L363

SME L356 L364

SMF L357 L365

SMG L358 L366

0

0

0

0

SMH L359 L367

SAA L368 L376

SAB L369 L377

SAC L370 L378

0

0

0

0

SAD L371 L379

SAE L372 L380

SAF L373 L381

SAG L374 L382

SAH L375 L383

SDA L320 L328

SDB L321 L329

SDC L322 L330

SDD L323 L331

SDE L324 L332

SDF L325 L333

SDG L326 L334

SDH L327 L335

SSA L336 L344

SSB L337 L345

SSC L338 L346

SSD L339 L347

SSE L340 L348

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

D-6

Appendix D. Database

Table D-8. Status Display Modules

Page * Name

SDT State 5

SDT State 6

SDT State 7

SDT Alarm Acknowledge 0

SDT Alarm Acknowledge 1

SDT Alarm Acknowledge 2

SDT Alarm Acknowledge 3

SDT Alarm Acknowledge 4

SDT Alarm Acknowledge 5

SDT Alarm Acknowledge 6

SDT Alarm Acknowledge 7

SDT Last State Info 0

SDT Last State Info 1

SDT Last State Info 2

SDT Last State Info 3

SDT Last State Info 4

SDT Last State Info 5

SDT Last State Info 6

SDT Last State Info 7

Display

Atom SDT0 SDT1

SSF L341 L349

SSG L342 L350

SSH L343 L351

SKA L384 L392

SKB L385 L393

SKC L386 L394

SKD L387 L395

SKE L388 L396

SKF L389 L397

SKG L390 L398

SKH L391 L399

SLA L400 L408

SLB L401 L409

SLC L402 L410

SLD L403 L411

SLE L404 L412

SLF L405 L413

SLG L406 L414

SLH L407 L415

21 22

* For 53MC5000B Firmware only

2 of 2

Default

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Table D-9. Parameter Display Modules

Name

Title

Point 1Name

Point 2 Name

Point 3 Name

Point 1 Designator

Point 2 Designator

Point 3 Designator

Modify Disable

Display

Atom 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Default

TAG A010 A014 A018 A022 A026 A030 A034 A038

PNA A011 A015 A019 A023 A027 A031 A035 A039

PNB A012 A016 A020 A024 A028 A032 A036 A040

PNC A013 A017 A021 A025 A029 A033 A037 A041

PDA F084 F087 F090 F093 F096 F099 F102 F105

PDB F085 F088 F091 F094 F097 F100 F103 F106

PDC F086 F089 F092 F095 F098 F101 F104 F107

PMD L312 L313 L314 L315 L316 L317 L318 L319

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

0

D-7

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table D-10. Trend Modules

Name Atom 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Trend Rate

Trend Mode

Trend Height

Trend Zero

TRR B355 B358 B361 B364 B367 B370 B373 B376

TRM B356 B359 B362 B365 B368 B371 B374 B377

TRH B357 B360 B363 B366 B369 B372 B375 B378

TRZ C302 C304 C306 C308 C310 C312 C314 C316

Trend Span

Trend Work Area

Tag

Trend Eng Unit

TRS

TRW

TAG

TREU

C303 C305 C307 C309 C311 C313 C315 C317

H056 H057 H058 H059 H060 H061 H062 H063

A072 A074 A076 A078 A080

A073 A075 A077 A079 A081

A082 A084 A086

A083 A085 A087

Trend Point Designator TRP F176 F177 F178 F179 F180 F181 F182 F183

7 Default

0

0

47

0

0

0

Table D-11. Totalizer Modules

Name

Tag

Engineering Units

Input

Scale Factor

Rollover Value

Dropout Value

Reset

Actual Total

Output Pulse

Display

Atom 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Default

TAG A092 A094 A096 A098 A100 A102 A104 A106

TMEU A093 A095 A097 A099 A101 A103 A105 A107

TMPT F216 F217 F218 F219 F220 F221 F222 F223

TMF C318 C320 C322 C324 C326 C328 C330 C332

TMM H048 H049 H050 H051 H052 H053 H054 H055

TMD C319 C321 C323 C325 C327 C329 C331 C333

TMR L232 L233 L234 L235 L236 L237 L238 L239

TO H032 H033 H034 H035 H036 H037 H038 H039

TMP L224 L225 L226 L227 L228 L229 L230 L231

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

0

0

0

0

0

0

Table D-12. Communication Module

Name

Instrument Address

Baud Rate

No Parity

No Byte Stuffing

Datalink Disable

Atom Datapoint Default

IA

BR

CP

CB

DLD

B001

B002

L256

L258

L257

0

253

0

0

0

D-8

Appendix D. Database

Table D-13. System Module

Page *

Execute

Counter

Comm.

Display

EZ-Tune

Name

Unit Tag Name

Function Index

Scan Index

Background Program

Background Scan Index

Link List Load

Forced Output

Power Up

Counter Mode

Seconds

Minutes

Hours

Month

Day

Year

Instrument Address *

Baud Rate *

No Parity *

No Byte Stuffing *

Datalink Disable *

Display Program

Display Brightness Index

Number of [Display] Groups

Number of Displays per Group

No Alarm Line Annunciation

Alarm Line Output

Control Module Selector *

PID Control Mode *

Lowest TR Minutes *

Max. Allowed PV Deviation *

Output Step Change Value 0 *

Initial PV Response Limit *

Enable Tuning Parameter Limits *

Automatic Tuning Parameter Entry *

Atom

DSPL

BRIGHT

MDG

MDS

NALIN

ALINE

LPS

CM

TLIM

DPV

DOUT

DPPV

PLIM

APLD

TAG

FIX

SCAN

BACK

BSCAN

LLD

FXM

PWRUP

CMODE

SEC

MIN

HOURS

DAY

MONTH

YEAR

IA

BR

CP

CB

DLD

Default

0

2

0

0

1

0

1

5

3

4

0

ALARM

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

MC5000

0

1

0

0

0

1

0

253

0

0

0

Datapoint

C387

C380

C381

C378

L520

L522

B005

B012

B017

B018

L063

A009

B385

B386

L075

B257

B258

B259

B260

B261

B262

B001

A008

B000

B003

B008

B006

B016

B333

L066

B002

L256

L258

L257

D-9

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table D-13. System Module

Page * Name

Scan File Overrun Counter

Background Overrun Counter

Initialization Message

Display List

Expansion Board Slots 1 through 5

Population Identification Codes

Atom

OVR

BOVR

SLT1 through

SLT5

Low Limit (High Selector) Two Loop

Override Controller

Display Type

Process Control Station

Unit Identifier

License Key

Counter Mode

HiRes Disable

DSPT

PCS

UID

LKEY

CMODE

HD

Datapoint

B004

B007

A188

A189

B021 to B084

B095 to

B099

C088

C089

B202

Default

0

0

NULL

NULL

0

0

0

Unchanged

B094

B093

A318

A319

L075

L076

0

0

* For 53MC5000B Firmware only

D-10

Appendix D. Database

L054

L055

L056

L057

L058

L059

L060

L061

L062

L063

L064

Table D-14. Database - L Type Datapoints

Name Module Datapoint

L000

L001

L002-

L017

L018-

L023

L024

L025

L026-

L041

L042-

L047

L048

L049

L050

L051

L052

L053

L065

L066

L067

L068

L069

L070

L071

L072

L073

Discrete Input 0 (Standard)

Discrete Input 1 (Standard)

Discrete Inputs 2 through 17

(Optional)

Discrete Inputs 18 through 23

(Optional)

Discrete Output 0 (Standard)

Discrete Output 1 (Standard)

Discrete Outputs 2 through 17

(Optional)

Discrete Outputs 18 through 23

(Optional)

Remote/Local Push Button Pressed

SP Increment Push Button Pressed

SP Decrement Push Button Pressed

Auto/Manual Push button Pressed

Output Increment Push Button

Pressed

Output Decrement Push Button

Pressed

F1 Push Button Pressed

F2 Push Button Pressed

F3 Push Button Pressed

Function 1 (F1) Foreground Oneshot

Function 2 (F2) Foreground Oneshot

Function 3 (F3) Foreground Oneshot

Function 1 (F1) Background Oneshot

Function 2 (F2) Background Oneshot

Function 3 (F3) Background Oneshot

No Alarm Line Annunciation

Silence (Goes to 1 when Horn = 1 and the Acknowledge Push Button is Pressed)

Horn (Goes to 1 on Alarm Entry)

Power Up (Goes to 1 on Reset)

Power Failure Time (Goes to 1 for

Short Term Power Failure)

Peer-to-Peer Task Failure

Peer-to-Peer Task Failure

(n-1)

0

1

Remote Keypad Enable

Standard Log Run

DI

DO

System

System

Atom

OVDPB

FNC1PB

FNC2PB

FNC3PB

FNC1FO

FNC2FO

FNC3FO

FNC1BO

FNC2BO

FNC3BO

NALIN

DI0

DI1

DI2-

DI17

DI18-

DI23

DO0

DO1

DO2-

DO17

DO18-

DO23

RLPB

SPIPB

SPDPB

AMPB

OVIPB

SILENCE

HORN

PWRUP

PFT

PPF1

PPF2

RMTK

SLR

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Default

1 of 6

Table

5-6

5-7

D-11

53MC5000 Process Control Station

User Log Enable

Counter Mode

HiRes Disable

Display FTran Control

SDT0 Process Alarm

SDT1 Process Alarm

FCS

SP Track Status

Output Track Status

Reverse Switch

Auto Status

Remote Status

Reverse Valve

Alarm A Active

Alarm B Active

Auto Switch

Remote Switch

Auto Enable

Remote Setpoint Enable

Setpoint Track Switch

Output Track Switch

Setpoint Track Enable

Output Track Enable

Manual Fallback Disable

Reserved

Hard Manual Limit

Control Track Command

Reserved

Alarm Acknowledge

Alarm AA Past State

Alarm AB Past State

SP Track Status

Output Track Status

Reverse Switch

Auto Status

Remote Status

Reverse Valve

Alarm A Active

Alarm B Active

Auto Switch

Remote Switch

Table D-14. Database - L Type Datapoints

Name Module Datapoint

L129

L130

L131

L132

L133

L134

L135

L136

L137

L119

L120

L121

L122

L123

L124

L125

L126

L127

L128

L109

L110

L111

L112

L113

L114

L115

L116

L117

L118

L074

L075

L076

L077

L078

L079

L080-

L103

L104

L105

L106

L107

L108

System

SDT

Controller 0

Controller 0

Controller 0

Controller 1

Atom

ULE

CMODE

HD

DFC

SPA0

SPA1

SPTS0

OVTS0

RSW0

AUT0

RMT0

RSV0

PA10

PA20

SWA0

SWR0

AE0

RE0

SWSPT0

SWOVT0

STE0

OTE0

MFD0

HML0

CTC0

AK0

LA0

LB0

SPTS1

OVTS1

RSW1

AUT1

RMT1

RSV1

PA11

PA21

SWA1

SWR1

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

Default

2 of 6

Table

5-14

5-9

5-9

5-9

D-12

Appendix D. Database

Auto Enable

Remote Setpoint Enable

Setpoint Track Switch

Output Track Switch

Setpoint Track Enable

Output Track Enable

Manual Fallback Disable

Reserved

Hard Manual Limit

Control Track Command

Reserved

Alarm Acknowledge

Alarm AA Past State

Alarm AB Past State

SP Track Status

Output Track Status

Reverse Switch

Auto Status

Remote Status

Reverse Valve

Alarm A Active

Alarm B Active

Auto Switch

Remote Switch

Auto Enable

Remote Setpoint Enable

Setpoint Track Switch

Output Track Switch

Setpoint Track Enable

Output Track Enable

Manual Fallback Disable

Reserved

Hard Manual Limit

Control Track Command

Reserved

Alarm Acknowledge

Alarm AA Past State

Alarm AB Past State

SP Track Status

Output Track Status

Reverse Switch

Auto Status

Table D-14. Database - L Type Datapoints

Name Module Datapoint

L172

L173

L174

L175

L176

L177

L178

L179

L166

L167

L168

L169

L170

L171

L156

L157

L158

L159

L160

L161

L162

L163

L164

L165

L146

L147

L148

L149

L150

L151

L152

L153

L154

L155

L138

L139

L140

L141

L142

L143

L144

L145

Controller 1

Controller 2

Controller 3

Atom

AE1

RE1

SWSPT1

SWOVT1

STE1

OTE1

MFD1

HML1

CTC1

AK1

LA1

LB1

SPTS2

OVTS2

RSW2

AUT2

RMT2

RSV2

PA12

PA22

SWA2

SWR2

AE2

RE2

SWSPT2

SWOVT2

STE2

OTE2

MFD2

HML2

CTC2

AK2

LA2

LB2

SPTS3

OVTS3

RSW3

AUT3

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

Default

3 of 6

Table

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

D-13

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table D-14. Database - L Type Datapoints

Name Module Datapoint

L194

L195

L196

L197

L198

L199

L200-

L223

L224-

L231

L232-

L239

L240-

L247

L248-

L255

L256

L257

L258

L259

L260

L180

L181

L182

L183

L184

L185

L186

L187

L188

L189

L190

L191

L192

L193

L261

L262

L263

L264

L265

Remote Status

Reverse Valve

Alarm A Active

Alarm B Active

Auto Switch

Remote Switch

Auto Enable

Remote Setpoint Enable

Setpoint Track Switch

Output Track Switch

Setpoint Track Enable

Output Track Enable

Manual Fallback Disable

Reserved

Hard Manual Limit

Control Track Command

Reserved

Alarm Acknowledge

Alarm AA Past State

Alarm AB Past State

Peer-to-Peer Communication Status

(0 = Invalid, 1 = Valid)

Totalizer 0-7 Output Pulse

Totalizer 0-7 Reset

Reserved Temporaries

Reserved Temporaries

Datalink No Parity

Datalink Disable

Datalink No Byte Stuffing

Gateway On

Gateway Interrogator/Responder

Mode (0 = Responder, 1 =

Interrogator)

Reserved

MicroLink Retry Disable

Auto Connect Disable

DI0 Discrete Input Invert (Standard)

DI1 Discrete Input Invert (Standard)

Controller 3

External

Totalizer

Totalizer

COMM

DI

Atom

RMT3

RSV3

PA13

PA23

SWA3

SWR3

AE3

RE3

SWSPT3

SWOVT3

STE3

OTE3

MFD3

HML3

CTC3

AK3

LA3

LB3

PSTAT0-

PSTAT23

TMP0-

TMP7

TMR0-

TMR7

BLTEMP

1 - 8

FLTEMP

1 - 8

CP

DLD

CB

GATE

GDR

IINV0

IINV1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Default

4 of 6

Table

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-8

5-13

5-13

5-14

5-6

D-14

Appendix D. Database

L328-

L335

L336-

L343

L344-

L351

L352-

L359

L360-

L367

L368-

L375

L408-

L415

L416-

L419

L420-

L424

L425-

L435

L376-

L383

L384-

L391

L392-

L399

L400-

L407

L290-

L305

L306-

L311

L312-

L319

L320-

L327

Table D-14. Database - L Type Datapoints

Name Module Datapoint

L266-

L281

L282-

L287

L288

L289

DI2 through DI17 Discrete Input

Invert (Optional)

DI18 through DI23 Discrete Input

Invert (Optional)

DO0 Discrete Output Invert

(Standard)

DO1 Discrete Output Invert

(Standard)

DO2 through DO17 Discrete Output

Invert (Optional)

DO18 through DO23 Discrete

Output Invert (Optional)

Parameter Display Modules 0 thru 7

Modify Disable

SDT0 Modify Display Disable 0 thru

7

SDT1 Modify Display Disable 0 thru

7

SDT0 State 0 thru 7

DI

DO

Parameter

SDT1 State 0 thru 7

SDT0 Mode 0 thru 7

SDT1 State 0 thru 7

SDT0 Alarm Enable 0 thru 7

SDT! Alarm Enable 0 thru 7

SDT0 Alarm Acknowledge 0 thru 7

SDT1 Alarm Acknowledge 0 thru 7

SDT0 Last State 0 thru 7

SDT1 Last State 0 through 7

AI0 through AI3 0-5 V Input

(Standard)

AI4 through AI8 0-5 V Input

(Optional)

AI n

0-5 V Input (Optional)

Status

AI

Atom

IINV2-

IINV17

IINV18-

IINV23

OINV0 0

OINV1

OINV2-

OINV17

OINV18-

OINV23

PMD0-

PMD7

SDA0-

SDH0

SDA1-

SDH1

SSA0-

SSH0

SSA1-

SSH1

SMA0-

SMH0

SMA1-

SMH1

SAA0-

SAH0

SAA1-

SAH1

SKA0-

SKH0

SKA1-

SKH1

SLA0-

SLH0

SLA1-

SLH1

NOBIAS0-

NOBIAS3

NOBIAS4-

NOBIAS8

NOBIAS n

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Default

5 of 6

Table

5-6

5-7

5-11

5-10

5-4

D-15

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table D-14. Database - L Type Datapoints

Name Module Datapoint

L476-

L489

L490-

L503

L504-

L511

L512-

L519

L520

L521

L522

L523-

L534

L535-

L799

L800-

L999

L460-

L467

L468-

L471

L472-

L473

L474-

L475

L436-

L439

L440-

L443

L444-

L448

L449-

L459

Reserved

AI0 through AI3 Square Root Signal

(Standard)

AI4 through AI8 Square Root Signal

(Optional)

AI n

Square Root Signal (Optional)

Reserved

AI4 through AI7 Frequency Input

(Optional)

AO0 and AO1 0-20 mA Output

(Standard)

AO0 and AO1 0-20 mA Output

(Optional)

AI n

0-20 mA Output (Optional)

Reserved

Reserved Temporaries

Reserved Temporaries

Enable Tuning Parameter Limits

Abort EASY-TUNE Switch

Automatic Tuning Parameter Entry

EASY-TUNE Reserved

Reserved

Unassigned

AI

AI

AO

EASY-

TUNE

Atom

SQRT0-

SQRT3

SQRT4-

SQRT8

SQRT n

FREQ4-

FREQ7

BASE0-

BASE1

BASE2-

BASE3

BASE n

BLTEMP

9 - 16

FLTEMP

9 - 16

PLIM

APLD

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Default

6 of 6

Table

5-4

5-4

5-5

17-2

D-16

Appendix D. Database

Table D-15. Database - B Type Datapoints

Module Datapoint

Name

B000 Function Index

B001 Datalink Address

B002 Datalink Baud Rate Index

B003 Scan Index

B004 Scan File Overrun Counter

B005 Display Program

B006 Background Scan Index

B007 Background Overrun Counter

B008 Background Program

B009 Character Set Select

B010 Keyboard Control Pointer

B011 Step Number

B012 Display Brightness Index

B013 Last Background FIX

B014 Last Display

B015 Last Function Index

B016 Link List Load

B017 Number of Display Groups

B018 Number of Display Screens/Group

B019 Current Display Pointer

B020 Current Display Handler State

B021-

B084

Display List

B085-

B092

Reserved

B093 Process Control Station

B094 Display Type

B095 Option Slot Status 1

B096 Option Slot Status 2

B097 Option Slot Status 3

B098 Option Slot Status 4

B099 Option Slot Status 5

B100-

B239

FCS Wire List

B240-

B247

B248-

B255

Reserved Temporaries

Reserved Temporaries

B256 RTC - Ticks (1/20th Second)

B257 RTC - Seconds of the Minute

B258 RTC - Minutes of the Hour

B259 RTC - Hours of the Day

B260 RTC - Day of the Month

System

System

System

System

System

PCS

DSPT

SLT1

SLT2

SLT3

SLT4

SLT5

Atom

FIX

IA

BR

SCAN

OVR

DSPL

BSCAN

BOVR

BACK

CHRSEL

KCP

STEP

BRGT

LBACK

LDSPL

LFX

LLD

MDG

MDS

CDP

CDS

0

0

4

0

0

0

0

0

0

3

1

253

1

0

0

1

0

0

5

3

0

Default

1 of 6

Table

5-14

5-14

5-14

BBTEMP

1 - 8

FBTEMP

1 - 8

TICKS

SEC

MIN

HOURS

DAY

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

5-14

5-14

D-17

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table D-15. Database - B Type Datapoints

Module Datapoint

Name

B290 -

B297

B298-

B315

B316

B317

B318

B319

B320

B321

B322

B323

B324

B261 RTC - Month of the Year

B262 RTC - Year

B263 AI0 Calibrate Zero

B264 AI1 Calibrate Zero

B265 AI2 Calibrate Zero

B266 AI3 Calibrate Zero

B267 AO0 Calibrate Zero

B268 AO1 Calibrate Zero

B269 AI0 Digital Filter Index (Std)

B270 AI1 Digital Filter Index (Std)

B271 AI2 Digital Filter Index (Std)

B272 AI3 Digital Filter Index (Std)

B273 AI4 Digital Filter Index (Opt)

B274 AI5 Digital Filter Index (Opt)

B275 AI6 Digital Filter Index (Opt)

B276 AI7 Digital Filter Index (Opt)

B277 AI8 Digital Filter Index (Opt)

B279-

B288

AI n

Digital Filter Index (Opt)

B289 Datalink Delay

NET C Control Block

Reserved

B325

B326

B327

B328 Number of SDT’s in Log

B329 Number of PAR’s in Log

B330 Index of Log Destination

B331 HART Display Write Disable

B332 Clue

B333 FIX Match

System

AI

AO

AI

CON

SDT

ALRM0

STAT0

ALRM1

STAT1

ALRM2

STAT2

ALRM3

STAT3

ALRM0

STAT0

ALRM1

STAT1

LOGSDT

LOGPAR

LOGDST

HARTWP

CLUE

FXM

Atom

MONTH

YEAR

CIZ0

CIZ1

CIZ2

CIZ3

COZ0

COZ1

DFILT0

DFILT1

DFILT2

DFILT3

DFILT4

DFILT5

DFILT6

DFILT7

DFILT8

DFILT n

DLDELAY

0

0

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

Default

2 of 6

Table

5-14

5-4

5-5

5-4

0

D-18

Appendix D. Database

Table D-15. Database - B Type Datapoints

Module Datapoint

Name

B334 Last Control Strategy Loaded

B335 Alarm Mode

B336 Trend Rate

B337 Trend Mode

B338 Setpoint Mode

B339 Display Mode

B340 Alarm Mode

B341 Trend Rate

B342 Trend Mode

B343 Setpoint Mode

B344 Display Mode

B345 Alarm Mode

B346 Trend Rate

B347 Trend Mode

B348 Setpoint Mode

B349 Display Mode

B350 Alarm Mode

B351 Trend Rate

B352 Trend Mode

B353 Setpoint Mode

B354 Display Mode

B355 Rate

B356 Mode

B357 Height

B358 Rate

B359 Mode

B360 Height

B361 Rate

B362 Mode

B363 Height

B364 Rate

B365 Mode

B366 Height

B367 Rate

B368 Mode

B369 Height

B370 Rate

B371 Mode

B372 Height

B373 Rate

B374 Mode

B375 Height

Controller 0

Controller 1

Controller 2

Controller 3

Trend 0

Trend 1

Trend 2

Trend 3

Trend 4

Trend 5

Trend 6

Atom

SPM2

CDM2

AIX3

CTR3

CTM3

SPM3

CDM3

TRR0

TRM0

TRH0

TRR1

TRM1

TRH1

TRR2

TRM2

TRH2

TRR3

LCS

AIX0

CTR0

CTM0

SPM0

CDM0

AIX1

CTR1

CTM1

SPM1

CDM1

AIX2

CTR2

CTM2

TRM3

TRH3

TRR4

TRM4

TRH4

TRR5

TRM5

TRH5

TRR6

TRM6

TRH6

0

0

0

47

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

47

0

0

47

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

2

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

47

0

0

0

0

47

47

0

0

47

Default

3 of 6

Table

5-9

5-12

D-19

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table D-15. Database - B Type Datapoints

Module Datapoint

Name

B376 Rate

B377 Mode

B378 Height

B379 Database Identifier

B380

Product Identifier (0 = 53MC5000,

1 = 53SL5100A, 2 = 53IT5100A,

3 = 53ML5100A)

B381 For internal controller use.

B382 Software Level

B383 System ROM Checksum

B384 PIC Code

B385

EASY-TUNE Control Module

Selector

B386 EASY-TUNE PID Control Mode

B387 EASY-TUNE Status

Trend 7

Atom

TRR7

TRM7

TRH7

PIC

EASY-

TUNE

Parameters

LPS

Successful

Unsuccessful

CM

B388-

B389

EASY-TUNE internal use (updated every scan)

B400 Task 0 Scan

B401 Task 1 Scan

B402 Task 2 Scan

B403 Task 3 Scan

B404 Task 4 Scan

B405 Task 5 Scan

B406 Task 6 Scan

B407 Task 7 Scan

B408 Task 8 Scan

B409 Task 9 Scan

B410 Task 10 Scan

B411 Task 11 Scan

B412 Task 12 Scan

B413 Task 13 Scan

B414 Task 14 Scan

B415 Task 15 Scan

B416 Task 16 Scan

B417 Task 17 Scan

B418 Task 18 Scan

B419 Task 19 Scan

B420 Task 20 Scan

B421 Task 21 Scan

B422 Task 22 Scan

External I/O

SCAN10

SCAN11

SCAN12

SCAN13

SCAN14

SCAN15

SCAN16

SCAN17

SCAN18

SCAN19

SCAN0

SCAN1

SCAN2

SCAN3

SCAN4

SCAN5

SCAN6

SCAN7

SCAN8

SCAN9

SCAN20

SCAN21

SCAN22

0

0

47

Default

4 of 6

Table

5-12

0

17-2

17-3

17-4

5-8

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

D-20

Appendix D. Database

Table D-15. Database - B Type Datapoints

Module Datapoint

Name

B423 Task 23 Scan

B424 Task 0 Mode

B425 Task 1 Mode

B426 Task 2 Mode

B427 Task 3 Mode

B428 Task 4 Mode

B429 Task 5 Mode

B430 Task 6 Mode

B431 Task 7 Mode

B432 Task 8 Mode

B433 Task 9 Mode

B434 Task 10 Mode

B435 Task 11 Mode

B436 Task 12 Mode

B437 Task 13 Mode

B438 Task 14 Mode

B439 Task 15 Mode

B440 Task 16 Mode

B441 Task 17 Mode

B442 Task 18 Mode

B443 Task 19 Mode

B444 Task 20 Mode

B445 Task 21 Mode

B446 Task 22 Mode

B447 Task 23 Mode

B448-

B455

NET A Control Block

B456-

B463

B464-

B511

NET B Control Block

Unassigned

B512-

B543

Node List A (MicroLink)

Node List B (MicroLink)

External I/O

Network A

& B Node

Lists

Network A

& B Node

Lists

B544-

B575

B576-

B607

B608-

B639

B640-

B663

Node List C

Node List D (Controller configured as Datalink Gateway Interrogator)

NET B Data

Network D

Node List

Atom

SCAN23

MODE0

MODE1

MODE2

MODE3

MODE4

MODE5

MODE6

MODE7

MODE8

MODE9

MODE10

MODE11

MODE12

MODE13

MODE14

MODE15

MODE16

MODE17

MODE18

MODE19

MODE20

MODE21

MODE22

MODE23

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

Default

5 of 6

Table

5-8

C-2

C-2

B-5

D-21

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table D-15. Database - B Type Datapoints

Name Module Datapoint

B664-

B687

B688-

B695

B696-

B703

B704-

B767

NET C Data

API Control

API B Data

Reserved

Atom Default

6 of 6

Table

D-22

Appendix D. Database

Table D-16. Database - C Type Datapoints

Module Datapoint

Name

C000 Analog Output 0

C001 Analog Output 1

C002 Analog Output 2 (Optional)

C003 Analog Output 3 (Optional)

C004-

C017

Analog Outputs (Optional)

C018

C019

C020-

C036

C037-

C046

C047-

C063

Reserved

FCS

FCS

Reserved

C064 AI7 Scan Pulse Count

C065 AI6 Scan Pulse Count

C066 AI5 Scan Pulse Count

C067-

C075

Reserved

C076 Math A - K1

C077 Math A - K2

C078 Math A - K3

C079 Math B - K1

C080 Math B - K2

C081 Math B - K3

C082 Math C - K1

C083 Math C - K2

C084 Math C - K3

C085 Math D - K1

C086 Math D - K2

C087 Math D - K3

C088 Math E - K1

C089 Math E - K2

C090 Math E - K3

C091 Math F - K1

C092 Math F - K2

C093 Math F - K3

C094 Math G - K1

C095 Math G - K2

C096 Math G - K3

C097 Math H - K1

C098 Math H - K2

C099 Math H - K3

AO

AI

AIPI7

AIPI6

AIPI5

Atom

AO0

AO1

AO2

AO3

AO n

0

0

0/1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Default

1 of 7

Table

5-5

5-4

D-23

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table D-16. Database - C Type Datapoints

Module Datapoint

Name

C100 Process Variable

C101 Setpoint

C102 Output

C103 Alarm Limit 1

C104 Alarm Limit 2

C105 Alarm Dead Band

C106 Proportional Band

C107 Reset Time

C108 Rate Time

C109 Output High Limit

C110 Output Low Limit

C111 Manual Reset

C112 Remote SP Bias

C113 Remote SP Ratio

C114 Control Zone

C115 Controller Span

C116 Controller Lower Range

C117 Setpoint Slew Rate

C118 Output Slew Rate

C119 Control Setpoint

C120 Remote Setpoint

C121 Deviation

C122 Feed Forward

C123 Control Output

C124 Partial Output Term

C125 Setpoint High Limit

C126 Setpoint Low Limit

C127 Reset Feedback

C128 Setpoint Track Value

C129 Output Track Value

C130-

C135

Reserved

C136 Process Variable

C137 Setpoint

C138 Output

C139 Alarm Limit 1

C140 Alarm Limit 2

C141 Alarm Dead Band

C142 Proportional Band

C143 Reset Time

C144 Rate Time

C145 Output High Limit

Controller 0

Controller 1

Atom

PV1

SP1

OUT1

PL11

PL21

ADB1

PB1

TR1

TD1

OH1

CZ0

IR0

ILR0

T10

T30

TSP0

RSP0

DV0

FF0

CO0

PN0

SH0

SL0

RF0

STV0

OTV0

TR0

TD0

OH0

OL0

MR0

B10

K10

PV0

SP0

OUT0

PL10

PL20

ADB0

PB0

0

0

0

100

0

2

100

0

0

100

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

100

0

0

0

0

0

100

0

0

100

0

1

0

50

0

0

0

100

0

2

100

Default

2 of 7

Table

5-9

5-9

D-24

Appendix D. Database

Table D-16. Database - C Type Datapoints

Module Datapoint

Name

C146 Output Low Limit

C147 Manual Reset

C148 Remote SP Bias

C149 Remote SP Ratio

C150 Control Zone

C151 Controller Span

C152 Controller Lower Range

C153 Setpoint Slew Rate

C154 Output Slew Rate

C155 Control Setpoint

C156 Remote Setpoint

C157 Deviation

C158 Feed Forward

C159 Control Output

C160 Partial Output Term

C161 Setpoint High Limit

C162 Setpoint Low Limit

C163 Reset Feedback

C164 Setpoint Track Value

C165 Output Track Value

C166-

C171

Reserved

C172 Process Variable

C173 Setpoint

C174 Output

C175 Alarm Limit 1

C176 Alarm Limit 2

C177 Alarm Dead Band

C178 Proportional Band

C179 Reset Time

C180 Rate Time

C181 Output High Limit

C182 Output Low Limit

C183 Manual Reset

C184 Remote SP Bias

C185 Remote SP Ratio

C186 Control Zone

C187 Controller Span

C188 Controller Lower Range

C189 Setpoint Slew Rate

C190 Output Slew Rate

C191 Control Setpoint

Controller 1

Controller 2

Atom

T11

T31

TSP1

RSP1

DV1

FF1

CO1

OL1

MR1

B11

K11

CZ1

IR1

ILR1

PN1

SH1

SL1

RF1

STV1

OTV1

MR2

B12

K12

CZ2

IR2

ILR2

T12

T32

TSP2

PV2

SP2

OUT2

PL12

PL22

ADB2

PB2

TR2

TD2

OH2

OL2

0

0

0

0

50

0

1

0

100

0

0

0

100

0

2

100

0

0

100

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

100

0

1

0

0

50

100

0

Default

3 of 7

Table

5-9

5-9

D-25

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table D-16. Database - C Type Datapoints

Module Datapoint

Name

C192 Remote Setpoint

C193 Deviation

C194 Feed Forward

C195 Control Output

C196 Partial Output Term

C197 Setpoint High Limit

C198 Setpoint Low Limit

C199 Reset Feedback

C200 Setpoint Track Value

C201 Output Track Value

C202-

C207

Reserved

C208 Process Variable

C209 Setpoint

C210 Output

C211 Alarm Limit 1

C212 Alarm Limit 2

C213 Alarm Dead Band

C214 Proportional Band

C215 Reset Time

C216 Rate Time

C217 Output High Limit

C218 Output Low Limit

C219 Manual Reset

C220 Remote SP Bias

C221 Remote SP Ratio

C222 Control Zone

C223 Controller Span

C224 Controller Lower Range

C225 Setpoint Slew Rate

C226 Output Slew Rate

C227 Control Setpoint

C228 Remote Setpoint

C229 Deviation

C230 Feed Forward

C231 Control Output

C232 Partial Output Term

C233 Setpoint High Limit

C234 Setpoint Low Limit

C235 Reset Feedback

C236 Setpoint Track Value

C237 Output Track Value

Controller 2

Controller 3

Atom

RSP2

DV2

FF2

CO2

PN2

SH2

SL2

RF2

STV2

OTV2

TR3

TD3

OH3

OL3

MR3

B13

K13

PV3

SP3

OUT3

PL13

PL23

ADB3

PB3

CZ3

IR3

ILR3

T13

T33

TSP3

RSP3

DV3

FF3

CO3

PN3

SH3

SL3

RF3

STV3

OTV3

0

0

100

0

1

0

50

0

0

0

100

0

2

100

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

100

0

0

0

0

0

0

100

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

100

0

Default

4 of 7

Table

5-9

5-9

D-26

Appendix D. Database

Table D-16. Database - C Type Datapoints

Datapoint

Name

C238-

C243

Reserved

C244-

C249

C250-

C255

Reserved Temporaries

Reserved Temporaries

C256 AI0 Engineering Span

C257 AI1 Engineering Span

C258 AI2 Engineering Span

C259 AI3 Engineering Span

C260 AI4 Engineering Span

C261 AI5 Engineering Span

C262 AI6 Engineering Span

C263 AI7 Engineering Span

C264 AI8 Engineering Span

C265-

C275

AI9 through AI19 Engineering Spans

C276 AI0 Engineering Zero

C277 AI1 Engineering Zero

C278 AI2 Engineering Zero

C279 AI3 Engineering Zero

C280 AI4 Engineering Zero

C281 AI5 Engineering Zero

C282 AI6 Engineering Zero

C283 AI7 Engineering Zero

C284 AI8 Engineering Zero

C285-

C295

AI9 through AI19 Engineering Zeros

C296 AI0 Calibrate Span (Standard)

C297 AI1 Calibrate Span (Standard)

C298 AI2 Calibrate Span (Standard)

C299 AI3 Calibrate Span (Standard)

C300 AO0 Calibrate Span (Standard)

C301 AO1 Calibrate Span (Standard)

C302 Trend 0 Zero

C303 Trend 0 Span

C304 Trend 1 Zero

C305 Trend 1 Span

C306 Trend 2 Zero

C307 Trend 2 Span

C308 Trend 3 Zero

C309 Trend 3 Span

C310 Trend 4 Zero

AI

AI

AI

Module

AO

Trend

Atom

ZERO0

ZERO1

ZERO2

ZERO3

ZERO4

ZERO5

ZERO6

ZERO7

ZERO8

ZERO9-

ZERO19

CIS0

BCTEMP

1 - 6

FCTEMP

1 - 6

SPAN0

SPAN1

SPAN2

SPAN3

SPAN4

SPAN5

SPAN6

SPAN7

SPAN8

SPAN9-

SPAN19

TRZ1

TRS1

TRZ2

TRS2

TRZ3

TRS3

TRZ4

CIS1

CIS2

CIS3

COS0

COS1

TRZ0

TRS0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

100

0

0

Default

5 of 7

Table

5-4

5-4

5-4

5-5

5-12

D-27

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table D-16. Database - C Type Datapoints

Module Datapoint

Name

C311 Trend 4 Span

C312 Trend 5 Zero

C313 Trend 5 Span

C314 Trend 6 Zero

C315 Trend 6 Span

C316 Trend 7 Zero

C317 Trend 7 Span

C318 Totalizer Module 0 - Scale Factor

C319 Totalizer Module 0 - Drop Out

C320 Totalizer Module 1 - Scale Factor

C321 Totalizer Module 1 - Drop Out

C322 Totalizer Module 2 - Scale Factor

C323 Totalizer Module 2 - Drop Out

C324 Totalizer Module 3 - Scale Factor

C325 Totalizer Module 3 - Drop Out

C326 Totalizer Module 4 - Scale Factor

C327 Totalizer Module 4 - Drop Out

C328 Totalizer Module 5 - Scale Factor

C329 Totalizer Module 5 - Drop Out

C330 Totalizer Module 6 - Scale Factor

C331 Totalizer Module 6 - Drop Out

C332 Totalizer Module 7 - Scale Factor

C333 Totalizer Module 7 - Drop Out

C334-

C343

Reserved Temporaries

C344-

C353

Reserved Temporaries

C354-

C377

Extended Math 0-1 (K1-K12)

C378 Initial PV Response Limit

C379 Initial PV Response Time 0

C380 Maximum PV Deviation Allowed

C381 Output step change Value 0

C382 Tp - Time Constant Modifier

C383 Kp - Process Gain Modifier

C384 Wp - Dead Time Modifier

C385 Lowest % PB

C386 Highest % PB

C387 Lowest TR Minutes

C388 Highest TR Minutes

C389 Lowest TD Minutes

Trend

Totalizer

EASY-

TUNE

Atom

TRS4

TRZ5

TRS5

TRZ6

TRS6

TRZ7

TRS7

TMF0

TMD0

TMF1

TMD1

TMF2

TMD2

TMF3

TMD3

TMF4

TMD4

TMF5

TMD5

TMF6

TMD6

TMF7

TMD7

BCTEMP

7 - 16

FCTEMP

7 - 16

DPPV

DPV

DOUT

TLIM

0

0

0

0

2

0

0.1

0.1

0.1

2

500

0

30

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Default

6 of 7

Table

5-12

5-13

17-2

D-28

Appendix D. Database

Table D-16. Database - C Type Datapoints

Module Datapoint

Name

C397-

C417

C418-

C431

C432-

C439

C440-

C539

C540-

C639

C640-

C703

C704-

C767

C390 Highest TD Minutes

C391

Estimated Tp Time Constant

Seconds

C392 Estimated Kp Process Gain

C393 Estimated Wp Dead Time Seconds

C394 ITAE PB Result

C395 ITAE TR Result

C396 ITAE TD Result

EASY-TUNE Reserved

Reserved

API C Data

Unassigned

Function Step Results

NET B Data

NET C Data

EASY-

TUNE

Atom

0

0

0

0

0

0

10

0

0

Default

7 of 7

Table

17-2

0

0

D-29

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table D-17. Database - H Type Datapoints

Module Datapoint

Name

H000 Analog Input 0 (Standard)

H001 Analog Input 1 (Standard)

H002 Analog Input 2 (Standard)

H003 Analog Input 3 (Standard)

H004 Analog Input 4 (Optional)

H005 Analog Input 5 (Optional)

H006 Analog Input 6 (Optional)

H007 Analog Input 7 (Optional)

H008 Analog Input 8 (Optional)

H009-

H019

Analog Inputs 9 through 19

(Optional)

H020 Reset Generator

H021 Rate Generator

H022 Reserved

H023 Reset Generator

H024 Rate Generator

H025 Reserved

H026 Reset Generator

H027 Rate Generator

H028 Reserved

H029 Reset Generator

H030 Rate Generator

H031 Reserved

H032 Totalizer 0 Actual Total

H033 Totalizer 1 Actual Total

H034 Totalizer 2 Actual Total

H035 Totalizer 3 Actual Total

H036 Totalizer 4 Actual Total

H037 Totalizer 5 Actual Total

H038 Totalizer 6 Actual Total

H039 Totalizer 7 Actual Total

H040 Totalizer 0 Work Area

H041 Totalizer 1 Work Area

H042 Totalizer 2 Work Area

H043 Totalizer 3 Work Area

H044 Totalizer 4 Work Area

H045 Totalizer 5 Work Area

H046 Totalizer 6 Work Area

H047 Totalizer 7 Work Area

H048 Totalizer 0 Rollover Value

H049 Totalizer 1 Rollover Value

H050 Totalizer 2 Rollover Value

AI

Controller-0

Controller-1

Controller-2

Controller-3

Totalizer

Totalizer

Atom

RN1

DN1

RN2

DN2

RN3

DN3

TT2

TT3

TT4

TT5

TT6

TT7

TMM0

TMM1

TMM2

TO0

TO1

TO2

TO3

TO4

TO5

TO6

TO7

TT0

TT1

AI0

AI1

AI2

AI3

AI4

AI5

AI6

AI7

AI8

AI n

RN0

DN0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Default

1 of 2

Table

5-4

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-13

5-13

D-30

Appendix D. Database

Table D-17. Database - H Type Datapoints

Module Datapoint

Name

H051 Totalizer 3 Rollover Value

H052 Totalizer 4 Rollover Value

H053 Totalizer 5 Rollover Value

H054 Totalizer 6 Rollover Value

H055 Totalizer 7 Rollover Value

H056 Trend 0 Work Area

H057 Trend 1 Work Area

H058 Trend 2 Work Area

H059 Trend 3 Work Area

H060 Trend 4 Work Area

H061 Trend 5 Work Area

H062 Trend 6 Work Area

H063 Trend 7 Work Area

H064 AI7 Pulse Total

H065 AI6 Pulse Total

H066 AI5 Pulse Total

H067-

H070

H071-

H074

NET B Data

NET C Data

H075-

H082

H083-

H091

H092-

H115

H116-

H119

H120-

H123

H124-

H127

API H Data

Reserved

Unassigned

EASY-TUNE Reserved

Reserved Temporaries

Reserved Temporaries

Totalizer

Trend

AI

Atom

TMM3

TMM4

TMM5

TMM6

TMM7

TRW0

TRW1

TRW2

TRW3

TRW4

TRW5

TRW6

TRW7

AIPC7

AIPC6

AIPC5

0

BHTEMP

1 - 4

FHTEMP

1 - 4

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Default

2 of 2

Table

5-13

5-12

5-4

D-31

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table D-18. Database - A Type Datapoints

Module Datapoint

Name

A000 Tag Name

A001 Engineering Units

A002 Tag Name

A003 Engineering Units

A004 Tag Name

A005 Engineering Units

A006 Tag Name

A007 Engineering Units

A008 Unit Tag Name

A009 Alarm Line Output

A010 Parameter Module 0 Title

A011 Point 1 Name, Module 0

A012 Point 2 Name, Module 0

A013 Point 3 Name, Module 0

A014 Parameter Module 1 Title

A015 Point 1 Name, Module 1

A016 Point 2 Name, Module 1

A017 Point 3 Name, Module 1

A018 Parameter Module 2 Title

A019 Point 1 Name, Module 2

A020 Point 2 Name, Module 2

A021 Point 3 Name, Module 2

A022 Parameter Module 3 Title

A023 Point 1 Name, Module 3

A024 Point 2 Name, Module 3

A025 Point 3 Name, Module 3

A026 Parameter Module 4 Title

A027 Point 1 Name, Module 4

A028 Point 2 Name, Module 4

A029 Point 3 Name, Module 4

A030 Parameter Module 5 Title

A031 Point 1 Name, Module 5

A032 Point 2 Name, Module 5

A033 Point 3 Name, Module 5

A034 Parameter Module 6 Title

A035 Point 1 Name, Module 6

A036 Point 2 Name, Module 6

A037 Point 3 Name, Module 6

A038 Parameter Module 7 Title

A039 Point 1 Name, Module 7

A040 Point 2 Name, Module 7

A041 Point 3 Name, Module 7

Controller-0

Controller-1

Controller-2

Controller-3

System

Parameter

Atom

TAG

PNA1

PNB1

PNC1

TAG

PNA2

PNB2

PNC2

TAG

PNA3

PNB3

PNC3

TAG

PNA4

PNB4

PNC4

TAG

TAG

EU

TAG

EU

TAG

EU

TAG

EU

TAG

ALINE

TAG

PNA0

PNB0

PNC0

PNA5

PNB5

PNC5

TAG

PNA6

PNB6

PNC6

TAG

PNA7

PNB7

PNC7

Default

1 of 6

Table

CON0

CON0

CON1

CON1

CON2

CON2

CON3

CON3

MC5000

ALARM

CON0 TUNE

PROP BAND

RESET

RATE

CON0 ALRM

PROC LIM1

PROC LIM2

ALRM DBAND

CON0 OUTV

OUT HI LIM

OUT LO LIM

OUT SLEW

CON0 SPV

SP HI LIM

SP LO LIM

SP SLEW

CONO TUNE

PROP BAND

RESET TIME

DERIV TIME

CON1 ALRM

PROC LIM1

PROC LIM2

ALRM DBAND

CON1 OUTV

OUT HI LIM

OUT LO LIM

ALRM DBAND

CON1 SPV

SP HI LIM

SP LO LIM

SP SLEW

5-9

5-14

5-11

D-32

Appendix D. Database

Table D-18. Database - A Type Datapoints

Module Datapoint

Name

A054 Status Module 0 Title

A055 Point 1 Name, Module 0

A056 Point 2 Name, Module 0

A057 Point 3 Name, Module 0

A058 Point 4 Name, Module 0

A059 Point 5 Name, Module 0

A060 Point 6 Name, Module 0

A061 Point 7 Name, Module 0

A062 Point 8 Name, Module 0

A063 Status Module 1 Title

A064 Point 1 Name, Module 1

A065 Point 2 Name, Module 1

A066 Point 3 Name, Module 1

A067 Point 4 Name, Module 1

A068 Point 5 Name, Module 1

A069 Point 6 Name, Module 1

A070 Point 7 Name, Module 1

A071 Point 8 Name, Module 1

A072 Trend 0 Tag

A073 Trend 0 Engineering Units

A074 Trend 1 Tag

A075 Trend 1 Engineering Units

A076 Trend 2 Tag

A077 Trend 2 Engineering Units

A078 Trend 3 Tag

A079 Trend 3 Engineering Units

A080 Trend 4 Tag

A081 Trend 4 Engineering Units

A082 Trend 5 Tag

A083 Trend 5 Engineering Units

A084 Trend 6 Tag

A085 Trend 6 Engineering Units

A086 Trend 7 Tag

A087 Trend 7 Engineering Units

A092 Totalizer 0 Tag Name

A093 Totalizer 0 Engineering Units

A094 Totalizer 1 Tag Name

A095 Totalizer 1 Engineering Units

A096 Totalizer 2 Tag Name

A097 Totalizer 2 Engineering Units

A098 Totalizer 3 Tag Name

A099 Totalizer 3 Engineering Units

Status

Trend

Totalizer

Atom

STE1

STF1

STG1

STH1

TAG

EU

TAG

EU

TAG

EU

TAG

EU

TAG

EU

TAG

EU

TAG

STG0

STH0

TAG

STA1

STB1

STC1

STD1

TAG

STA0

STB0

STC0

STD0

STE0

STF0

EU

TAG

EU

TAG

EU

TAG

EU

TAG

EU

TAG

EU

M

N

O

P

I

J

K

L

G

H

SDT1

E

F

SDT0

A

B

C

D

Default

2 of 6

Table

5-10

5-12

5-13

D-33

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table D-18. Database - A Type Datapoints

Module Datapoint

Name

A139

A140

A141

A142

A143

A144

A145

A146

A147

A148

A149

A150

A151

A152

A153

A130

A131

A132

A133

A134

A135

A136

A137

A138

A100 Totalizer 4 Tag Name

A101 Totalizer 4 Engineering Units

A102 Totalizer 5 Tag Name

A103 Totalizer 5 Engineering Units

A104 Totalizer 6 Tag Name

A105 Totalizer 6 Engineering Units

A106 Totalizer 7 Tag Name

A107 Totalizer 7 Engineering Units

A112 Flash-Load ID

A113-

A115

Reserved

A116-

A119

A120-

A123

Reserved Temporary

Reserved Temporary

A128

A129

Remote Point Task 0

Remote Point Task 1

Remote Point Task 2

Remote Point Task 3

Remote Point Task 4

Remote Point Task 5

Remote Point Task 6

Remote Point Task 7

Remote Point Task 8

Remote Point Task 9

Remote Point Task 10

Remote Point Task 11

Remote Point Task 12

Totalizer

Atom

TAG

EU

TAG

EU

TAG

EU

TAG

EU

FLID

BATEMP

1 - 4

FATEMP

1 - 4

External I/O RPT0

External I/O RPT1

External I/O RPT2

External I/O RPT3

External I/O RPT4

External I/O RPT5

External I/O RPT6

External I/O RPT7

External I/O RPT8

External I/O RPT9

External I/O RPT10

External I/O RPT11

External I/O RPT12

Default

3 of 6

Table

5-13

5-8

D-34

Appendix D. Database

Table D-18. Database - A Type Datapoints

Datapoint

Name

A161

A162

A163

A164

A165

A166

A167

A154

A155

A156

A157

A158

A159

A160

Remote Point Task 13

Remote Point Task 14

Remote Point Task 15

Remote Point Task 16

Remote Point Task 17

Remote Point Task 18

Remote Point Task 19

A168

A169

A170

A171

A172

A173

Remote Point Task 20

Remote Point Task 21

Remote Point Task 22

A174

A175

Remote Point Task 23

A188 Reserved

A189 Reserved

A190 Model Number Low (Display Only)

A191 Model Number High (Display Only)

A192-

A199

A200-

A223

Reserved

Unassigned

A224 AI0 Tag Name

A225 AI1 Tag Name

A226 AI2 Tag Name

A227 AI3 Tag Name

A228 AI4 Tag Name

A229 AI5 Tag Name

A230 AI6 Tag Name

A231 AI7 Tag Name

A232 AI8 Tag Name

A233-

A243

AI Tag Names

External I/O RPT13

External I/O RPT14

External I/O RPT15

External I/O RPT16

External I/O RPT17

External I/O RPT18

External I/O RPT19

External I/O RPT20

External I/O RPT21

External I/O RPT22

External I/O RPT23

AI

Module Atom

TAG

TAG

Default

4 of 6

Table

(Set at factory .)

5-8

5-4

D-35

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table D-18. Database - A Type Datapoints

Module Datapoint

Name

A244 AO0 Tag Name

A245 AO1 Tag Name

A246 AO2 Tag Name

A247 AO3 Tag Name

A248-

A261

AO Tag Names

A262 DI0 Tag Name

A263 DI1 Tag Name

A264 DI2 Tag Name

A265 DI3 Tag Name

A266 DI4 Tag Name

A267 DI5 Tag Name

A268 DI6 Tag Name

A269 DI7 Tag Name

A270 DI8 Tag Name

A271 DI9 Tag Name

A272 DI10 Tag Name

A273 DI11 Tag Name

A274 DI12 Tag Name

A275 DI13 Tag Name

A276 DI14 Tag Name

A277 DI15 Tag Name

A278 DI16 Tag Name

A279 DI17 Tag Name

A280 DO0 Tag Name

A281 DO1 Tag Name

A282 DO2 Tag Name

A283 DO3 Tag Name

A284 DO4 Tag Name

A285 DO5 Tag Name

A286 DO6 Tag Name

A287 DO7 Tag Name

A288 DO8 Tag Name

A289 DO9 Tag Name

A290 DO10 Tag Name

A291 DO11 Tag Name

A292 DO12 Tag Name

A293 DO13 Tag Name

A294 DO14 Tag Name

A295 DO15 Tag Name

A296 DO16 Tag Name

A297 DO17 Tag Name

AO

AO

DI

DO

Atom

TAG

TAG

TAG

TAG

TAG

Default

5 of 6

Table

5-5

5-5

5-6

5-7

D-36

Appendix D. Database

Table D-18. Database - A Type Datapoints

Module Datapoint

Name

A298 AI0 Engineering Units

A299 AI1 Engineering Units

A300 AI2 Engineering Units

A301 AI3 Engineering Units

A302 AI4 Engineering Units

A303 AI5 Engineering Units

A304 AI6 Engineering Units

A305 AI7 Engineering Units

A306 AI8 Engineering Units

A307-

A317

AI Engineering Units

A318 Unit Identifier

A319 License

AI

AI

System

EU

EU

Atom

EU

UID

LKEY

Default

6 of 6

Table

5-4

5-4

5-14

D-37

53MC5000 Process Control Station

Table D-19. Database - F Type Datapoints

Datapoint

Name

F084 Parameter Mod 0 Point 1 Designator

F085 Parameter Mod 0 Point 2 Designator

F086 Parameter Mod 0 Point 3 Designator

F087 Parameter Mod 1 Point 1 Designator

F088 Parameter Mod 1 Point 2 Designator

F089 Parameter Mod 1 Point 3 Designator

F090 Parameter Mod 2 Point 1 Designator

F091 Parameter Mod 2 Point 2 Designator

F092 Parameter Mod 2 Point 3 Designator

F093 Parameter Mod 3 Point 1 Designator

F094 Parameter Mod 3 Point 2 Designator

F095 Parameter Mod 3 Point 3 Designator

F096 Parameter Mod 4 Point 1 Designator

F097 Parameter Mod 4 Point 2 Designator

F098 Parameter Mod 4 Point 3 Designator

F099 Parameter Mod 5 Point 1 Designator

F100 Parameter Mod 5 Point 2 Designator

F101 Parameter Mod 5 Point 3 Designator

F102 Parameter Mod 6 Point 1 Designator

F103 Parameter Mod 6 Point 2 Designator

F104 Parameter Mod 6 Point 3 Designator

F105 Parameter Mod 7 Point 1 Designator

F106 Parameter Mod 7 Point 2 Designator

F107 Parameter Mod 7 Point 3 Designator

F176 Trend 0 Point Designator

F177 Trend 1 Point Designator

F178 Trend 2 Point Designator

F179 Trend 3 Point Designator

F180 Trend 4 Point Designator

F181 Trend 5 Point Designator

F182 Trend 6 Point Designator

F183 Trend 7 Point Designator

F216 Tot Mod 0 Input Point Designator

F217 Tot Mod 1 Input Point Designator

F218 Tot Mod 2 Input Point Designator

F219 Tot Mod 3 Input Point Designator

F220 Tot Mod 4 Input Point Designator

F221 Tot Mod 5 Input Point Designator

F222 Tot Mod 6 Input Point Designator

F223 Tot Mod 7 Input Point Designator

F248-

F251

Reserved Temporaries

Module

Parameter

Trend

Totalizer

Atom

PDC4

PDA5

PDB5

PDC5

PDA6

PDB6

PDC6

PDA7

PDB7

PDC7

TRP0

TRP1

TRP2

TRP3

TRP4

TRP5

TRP6

PDB2

PDC2

PDA3

PDB3

PDC3

PDA4

PDB4

PDA0

PDB0

PDC0

PDA1

PDB1

PDC1

PDA2

TRP7

TMPT0

TMPT1

TMPT2

TMPT3

TMPT4

TMPT5

TMPT6

TMPT7

BFTEMP

1 - 4

Default

1 of 2

Table

C143

C144

C139

C140

C141

C178

C179

C106

C107

C108

C103

C104

C105

C142

C180

C175

C176

C177

C214

C215

C216

C211

C212

C213

5-11

5-12

5-13

D-38

Appendix D. Database

Table D-19. Database - F Type Datapoints

Module Datapoint

Name

F252-

F255

Reserved Temporaries

F352 Local Point 0

F353 Local Point 1

F354 Local Point 2

F355 Local Point 3

F356 Local Point 4

F357 Local Point 5

F358 Local Point 6

F359 Local Point 7

F360 Local Point 8

F361 Local Point 9

F362 Local Point 10

F363 Local Point 11

F364 Local Point 12

F365 Local Point 13

F366 Local Point 14

F367 Local Point 15

F368 Local Point 16

F369 Local Point 17

F370 Local Point 18

F371 Local Point 19

F372 Local Point 20

F373 Local Point 21

F374 Local Point 22

F375 Local Point 23

Atom

External I/O

LPT6

LPT7

LPT8

LPT9

LPT10

LPT11

LPT12

LPT13

LPT14

LPT15

LPT16

FFTEMP

1 - 4

LPT0

LPT1

LPT2

LPT3

LPT4

LPT5

LPT17

LPT18

LPT19

LPT20

LPT21

LPT22

LPT23

Default

2 of 2

Table

5-8

5-8

D-39

MODULAR CONTROLLER QUICK START

APPENDIX E.0 - FM APPROVAL

The following listed equipment is Factory Mutual approved as:

Nonincendive for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C & D locations, Temperature Code T3C,

160 o

C. Temperature Code T3C means that the highest component surface temperature at maximum line and load conditions, does not exceed 160

(104 o o

C (320 o

F) based on an ambient temperature of 40 o

C

F). This restricts the use of this equipment to atmospheres with an Autoignition Temperature

(AIT) greater than 160 o

C. Based on the gases and vapors listed in ANSI/NFPA 497M, Classification of Gases, Vapors and Dusts for Electrical Equipment in Hazardous (Classified) Locations, the only listed Group C atmosphere in which this equipment cannot be used is Diethyl Ether with an AIT of

160 o

C.

WARNING

It is the users responsibility to install all apparatus in accordance with

ANSI/NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. Rules and requirements for the installation and wiring of equipment in Class I, Division 2 Hazardous

(Classified) Locations are found in Article 501 of the Code.

The following Model Number variations of the

53MC5000 are suitable for installation in Division 2 locations:

Modular Controller. Model 53MC5abcA2deBfghjkXl a = Control Loops 1, 2 or 4 b = Power Requirements 1 or 2 c = Functional Requirements 1, 2 ,3 or 4 d = Rear terminal Requirements 1, 3, 4 or 5 e = Chassis A or B f = Discrete I/O Option A, B, C, D, E, F or X g = Dual Relay ITB 1, 2, 3 or X h = Analog I/O Option A, B, C, D or X j = Analog Conditioning Module A, B, C, D, E or X k = Communications Option A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J or X l = Conformal Coating A or X

E-1

MODULAR CONTROLLER QUICK START

APPROVED OPTIONS

The following optional accessories as listed in Chapter 1.0 of the Instruction Manual are suitable for use in Division 2.

6DI/4DO, Contact Closure Input (CCI), Contact Closure Output (CCO).

Dual Relay ITB, CCO.

WARNING

For use in Division 2 locations, the energy to relay contacts 8 and 11 must be limited to <3 VA, <28 V and <250 mA, resistive loads only.

The use of open contact type relays in a Class I, Division 2 locations is permitted only if the energy switched by the contacts is limited to an intrinsically safe level. It is the user’s responsibility to limit the energy.

16DI/DO ITB, for Opto 22 I/O modules.

Opto 22 I/O modules:

The following modules are suitable for use in Class I, Division 2 locations as part of the 16DI/DO ITB.

AC Input

Modules

G4IDC5

G4IDC5G

G4IAC5

G4IAC5A

G4IDC24

G4IAC24

Opto 22 Part Number

AC Output

Modules

G4OAC5

G4OAC5A

G4OAC5A5(NC)

G4OAC24

G4OAC24A

DC Input

Modules

G4IC5

G4IDC5B

G4IDC5D

G4IDC5G

G4IAC5

G4IAC5A

G4IDC24

G4IAC24

DC Output

Modules

G4ODC5

G4ODC5A

G4ODC24

WARNING

It is the user’s responsibility to install all associated switches and load apparatus in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70, National

Electrical Code. Rules and requirements for the installation and wiring of equipment in Class I, Division 2 Hazardous (Classified)

Locations are found in Article 501 of the Code.

E-2

MODULAR CONTROLLER QUICK START

APPROVED OPTIONS (cont’d)

Single Channel Analog Input Option.

Multi-Channel Analog I/O Option.

5Bxx Group of mV, Voltage, Current, RTD and Thermocouple Input Isolation

Modules.

SCADA Adapter ITB.

NON-APPROVED OPTIONS

The Hand Held Configurer (HHC) (Discussed in Chapter 3.0 of the 53MC5000 Instruction Manual) is a portable terminal designed to interface with the 53MC5000 through the "Configuration Port" connector located on the front panel of the 53MC5000. It is NOT APPROVED FOR USE IN CLASS

I, DIVISION 2, HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS.

To use the HHC, the user must certify that the atmosphere in the area of the 53MC5000 is nonhazardous.

E-3

MODULAR CONTROLLER QUICK START

INSTALLATION DIAGRAMS

A copy of each of the following interconnection diagrams is included in this Appendix.

In Class I, Division 2 installations these drawings shall be used in place of the installation drawings provided in the 53MC5000 Instruction Manual and 53MC5000 Quick Start Installation Guide.

ID-53-1592 Installation Diagram, Standard Rear Terminal Board and Expansion

Rear Terminal Board

ID-53-1593

ID-53-1594

ID-53-1595

ID-53-1596

ID-53-1597

ID-53-1598

ID-53-1599

ID-53-1601

ID-53-1603

Installation Diagram, Discrete ITB and Dual Relay ITB

Installation Diagram, Cord Set Rear Terminal Board and Expansion

Rear Terminal Board

Installation Diagram, Cord Set ITB and Dual Relay ITB

Installation Diagram, Analog ITB

Installation Diagram, MicroLink Communications

Installation Diagram, Standard Communications with Cord Set

Installation Diagram, Standard Communications with Standard Rear Terminal Board

Installation Diagram, Controller to SCADA Adaptor

Installation Diagram, 16DI/DO ITB

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

WARNING

EXPLOSION HAZARD, DO NOT DISCONNECT CABLES, MODULES, OR

FUSES UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED OR THE AREA IS

KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS.

When the equipment is installed in a Class I, Division 2 location, no service that requires the removal, replacement, or connection of components or wiring shall be performed on any circuits not known to be operating at intrinsically safe energy levels unless the power supplies have been disconnected or the area is known to be nonhazardous. If the area is to be declared nonhazardous, it is the user’s responsibility to determine whether the atmosphere is hazardous with a suitable combustible gas detector.

E-4

MODULAR CONTROLLER QUICK START

LITHIUM BATTERY HANDLING PRECAUTIONS

ABB Automation

Part. No.

167B024U01

Manufacturer: Eagel Picher Industries, Inc.

Box 130 Bethel Road

Seneca, MO 64865

Part Number:

Type:

LTC-7P

Inorganic, Liquid Lithium Thionyl Chloride

Voltage: 3.5

Capacity: 750 mAh

Storage Temp.: 150 o

C (302 o

F)

Operating Temp.: -40 to 125 o

C (-40 to 257 o

F)

Sealing: Hermetic, Non-Venting

WARNING

REPLACE BATTERY WITH EAGLE PICHER P/N LTC-7P ONLY. USE OF

ANOTHER BATTERY MAY PRESENT A RISK OF FIRE OR EXPLOSION.

Replacement

Procedure:

Disposal

Procedure:

CAUTION

BATTERY MAY EXPLODE IF MISTREATED. DO NOT RECHARGE,

DISASSEMBLE OR DISPOSE OF IN FIRE.

The LTC-7P battery is short circuit protected for wave soldering.

Care should be taken to avoid short circuiting the battery during installation. No special handling procedures are required for removal of used batteries.

Dispose of used batteries in accordance with Federal, state and local code requirements for disposal of hazardous materials.

E-5

ABB Automation Inc.

125 East County Line Road

Warminster, PA 18974 USA

Tel. 215-674-6000

FAX: 215-674-7183

ABB Instrumentation Ltd

Howard Road, St. Neots

Cambs. England, PE19 3EU

Tel. +44 (0) 1480-475-321

FAX: +44 (0) 1480-217-948

The Company’s policy is one of continuous product improvement and the right is reserved to modify the information contained herein without notice.

© 2000 ABB Automation Inc. Printed in USA

ABB Instrumentation S.p.A

Via Sempione 243

20016 Pero (Milano) Italy

Tel: +39 (02) 33928 1

Fax: +39 (02) 33928 240

ABB Automation Products GmbH

Industriestr. 28

D-65760 Eschborn Germany

Tel: +49 (0) 6196 800 0

Fax: +49 (0) 6196 800 1849

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents